Psychiatry Residency: eBooks

Adoption As a Lifelong Process: A Psychiatric Analysis by Barbara Steck This book addresses the psychosocial complexities of adoption from multiple perspectives, including the biological family, adopted child, and adoptive parents. It highlights the must-have sensitivity and tactfulness for recurring discussions of the adoption situation. Organized into 10 parts, the book begins with a brief outline of the history of adoption and its legal status from antiquity to modern times. Chapters in the first half of the book examine critical topics such as different parenthood situations, stress and pain processes in early childhood, and challenges of domestic, international, transcultural, transracial, foster, and sexual and gender minorities adoption. Within the second half of the book, chapters describe the birth parents' difficulties in relinquishing their infant, the motives of the adoptive parents, and the hardships of the adoptive children in self-development. The final chapters address the topic of deprivation, traumatization, and developmental trauma disorders on a psychodynamic level accompanied by clinical vignettes. Unique, perceptive, and insightful, Adoption, A Life Long Process is an essential resource for all of those involved in the adoption process, including counselors, psychologists, psychiatrists, social workers, adoptive parents, and biological parents.

Anxiety by Cheryl Winning Ghinassi This engagingly written survey covers the history of anxiety disorders and current approaches to their definition and treatment.Anxiety disorders are significant mental health illnesses that impair lives and cost society millions of dollars in health care expenses and lost productivity. Greater awareness of anxiety disorders is essential for both the general public and health professionals if those who suffer from them are to be identified, receive proper treatment, and have a chance at leading fulfilling lives.To that end, Anxiety begins with a historical overview of the ways in which anxiety disorders have been understood, from the prehistoric era until the present time, examining the disorders from the perspectives of conceptualization, classification, research, and treatment. Subsequent chapters examine these themes in light of our current understanding and approaches to anxiety disorders. Current diagnostic and assessment methods are discussed, as are modern treatment options. The book concludes with a survey of the future directions in research for the understanding and treatment of anxiety disorders.

Anxiety disorders: translational perspectives on diagnosis and treatment by Kerry Ressler (Editor); Daniel Pine (Editor); Barbara Rothbaum (Editor) Anxiety affects millions, manifesting as generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), obsessive compulsive disorder, panic disorder, phobias, post-traumatic-stress disorder (PTSD), and social anxiety disorder. Not only are anxiety disorders common, but they are also crippling, frequently co-occurring and predict high risk for depressive disorders. Shared mechanisms may explain the overlapping features of many anxiety disorders and account for associations with other highly-impairing conditions, such as major depression and substance use. Beyond risk for specific disorders, anxiety also predicts a number of other adverse outcomes, including suicidal behavior, medical problems, social, and economic difficulties. Conversely, disorder-specific mechanisms may also exist and explain the unique features of each syndrome. Thus, it is important to understand both shared and specific aspects of anxiety. The Primer on Anxiety Disorders provides early-stage practitioners and trainees, as well as seasoned clinicians and researchers, with need-to-know knowledge on diagnosis and treatment. Clinical cases are used throughout the book to enhance understanding of and illustrate specific disorders, comorbid conditions and clinical issues. To facilitate an integrative approach, content allows clinicians to understand patient characteristics and tailor interventions. The integrated approach of each chapter includes recent research on genetics and neuroscience to understand the mechanisms of anxiety disorders, focusing on the forthcoming new nosology in DSM-5. Chapters further integrate innovative advances in clinical research providing research on a range of discoveries regarding biomarkers of illness, biological predictors of treatments and the effect of treatment on neurocircuitry.

Generalized Anxiety Disorders by Michael Van Ameringen (Editor); Mark H. Pollack (Editor); Oxford Editor Generalized anxiety disorder (GAD) was first characterized by Freud as part of anxiety neurosis and became part of the diagnostic nomenclature in 1980. GAD is a chronic condition, which affects between 6% -10% in the general population. It is associated with significant functional impairment and increased risk of adverse health outcomes, including cardiovascular disease. It is also frequently found in conjunction with other psychiatric conditions, including mood and other anxiety disorders, and alcohol and substance abuse/dependence. Somatic symptoms are common in GAD, and patients diagnosed with GAD visit primary care physicians twice as often as patients with similar medical and socioeconomic backgrounds.Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library series, this pocketbook provides a user-friendly overview of the characterization, diagnosis, evaluation and treatment of GAD in addition to differential diagnoses, pathogenesis, course and clinical co-morbidity associated with this disorder. Each chapter begins with a series of key points.

Handbook of Assessing Variants and Complications in Anxiety Disorders by Dean McKay (Editor); Eric A. Storch (Editor) The Handbook of Assessing Variants and Complications in Anxiety Disorders assembles current findings on assessment methods and applies them to common complicating factors, including comorbid personality and behavioral problems. Chapters examine innovative approaches to assessment of anxiety in children and adults, provide leading insights into timely topics (e.g., school refusal, self-injurious behaviors), and analyze strengths and weaknesses of widely used assessment tools. In clarifying the assessment process, contributors give readers a clear perspective on choosing treatment options in keeping with the trend toward targeted, evidence-based practice, and pinpoint needs for further research. The Handbook's coverage spans the anxiety spectrum, including areas such as: Assessment of social and generalized anxiety disorder. Neuropsychological assessment of obsessive-compulsive disorder.­ Intelligence testing and treatment planning with children. Assessment of substance abuse and dependence in anxiety disorders. Personality disorder assessment in clients with anxiety disorders. Functional assessment of comorbid and secondary disorders: identifying conditions for primary treatment. The Handbook of Assessing Variants and Complications in Anxiety Disorders is an essential reference for researchers, scientist-practitioners, and graduate students in clinical child, school, and developmental psychology; social work; psychiatry; psychotherapy; counseling; and pediatrics. And its companion volume, the Handbook of Treating Variants and Complications in Anxiety Disorders, translates these findings to the next stage of care.

Handbook of Child and Adolescent Anxiety Disorders by Dean McKay (Editor); Eric A. Storch (Editor) Is it school refusal or separation anxiety disorder? Can preschoolers have panic attacks? Does food neophobia really exist? For readers seeking ways to improve assessment, case conceptualization, or treatment plans as well as a more general understanding of anxiety disorders among children, the Handbook of Child and Adolescent Anxiety Disorders addresses these and many other complex issues. A straightforward companion to the diagnostic manuals, this volume crosses theoretical boundaries to describe in depth the wide range of children's anxiety disorders and to explain the developmental nuances that separate them from their adult analogues.Coverage includes:Diagnostic and etiological models of children's anxiety disorders (i.e., genetic, cognitive-behavioral, taxonomic, neuropsychological, dimensional).Differential diagnosis guidelines for generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), phobic conditions, obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), and posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) in youth.Ancillary factors in child and adolescent anxiety (e.g., personality, temperament, parenting issues, and comorbid conditions).Psychological, pharmacological, and combined treatments for childhood anxiety disorders.Special populations and emerging areas of interest, including anxiety disorders in the contexts of chronic health problems and developmental disabilities.The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Anxiety Disorders is a must-have reference for researchers, clinicians, and graduate students in psychology, psychiatry, social work and counseling as well as allied professionals in hospitals, community mental health centers, schools, and private practice.

Handbook of Treating Variants and Complications in Anxiety Disorders by Eric A. Storch (Editor); Dean McKay (Editor) As prevalent as anxiety is as a diagnosis, clinically complex cases are even more so. At the same time that it is recognized as a spectrum of disorders with many possibilities for intervention, it is most often seen with variations that further complicate treatment. The Handbook of Treating Variants and Complications in Anxiety Disorders explains in clear detail how and why clinical factors present challenges to clinicians treating clients with these disorders. Comorbid conditions often found in children, adolescents, and adults with anxiety, including developmental disabilities and personality disorders, are analyzed in the context of treatment. Case examples and literature reviews illustrate the relative merits of integrated versus sequential treatment, the importance of prioritizing behaviors, age-related considerations, and therapist issues. This best-practices approach guides readers in choosing current evidence-based options for treatment that is tailored to the individual and effective in the short and long term. Included in the Handbook: Prognostic indicators of treatment response for children and adults with anxiety disorders. Treatment of comorbid anxiety and disruptive behavior in youth. Treatment of PTSD with comorbid borderline personality disorder. Limited motivation, patient-therapist mismatch, and the therapeutic alliance. Assessment and treatment of comorbid anorexia nervosa and obsessive compulsive disorder. Treatment of comorbid anxiety disorders across the lifespan. Developed as a companion reference to the Handbook of Assessing Variants and Complications in Anxiety Disorders, the Handbook of Treating Variants and Complications in Anxiety Disorders is of immediate relevance to researchers, scientist-practitioners, and graduate students in clinical child, school, and developmental psychology; social work; psychiatry; psychotherapy; counseling; and pediatrics.

Oxford Handbook of Anxiety and Related Disorders by Martin M. Antony (Editor); Murray B. Stein (Editor) Oxford Handbooks offer authoritative and up-to-date reviews of original research in a particular subject area. Specially commissioned chapters from leading figures in the discipline give critical examinations of the progress and direction of debates, as well as a foundation for future research. Oxford Handbooks provide scholars and graduate students with compelling new perspectives upon a wide range of subjects in the humanities, social sciences, and sciences. Anxiety disorders are among the most prevalent of psychological disorders. A scholarly, exhaustive work, the Oxford Handbook of Anxiety and Related Disorders reviews current research and clinical developments through synthetic chapters written by experts from various fields of study and clinical backgrounds. The Handbook discusses each of the main anxiety disorders (e.g., panic disorder, social anxiety disorder, phobias, generalized anxiety disorder, posttraumatic stress disorder and psychological trauma, obsessive-compulsive disorder, etc.), examining diagnostic criteria, prevalence rates, comorbidity, as well as clinical issues. Neurobiological and psychological approaches to understanding these disorders are presented through the examination of such topics as genetic research, neuroanatomical models, learning theories, and more. Current issues in classification and assessment are also discussed in depth and treatment approaches, both traditional and alternative, are provided along with detailed discussions of both pharmacological and psychological approaches. The Handbook also introduces other anxiety-based conditions, such as body dysmorphic disorder, and looks at cultural issues and the impact of anxiety disorders in specific populations. The multiple perspectives and breadth of scope offered by theOxford Handbook of Anxiety and Related Disorders will make it an invaluable resource for clinicians, researchers, educators, as well as scholars and students.

Separation Anxiety Disorder in Adults: Clinical Features, Diagnostic Dilemmas and Treatment Guidelines by Vijaya Manicavasagar; Derrick Silove Separation Anxiety Disorder in Adults provides a comprehensive foundation for understanding the development, manifestation, and treatment of adult separation anxiety. The book explores precursors and triggers to both childhood and adult separation anxiety disorder, comorbidity with other disorders and conditions, and characteristics of populations and individuals with separation anxiety. Assessment and treatment are comprehensively covered, discussing how treatment for adults difers from that for children. Clinical review questionnaires are included for immediate use in practice.

Serotonin and Anxiety by Caio Maximino Anxiety disorders have long been a research subject for scientists in different areas of inquiry, and the particular role of serotonin - the neurotransmitter which has probably most captured the imagination of laymen and academics alike - is as elusive as the clinical aspects of serotonergic medications. Why are drugs acting at certain serotonin receptors efficacious against generalized anxiety disorder, but not panic disorder? Why is the inverse true for monoamine oxidase inhibitors? These clinically relevant issues are clarified by the neurochemical, anatomical and physiological organization of the serotonergic system. In this book, the author summarizes the latest findings regarding the role of serotonin in modulating the activity of brain regions which organize behavioral patterns associated with fear, anxiety and stress. The emergent picture is one of far greater complexity than previously thought: while the serotonergic innervation of those brain regions arises from the same structure - the dorsal raphe nucleus - that structure is not homogeneous from anatomical, physiological and neurochemical points of view, nor are its projections to the cerebral aversive and behavioral inhibition systems. The diverse findings which compose this picture of complexity - whether they arise from developmental neurobiology, electrophysiology, neurochemistry, neuroendocrinology, neuropsychopharmacology or behavioral neuroscience - are integrated in this book. Advanced undergraduate, graduate students, and researchers will benefit from the information. The result sheds light on many important questions regarding the neuroanatomical, pharmacological and functional aspects of the role of serotonin in anxiety disorders, and points to future avenues of research.

Textbook of Anxiety Disorders by Dan J. Stein (Editor); Eric Hollander (Editor); Barbara O. Rothbaum (Editor) Acclaimed as "a tremendous contribution to the field of psychiatry" (Doody's Health Science Book Review Journal), the Textbook of Anxiety Disorders is now available in an expanded second edition. The new edition continues to offer both clinicians and researchers a single-volume resource that covers not only progress in clinical interventions but also the latest advances in theoretical knowledge. Following a comprehensive overview of anxiety disorders, the book provides detailed coverage of seven specific DSM-IV-TR diagnoses: generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), mixed anxiety-depression, panic disorder, social phobia, specific phobias, and posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD). Each section covers the latest thinking on symptomatology and pathogenesis, then provides evidence-based clinical recommendations for pharmacotherapy and psychotherapy. * All chapters have been expanded and fully updated with new research findings. Many chapters have been entirely rewritten by new authors to provide fresh insight into such topics as integrated treatment of anxiety disorders; pharmacotherapy for GAD, OCD, and panic disorder; psychotherapy for OCD and PTSD; anxiety disorders in the elderly; anxiety accompanying substance abuse; and the economic and social costs of anxiety. In addition, new chapters on anxious traits and temperaments, the neuropsychology of anxiety disorders, and anxiety and insomnia enhance this comprehensive edition. * Each chapter now includes a concise summary of key clinical points that helps readers put findings into practice--as well as recommended readings that provide access to essential reports. Standing at the cutting edge of anxiety disorder research and clinical practice, this authoritative volume deserves a place on the reference shelf of any busy clinician, researcher, or educator. It will be invaluable to all mental health care professionals interested in the latest developments in understanding and treating these complex and costly disorders.

Alternative perspectives on psychiatric validation: DSM, IDC, RDoC, and beyond by Peter Zachar (Editor); Drozdstoj St. Stoyanov (Editor); Massimiliano Aragona (Editor); Assen Jablensky (Editor) Many of the current debates about validity in psychiatry and psychology are predicated on the unexpected failure to validate commonly used diagnostic categories. The recognition of this failure has resulted in, what Thomas Kuhn calls, a period of extraordinary science in which validation problems are given increased weight, alternatives are proposed, methodologies are debated, and philosophical and historical analyses are seen as more relevant than usual. In this important new book in the IPPP series, a group of leading thinkers in psychiatry, psychology, and philosophy offer alternative perspectives that address both the scientific and clinical aspects of psychiatric validation, emphasizing throughout their philosophical and historical considerations. This is a book that all psychiatrists, as well as philosophers with an interest in psychiatry, will find thought provoking and valuable.

Clinical Staging in Psychiatry: Making Diagnosis Work for Research and Treatment by Patrick D. McGorry (Editor); Ian B. Hickie (Editor) Psychiatric diagnosis is experiencing a crisis of confidence. Current approaches are outmoded, with reform desperately needed. Clinical staging is a solution to this crisis. Clinical staging addresses the limitations of current diagnostic systems by recognising the full continuum or trajectory of mental illness from asymptomatic to chronic illness. It acknowledges the overlap between mental health symptoms during early stages and directly links each stage to treatment and underlying cognitive, neurological and biological changes. This approach enhances chances of early identification, promotes the implementation of safer treatments, and increases opportunities to alter the negative trajectory of mental disorders. This book comprehensively describes the conceptual basis of clinical staging in psychiatry, details current progress in identifying biomarkers for each stage, and explores the implications of staging on treatment and health systems. This book provides a foundation for transformational reform in psychiatric diagnosis.

Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders DSM-5-TR by American Psychiatric Association The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, Fifth Edition, Text Revision (DSM-5-TR), is the most comprehensive, current, and critical resource for clinical practice available to today's mental health clinicians and researchers. DSM-5-TR includes the fully revised text and references, updated diagnostic criteria and ICD-10-CM codes since DSM-5 was published in 2013. It features a new disorder, Prolonged Grief Disorder, as well as codes for suicidal behavior available to all clinicians of any discipline without the requirement of any other diagnosis. With contributions from over 200 subject matter experts, this updated volume boasts the most current text updates based on the scientific literature. Now in four-color and with the ability to authenticate each printed copy, DSM-5-TR provides a cohesive, updated presentation of criteria, diagnostic codes, and text. This latest volume offers a common language for clinicians involved in the diagnosis and study of mental disorders and facilitates an objective assessment of symptom presentations across a variety of clinical settings--inpatient, outpatient, partial hospital, consultation-liaison, clinical, private practice, and primary care. Stay current with these important updates in DSM-5-TR: * Fully revised text for each disorder with updated sections on associated features, prevalence, development and course, risk and prognostic factors, culture, diagnostic markers, suicide, differential diagnosis, and more.* Addition of Prolonged Grief Disorder (PGD) to Section II--a new disorder for diagnosis* Over 70 modified criteria sets with helpful clarifications since publication of DSM-5* Fully updated Introduction and Use of the Manual to guide usage and provide context for important terminology* Considerations of the impact of racism and discrimination on mental disorders integrated into the text* New codes to flag and monitor suicidal behavior, available to all clinicians of any discipline and without the requirement of any other diagnosis* Fully updated ICD-10-CM codes implemented since 2013, including over 50 coding updates new to DSM-5-TR for substance intoxication and withdrawal and other disorders* Updated and redesigned Diagnostic Classification This manual is a valuable resource for other physicians and health professionals, including psychologists, counselors, nurses, and occupational and rehabilitation therapists, as well as social workers and forensic and legal specialists. The new DSM-5-TR is the most definitive resource for the diagnosis and classification of mental disorders.

DSM: A History of Psychiatry's Bible by Allan V. Horwitz The first comprehensive history of "psychiatry's bible"--the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders. Over the past seventy years, the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, or DSM, has evolved from a virtually unknown and little-used pamphlet to an imposing and comprehensive compendium of mental disorder. Its nearly 300 conditions have become the touchstones for the diagnoses that patients receive, students are taught, researchers study, insurers reimburse, and drug companies promote. Although the manual is portrayed as an authoritative corpus of psychiatric knowledge, it is a product of intense political conflicts, dissension, and factionalism. The manual results from struggles among psychiatric researchers and clinicians, different mental health professions, and a variety of patient, familial, feminist, gay, and veterans' interest groups. The DSM is fundamentally a social document that both reflects and shapes the professional, economic, and cultural forces associated with its use. In DSM, Allan V. Horwitz examines how the manual, known colloquially as "psychiatry's bible," has been at the center of thinking about mental health in the United States since its original publication in 1952. The first book to examine its entire history, this volume draws on both archival sources and the literature on modern psychiatry to show how the history of the DSM is more a story of the growing social importance of psychiatric diagnoses than of increasing knowledge about the nature of mental disorder. Despite attempts to replace it, Horwitz argues that the DSM persists because its diagnostic entities are closely intertwined with too many interests that benefit from them. This comprehensive treatment should appeal to not only specialists but also anyone who is interested in how diagnoses of mental illness have evolved over the past seven decades--from unwanted and often imposed labels to resources that lead to valued mental health treatments and social services.

DSM-5® Clinical Cases by John W. Barnhill (Editor) DSM-5 Clinical Cases presents patient cases that exemplify the mental disorders categorized in the newly released DSM-5, bringing DSM-5 alive for teachers and students of psychiatry, psychology, social work, nursing, and related mental health and healthcare fields. Cases are cross-referenced with DSM-5 and help the reader understand diagnostic concepts, including symptoms, severity, comorbidities, age of onset and development, dimensionality across disorders, and gender and cultural implications. Every feature in the book helps to bridge the distance between the formal classification and the real-life presentation of patients: * All cases are original and previously unpublished, making for fresh, compelling reading for both experienced clinicians and those new to diagnostic classification. Case authors were selected for their expertise in the disorder described in the case. For ease in identifying specific cases, case titles are clinically relevant, based on the primary complaint, and identify the DSM-5 diagnosis described.* Each case adheres to a consistent format developed by the editors to fully illuminate the disorder being profiled. Features may include history of present illness, family psychiatric history, medical history, mental status exam results, DSM-5 diagnostic features, lab and physical findings, and a summary.* A brief discussion follows each case, analyzing the clinical presentation, highlighting key points, and exploring issues of comorbidity that may complicate both the diagnosis and subsequent treatment. This approach is especially helpful since few cases in real-life are unambiguous.* Easy-to-use appendixes enable readers to locate cases by type of disorder, special interests, and DSM-5 diagnosis.* The book is designed to serve as a companion text in a variety of contexts--from abnormal psychology courses to medical school and residency training programs. In addition, those studying for specialty examinations will find reviewing the cases very useful. Fascinating, practical, and instructive, DSM-5 Clinical Cases succeeds in bringing the DSM-5 to the examining room.

DSM-5® Handbook on the Cultural Formulation Interview by Roberto Lewis-Fernández (Editor); Neil Krishan Aggarwal (Editor); Ladson Hinton (Editor); Devon E. Hinton (Editor); Laurence J. Kirmayer (Editor) DSM-5 Handbook of the Cultural Formulation Interview provides the background, context, and detailed guidance necessary to train clinicians in the use of the Cultural Formulation Interview (CFI), which was created as part of the 2007-2013 DSM revision process. The purpose of the CFI--and this unique handbook--is to make it easier for providers to account for the influence of culture in their clinical work to enhance patient-clinician communication and improve outcomes. Cultural psychiatry as a field has evolved enormously from the days when it was principally concerned with epidemiological and clinical studies of disease prevalence; it now examines a multitude of issues, primary among them the differing patient, family, and practitioner models of illness and treatment experiences within and across cultures. The editors, all of whom have been intimately involved in the evolution of the field, have designed the book and accompanying videos for maximum instructional and clinical utility. The Handbook boasts many strengths and useful features, including: * A detailed description of each of the three CFI components: a core 16-item questionnaire, which can be applied in any clinical setting with any patient by any mental health clinician; an informant version of the core CFI used to obtain information from caregivers; and 12 supplementary modules that expand on these basic assessments. This material facilitates implementation of the CFI by clinicians.* Over a dozen clinical vignettes are included to illustrate use of the three components, and the Handbook also includes multiple videos that demonstrate the application of portions of the core CFI, and several supplementary modules.* Strategies for incorporating the CFI into clinical training are identified and discussed, furthering the objective of developing culturally-sensitive and astute practitioners.* The theoretical bases of the CFI are explored, raising questions for discussion and identifying areas for further research. The CFI is a valuable tool for all patients, not just those judged to be culturally different. The CFI has been called the single most practically useful contribution of cultural psychiatry and medical anthropology to clinical psychiatry, primary care, and medicine in general. DSM-5 Handbook on the Cultural Formulation Interview is the only book on the market that equips readers with the skills and insight to incorporate the CFI into practice, making it a critically important addition to the clinical literature.

Interpreting the MMPI-2-RF by Yossef S. Ben-Porath This guide is a vital tool for effective use of the recently released MMPI-2-RF. Yossef S. Ben-Porath, a leading expert on the MMPI instruments, provides detailed descriptions of the scales of the test, tables with interpretive recommendations for each scale, and an abundance of illustrative cases from a wide variety of settings, including forensic (criminal and civil), medical, and personnel screening. A comprehensive reference for users of the new test, this book sets the standard for interpretation of, and instruction on, the MMPI-2-RF. A book-based exam offering Continuing Education (CE) credit is available for this publication. Visit the University of Minnesota Press Test Division website for more information.

Interviewing Children and Adolescents: Skills and Strategies for Effective DSM-5® Diagnosis by James Morrison; Kathryn Flegel This instructive clinical resource has given thousands of clinicians and students essential skills for evaluating infants through adolescents with any type of mental health issue. Principles for conducting age-appropriate clinical interviews with children of varying ages and their parents--including the use of toys, drawing, dolls, and other forms of play--are illustrated with annotated sample transcripts. The book provides crucial information for accurately diagnosing a wide range of mental and behavioral disorders. User-friendly features include concise explanations of diagnostic criteria, coding notes, interview pointers for specific disorders, vivid vignettes, and a sample written report. New to This Edition *Current terminology, codes, and diagnostic criteria integrated throughout the case examples and disorder-specific discussions. *Features both DSM-5 and ICD-10-CM codes. *Essential Features--prototypes that encapsulate the symptoms and other diagnostic elements of each disorder. *Reproducible tool (Questionnaire for Parents) that can be downloaded and printed for repeated use. *Additional disorders and vignettes.

Managing Uncertainty in Mental Health Care by Jose Silveira; Patricia Rockman As the profound contribution of mental illness to disability, morbidity, and mortality has gained acceptance, mental health has grown into a global priority. One in five experience mental illness in their lifetime, and those who suffer are coming forward in unprecedented numbers. As more people seek care for themselves and others, providers are increasingly unable to meet the demand through existing systems and mental health care approaches.In Managing Uncertainty in Mental Health Care, Drs. Patricia Rockman and José Silveira critically examine core assumptions informing the primary approaches currently used to assess mental illness in clinical settings, with an emphasis on clinician certainty. They illustrate how current diagnostic frameworks obscure clinician uncertainty while encouraging overconfidence and go on to consider potential strategies for lessening the impact of inevitable errors. Ultimately, this book makes a case for acknowledging the fallibility of clinical judgment, independent of competence and experience, and the need to modify approaches to mental health care so that they align with the irreducible uncertainty of the domain.By exploring emerging transdiagnostic approaches to mental health care in terms of their alignment with irreducible uncertainty, Rockman and Silveira make space for error and offer clinicians a novel way to advance the fundamental aim of mental health care: to reduce the harm and suffering of all.

Sourcebook of Interactive Practice Exercises in Mental Health by Luciano L'Abate As a primary or an adjunct mental health therapy, written practice exercises have proven an effective, low-cost way for clients to transfer gains made in therapy to the challenges of daily life and relationships. These interactive workbooks expand on earlier self-help and distance writing methods along a continuum of healing approaches, from the proactive and preventive to the therapeutic and rehabilitative. But despite their appeal, large-scale access to high-quality materials hasn't always been readily available--until now. The Sourcebook of Interactive Practice Exercises in Mental Health gives professionals a library of replicable, evidence-based, clinically robust protocols and workbooks for a broad range of clinical and non-clinical conditions, suitable for individuals, couples, and families. Luciano L'Abate places practice exercises in the context of current mental health and technological advances, offering guidelines for administration, helpful case studies, and caveats for those new to this type of intervention, and features a wealth of complete protocols in these major areas: psychological disorders from the DSM-IV, including depression, anxiety, phobias, and PTSD, couple and family concerns, from intimacy to domestic violence to children's adjustment to divorce, lifelong learning: assertiveness, emotional competence, social skills, and more, family support skills: preparation for marriage, parenthood, and adoption´, plus exercises derived from widely-used psychological tests (e.g., the Beck Depression Inventory, the MMPI), behavior lists, and others. Clinical psychologists, mental health professionals, and psychotherapists will find the Sourcebook of Interactive Practice Exercises in Mental Health a therapeutic treasure chest filled with new approaches to intractable issues or unreachable clients, new means of viewing typical problems, even new ways for talk therapy to work withwords.

Reactive Attachment Disorder: A Case-Based Approach by Daniel F. Shreeve A child's close bond with mother, father, or guardian usually provides a foundation for trust in all future attachments. Children deprived of early and healthy dependency--who do not form normal attachment with their caregivers--may later suffer from Reactive Attachment Disorder (RAD). This childhood disorder is characterized by a general failure in social relationships resulting from pathogenic care. Although first included in the third edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual (DSM-III) in 1980, RAD is one of the more uncommon and understudied forms of psychopathology. Reactive Attachment Disorder: A Case-Based Approach adds to a now growing research base, providing scholars and clinicians with a well-rounded analysis of RAD and suggested treatments. The case-based approach used in this Brief follows the representative case of "Jorge," presented as unfolding over time and structured to illustrate challenges of diagnosis, to show examples of co-morbidity, and to provoke reflection on what questions may arise during treatment. Readers are asked to appraise the overlap with other clinical syndromes, the forms of psychotherapy which may apply, and the potential role of psychiatric medications as part of a comprehensive treatment plan.

Separation Anxiety Disorder in Adults: Clinical Features, Diagnostic Dilemmas and Treatment Guidelines by Vijaya Manicavasagar; Derrick Silove Separation Anxiety Disorder in Adults provides a comprehensive foundation for understanding the development, manifestation, and treatment of adult separation anxiety. The book explores precursors and triggers to both childhood and adult separation anxiety disorder, comorbidity with other disorders and conditions, and characteristics of populations and individuals with separation anxiety. Assessment and treatment are comprehensively covered, discussing how treatment for adults difers from that for children. Clinical review questionnaires are included for immediate use in practice.

ADHD and Hyperkinetic Disorder by Tobias Banaschewski; Alessandro Zuddas; Philip Asherson; Jan Buitelaar; David Coghill; Marina Danckaerts; Manfred Dopfner; Luis Rohde; Edmund Sonuga-Barke; Eric Taylor This pocketbook serves as a concise and practical guide to the management of ADHD for child and adolescent psychiatrists and child psychologists, paediatricians, trainees, psychiatric specialist nurses, interested general practitioners, and other mental health professionals. The pocketbook provides a user-friendly introduction to the clinical understanding, evaluation, and treatment of ADHD. This edition has been updated to include new DSM-5 diagnostic criteria (May 2013) and to reflect more published studies on ADHD in the adult population, along with new data on the CNS stimulant drug LDX (Lisdexamfetamine Dimesylate).

ADHD and Its Many Associated Problems by Christopher Gillberg ADHD and Its Many Associated Problems is a clinical handbook about infants, children, adolescents, young adults, middle-aged, and elderly people with ADHD and all its many comorbidities. It is the only book on ADHD that includes the comprehensive view of the condition as but one (albeit, perhaps the most important) of many disorders subsumed under the umbrella concept of ESSENCE (Early Symptomatic Syndromes Eliciting Neurodevelopmental Clinical Examinations). This book reviews the history of ADHD, its definitions, symptoms, associated ESSENCE problems, etiology, risk and protective factors, approach to diagnosis and diagnostic work-up, comprehensive intervention guidelines, and outcome. It relies on the most up-to-date research and clinical information available. With over 40 years of practice in the field, Christopher Gillberg demonstrates his extensive research and clinical experience in ADHD and Its Many Associated Problems. More than any other book in the field, it focuses on the variable clinical presentation and the importance of early recognition of these most important public health problems of our time. It makes the point that in order to be able to deal with ADHD in a holistic way, clinicians need to be aware that ADHD is not just about ADHD, but about an entire host of other problems. The book emphasizes the strengths that people with ADHD demonstrate, strengths that can be turned into great assets, but only if the nature of the underlying problems are acknowledged.ADHD and Its Many Associated Problems is intended for specialist neurologists and psychiatrists, but can also be of great value to general practitioners and clinical psychologists. It is useful also for social workers, teachers, and, people who suffer from the condition(s).

Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder: Adult Outcome and Its Predictors by Lily Hechtman (Editor) The book provides a comprehensive summary of the best known and most highly respected well-controlled long-term prospective follow-up studies in ADHD. These studies followed children with ADHD and matched controls into young adulthood (mean age 20-25 years) and middle-age (mean age 41 years). They explore a wide variety of outcome areas, e.g. education, occupation, emotional and psychiatric functioning, substance use and abuse, sexual behavior, as well as legal problems. One chapter focuses particularly on the outcome of girls with ADHD. Outcome areas explored are thus comprehensive and clinically very relevant. The book also explores the possible predictors of adult outcome. A whole chapter is devoted to treatment (medication and psychosocial) as a predictor of outcome. In addition to treatment, predictors explored include characteristics of the child (e.g., IQ, severity of initial ADHD symptoms, initial comorbidity characteristics of the family, e.g., socioeconomic status, single parenthood, parental pathology, and family functioning. In a summary chapter, the impact and importance of these various predictors in different outcome areas, e.g. education, occupation, emotional/social functioning, antisocial behavior, substance use and abuse and risky sexual and driving behaviors are explored. In summary, the book provides a comprehensive view of the prognosis, e.g., long-term outcome of ADHD and key factors which can influence this outcome. Professionals and the general public will thus get a clear view of what can happen to children with ADHD as they proceed through adolescence and adulthood and address important prognostic and predictive factors in their treatment approaches to ensure better long-term outcome in patients with ADHD.

Behavioral Neuroscience of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder and Its Treatment by Clare Stanford (Editor); Rosemary Tannock (Editor) In this volume there is a strong emphasis on translational science, with preclinical approaches suggesting new directions for development of new treatments.  Individual chapters describe how neuroimaging, neuroendocrine, genetic and behavioral studies use powerful research tools that are offering a completely new understanding of the factors that increase vulnerability to ADHD.  The clinical impact of co-morbid problems, especially obesity and substance misuse, are highlighted and explain what such problems can tell us about the etiology of ADHD, more generally.  Reviews of the pharmacology of established drug treatments for ADHD justify an exciting novel theory for their therapeutic actions and address questions about the effects of their long‑term use. 

Oxford Textbook of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder by Tobias Banaschewski (Editor); David Coghill (Editor); Alessandro Zuddas (Editor) Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) is one of the most common mental disorders affecting children and adolescents. The condition is characterized by a persistent pattern of behavioural symptoms including inattentiveness, hyperactivity, and impulsiveness associated with substantial impairment in social, academic, and/or occupational functioning. Clinical and research interest in the topic of ADHD has grown substantially in recent years but, despite this, there is still a lack of up-to-date reference texts devoted to the diagnosis, assessment, and management of patients with these conditions. Part of the Oxford Textbooks in Psychiatry series, the Oxford Textbook of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder attempts to bridge this gap by providing an authoritative, multi-disciplinary guide to the latest research developments in the diagnosis, assessment, and management of patients with ADHD. Organized into eight key sections, this textbook covers the aetiology, pathophysiology, epidemiology, clinical presentation, co-morbidity, clinical assessment, and clinical management of ADHD. Individual chapters address key topics such as the clinical assessment of ADHD in adults, and contain information on best practice, current diagnostic guidelines including DSM-5 and ICD-11, and key up-to-date references for further reading.Edited and written by an international group of recognized experts, the Oxford Textbook of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder is a comprehensive resource suitable for child and adolescent psychiatrists, adult psychiatrists, and psychiatric trainees, as well as child psychologists, paediatricians, psychiatric nurses, and other mental health care professionals.

Rethinking adult ADHD: Helping clients turn intentions into actions by J. Russell Ramsay In Rethinking Adult ADHD, Dr. J. Russell Ramsay provides a first‑of‑its‑kind exploration of the common beliefs that underlie and reinforce ADHD in adults, and offers a blueprint to help clients overcome ADHD symptoms using cognitive behavior therapy.   While negative thinking does not cause ADHD, research shows that cognitive strategies play a key role in maintaining ADHD symptoms. The book explores research on negative thoughts and beliefs in adults with ADHD, specifically the belief, or lack thereof, in one's ability to persistently and consistently carry out the steps required to achieve one's goals. This manifests in what Dr. Ramsay describes as self-distrust thoughts and self-mistrust beliefs, and which leads to escape-avoidance coping patterns. To address these problems, he targets emotional, behavioral, and relationship problems for work in therapy. Clinical case illustrations show how traditional cognitive change tactics can be adapted to treatment of adult ADHD, to foster the implementation of coping strategies and essential skills. These cognitive approaches serve as an essential ligament in treatment, designed to help adults with ADHD more consistently turn their intentions into actions.

Asperger Syndrome: A Guide for Professionals and Families by Raymond W. DuCharme (Editor); Thomas P. Gullotta (Editor) Since the first edition was published in 2003, an enormous amount of research into Asperger Syndrome (AS) and autism spectrum disorders has been conducted. New genetic and epigenetic theories, updated findings on viable therapies, and targeted skill-building programs provide a solid foundation of information for professionals to use in practice and impart to concerned families.  The Second Edition of Asperger Syndrome synthesizes the current state of the field, beginning with the controversy over the proposed linking of the condition with autism in the DSM-5. This comprehensive guide gives readers a deeper understanding of the disorder, detailing the effective strategies and therapies available to improve the lives of young people with AS and ensure their successful transition from childhood to adolescence to adulthood. Focusing on core deficit and treatment areas, expert contributors analyze the evidence base on behavioral and pharmacological interventions as well as educational strategies geared toward bolstering cognitive and social skills. In addition to epidemiology, etiology, diagnosis, and assessment, this volume offers the most current information on:  Counseling and other therapeutic strategies for children with AS and their families. Early intervention for children and youth with AS. Social skills instruction for children with AS. Evaluating evidence-based instruction for children with AS. Comprehensive education-based mental health services for students diagnosed on the autism spectrum. Practical advice for families, from a parent of a child with AS. The Second Edition of Asperger Syndrome is an essential reference for researchers, clinicians, and scientist-practitioners in clinical child, school, and developmental psychology; child and adolescent psychiatry; education; rehabilitation medicine/therapy; social work; and pediatrics.

Autism Spectrum Disorder by Christopher McDougle (Editor) The Primer on Autism Spectrum Disorder provides a quick yet comprehensive overview of clinically-relevant topics related to autism spectrum disorder (ASD) for the medical or mental health student, trainee, or recent graduate who seeks efficient learning. Chapters are designed to give an overview of a topic area in real time while on a rotation; while studying for professional board examinations in primary care, pediatrics, neurology or psychiatry; or even during preparation for a presentation or discussion scheduled to occur the next day. The sections include Background and Diagnostic Assessment, Etiology, Treatment, and Other Care Delivery Services and Perspectives, with each chapter written by an internationally recognized expert in the field. The chapters on diagnosis and treatment are written from a practical "how to" perspective. Those on etiology are written with the clinician in mind. These clinically-focused chapters include one or more vignettes that present simulated patient cases designed to highlight teaching points related to each chapter's content area. The book ends with a chapter written by family members of individuals with ASD and another written by an adult with ASD that illustrate the human impact these disorders have on day-to-day lives, hopes, and dreams. At the end of each chapter, "Key Points" for summarizing the intended take home messages of each author/authors are listed.

Autism Spectrum Disorder by Martin J. Lubetsky (Editor); Benjamin L. Handen (Editor); John J. McGonigle (Editor) Autism Spectrum Disorder highlights current key topics for this complex and challenging developmental neurobiological disorder. In a very practical and concise manner, the reader will find a state-of-the-science review combining key factual knowledge with practical clinical considerations. Written in a user-friendly fashion, this text provides key fact boxes, summary questions, and references for further readings to enhance understanding. This invaluable book incorporates practical clinical knowledge within a didactic framework to provide a comprehensive overview of Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) across the lifespan.

Autism Spectrum Disorders by Eric Hollander (Editor); Randi Hagerman (Editor); Deborah Fein (Editor) In DSM-5, published in 2013, the classification of autism spectrum disorder (ASD) was created, subsuming several diagnoses and representing a significant evolution from its first appearance in the DSM-III three decades earlier. Autism Spectrum Disorders reflects this evolution, offering clinicians and families a succinct, definitive, and up-to-date guide to current research in the field and its impact on assessment and treatment. The book begins with the epidemiology of ASDs, which have increased in prevalence, and explores genetic heritability and environmental risk factors. It then explains the roles of the psychiatrist, neurologist and pediatrician in assessing the patient, examines assessment tools and processes, and describes the latest advances in a variety of treatments and interventions. The text's focus is on educating and empowering families and health care providers to determine whether appropriate genetic testing and counseling have been undertaken, whether the individual has had the relevant assessment, and whether skilled behavioral treatment and additional medical assessment or treatment are required. Specifically, the text: * Reviews existing prevalence estimates for ASDs since 2000 and discusses methodological factors impacting the estimation of prevalence and the interpretation of changes in prevalence estimates over time.* Evaluates genomic and epigenomic research over the last decade in the context of translating findings to practice, in terms of testing (e.g., copy number variants and whole-exome sequencing) and counseling.* Examines the role of environmental toxicity in immune dysregulation, which has now been noted among individuals with ASD and their family members by numerous studies. * Reviews medical and cognitive assessments that may be needed.* Reviews targeted treatments that have the potential to reverse neurobiological abnormalities in ASD* Reviews behavioral treatments that are effective in promoting development and improving behavior.* Describes the Developmental, Individual Difference, Relationship-based (DIR) model, a comprehensive developmental theory with relevance across the lifespan, which targets the core deficits of ASD identified in DSM-5.* Provides an overview of school-based interventions for students with autism, exploring the rationale for conducting school-based research and examining existing teacher-, paraprofessional-, and peer-mediated interventions school-based interventions.* Explores other approaches to ASDs, such as complementary and integrative approaches and non-invasive brain stimulation technologies, including transcranial magnetic stimulation. The push for early screening is resulting in earlier diagnosis of ASDs and the provision of evidence-based interventions that have a positive impact on outcomes. Autism Spectrum Disorders provides a bench-to-bedside guide that is essential reading for health care providers and families facing the challenges inherent in these complex disorders.

The Autisms by Mary Coleman; Christopher Gillberg The Autisms, written by Mary Coleman and Christopher Gillberg, demonstrates that autism, like mental retardation, is a clinical presentation of numerous different diseases, many with genomic underpinnings. In this ground-breaking work, the authors explain in great detail how to clinically diagnose infants, children, adolescents and adults with autistic behavioral features and their psychiatric and neurological work-ups.This new edition contains several chapters on the associated problems of autism, such as intellectual disability, epilepsy, tics, eating disorders and sleep problems, as well as a chapter on epidemiology that documents the historical increase in autism diagnoses. Several chapters summarize the latest data on neuroanatomy, biochemistry and neuropsychology, while three neurogenomics chapters show evidence suggesting that autism occurs due to genetic errors which cause interruption or misdirection of critical neurodevelopmental circuits in the fetal brain. Completely up-to-date, The Autisms is relevant and necessary reading for researchers and clinicians in neuroscience, neurology, pediatrics, psychiatry, and psychology.

Autistic Community and the Neurodiversity Movement: Stories from the Frontline by Steven K. Kapp (Editor) This open access book marks the first historical overview of the autism rights branch of the neurodiversity movement, describing the activities and rationales of key leaders in their own words since it organized into a unique community in 1992. Sandwiched by editorial chapters that include critical analysis, the book contains 19 chapters by 21 authors about the forming of the autistic community and neurodiversity movement, progress in their influence on the broader autism community and field, and their possible threshold of the advocacy establishment. The actions covered are legendary in the autistic community, including manifestos such as "Don't Mourn for Us", mailing lists, websites or webpages, conferences, issue campaigns, academic project and journal, a book, and advisory roles. These actions have shifted the landscape toward viewing autism in social terms of human rights and identity to accept, rather than as a medical collection of deficits and symptoms to cure.

Encyclopedia of Autism Spectrum Disorders by Fred R. Volkmar (Editor) This major reference work breaks new ground as an electronic resource for students, educators, researchers, and professionals. Comprehensive in breath and textbook in depth, the Encyclopedia of Autism Spectrum Disorders serves as a reference repository of knowledge in the field as well as a regularly updated conduit of new knowledge long before such information trickles down from research to standard textbooks. The Encyclopedia consists of 5 volumes and approximately 1,500 entries divided by the major conceptual areas of ASD and PDDs, including: - Research trends and findings - Behavior/speech - Communication - Treatments - Education Taking advantage of the techniques offered by the electronic medium, the Encyclopedia of Autism Spectrum Disorders offers an extensive cross-referencing system facilitating search and retrieval of information.

Evidence-Based Practices and Treatments for Children with Autism by Brian Reichow (Editor); Peter Doehring (Editor); Domenic V. Cicchetti (Editor); Fred R. Volkmar (Editor) Autism spectrum disorders (ASDs) have been increasingly diagnosed in recent years and carries with it far reaching social and financial implications. With this in mind, educators, physicians, and parents are searching for the best practices and most effective treatments. But because the symptoms of ASDs span multiple domains (e.g., communication and language, social, behavioral), successfully meeting the needs of a child with autism can be quite challenging. Evidence-Based Practices and Treatments for Children with Autism offers an insightful and balanced perspective on topics ranging from the historical underpinnings of autism treatment to the use of psychopharmacology and the implementation of evidence-based practices (EBPs). An evaluation methodology is also offered to reduce the risks and inconsistencies associated with the varying definitions of key autism terminology. This commitment to clearly addressing the complex issues associated with ASDs continues throughout the volume and provides opportunities for further research. Additional issues addressed include: Behavioral excesses and deficits treatment Communication treatment Social awareness and social skills treatment Dietary, complementary, and alternative treatments Implementation of EBPs in school settings Interventions for sensory dysfunction With its holistic and accessible approach, Evidence-Based Practices and Treatments for Children with Autism is a vital resource for school psychologists and special education professionals as well as allied mental health professionals, including clinical child and developmental psychologists, psychiatrist, pediatricians, primary care and community providers.

Foundation Role Plays for Autism: Role Plays for Working with Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders, Parents, Peers, Teachers, and Other Professionals by Andrew Nelson Role play is an ideal tool for helping people with Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD) develop and practice communication and social skills. It is also an effective way of informing others about what it's like to have ASD, and of teaching professionals how individuals with ASD can best be supported. Foundation Role Plays for Autism contains safe and structured role plays for working with different groups, including individuals with ASD, their teachers, caregivers, parents and peers. It provides materials for custom-making role plays to suit the specific needs of participants and photocopiable forms for tracking individual participants' skills. An accompanying audio CD simulates scenarios such as taking down phone messages and following instructions from a teacher, helping individuals with ASD practice skills for coping with challenging situations before implementing them in real-life scenarios, and helping others to develop new perspectives on the challenges faced by individuals with ASD. This hands-on, practical book will enable teachers, autism trainers and consultants and other professionals to develop and practice new skills for working with individuals with ASD, and their families and peers.

Infectious Behavior: Brain-Immune Connections in Autism, Schizophrenia, and Depression by Paul H. Patterson In "Infectious Behavior," neurobiologist Paul Patterson examines the involvement of the immune system in autism, schizophrenia, and major depressive disorder. Although genetic approaches to these diseases have garnered the lion's share of publicity and funding, scientists are uncovering evidence of the important avenues of communication between the brain and the immune system and their involvement in mental illness. Patterson focuses on this brain-immune crosstalk, exploring the possibility that it may help us understand the causes of these common, but still mysterious, diseases. The heart of this engaging book, accessible to nonscientists, concerns the involvement of the immune systems of the pregnant woman and her fetus, and a consideration of maternal infection as a risk factor for schizophrenia and autism. Patterson reports on research that may shed light on today's autism epidemic. He also outlines the risks and benefits of both maternal and postnatal vaccinations. In the course of his discussion, Patterson offers a short history of immune manipulation in treating mental illness (recounting some frightening but fascinating early experiments) and explains how the immune system influences behavior and how the brain regulates the immune system, looking in particular at stress and depression. He examines the prenatal origins of adult disease and evidence for immune involvement in autism, schizophrenia, and depression. Finally, he describes the promise shown by recent animal experiments that have led to early clinical trials of postnatal and adult treatments for patients with autism and related disorders.

International Handbook of Autism and Pervasive Developmental Disorders by Johnny L. Matson (Editor); Peter Sturmey (Editor) Since the early 1940s, when first identified childhood psychosis and autistic psychopathy, autism spectrum disorder (ASD) has continued to burgeon into a major focus of inquiry and interest among researchers, practitioners, and the public alike. With each passing decade, the number of scholarly articles addressing ASD and related disabilities continues to soar. Today, thousands of papers on autism are published annually across various disciplines and journals, making it challenging - if not impossible - to keep pace with, let alone synthesize, all the latest developments. Based on a solid historical foundation of autism theory and research, the International Handbook of Autism and Pervasive Developmental Disorders integrates the broad scholarly base of literature with a trenchant analysis of the state of the field in nosology, etiology, assessment, and treatment. Its expert contributors examine recent findings and controversies (e.g., how prevalent autism actually is), along with longstanding topics of interest as well as emerging issues. Coverage includes: A survey of diagnostic criteria and assessment strategies. Genetic, behavioral, biopsychosocial, and cognitive models. Psychiatric disorders in persons with ASD. Theory of mind and facial recognition. Diagnostic instruments for assessing core features and challenging behaviors. Evidence-based psychosocial, pharmacological, and integrative treatments. Interventions specifically for adults with ASD. Training issues for professionals and parents. A review of findings of successful and promising therapies, coupled with guidance on how to distinguish between dubious and effective treatments. The International Handbook of Autism and Pervasive Developmental Disorders is an indispensable resource for researchers, professors, graduate students, and allied practitioners in clinical child and school psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, education, social work, rehabilitation, pediatric medicine, and developmental psychology.

Interventions for Autism Spectrum Disorders: Translating Science into Practice by Sam Goldstein (Editor); Jack A. Naglieri (Editor) Children are being diagnosed with autism spectrum disorders at a staggering rate--as many as one in 110, according to some studies. To this sobering statistic add the familiar figures of the toddler disengaged from his peers, the middle schooler shunned in the lunchroom, and the adult struggling with social cues on the job, and professionals are faced with a mounting challenge: to assist and support young people with these disorders to ensure their successful transition to adolescence and adulthood. The first volume dedicated solely to its topic, Interventions for Autism Spectrum Disorders provides a comprehensive overview of programs currently in use. Contributors explore programs focusing on long-term outcomes, home- and classroom-based strategies, resilience training for parents, and pharmacological management of symptoms. Background chapters review issues in reliability and validity of interventions and evaluating treatment effectiveness. And an especially cogent chapter discusses the centrality of treatment integrity to best practice. Comprehensive programs and targeted interventions covered include: The Early Start Denver Model for young children. The TEACCH program for children, adults, and families. The Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD) and CARD eLearning. PROGress: a program for remediating and expanding social skills. Evidence-based strategies for repetitive behaviors and sensory issues. Self-regulation strategies for students with autism spectrum disorders. Interventions for Autism Spectrum Disorders is an essential resource for researchers, professionals/practitioners, and clinicians in a wide array of fields, including clinical child, school, and developmental psychology; child and adolescent psychiatry; education; rehabilitation medicine/therapy; social work; and pediatrics.

The Oxford Handbook of Externalizing Spectrum Disorders by Theodore P. Beauchaine (Editor); Stephen P. Hinshaw (Editor) Recent developments in the conceptualization of externalizing spectrum disorders, including attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder, conduct disorder, antisocial personality disorder, and substance use disorders, suggest common genetic and neural substrates. Despite this, neither shared vulnerabilities nor their implications for developmental models of externalizing conduct are captured by prevailing nosologic and diagnostic systems, such as the DSM-5. The Oxford Handbook of Externalizing Spectrum Disorders is the first book of its kind to capture the developmental psychopathology of externalizing spectrum disorders by examining causal factors across levels of analysis and developmental epochs, while departing from the categorical perspective. World renowned experts on externalizing psychopathology demonstrate how shared genetic and neural vulnerabilities predispose to trait impulsivity, a highly heritable personality construct that is often shaped by adverse environments into increasingly intractable forms of externalizing conduct across development. Consistent with contemporary models of almost all forms of psychopathology, the Handbook emphasizes the importance of neurobiological vulnerability and environmental risk interactions in the expression of externalizing behavior across the lifespan. The volume concludes with an integrative, ontogenic process model of externalizing psychopathology in which diverse equifinal and multifinal pathways to disorder are specified.

The Behavioral Addictions by Michael S. Ascher (Editor); Petros Levounis (Editor) The Behavioral Addictions is the first American Psychiatric Publishing title to explore the diagnosis and treatment of patients who suffer from behavioral addictions, extreme forms of which share specific characteristics with severe forms of substance use disorders. These characteristics include tolerance (the need to use the substance or perform the troublesome behavior at higher doses, or more and more frequently, in order to achieve the same effect); withdrawal (feelings of restlessness, irritability, and discontent following abrupt discontinuation of the substance or the behavior); obsessive thinking and planning that block out anything other than obtaining or engaging in the addictive agent or behavior; and accompanying external consequences in related to finances, health, interpersonal relationships, legal affairs, etc. Although not all behavioral addictions are currently recognized as such by DSM-5, both substances and behaviors can hijack a person's pleasure-and-reward brain circuitry, causing great suffering. This case-based volume is practical and engaging and offers many features that make it not only informative but also accessible and entertaining: * Behaviors covered, both those widely recognized and those less commonly accepted, involve exercise, food, gambling, Internet gaming, Internet surfing, kleptomania, love, sex, shopping, work, tanning, and e-mailing/texting.* Introductory chapters discuss the relationship of behavioral or process addictions to substance use disorders across many spheres, and they provide an overview of the behavioral addictions from neurobiological, theoretical, clinical, and forensic perspectives.* Gambling disorder is now classified in DSM-5 as a behavioral addiction, lending credence to the construct of behavioral addictions and providing precedent for future consideration of other behavioral addictions, such as those highlighted in the volume. * Each chapter focuses on a real-life case study of a patient with a behavioral addiction. Videos that accompany the volume demonstrate encounters between a clinician and a patient exhibiting an addiction. This puts material on assessment, treatment, etc. into a real-world context.* Key points for review and multiple-choice questions are included at the end of each chapter. Not simply an exaggeration of everyday social and personal ailments, these behavioral conditions present clinicians with unique and poorly researched challenges in everyday clinical practice. The Behavioral Addictions helps the reader to determine not only where to draw the line between healthy and unhealthy levels of participation in a behavior, but also how to intervene in ways that are therapeutic, effective, and evidence-based.

Bioprediction, Biomarkers, and Bad Behavior: Scientific, Legal, and Ethical Challenges by Ilina Singh (Editor); Walter P. Sinnott-Armstrong (Editor); Julian Savulecu (Editor) Many decisions in the legal system and elsewhere depend on predictions of bad behaviors, including crimes and mental illnesses. Some scientists have suggested recently that these predictions can become more accurate and useful if they are based in part on biological information, such as brain structure and function, genes, and hormones. The prospect of such bioprediction, however, raises serious concerns about errors and injustice. Can biological information significantly increase the accuracy of predictions of bad behavior? Will innocent or harmless people be mistakenly treated as if they were guilty or dangerous? Is it fair to keep people in prisons or mental institutions longer because of their biology? Will these new instruments of bioprediction be abused in practice within current institutions? Is bioprediction worth the cost? Do we want our government to use biology in this way? All of these scientific, legal, and ethical questions are discussed in this volume. The contributors are prominent neuroscientists, psychologists, sociologists, philosophers, ethicists, and legal scholars. This volume will interest everyone with hopes that bioprediction will solve problems or fears that bioprediction will be applied unjustly.

Bullying, Suicide, and Homicide: Understanding, Assessing, and Preventing Threats to Self and Others for Victims of Bullying by Butch Losey In our society, bullying is commonly seen as a normal, inescapable part of growing up that children and adolescents must simply endure. In Bullying, Suicide, and Homicide, Butch Losey challenges this viewpoint, arguing that bullying is not a part of childhood development, but rather an aberrant behavior that, for the victim, can lead to adverse decisions, such as suicide and homicide. He provides a detailed understanding of the relationship between bullying, suicide, and homicide and an assessment and response strategy that can be utilized by mental health professionals who work with children and adolescents. This strategy involves a three stage ecological approach: screening to identify warning signs for bullying, depression, suicide, and violence by means of the Bullying Lethality Identification System (BLIS), developed by Losey and a colleague; assessing the risks of suicide and threats of violence using specially tailored forms and tools; and mediating to identify appropriate interventions. All of the associated tools and forms that the author has created are included as appendices and on the accompanying CD. Losey's sensitive and compassionate treatment of this important subject will inform and motivate mental health professionals in their work with victims of bullying.

Clinical Psychology and Cognitive Behavioral Psychotherapy: Recovery in Mental Health by Stavroula Rakitzi This book presents the evidence-based treatments in the context of cognitive behavioral therapy and rehabilitation in various disorders in combination with the clinical experience of the author in private practice. Every chapter is structured in the same form. Part A Basics: introduction, definition, the importance, discussion, revision questions, und Part B Disorders: abstract, introduction, clinical features, evidence-based treatments, discussion, revision questions. The book is addressed to psychology students, medicine students, to researchers, to psychotherapists, to psychiatrists and to non-experts. The language of the book is simple enough, so that non-experts can be informed about issues in mental health. The aim of the book is to minimize the stigma towards mental health problems, to give an optimistic message regarding the modern evidence-based treatments in mental health and to clarify that reintegration into society is a realistic goal nowadays.

Disruptive Behavior Disorders by Patrick H. Tolan (Editor); Bennett L. Leventhal (Editor) Aggressive behavior among children and adolescents has confounded parents and perplexed professionals--especially those tasked with its treatment and prevention--for countless years. As baffling as these behaviors are, however, recent advances in neuroscience focusing on brain development have helped to make increasing sense of their complexity. Focusing on their most prevalent forms, Oppositional Defiant Disorder and Conduct Disorder, Disruptive Behavior Disorders advances the understanding of DBD on a number of significant fronts. Its neurodevelopmental emphasis within an ecological approach offers links between brain structure and function and critical environmental influences and the development of these specific disorders. The book's findings and theories help to differentiate DBD within the contexts of normal development, non-pathological misbehavior and non-DBD forms of pathology. Throughout these chapters are myriad implications for accurate identification, effective intervention and future cross-disciplinary study. Key issues covered include: Gene-environment interaction models. Neurobiological processes and brain functions. Callous-unemotional traits and developmental pathways. Relationships between gender and DBD. Multiple pathways of familial transmission. Disruptive Behavior Disorders is a groundbreaking resource for researchers, scientist-practitioners and graduate students in clinical child and school psychology, psychiatry, educational psychology, prevention science, child mental health care, developmental psychology and social work.

Disruptive Mood: Irritability in Children and Adolescents by Argyris Stringaris; Eric Taylor A practical guide to understanding and treating children and adolescents prone to extreme levels of angry outbursts, Disruptive Mood: Irritability in Children and Adolescents is based on the very latest research and theory. Providing both a clinical and scientific perspective on irritability in children, this book is a timely look at recent developments in the field. Abnormal states of anger are a common reason for referral to child health services, and cause concern in clinics, schools, and families. Misdiagnosis and treatment can stem from a lack of understanding of the mechanisms involved in high levels of anger in children, and Disruptive Mood: Irritability in Children and Adolescents provides clear guidance on the development of abnormal states of anger, their consequences for later development, and how to assess and make differential diagnoses between them. A useful resource for clinical practice, this book is concise and accessible, and offers tools for evaluating treatments. Disruptive Mood: Irritability in Children and Adolescents is designed for practitioners involved in child and adolescent mental health and education and researchers who need an introduction to this complex field.

Embitterment: Societal, Psychological, and Clinical Perspectives by Michael Linden (Editor); Andreas Maercker (Editor) Embitterment is a distinct state of mood known to everyone. It can be seen in the context of exceptional though "normal" negative life events. It is an emotional reaction e.g. to humiliation, to being severely disappointed by others, or to violations of basic values. Embitterment is accompanied by other emotions like feelings of hopelessness and helplessness, poor moods and a lack of drive, and aggression towards oneself and others. It can end in suicide or even murder-suicide and in a distinct pathological state known as "Posttraumatic Embitterment Disorder (PTED)". But despite the high prevalence rates, the detrimental effects on individuals and its forensic and societal importance, embitterment has yet to receive due scientific attention. In this book pioneers in embitterment research summarize the current knowledge on embitterment, its triggers, phenomenology and consequences. The work is intended to stimulate international debate and to contribute to a better understandingof embitterment and a deeper appreciation of the impact of exceptional but normal negative life events on psychological well-being.

Emotion Regulation and Well-Being by Ivan Nyklíek (Editor); Ad Vingerhoets (Editor); Marcel Zeelenberg (Editor) Emotion is a basic phenomenon of human functioning, most of the time having an adaptive value enhancing our effectiveness in pursuing our goals in the broadest sense. Regulation of these emotions, however, is essential for adaptive functioning, and suboptimal or dysfunctional emotion regulation may even be counterproductive and result in adverse consequences, including a poor well-being and ill health.This volume provides a state-of-the art overview of issues related to the association between emotion regulation and both mental and physical well-being. It covers various areas of research highly relevant to both researchers in the field and clinicians working with emotion regulation issues in their practice. Included topics are arranged along four major areas:* (Neuro-)biological processes involved in the generation and regulation of emotions* Psychological processes and mechanisms related to the link between emotion regulation and psychological well-being as well as physical health* Social perspective on emotion regulation pertaining to well-being and social functioning across the life span* Clinical aspects of emotion regulation and specific mental and physical health problemsThis broad scope offers the possibility to include research findings and thought-provoking views of leading experts from different fields of research, such as cognitive neuroscience, clinical psychology, psychophysiology, social psychology, and psychiatry on specific topics such as nonconscious emotion regulation, emotional body language, self-control, rumination, mindfulness, social sharing, positive emotions, intergroup emotions, and attachment in their relation to well-being and health. Chapters are based on the "Fourth International Conference on the (Non) Expression of Emotions in Health and Disease" held at Tilburg University in October 2007. In 2007 Springer published "Emotion Regulation: Conceptual and Clinical Issues" based on the Third InternationalConference on the (Non) Expression of Emotion in Health and Disease," held at Tilburg University in October 2003. It is anticipated that, depending on sales, we may continue to publish the advances deriving from this conference.

Essentials of Psychiatry in Primary Care: Behavioral Health in the Medical Setting by Robert C. Smith; Dale D'Mello; Gerald G. Osborn; Laura Freilich; Francesca C. Dwamena; Heather S. Laird-Fick An innovative psychiatry textbook that presents behavioral disorders from the perspective of what is seen in medical settings The goal of Essentials of Psychiatry in Primary Care is not to make psychiatrists out of medical clinicians, but rather, to help clinicians manage common behavioral conditions that most often present in a medical setting.  Essentials of Psychiatry in Primary Care seeks to integrate medicine and psychiatry --- as the authors' systems-based biopsychosocial model proposes. The book identifies physical symptoms as a common mode of presentation of mental health problems and describes how to integrate them with psychological symptoms to make diagnoses of mental disorders. Essentials of Psychiatry in Primary Care also details a behaviorally defined, evidence-based mental healthcare model that can be effectively used in a medical setting.  The combined experiences in primary care of the authors --- who specialize in both general internal medicine and psychiatry --- provide the perfect background for a book of this nature. Having trained medical students, as well as internal and family medicine residents since 1986, their experience and research demonstrates the information they outline is effective and associated with improved mental and physical health outcomes. 

Functional Assessment for Challenging Behaviors by Johnny L. Matson (Editor) As the cornerstone of applied behavior analysis, functional assessment is supported by a burgeoning literature that focuses on identification of and interventions for aggressive, self-injurious, and other challenging behaviors. Although the number of research studies continues to grow, full-length volumes on using functional assessment to address these behaviors remain few and far between. Comprehensive in coverage, Functional Assessment for Challenging Behaviors expands the knowledge base by providing information on all aspects of its topic. This unique volume addresses basic questions in salient detail, from types and rates of challenging behaviors to populations that warrant functional assessment. In addition, it examines typical assessment techniques, including interview, scaling, experimental, and in vivo methods. The use of functional assessment in treatment planning - and in combination with other interventions - is covered in depth. An especially timely chapter identifies key ethical and legal concerns in working with challenging behavior populations. Coverage includes: The history of behavior analysis and functional assessment. The nature, prevalence, and characteristics of challenging behaviors. Interview and observation methods in functional assessment and analysis. Experimental functional analysis for challenging behaviors. Treatment methods commonly used with functional assessment. Using functional assessment in treatment planning. Functional Assessment for Challenging Behaviors is an essential resource for researchers, scientist-practitioners, and graduate students in clinical child and school psychology, pediatric psychiatry and medicine, social work, rehabilitation, and developmental psychology.

Handbook of Self-Regulation: Research, Theory, and Applications by Kathleen D. Vohs (Editor); Roy F. Baumeister (Editor) From leading authorities, this significantly revised and expanded handbook is a highly regarded reference in a rapidly growing field. It thoroughly examines the conscious and unconscious processes by which people manage their behavior and emotions, control impulses, and strive toward desired goals. Chapters explore such vital issues as why certain individuals have better self-control than others; how self-regulation shapes, and is shaped by, social relationships; underlying brain mechanisms and developmental pathways; and which interventions can improve people's self-control. The volume also addresses self-regulatory failures and their consequences, with chapters on attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder, criminality, addictions, and money management challenges. As a special bonus, purchasers of the third edition can download a supplemental e-book featuring two notable, highly cited chapters from the second edition. New to This Edition *Incorporates current topic areas, theories, and empirical findings. *Updated throughout, with 21 new chapters and numerous new authors. *Cutting-edge topics: implicit self-regulation processes, the role of physical needs and processes (such as the importance of sleep), the benefits of dampening positivity, the frequency and consequences of emotional control in the workplace, and self-regulation training. *Expanded coverage of motivational factors, romantic relationships, and lapses of self-control. *Supplemental e-book featuring selected chapters from the prior edition.

Interpreting the MMPI-2-RF by Yossef S. Ben-Porath This guide is a vital tool for effective use of the recently released MMPI-2-RF. Yossef S. Ben-Porath, a leading expert on the MMPI instruments, provides detailed descriptions of the scales of the test, tables with interpretive recommendations for each scale, and an abundance of illustrative cases from a wide variety of settings, including forensic (criminal and civil), medical, and personnel screening. A comprehensive reference for users of the new test, this book sets the standard for interpretation of, and instruction on, the MMPI-2-RF. A book-based exam offering Continuing Education (CE) credit is available for this publication. Visit the University of Minnesota Press Test Division website for more information.

Neurocognitive Behavioral Disorders: An Interdisciplinary Approach to Patient-Centered Care by Maureen Nash (Editor); Sarah Foidel (Editor) Dementia, now known as major neurocognitive disorder, is not one monolithic disease. Nor is behavior disturbance driven by one particular neurocognitive dysfunction. In fact if we are able to understand it, behavior is an excellent form of nonverbal communication. There are many different causes of dementia. A major challenge with both researching and implementing interventions is viewing dementia and related behaviors as single entities. This approach leaves room for critical errors in the treatment of dementia patients, beginning with misdiagnosis.  This book approaches dementia by reviewing cognitive and functional assessments to provide a more accurate diagnosis, which then allows physicians to design specific interventions that are tailored to the person and their challenges. Because person centered care is vital to quality of life and longevity to an aging patient, this understanding of individual needs is vital. Written by experts in the field,this book incorporates the latest evidence-based behavioral interventions matched to specific deficits. Behavioral management focuses not on controlling behavior, but using it to teach staff and caregivers how to interpret common actions and maximize function for people with major neurocognitive disorders. Quality of life and individualized care planning will be the theme and the book will provide practical case examples. The book begins by introducing dementia and other neurocognitive illnesses, contextualizing them both historically and contemporarily.  Next, the text focuses on the comprehensive assessment of a person with neurocognitive challenges in order to identify strengths and understand what the person is trying to communicate with their behavior.  This process allows individualized care planning and behavioral (non-pharmacologic) management to meet the cognitive challenges and maximize individual strengths and thereby improve outcomes, makingthis a cutting edge resource.

Opportunities to Promote Children's Behavioral Health: Health Care Reform and Beyond: Workshop Summary by Forum on Promoting Children's Cognitive, Affective, and Behavioral Health; Board on Children, Youth, and Families; Institute of Medicine; Division of Behavioral and Social Sciences and Education Staff; Noam I. Keren (Editor); Steve Olson (Editor); National Academies of Sciences, Engineering, and Medicine The Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act (ACA), which was signed into law in 2010, has several provisions that could greatly improve the behavioral health of children and adolescents in the United States. It requires that many insurance plans cover mental health and substance use disorder services, rehabilitative services to help support people with behavioral health challenges, and preventive services like behavioral assessments for children and depression screening for adults. These and other provisions provide an opportunity to confront the many behavioral health challenges facing youth in America. To explore how the ACA and other aspects of health care reform can support innovations to improve children's behavioral health and sustain those innovations over time, the Forum on Promoting Children's Cognitive, Affective, and Behavioral Health held a workshop on April 1-2, 2015. The workshop explicitly addressed the behavioral health needs of all children, including those with special health needs. It also took a two-generation approach, looking at the programs and services that support not only children but also parents and families. This report summarizes the presentations and discussions of this workshop.

The Oxford Handbook of Behavioral Emergencies and Crises by Phillip M. Kleespies (Editor) The Oxford Handbook of Behavioral Emergencies and Crises includes the most up-to-date and valuable research on the evaluation and management of the most challenging patients or clients faced by mental health providers - individuals who are at high risk of suicide, of other-directed violence, or of becoming the victims of interpersonal violence. These are cases in which the outcome can be serious injury or death, and there can be negative consequences not only for the patient, but also for the patient's family and friends, for the assessing or treating clinician, and for the patient's clinic or medical center. Virtually all mental health clinicians with an active caseload will see individuals with such issues. This Handbook is comprised of chapters by leading clinicians, researchers, and scholars in this area of practice. It presents a framework for learning the skills needed for assessing and working competently with such high-risk individuals. Chapters draw a distinction between behavioral emergencies and crises, and between emergency intervention and crisis intervention. The book examines the inter-related aspects of the major behavioral emergencies; that is, for example, the degree to which interpersonal victimization may lead an individual on a pathway to later suicidal or violent behavior, or the degree to which suicidal individuals and violent individuals may share certain cognitive characteristics. This resource is not simply a knowledge base for behavioral emergencies; it also presents a method for reducing stress and acquiring skills in working with high-risk people.

Personality Disorders (Oxford Psychiatry Library) by Giles Newton-Howes A practical guide to personality disorders, this pocketbook is written with clinical utility in mind. Case examples and a focus on evidence based treatments will give busy health professionals confidence when diagnosing and treating patients with personality disorders. Clear and concise, this book provides practical advice highlighted with useful "key points" so that readers can find information quickly and easily. Personality Disorders outlines the principles of management, with a focus on pharmacological, psychotherapeutic, and social interventions. Personality disorder is an area of psychiatry with much confusion and controversy, and Dr Newton-Howes explores the current understanding of the field, including where there are gaps. Informed by the classification systems in ICD-10 and DSM-5, this book will serve as a practical reference for psychiatrists, psychiatric trainees, clinical psychologists, GPs with a special interest in mental health, and other mental health professionals.

Personality Disorders by Rainer Sachse Practical advice for treating personality disorders.This praxis-oriented guide presents a treatment model of personality disorders (PDs) based on the latest research that shows that some "pure" PDs are due to relationship disturbances. The reader gains concise and clear information about the dual-action regulation model, the framework for clarification-oriented psychotherapy, which relates the relationship dysfunction to central relationship motives and relationship games. Practical information is given on how to behave with clients and clear therapeutic strategies based on a five-phase model are outlined to help therapists manage interactional problems in therapy and to assist clients in achieving effective change.The eight pure personality disorders (narcissistic, histrionic, dependent, avoidant, schizoid, passive-aggressive, obsessive-compulsive, and paranoid) are each explored in detail so the reader learns about the specific features of each disorder and the associated interactional motives, dysfunctional schemas, and relationship games and tests, as well as which therapeutic approaches are appropriate for a particular PD. As the development of a trusting therapeutic relationship is difficult with this client group, detailed strategies and tips are given throughout. This book is essential reading for clinical psychologists, psychiatrists, psychotherapists, counselors, coaches, and students.

Preventing Bullying and School Violence by Stuart W. Twemlow; Frank C. Sacco Results from numerous surveys indicate that many students do not feel safe in school. This condition exacts an academic as well as a psychological toll because, as the authors remind us, children must feel safe in order to learn. The authors of Preventing Bullying and School Violence contend that inadequate attention has been given to the role of mental health professionals in preventing bullying and school violence. They propose a collaborative, multidisciplinary approach, one that draws upon the skills of the educational, health care, and mental health communities in identifying risk, choosing appropriate interventions, and implementing targeted wellness programs. The authors see bullying as a process, not a problem originating with a single troubled person. Accordingly, they believe that bullying behaviors can be effectively addressed only by targeting the broader social context--the coercive power and group dynamics that breed and maintain bullying and violent behavior in the school setting. The book is designed to help clinicians, school counselors, and administrators create a safe climate for their students and to respond thoughtfully, but swiftly, when threats arise. The authors offer many practical guidelines for achieving these goals, addressing * The critical importance of establishing a strong connection between the family, the school, and the community in creating a healthy academic environment* Strategies for working effectively with the complex social bureaucracies that often characterize the entities (such as school boards and governmental agencies) that intervene in cases involving violent children, with an emphasis on developing skills in managing both small and large groups* Ways to define and recognize at-risk children who require special attention as a result of having mental illness and/or learning disability* Innovative community interventions, such as therapeutic mentoring and home-based therapy, in addition to information on local, state, and federal programs designed to support antiviolence programs in the schools* Techniques for promoting wellness among the student population--not just physical wellness, but also the positive attitudes and coping skills that are the hallmarks of mental health. Preventing Bullying and School Violence aims to empower mental health professionals to work confidently and effectively in educational settings to reduce the distress, enhance the psychological well-being, and secure the safety of all schoolchildren.

Stepped Care and e-Health: Practical Applications to Behavioral Disorders by Crissa Draper (Editor); William O'Donohue (Editor) Stepped care provides the least intrusive intervention to individuals seeking treatment by providing a range of treatment intensities. In the past two decades, computers and the internet have provided a new and efficient medium that lends well to adding steps in a stepped-care model. While there is ample evidence to support the positive effects of bibliotherapy or self-help books, computer-aided therapy (also known as e-health) has the potential to take these effects even further.This volume will be of interest to practitioners and organizations attempting to serve rural and underserved communities. The book focuses on evidence-based treatment, making it consistent with quality improvement initiatives.

Behavioral Neurobiology of Bipolar Disorder and Its Treatment by Husseini K. Manji (Editor); Carlos A. Zarate Jr. (Editor) This book offers the most up-to-date information about research surrounding the neurobiology of bipolar disorder as well as currently available and novel therapeutic options. The volume has assembled a widely respected group of preclinical and clinical researchers who bring their expertise to bear upon this illness by reviewing cutting-edge research and clinical evidence regarding the pathophysiology and treatment of bipolar disorder. Early chapters review the course and outcome and genetics of this highly heritable condition, including chapters on epigenetics and clinical endophenotypes. Several chapters offer a remarkably thorough and unique overview of the neurobiology of the disorder, including what is known from neuroimaging work and the development of animal models. Finally, the book covers treatment strategies for bipolar disorder, including both traditional and novel therapeutics, as well as non-pharmacological treatments. It offers both researchers and clinicians key insights into this devastating disorder.

Bipolar Disorder by Lakshmi Yatham; Gin Malhi Bipolar disorder affects up to 5% of the general population and the condition is associated with considerable morbidity and mortality. There has been an explosion of research into the neurobiology and treatment of bipolar disorder over the past 15 years. This has led to increased understanding of the disorder and development of many new treatments for this condition. Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library, this concise pocket book covers the diagnostic aspects, clinical features, and biology of bipolar disorder, as well as current treatment strategies including psychotherapy, pharmacotherapy and somatic treatments. It serves as an invaluable quick reference for clinical psychiatrists, trainees, specialist nurses and other mental health care professionals, as well as interested general practitioners.

Bipolar Disorder in Youth: Presentation, Treatment and Neurobiology by Stephen M. Strakowski (Editor); Melissa P. DelBello (Editor); Caleb M. Adler (Editor) Bipolar disorders affect up to 3% of the world's population and are the 6th leading cause of disability worldwide. The estimated annual costs of bipolar disorder approach $50 billion in the United States, and the associated societal and personal suffering is immeasurable. Bipolar disorder is a lifelong illness that typically begins in mid-adolescence, thereby disrupting healthy developmental processes. It is also a progressive illness, making early intervention even more critical. As the disorder presents differently in youth as it does in adults, considerable controversy exists around the diagnosis in young people. The neurobiological factors leading to the onset of bipolar disorder reflect abnormalities in adolescent brain development. Bipolar disorder is strongly heritable and therefore, these developmental abnormalities likely represent the culmination of processes that precede the expression of symptoms. Current studies of children who are at risk for bipolar disorder are identifying these processes. Again, controversy exists about how to move these neuroscience gains forward to help affected individuals and, particularly to manage children at risk to delay or prevent the onset or progression of bipolar disorder.With these considerations in mind, Bipolar Disorder in Youth provides a timely, focused review of the diagnosis, treatment, and neurobiology of bipolar disorder in youth. It addresses current controversies and resolves those in which evidence is available. The book is organized into three sections based on these topics to provide comprehensive discussions to aid clinicians managing these individuals in their practices, as well as scientists trying to advance the field. The three editors are widely recognized experts in bipolar disorder, and the authors of each chapter represent international experts in the respective topics. Consequently, this book is the most comprehensive volume available discussing this important population and is a "must" for the libraries of clinicians and scientists working with bipolar children and adolescents.

BipolART: Art and Bipolar Disorder: A Personal Perspective by Denys N. Wheatley Written with disarming honesty by a long-term sufferer of bipolar disorder, with more than half a century's experience of intervention and treatment, this highly personal volume traces the effectiveness of a therapy modality for mental illness that has gained much ground in the past two decades: art.The author began to use art, and in particular doodling, from 1998 as a way of externalizing his feelings. Its expressiveness, accessibility and energy-efficiency was ideally suited to the catatonia he experienced during the bouts of depression that are a feature of bipolar disorder, while as the low moods lifted and his energy surged, he completed more ambitious and elaborate works.As well as being highly eclectic, Wheatley's assembled oeuvre has afforded him both insights and therapeutic intervention into his condition, once deemed highly debilitating and taboo, but much more socially accepted now that well known sufferers such as Stephen Fry have recounted their experiences of the condition.After an opening account of how the images were generated, the volume reproduces a 'gallery' of selected work, and then offers an extended epilogue analyzing the art's connections with the disorder as well as the author's assessment of how each attempt at visual self-expression was, for him, a therapeutic intervention.Wheatley, a cell biologist who has enjoyed a full career in cancer research, has had no formal training in art, yet his haunting pictures, many of them resembling life forms, are brought to life by his perceptive, self-aware commentary.This book will be of interest to psychologists and psychiatrists among the wider medical profession as well as people suffering from any form of bipolar disorder whatever the severity.

Deja Review Behavioral Science, Second Edition by Gene R. Quinn Publisher's Note: Products purchased from Third Party sellers are not guaranteed by the publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product. Maximum Retention--Minimal Time "Deja Review provides a review of biostatistics, epidemiology, ethics and health care systems in a manner that I have not found in other review books. What I liked best is the versatility ... It's small enough to carry around in my backpack and I can flip to a chapter between classes or during downtime." -- Daniel Marcovici, Third Year Medical Student, Tel Aviv University, Sackler School of Medicine "The format of the book is great. This is a great book for Step 1 and the shelf. It focused on high yield subjects ... I found it useful even to refer to for the psychiatry clerkship." -- Sarah Fabiano, Third Year Medical Student, SUNY Update Medical University "With a well-organized and easily accessible format, this book reviews the major concepts of behavioral science with a particular focus on high yield topics....While this book may be used by students at all levels, it is ideal for those rotating on a psychiatry clerkship and preparing for USMLE....Its ease of use and design set it apart from other books covering individual subjects. 3 Stars."--Doody's Review Service Deja Review: Behavioral Science boils down your coursework to just the critical concepts you need to know for exam success. This unbeatable guide features a quick-read, two-column "flashcard" Q&A format--specifically designed to help you remember a large amount of pertinent information in the least amount of time. The format allows you to zero in on only the correct answers to promote memory retention and get the most out of your study time. Great for last-minute review of high-yield facts, Deja Review provides a straightforward way for you to assess your strengths and weaknesses so you can excel on your course exams and the USMLE Step 1. Active recall questions allow you to understand, not just memorize, the content Clinical vignettes at the end of chapters prepare you for board-style questions Portable size for study on the go--fits in your white coat pocket Bookmark included to guide you through easy-to-use flashcard presentation

First Aid for the Psychiatry Boards by Amin Azzam; Jason Yanofski; Edward Kaftarian; Tao Le Publisher's Note: Products purchased from Third Party sellers are not guaranteed by the publisher for quality, authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product. The Insider's Guide to Acing the Psychiatry Boards Written by Physicians Who Passed! Apply the proven First Aid formula for Psychiatry Board success! "A classic review in virtually every sense, this book consists of brief chapters packed with vital psychiatric and neurological information targeting the clinical knowledge criteria outlined by the American Board of Psychiatry and Neurology (ABPN) for their board-certification examination. Using abbreviated and high yield chapters, this book presents the most up-to-date and useful information on psychiatric and neurologic concepts related to the ABPN examination. 3 Stars."--Doody's Review Service First Aid for the Psychiatry Boards is an "insider's guide" to passing the Psychiatry Boards, in-training exams, and recertification. Based on feedback from recent test-takers, this review offers high-yield information, mnemonics, and visual aids -- along with mini-cases for oral board success.The content is written by recent test-takers so you know you are studying the most current and relevant material possible. Now you can get real answers to real board questions! Features: Hundreds of high-yield facts, mnemonics, clinical images, and summary tables help you ace the boards and in-service exams Covers must-know psychiatry and neurology topics in one complete volume Written by recent, successful test-takers and reviewed by top faculty so you know you're studying the most relevant, up-to-date material possible Integrated mini-cases review frequently tested scenarios and classic patient presentations Great for in-service and board exams and the perfect refresher before recertification Insider Coverage of All the Must-Know Topics: Guide to the ABPN Examination, Psychiatry Topics Disorders of Childhood Onset, Unipolar Depressive Disorders, Bipolar Disorder, Primary Psychotic Disorders, Substance Abuse and Dependence, Anxiety Disorders, Personality Disorders, Eating Disorders, Somatoform Disorders, Sleep and Sleep Disorders, Delirium and Dementia, Sexuality and Sexual Disorders, Neurology Topics Neuroanatomy and Clinical Correlates,Stroke and Critical Care, Neurochemistry and Neuropharmacology, Neuroimmunology, Neurodegenerative Disorders, Headache and Pain, Neuro-oncology, Neuro-ophthalomology and Neuro-otology, Neurological Infections, Neuromuscular Disease, Pediatric Neurology and Neurogenetics, Seizures and Epilepsy Visit FirstAidfortheBoards.com

Kaplan and Sadock's Study Guide and Self-Examination by Lindsay Moskowitz; Robert BOLAND; Marcia VERDUIN; Eric Rashad Williams Perfect for stand-alone review or as preparation for the USMLE, PRITE in-service, ABPN Part I, and recertification examinations,Kaplan and Sadock's Study Guide and Self-Examination Review in Psychiatry, 10th Edition, is a comprehensive, authoritative review of the entire field. Written by Drs. Eric R. Williams and Lindsay Moskowitz, this essential review tool contains more than 600 multiple-choice questions and answers, with explanatory discussions of correct and incorrect responses. Also new to this edition are twenty videos and additional corresponding questions through the complementary digital copy.   Features more than 600 questions and answers--all of which are new, written for this edition--in single-answer, multiple choice format  Reflects the types of questions you'll encounter on ABPN board exams, the USMLE, and the PRITE in-service exam  Includes current terms and definitions consistent with DSM5-TR and ICD-11  Parallels the essential corresponding chapters in Kaplan & Sadock's Synopsis of Psychiatry, a staple of psychiatry education around the globe  Includes access to twenty case videos and additional corresponding questions  Included VST e-book features the ability to randomly generate interactive practice tests that draw questions from throughout the book  Ideal for psychiatrists and other physicians, as well as psychiatric residents, medical students, clinical psychologists, psychiatric nurses, and other professionals who provide care for the mentally ill    Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience  Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone.  Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech.

Psychiatry Board Review by Rajesh Tampi (Editor); Kristina Zdanys (Editor); Mark Oldham (Editor) The field of psychiatry is evolving rapidly specifically in the areas of classification of many psychiatric disorders, psychopharmacology and psychotherapeutics. The new Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders: DSM-5 which was introduced in 2013 forms the basis of the new classification system in psychiatry. The American Board of Psychiatry and Neurology is also in the process of phasing in DSM-5 criteria to the board examination, such that by 2017 the examination material will exclusively reflect the new manual. As psychiatric trainees and psychiatrists prepare for their certification and recertification examinations using the new classification system, a new board review textbook is imperative to address these changes in order to prepare them for the certification examinations as well as for their clinical practice. To help with this process we have compiled a list of 1000 questions and answers in psychiatry and neurology using the most current information available in the field and using the DSM 5 classification system. This book has been specifically written for the busy professional who does not have the time to access numerous resources necessary to prepare for professional examinations.

Understanding Body Dysmorphic Disorder: An Essential Guide by Katharine A. Phillips In a world obsessed with appearance, it is not surprising that body dysmorphic disorder, or BDD - an emotionally painful obsession with perceived flaws in one's appearance - has manifested itself as a troubling and relatively common problem for many individuals. In The Broken Mirror, the first and most definitive book on BDD, Dr. Katharine A. Phillips provided a comprehensive manual for patients and their physicians by drawing on years of clinical practice, scientific research, and professional evaluations of over 1,000 patients. Now, in Understanding Body Dysmorphic Disorder: An Essential Guide, the world's leading authority on BDD reaches out to patients, their friends, and their families with this concise and updated handbook. BDD causes sufferers to be obsessed by perceived flaws in their appearance and may afflict as much as two percent of the population, or nearly five million people. Many sufferers are able to function well in society, but remain secretly obsessed by their "hideous acne" or "horrible nose," sneaking constant peeks at a pocket mirror, or spending hours at a time redoing makeup. Others find their lives disintegrate because of their appearance obsessions. It is not an uncommon disorder, simply a hidden one, since sufferers are often embarrassed to tell even their closest friends about their concerns. Using stories and interviews to show the many different behaviors and symptoms of BDD, and a quick self-assessment questionnaire, Dr. Phillips guides readers through the basics of the disorder and through the many treatment options that work and don't work. With Understanding Body Dysmorphic Disorder: An Essential Guide, sufferers will find both helpful advice and much needed reassurance in a compact, down-to-earth indispensable book.

Handbook of Career Development in Academic Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences by Laura Weiss Roberts (Editor); Donald M. Hilty (Editor) Working in academic psychiatry is fulfilling, replete with extraordinary colleagues and inspiring opportunities for meaningful work and professional growth. Even so, getting started in an academic career can be a bit unsettling. After years of education, a new faculty member may feel unprepared for the everyday duties associated with a different academic role--negotiating with the chair, writing letters of recommendation for students, participating on committees with colleagues, and balancing personal and professional life. The Handbook of Career Development in Academic Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, Second Edition, provides real-world advice with compassion. Readers will find just what they need when they need it: step-by-step guidance to approaching the tasks and challenges that face them, questions to discuss with mentors and colleagues, and professionally vetted online career development resources. Readers will also hear the voice of sympathetic, experienced academic clinicians who share how best to navigate challenging situations encountered in academic settings. Each chapter features: * Smart Strategies: A list of specific actions readers can take to reach their professional goals* Questions to Discuss with a Mentor or a Colleague: A list of questions that simplifies and normalizes the process of soliciting career advice and assistance* Additional Resources: A collection of the most recent and innovative websites, books, and articles that will assist readers on their career path, even after they've finished reading the book Readers who seek out the advice in this book will find that they are better equipped to forge their academic careers--and flourish.

Casebook of Neuropsychiatry by Trevor A. Hurwitz (Editor); Warren T. Lee (Editor) Casebook of Neuropsychiatry provides a fascinating tour of the critical subspecialty of neuropsychiatry, which combines neurology and psychiatry to address organic disturbances in the central nervous system that give rise to mental diseases. The book is comprised of 11 chapters, with subjects ranging from apathy to hyperkinetic states, and from depression to psychobehavioral disinhibition. The chapters are further divided into 38 cases, each of which takes the reader from clinical presentation through differential diagnosis and diagnostic workup, to current treatment options. Although the book is written in an engaging, narrative style, it has a strong, thoroughly up-to-date scientific foundation. Each case is placed in the appropriate neurobiological context, thus enhancing both the reader's clinical skills and his or her neuropsychiatric knowledge. The book's many beneficial features include: * Complete coverage of the neurological diseases and treatments, including detailed material on the behavioral affiliations of the frontal, temporal and parietal cortices; limbic system; and basal ganglia;* Charts, illustrations, and imaging, which allow the reader access to all the diagnostic and medical historical documentation necessary to fully understand each case;* "Key Clinical Points" provided at the end of each chapter, which focus the reader's attention on the most important facts and strategies; and* Suggested readings, which afford readers the opportunity to deepen and enhance their knowledge and understanding. By grounding the field of neuropsychiatry in real-life clinical problems, the editors have created an engaging and practical volume that allows psychiatrists, neurologists, residents, and others to update their knowledge of current neuropsychiatric thinking, sharpen their diagnostic skills, and fully appreciate the nuance and substance of this rapidly growing field.

Case Files Psychiatry, Fifth Edition by Eugene C. Toy; Debra L. Klamen Publisher's Note: Products purchased from Third Party sellers are not guaranteed by the publisher for quality,  authenticity, or access to any online entitlements included with the product. Sixty high-yield psychiatry cases helps students sharpen their diagnostic and problem-solving skills The Case Files series is an award-winning learning system proven to improve shelf-exam scores and clerkship performance. Unlike other books on the market, this series helps students learn in the context of real patients instead of simply memorizing. Case Files Psychiatry teaches students how to improve their diagnostic and problem-solving skills as they work through sixty high-yield clinical cases. Each case includes a complete discussion, clinical pearls, references, and USMLE-style review questions with answers. The fifth edition has been updated to include a new Case Correlations feature which highlights differential diagnosis and related cases in the book, andNEW CASES highlighting DSM-V diagnostic entities.

Clinical Trials in Psychiatry by Brian S. Everitt; Simon Wessely Mental health problems account for a quarter of all physician consultations, and place an enormous financial burden on society. For this reason, the search for effective treatments in psychiatry continues apace. But as they are developed, it is essential that we have effective and rigorous methods of assessing the benefits and safety of new treatments. The randomised-controlled trial (RCT) is accepted as being the best method for doing this. In order to understand what does and does not work, mental health professionals' needs to understand how treatments have been assessed and evaluated. Clinical Trials in Psychiatry is the first book to explain RCTs for mental health professionals. It starts by discussing why we need trials and why they are the best way of deciding if a treatment works. It then describes the different types of trial, how to analyse the results, and how to conduct a trial. For anyone working in the mental health field, this book will be an essential source of reference, allowing them to make informed decisions about treatment.

DSM-5® Clinical Cases by John W. Barnhill (Editor) DSM-5 Clinical Cases presents patient cases that exemplify the mental disorders categorized in the newly released DSM-5, bringing DSM-5 alive for teachers and students of psychiatry, psychology, social work, nursing, and related mental health and healthcare fields. Cases are cross-referenced with DSM-5 and help the reader understand diagnostic concepts, including symptoms, severity, comorbidities, age of onset and development, dimensionality across disorders, and gender and cultural implications. Every feature in the book helps to bridge the distance between the formal classification and the real-life presentation of patients: * All cases are original and previously unpublished, making for fresh, compelling reading for both experienced clinicians and those new to diagnostic classification. Case authors were selected for their expertise in the disorder described in the case. For ease in identifying specific cases, case titles are clinically relevant, based on the primary complaint, and identify the DSM-5 diagnosis described.* Each case adheres to a consistent format developed by the editors to fully illuminate the disorder being profiled. Features may include history of present illness, family psychiatric history, medical history, mental status exam results, DSM-5 diagnostic features, lab and physical findings, and a summary.* A brief discussion follows each case, analyzing the clinical presentation, highlighting key points, and exploring issues of comorbidity that may complicate both the diagnosis and subsequent treatment. This approach is especially helpful since few cases in real-life are unambiguous.* Easy-to-use appendixes enable readers to locate cases by type of disorder, special interests, and DSM-5 diagnosis.* The book is designed to serve as a companion text in a variety of contexts--from abnormal psychology courses to medical school and residency training programs. In addition, those studying for specialty examinations will find reviewing the cases very useful. Fascinating, practical, and instructive, DSM-5 Clinical Cases succeeds in bringing the DSM-5 to the examining room.

50 Studies Every Psychiatrist Should Know by Ish P. Bhalla, et al. '50 Studies Every Psychiatrist Should Know' presents key studies that have shaped the clinical practice of psychiatry. Selected using a rigorous methodology, the studies cover a broad range of topics including anxiety disorders, bipolar disorder, major depressive disorder, schizophrenia, women's mental health, child and adolescent disorders, obsessive compulsive disorder, personality disorders, psychiatry in primary care, cognitive disorders, and epidemiological studies with an emphasis on clinical trials. For each study, a concise summary is presented with an emphasis on the results and limitations of the study and its implications for practice.

Landmark Papers in Psychiatry by Elizabeth Ryznar (Editor); Aderonke B. Pederson (Editor); Mark A. Reinecke (Editor); John G. Csernansky (Editor) Advances in the practice of psychiatry have occurred in "fits and starts" over the last several decades. These advances are evident to anyone long affiliated with the field and are best appreciated through direct experience of living through the times. These advances can also be gleaned from historical overviews in textbooks or the recollections of one's teachers and mentors. Returning to the original papers that have ushered in these changes is rarely done for various, mostly practical, reasons. Filtering through thousands of articles in psychiatry may prove daunting, access to the manuscripts may be limited (especially for papers not available electronically), and understanding their impact requires a broader context. Moreover, with so much active research currently occurring in various branches of psychiatry, current practitioners or trainees may find their attention focused on the present, and this is reinforced by electronic search algorithms, which return articles in reverse chronological order. Not surprisingly, citations for articles in virtually all fields decline precipitously for articles over five years old. As scholars and professionals, we are losing touch with our academic heritage. Yet navigating the future of psychiatry requires a firm understanding of its past. This resource serves as a guide for anyone seeking to understand the evolution of psychiatry as a scientific discipline. It does so by summarizing over 100 landmark papers in psychiatry and placing their scientific contributions within a historical context. An introductory section sets the stage for the major theoretical constructs within the field, with chapters devoted to ontology and nosology. Subsequent sections examine major facets of the theory and practice of psychiatry, such as pathogenesis of psychiatric illness, pharmacotherapy, psychotherapy, and somatic treatments. These sections are divided logically into chapters addressing important contributions to the understanding and treatment of specific disorders. A final section explores ethical considerations within each field. This framework echoes the complexity of psychiatry, which cannot be reduced to a single set of diagnoses or subspecialty categories. Highlighting the research trajectory of psychiatry, this resource will appeal to academics, trainees, and practitioners who desire a comprehensive, easy-to-read, up-to-date collection of psychiatry's pivotal moments. By understanding the challenges, inspirations, and insights from the past, readers will be better poised to address new and ongoing challenges within the field.

Assessment in Cognitive Therapy by Gary P. Brown (Editor); David A. Clark (Editor) This volume brings together leading experts to explore the state of the art of cognitive clinical assessment and identify cutting-edge approaches of interest to clinicians and researchers. The book highlights fundamental problems concerning the validity of assessments that are widely used in cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT). Key directions for further research and development are identified. Updated cognitive assessment methods are described in detail, with particular attention to transdiagnostic treatment, evidence-based practice, cognitive case formulation, and imagery-based techniques.

Clinical Psychology and Cognitive Behavioral Psychotherapy: Recovery in Mental Health by Stavroula Rakitzi This book presents the evidence-based treatments in the context of cognitive behavioral therapy and rehabilitation in various disorders in combination with the clinical experience of the author in private practice. Every chapter is structured in the same form. Part A Basics: introduction, definition, the importance, discussion, revision questions, und Part B Disorders: abstract, introduction, clinical features, evidence-based treatments, discussion, revision questions. The book is addressed to psychology students, medicine students, to researchers, to psychotherapists, to psychiatrists and to non-experts. The language of the book is simple enough, so that non-experts can be informed about issues in mental health. The aim of the book is to minimize the stigma towards mental health problems, to give an optimistic message regarding the modern evidence-based treatments in mental health and to clarify that reintegration into society is a realistic goal nowadays.

Cognitive Behavior Therapy: Basics and Beyond by Judith S. Beck; Aaron T. Beck (Foreword by) Hundreds of thousands of clinicians and graduate students have relied on this text--now significantly revised with more than 50% new material--to learn the fundamentals of cognitive behavior therapy (CBT). Leading expert Judith S. Beck demonstrates how to engage patients, develop a sound case conceptualization, plan individualized treatment, structure sessions, and implement core cognitive, behavioral, and experiential techniques. Throughout the book, extended cases of one client with severe depression and another with depression, anxiety, and borderline personality traits illustrate how a skilled therapist delivers CBT and troubleshoots common difficulties. Adding to the third edition's utility, the companion website features downloadable worksheets and videos of therapy sessions. New to This Edition Chapter on the therapeutic relationship. Chapter on integrating mindfulness into treatment. Presents recovery-oriented cognitive therapy (CT-R)--which emphasizes clients' aspirations, values, and positive adaptation--alongside traditional CBT. Pedagogical features: clinical tips, reflection questions, practice exercises, and videos at the companion website. New case examples featuring clients with more complex problems. Demonstrates how to integrate strategies from other modalities, such as acceptance and commitment therapy, dialectical behavior therapy, and mindfulness-based cognitive therapy. See also Recovery-Oriented Cognitive Therapy for Serious Mental Health Conditions, by Aaron T. Beck, Paul Grant, Ellen Inverso, Aaron P. Brinen, and Dimitri Perivoliotis, the authoritative presentation of the cutting-edge CT-R approach.

Cognitive Biases in Health and Psychiatric Disorders: Neurophysiological Foundations by Tatjana Aue (Editor); Hadas Okon-Singer (Editor) Cognitive Biases in Health and Psychiatric Disorders: Neurophysiological Foundations focuses on the neurophysiological basis of biases in attention, interpretation, expectancy and memory. Each chapter includes a review of each specific bias, including both positive and negative information in both healthy individuals and psychiatric populations. This book provides readers with major theories, methods used in investigating biases, brain regions associated with the related bias, and autonomic responses to specific biases. Its end goal is to provide a comprehensive overview of the neural, autonomic and cognitive mechanisms related to processing biases.

Cognitive Therapy for Chronic Pain: A Step-by-Step Guide by Beverly E. Thorn This go-to manual--now revised and significantly expanded with more than 50% new material--has enabled thousands of clinicians to effectively treat clients with chronic pain. In the face of today's growing opioid crisis, pain self-management techniques are needed now more than ever. The volume shows how to implement 10 treatment modules that draw on proven cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) strategies. In a convenient large-size format, it includes 58 reproducible client handouts and assessment tools that purchasers can photocopy from the book or download and print from the companion website. The website also offers access to downloadable audio recordings of relaxation exercises narrated by the author, plus supplemental resources for treating clients with lower levels of literacy. New to This Edition *Incorporates over a decade of important advances in pain research and clinical practice. *Treatment modules that allow clients to enter a group at any point after an introductory session. *Expanded with motivational enhancement, relaxation, and mindfulness techniques. *Many new handouts, assessment tools, and therapist scripts, as well as audio downloads. *Orients and engages clients using state-of-the-art research on how the brain processes pain.

Cognitive Therapy Techniques: A Practitioner's Guide by Robert L. Leahy This indispensable book has given many tens of thousands of practitioners a wealth of evidence-based tools for maximizing the power of cognitive therapy and tailoring it to individual clients. Leading authority Robert L. Leahy describes ways to help clients identify and modify problematic thoughts, core beliefs, and patterns of worry, self-criticism, and approval-seeking; evaluate personal schemas; cope with painful emotions; and take action to achieve their goals. Each technique includes vivid case examples and sample dialogues. Featuring 123 reproducible forms, the book has a large-size format for easy photocopying; purchasers also get access to a Web page where they can download and print the reproducible materials.   New to This Edition *Numerous additional techniques and reproducible tools, including 48 new or revised forms. *Chapters on decision-making problems, intrusive thoughts, and anger management issues. *Incorporates the latest theory and research as well as cutting-edge techniques drawn from acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT), behavioral activation, dialectical behavior therapy (DBT), emotional schema therapy, and the metacognitive model. *Significantly revised chapters on emotion regulation and worries. *Filled-out examples for many of the forms. 

Communication in Cognitive Behavioral Therapy by Michela Rimondini (Editor) Research has shown that the therapeutic alliance is a key factor in the success of treatment, and a critical component of establishing this alliance is the communication between therapist and client. The efficacy of treatment depends on the therapist's ability to collect reliable client information and create the foundation for a good relationship that involves the client in the healing process. Communication in Cognitive Behavioral Therapy provides an overview of the research and theory underlying the importance of therapeutic communication with a specific focus on cognitive behavioral psychotherapy. It brings together an international group of experts from the relevant disciplines of communication, psychotherapy, research and teaching to create an integrated perspective of this crucial area.The book offers a review of the main evidence-based theories, and is highlighted with specific examples and flow charts.Insight for trainers is given by providing learner-centered teaching methods that enhance the acquisition of these communication skills. For researchers, it offers both qualitative and quantitative analyses of the subject as well as a comprehensive review of the main analysis methods adopted in the field.

The Effectiveness of Rehabilitation for Cognitive Deficits by Peter W. Halligan (Editor); Derick T. Wade (Editor) Many patients with brain damage are left with a range of neuropsychological deficits that impair normal cognitive process. It is generally recognised that these less obvious cognitive deficits (including memory, language, perception, attention and executive disorders) militate against full recovery often to a greater extent than more traditional medical deficits (e.g. paralysis, sensory loss, etc). Recognition of this has helped fuel the exponential growth in cognitive neuropsychology and neuroscience over the past 30 years. In turn, this theoretical approach has been used to guide and inform the development of cognitive therapies designed to remediate cognitive impairments and their functional consequences. Cognitive rehabilitation has over the last decade grown to become an established and influential therapeutic approach. There is now a considerable body of knowledge describing the principles and theoretical basis for analysing and directing treatments to selective cognitive deficits. Despite this, the clinical effectiveness and extent to which cognitive theory can inform therapeutic treatment has been questioned. It is timely, therefore, to evaluate and discuss the type and quality of evidence used in support of cognitive rehabilitation. In this book, some of the most influential clinicians and cognitive neuroscientists in the world critically review and discuss the effectiveness of rehabilitation methods currently used to treat patients with cognitive impairments following acquired brain damage. It provides a much needed critique and consensus about what should constitute best practice. The book will be valuable for all those who have to deal with the neuropsychological and neurological effects of brain damage, including, neuropsychologists, neuropsychiatrists, neurologists, experimental pscyhologists, and neuroscientists.

The Massachusetts General Hospital Handbook of Cognitive Behavioral Therapy by Timothy Petersen (Editor); Sabine Wilhelm (Editor); Susan E. Sprich (Editor) This book provides a fully updated in-depth overview of Cognitive Behavioral Therapy (CBT), which is the most widely-disseminated evidence-based psychotherapy utilized today. The Massachusetts General Hospital Handbook of Cognitive Behavioral Therapy, 2nd edition displays the constantly evolving nature of CBT due to the continuous research trials conducted by clinicians. This second edition presents updated information and literature to reflect the current clinical guidelines based on research studies that have been published in the past few years. Chapters cover applying CBT to common disorders such as depression, obsessive-compulsive disorder, and anxiety disorders, as well as more specialized applications such as schizophrenia. Chapters also provide information on how to tailor CBT for specific populations and in specific settings. The book also features new chapters on the use of technology in treating psychiatric disorders and novel models of care and treatments for psychiatric disorders. The fully updated and expanded second edition of The Massachusetts General Hospital Handbook of Cognitive Behavioral Therapy will continue to be a go-to resource for all psychiatrists, psychologists, social workers, licensed mental health counselors, primary care doctors, graduate students, and psychiatry residents and fellows implementing cognitive behavioral therapy in their clinical practice.

Neurocognitive Behavioral Disorders: An Interdisciplinary Approach to Patient-Centered Care by Maureen Nash (Editor); Sarah Foidel (Editor) Dementia, now known as major neurocognitive disorder, is not one monolithic disease. Nor is behavior disturbance driven by one particular neurocognitive dysfunction. In fact if we are able to understand it, behavior is an excellent form of nonverbal communication. There are many different causes of dementia. A major challenge with both researching and implementing interventions is viewing dementia and related behaviors as single entities. This approach leaves room for critical errors in the treatment of dementia patients, beginning with misdiagnosis.  This book approaches dementia by reviewing cognitive and functional assessments to provide a more accurate diagnosis, which then allows physicians to design specific interventions that are tailored to the person and their challenges. Because person centered care is vital to quality of life and longevity to an aging patient, this understanding of individual needs is vital. Written by experts in the field,this book incorporates the latest evidence-based behavioral interventions matched to specific deficits. Behavioral management focuses not on controlling behavior, but using it to teach staff and caregivers how to interpret common actions and maximize function for people with major neurocognitive disorders. Quality of life and individualized care planning will be the theme and the book will provide practical case examples. The book begins by introducing dementia and other neurocognitive illnesses, contextualizing them both historically and contemporarily.  Next, the text focuses on the comprehensive assessment of a person with neurocognitive challenges in order to identify strengths and understand what the person is trying to communicate with their behavior.  This process allows individualized care planning and behavioral (non-pharmacologic) management to meet the cognitive challenges and maximize individual strengths and thereby improve outcomes, makingthis a cutting edge resource.

Perception, action, and consciousness : sensorimotor dynamics and two visual systems by Nivedita Gangopadhyay (Editor); Michael Madary (Editor); Finn Spicer (Editor) What is the relationship between perception and action, between an organism and its environment, in explaining consciousness? These are issues at the heart of philosophy of mind and the cognitive sciences. This book explores the relationship between perception and action from a variety of interdisciplinary perspectives, ranging from theoretical discussion of concepts to findings from recent scientific studies. It incorporates contributions from leading philosophers, psychologists, neuroscientists, and an artificial intelligence theorist. The contributions take a range of positions with respect to the view that perception is an achievement by an agent acting in a complex environment in which sensorimotor dynamics constitute an essential ingredient to perceptual experience. A key focus of the book is on the debate about action-oriented theories of visual perception versus the dual-visual systems hypothesis The former champions the role of sensorimotor dynamics in perceptual awareness while the latter favours a functional dichotomy between perception and action. At least on the surface, these two approaches are in conflict. Where one emphasizes the interdependence of action and perception, the other suggests that action and perception are functionally distinct. The dialogue between these two approaches brings out wider theoretical issues underlying the research paradigm of cognitive sciences and philosophy of mind. Exploring one of the major debates in the philosophy and psychology, this book is fascinating reading for all those in the cognitive sciences and philosophy of mind.

Remembering our childhood : how memory betrays us by Karl Sabbagh In this fascinating and sometimes disturbing book, the well-known writer Karl Sabbagh looks at psychologists' present understanding of the nature of memory, especially recollections of childhood, and how, in cases of so-called 'recovered memories', the unreliability and flexibility of memory has led to tragic consequences, destroying the lives of whole families. All of us have memories of childhood - that special trip to the fair, or impressions, such as dappled sunlight through rustling leaves seen from the pram. Some people firmly believe that they can recall scenes from the time they were babies. But what does science tell us about the nature of memory, and memories of childhood? In the first part of this book, Sabbagh begins gently with examples he has collected from many interviews of earliest memories, and goes on to look at psychologists' and neuroscientists' understanding of memory. It becomes clear that, whatever individuals might claim, memories of the first two years or so of our lives are simply not accessible to us, while later memories are fragile, yielding to suggestion and our inclination towards a neat story. All too often, our 'memory' of an event arises from what we have been told by a relative. The book then turns to darker territory. A casual remark by a child at a nursery leads to detailed and suggestive questioning of a number of children, resulting in the arrest of a teacher accused of child abuse. She was subsequently released. Some patients with eating and mood disorders undergoing therapy have come to believe, or have been led to believe by the therapist, that their problems stem from being sexually abused as a child - memories allegedly repressed and only 'recovered' under the guidance of the therapist. Such claims have again resulted in wrongful arrest, subsequently overturned, though the damage done to the families is irreparable. Sabbagh has interviewed the distinguished psychologist Elizabeth Loftus and others involved in blowing the whistle on the 'recovered memory' movement. Throughout, the book is full of quotations from interviews and extracts from transcribed interviews presented at court, making this a powerful and vivid account. While other books have been written on the dangers of the concept of recovered memory, Sabbagh here puts the story in the wider perspective of our growing scientific understanding of memory, and argues strongly for the critical role of scientific evidence in cases involving the memory of witnesses.

Social Cognition in Psychosis by Kathryn Eve Lewandowski (Editor); Ahmed Moustafa (Editor) Social Cognition in Psychosis combines current research on phenotypes, neurobiology, and existing evidence on the assessment and treatment of various forms of psychoses. The book presents various treatment options, including assessment approaches, tools and training methods that aid in the rehabilitation of patients with psychotic disorders. Social cognition is a set of psychological processes related to understanding, recognizing, processing and appropriately using social stimuli in one's environment. Individuals with psychotic disorders consistently exhibit impairments in social cognition. As a result, social cognition has been an important target for intervention, with recent efforts trying to enhance early recovery among individuals with psychotic disorders.

Veteran and Military Mental Health: A Clinical Manual by Christopher H. Warner (Editor); Carl A. Castro (Editor) This book addresses mental health treatment for veterans and active military personnel. In addition to examining foundational practices in the sub-field, it contains specifically tailored content concerning the recent collapse of the United States (US) installed Afghanistan government. The book is conscious of the myriad of complex emotions that veterans who fought for the past twenty years may be experiencing.  Organized into four parts, the book begins with the foundations of veteran and military mental health culture as patients transition from active duty to veteran status, understand the present stigma and barriers to care and reflect on their deployment experience. Part two delves into the specifics of the healthcare system in which military personnel find themselves at various points in their career, including deployment and returning home. Following this, chapters examine the critically unique conditions found in patients, such as sleep disorders, traumatic brain injury,homelessness, substance abuse, and sexual trauma. The book closes with discussions on veterans and their families that focus on the effects of deployment on a military person's loved ones and their mental state upon returning home.   Timely, socially conscious, and comprehensive, the Clinical Manual on Veteran and Military Mental Health is an invaluable resource for mental health professionals receiving new military personnel patients and who have seen a significant shift in their patients due to recent events. 

When Johnny and Jane Come Marching Home: How All of Us Can Help Veterans by Paula J. Caplan A psychologist's impassioned call to stop labeling our traumatized war veterans as mentally ill and a guide to how every citizen can help returning vets. Traumatized veterans returning from our wars in Iraq and Afghanistan are often diagnosed as suffering from a psychological disorder and prescribed a regimen of psychotherapy and psychiatric drugs. But why, asks psychologist Paula J. Caplan in this impassioned book, is it a mental illness to be devastated by war? What is a mentally healthy response to death, destruction, and moral horror? In When Johnny and Jane Come Marching Home, Caplan argues that the standard treatment of therapy and drugs is often actually harmful. It adds to veterans' burdens by making them believe wrongly that they should have "gotten over it"; it isolates them behind the closed doors of the therapist's office; and it makes them rely on often harmful drugs. The numbers of traumatized veterans from past and present wars who continue to suffer demonstrate the ineffectiveness of this approach. Sending anguished veterans off to talk to therapists, writes Caplan, conveys the message that the rest of us don't want to listen--or that we don't feel qualified to listen. As a result, the truth about war is kept under wraps. Most of us remain ignorant about what war is really like--and continue to allow our governments to go to war without much protest. Caplan proposes an alternative: that we welcome veterans back into our communities and listen to their stories, one-on-one. (She provides guidelines for conducting these conversations.) This would begin a long overdue national discussion about the realities of war, and it would start the healing process for our returning veterans.

Handbook of Community Psychiatry by Jacqueline Maus Feldman (Editor); Jules M. Ranz (Editor); Wesley E. Sowers (Editor); Hunter L. McQuistion (Editor) During the past decade or more, there has been a rapid evolution of mental health services and treatment technologies, shifting psychiatric epidemiology, changes in public behavioral health policy and increased understanding in medicine regarding approaches to clinical work that focus on patient-centeredness. These contemporary issues need to be articulated in a comprehensive format. The American Association of Community Psychiatrists (AACP), a professional organization internationally recognized as holding the greatest concentration of expertise in the field, has launched a methodical process to create a competency certification in community psychiatry. As a reference for a certification examination, that effort will benefit enormously from a comprehensive handbook on the subject.

The Oxford Handbook of Depression and Comorbidity by C. Steven Richards (Editor); Michael W. O'Hara (Editor) Depression is frequently associated with other psychiatric disorders and is often related to chronic health problems. Depressive symptoms are also common in chronically distressed close relationships and severe interpersonal difficulties in families and at work. The topic of depressive comorbidity is clearly very important, and while recent research in this area has been methodologically sophisticated, well presented, and inherently interesting, there has not been a comprehensive, academic resource that covers recent developments in this area.The Oxford Handbook of Depression and Comorbidity brings together scholarly contributions from world-class researchers to present a careful and empirically based review of depressive comorbidity. Cutting-edge chapters address theory, research, and practice, while capturing the diversity, evidence-base, and importance of depressive comorbidity. Specific topics include the comorbidity between depression and PTSD, alcohol use, and eating, anxiety, panic, bipolar, personality, and sleep disorders, as well as schizophrenia, suicide, cardiovascular disease, cancer, pain, obesity, intimate relationships, and many more. The Oxford Handbook of Depression and Comorbidity is a unique and much-needed resource that will be helpful to a broad range of researchers and practitioners including clinical and counseling psychologists, psychiatrists, marital and family therapists, social workers, and counselors working in mental-health and general health-care settings, as well as students in these areas.

Convergence Mental Health: A Transdisciplinary Approach to Innovation by Harris A. Eyre (Editor); Michael Berk (Editor); Helen Lavretsky (Editor); Charles Reynolds (Editor) Modern mental health issues are characterized by their complex, multi-systemic nature and broad societal impact, making them poorly suited to siloed approaches of thinking and innovation. Convergence science integrates knowledge, tools, and thought strategies from various fields and is the focal point where novel insights arise. Convergence Mental Health presents a blueprint for leveraging convergence science within the context of mental health in order to improve patient outcomes and health care systems.

Forensic Mental Health Assessments in Death Penalty Cases by David DeMatteo; Daniel C. Murrie; Natalie M. Anumba; Michael E. Keesler Forensic mental health assessments in death penalty cases are on the rise due in part to the continuing growth of forensic psychology and psychiatry as professions, combined with several recent U.S. Supreme Court decisions. Forensic mental health professionals are now conducting assessments at every stage of death penalty proceedings, ranging from pre-trial evaluations to determine eligibility for the death penalty to evaluations conducted post-sentencing and closer to the date of execution. Yet there are surprisingly few comprehensive resources available for students interested in death penalty assessments, clinicians who conduct those assessments, and attorneys who work with forensic mental health professionals. Forensic Mental Health Assessments in Death Penalty Cases fills this gap in the literature, providing an essential road map to the field for students and practitioners. Well-written and comprehensive, this book integrates the most up-to-date research with best practice recommendations, yielding a solid foundation of information related to capital punishment, death penalty litigation, and the role of forensic mental health professionals in death penalty cases. Vivid descriptions of influential court cases, a discussion of ethical considerations, guidance on conducting various types of forensic mental health assessments, and sample forensic reports illustrating best practices make up this important work. Current case law is covered in detail, alongside an important discussion of what remains unknown and directions for future research. This book is essential reading for students and professionals in the fields of mental health, criminal justice, and law, as well as for forensic practitioners who may not be familiar with the special requirements of death penalty cases. It is also an important resource for attorneys who work with forensic mental health professionals.

Forensic mental health : concepts, systems, and practice by Annie Bartlett (Editor); Gillian McGauley (Editor) In the UK, we lock up more individuals per year than in any other part of Europe. Many of these are suffering from some form of treatable mental disorder, yet too often, prison is viewed as the only option. Part of the problem is the range of individuals and specialities involved in making these crucial judgements. Government departments, health and social care and voluntary sector organisations, and frontline criminal justice and penal institutions are all engaged in the definition, management, and processing of the mentally disordered offender (MDO), leaving the invidual in 'spiders web' of a system - often to their disadvantage.This book presents a penetrating and thought provoking analysis of the forensic mental health system - how it operates, the people involved, the problems inherent in such a system, and the huge ethical dilemma of depriving an individual of their freedom. It brings together a range of specialists, each with considerable experience, who describe the processes involved in dealing with an MDO - from their own unique perspective.The book starts with a section on violence and risk - covering a range of ideas from the disciplines of criminology, sociology, psychiatry and psychology that contribute to an understanding of these concepts. The second section, on Forensic Psychotherapeutic Approaches to MDOs details the contributions of both cognitive and psychodynamic psychotherapies to understanding and managing the psychopathology, risk and interpersonal interactions of MDOs. Legislation, both statutory and case law, has changed substantially in relation to MDOs over the last decade and the third section on Law discusses these changes as well as the fierce debate that has surrounded them.The fourth section, on Ethics, develops some of these ideas on capacity, autonomy, vulnerability and responsibility. It describes common ethical dilemmas for professionals in forensic settings as it lays out the different duties involved in the different professional roles intrinsic to multi-agency working. The fifth section on Social Policy discusses the development of the concept of the MDO and how penal, health and social care institutions are designed to meet their needs. It illustrates how much has changed, especially in the last fifteen years and how much of that change has been driven by the risk agenda. The book concludes with an International Section - exploring how other countries think about anti-social and violent behaviour and how their circumstances and dilemmas have led to approaches to MDOs both similar to and different from those of England and Wales.The book will be essential for both students and professionals in the complex and ethically challenging discipline of forensic mental health.

Forensic neuropsychology in practice : a guide to assessment and legal processes by Susan Young (Editor); Michael Kopelman (Editor); Gisli Gudjonsson (Editor) Clinical psychologists and psychiatrists are increasingly being asked to prepare reports for legal purposes. These might involve issues regarding the clients own mental state at the time they committed the crime, or it might involve the neuropsychological effects of an injury to a third party. In addition they might be looking at issues regarding impulsivity, and the role of underlying disorders such as ADHD, and antisocial or borderline personality disorders. These topics are typically the preserve of the field of forensic neuropsychology, yet for many, this discipline is seen as a highly specialised one beyond the scope and skill of the clinical psychologist. This book fills a major gap in the literature, in providing a practical reference text for clinical and forensic psychologists and psychiatrists who are working in these important areas of forensic consultancy, and who need a working knowledge of neuropsychological assessment and legal processes. Topics include: aggression and violence, learning disability and developmental disorders - such as autism and ADHD, eplilepsy, amnesia, alcohol and substance misuse, and traumatic head injury. In addition, the book looks at expert testimony, malingering, and other ethical and professional issues. It will help practitioners deal with the clinical and neuropsychological problems in the field, and negotiate the legal labyrinths involved in issues such as competency, fitness to plead and stand trial, mental capacity and mitigation. With chapters written by leading practitioners and clinicians that provide a synthesis of key knowledge and best practice in their areas, this thought provoking and pragmatic guide will be essential for clinical and forensic neuropsychologists, psychiatrists, and lawyers.

Handbook of Juvenile Forensic Psychology and Psychiatry by Elena L. Grigorenko (Editor) Juvenile justice centers have a long tradition as an unfortunate stop for young offenders who need mental health care. Reports estimate that as many as 70% of the youth in detention centers meet criteria for mental health disorders. As juvenile justice systems once again turn their focus from confinement to rehabilitation, mental health providers have major opportunities to inform and improve both practice and policy. The Handbook of Juvenile Forensic Psychology and Psychiatry explores these opportunities by emphasizing a developmental perspective, multifaceted assessment, and evidence-based practice in working with juvenile offenders. This comprehensive volume provides insights at virtually every intersection of mental health practice and juvenile justice, covering areas as wide-ranging as special populations, sentencing issues, educational and pharmacological interventions, family involvement, ethical issues, staff training concerns, and emerging challenges. Together, its chapters contain guidelines not only for changing the culture of detention but also preventing detention facilities from being the venue of choice in placing troubled youth. Key issues addressed in the Handbook include: Developmental risks for delinquency. Race and sex disparities in juvenile justice processing. Establishing standards of practice in juvenile forensic mental health assessment. Serving dually diagnosed youth in the juvenile justice system. PTSD among court-involved youth. Female juvenile offenders. Juvenile sex offenders. The Handbook of Juvenile Forensic Psychology and Psychiatry is an essential reference for researchers, professors, allied clinicians and professionals, and policy makers across multiple fields, including child and school psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, developmental psychology, criminology, juvenile justice, forensic psychology, neuropsychology, social work, and education.

Oxford Textbook of Correctional Psychiatry by Robert Trestman (Editor); Kenneth Appelbaum (Editor); Jeffrey Metzner (Editor) Correctional psychiatry has received increasing recognition as an area of practice with unique skills and knowledge. The Oxford Textbook of Correctional Psychiatry brings together American and international experts to provide a comprehensive overview of the field. Students and psychiatric residents will find basic information that prepares them for clinical rotations, and psychiatrists working in jails and prisons will find a detailed review of the complex issues that arise in these settings.The Oxford Textbook of Correctional Psychiatry contains 71 chapters divided into 14 sections. The first three sections address history, structure, and processes including chapters on case law, human rights, ethics, organization and funding of systems, and stages of patient management that cover initial assessments through re-entry. The next three sections review in turn a broad array of management issues, emergencies, and psychopharmacology topics. Among other topics, these sections include chapters on sleep, detoxification, reassessment of community diagnoses and treatments, diversion programs, levels of care, malingering, substance use within facilities, and formulary management. Section seven has chapters on common psychiatric disorders, relevant medical disorders, and pain management. Sections eight through ten focus on psychotherapeutic options, suicide risk management, and addictions treatment. Chapters on aggression, self-injury, and other behavioral challenges appear in Section eleven. Section twelve reviews unique assessment and treatment needs of many distinct population groups. Special topics such as forensics, psychological testing, sexual assaults, quality improvement, training, and research, appear in Section thirteen, followed by a section devoted to current resources in correctional healthcare. The range of topics covered and the number of prominent contributors set this book apart from other available resources. Readers at all stages of their careers will gain the depth of understanding and practical information they need to approach all of the common clinical, organizational, and ethical challenges they face.

People With Mental Illness in the Criminal Justice System: Answering a Cry for Help by Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry; Committee on Committee on Psychiatry and the Community Written by a committee of the Group for the Advancement of Psychiatry, People With Mental Illness in the Criminal Justice System: Answering a Cry for Help represents the collective wisdom of leaders in community psychiatry and is the third in a series of successful publications that have used Dear Abby letters as source material. The letters, submitted by readers with experience with mental illness and the criminal justice system, constitute a rich, real-world repository for the case stories presented in this fascinating volume. Using the experiences shared in the letters, the authors employ the Sequential Intercept Model to present a series of chapters offering detailed recommendations for psychiatrists, group practices, and criminal justice entities on partnering with individuals who are at risk and their families, with the goal of improving outcomes. The book's many features and functions make it relevant to a diverse audience: * The Dear Abby letters on which the book's stories are based are heartfelt and human, providing a depth of emotion and understanding that cannot be found elsewhere, and the down-to-earth writing style and real-world material are designed to be useful and compelling to both practitioner and layperson.* The case-based recommendations for effective interventions are very specific and practical to promote and enhance clinical skill development. * A robust set of appendices presents information for professionals on a variety of critically important topics, including principles for criminal justice and community psychiatry; sequential intercept mapping; stages of engagement with the criminal justice system; HIPAA regulations; screening and mental status/criminal justice history; essential systems of care; and the risk-need-responsivity model.* An extensive section of criminal justice/mental health online resources addresses areas such as law enforcement, courts, corrections, evidence-based practices, veterans, organizations, and miscellaneous topics, providing avenues of information and assistance for individuals, families, and clinicians. This simple, evidence-based guide challenges psychiatrists to initiate changes in their clinical work; in the operation of their agencies, programs, and teams; and in their partnerships with local criminal justice and behavioral health providers to positively impact people with behavioral health conditions in the criminal justice system. Implementing the approaches described so eloquently in People With Mental Illness in the Criminal Justice System: Answering a Cry for Help can potentially reduce the overrepresentation of people with mental illnesses in justice settings, provide alternatives to incarceration, and divert individuals who do not pose a public safety risk from jail.

Principles and Practice of Child and Adolescent Forensic Mental Health by M. d. Elissa P. Benedek; Elissa P. Benedek (Editor); Peter Ash (Editor); Charles L. Scott (Editor) When care of younger patients raises thorny legal questions, you need answers you can trust: that's why this book belongs on every clinician's reference shelf. Principles and Practice of Child and Adolescent Forensic Mental Health is a timely and authoritative source that covers issues ranging from child custody to litigation concerns as it walks clinicians through the often-confusing field of depositions and courtroom testimony. The book expands on the 2002 volume Principles and Practice of Child and Adolescent Forensic Psychiatry winner of the 2003 Manfred S. Guttmacher Award, to meet pressing twenty-first-century concerns, from telepsychiatry to the Internet, while continuing to cover basic issues, such as forensic evaluation, psychological screening, and the interviewing of children for suspected sexual abuse, that are important to both new and experienced practitioners. Many of its chapters have been entirely rewritten by new authors to provide fresh insight into such topics as child custody; juvenile law; abuse, neglect, and permanent wardship cases; transcultural, transracial, and gay/lesbian parenting and adoption; and the reliability and suggestibility of children's statements. It also includes significant material not found in the previous volume: * Two chapters on special education offer an introduction to screening instruments and help practitioners determine a child's potential need for special education programs and services.* A chapter on cultural competence helps readers improve the accuracy and responsiveness of forensic evaluations and minimize the chance of an unjust outcome resulting from misguided expert opinion.* The section on youth violence features three new chapters--Taxonomy and Neurobiology of Aggression, Prevention of School Violence, and Juvenile Stalkers--plus a newly written chapter on assessment of violence risk, offering guidance on how to confront problems such as bullying and initiate effective family interventions.* A chapter on psychiatric malpractice and professional liability addresses these legal concerns with an eye toward cases involving minors.* A chapter on psychological autopsy covers evaluation of the circumstances surrounding pediatric suicides, describing various types of equivocal deaths and discussing legal issues such as admissibility of the autopsy in court.* A newly written chapter on the Internet expands the previous book's focus on child pornography to help practitioners deal with issues ranging from online threats to emotional and legal consequences of interactions in cyberspace. This is a valuable reference not only for practitioners in psychiatry and the mental health field but also for attorneys and judges. It opens up a field that may be too often avoided and helps professionals make their way through legal thickets with confidence.

Young Homicide Offenders and Victims: Risk Factors, Prediction, and Prevention from Childhood by Rolf Loeber; David P. Farrington The first decade of the new century proved to be a deadly one for many children and young people in the United States. Despite increased policing on the streets, higher rates of incarceration, harsher sentencing, stricter control of illegal drugs, and attempts to reduce access to firearms, FBI reports show that more than 7,300 young people between the ages of 15 and 29 were murdered in 2008 alone. It's clear that traditional crime reduction strategies have not stemmed the rising tide of homicides perpetrated by and upon one of society's most vulnerable populations. Innovative, practicable  solutions are needed to staunch this lethal trend. Based on the findings of a unique longitudinal study, Young Homicide Offenders and Victims: Risk Factors, Prediction, and Prevention from Childhood now provides experts with unprecedented analysis of prospectively collected data on 1,517 boys and young men who grew up in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. Following these males from childhood into early adulthood, examining their lives and the conditions under which they grew up in a representative mid-sized American city, the study forms the basis of this unique volume designed to stimulate debate on key questions of prevention and intervention as well as dispel popular myths about the childhood and adolescent features of homicide offenders and homicide victims. Key areas of coverage include: Early childhood risk factors of young homicide offenders and victims.  Insights into homicide offenders' lives as told in their own words. The effectiveness of screening for at-risk youth. Risk factor-based prevention and intervention strategies. The impact of interventions on homicide rates. Policy implications at the local, state, and national levels. Young Homicide Offenders and Victims: Risk Factors, Prediction, and Prevention from Childhood is essential reading for researchers,practitioners, and policy makers across the fields of juvenile justice and criminology, developmental psychology, sociology, psychiatry, public health, and policy making. ------- "This book changes the game in violence research ... The analysis is masterful, the prose is readable, and the achievement is nothing short of stunning." Richard Rosenfeld, Ph.D. / Curators Professor of Criminology and Criminal Justice, University of Missouri-St. Louis "This book will stand the test of time as a landmark homicide study." James C. Howell, Ph.D. / Senior Research Associate, National Gang Center "This is a fascinating, pioneering book ... The authors' sophisticated analyses demonstrate convincingly the considerable value of prospective longitudinal data for enhancing our understanding of the etiology and control of lethal violence." Steven F. Messner, Ph.D. / Distinguished Teacher Professor, Department of Sociology, University at Albany, SUNY / President, American Society of Criminology

The Concept of Race and Psychotherapy by Jefferson M. Fish Is our society color-blind? Trans-racial? Post-racial? And what--if anything--should this mean to professionals in clinical practice with diverse clients? The ambitious volume The Concept of Race and Psychotherapy probes these questions, compelling readers to look differently at their clients (and themselves), and offering a practical framework for more effective therapy. By tracing the racial "folk taxonomies" of eight cultures in the Americas and the Caribbean, the author elegantly defines race as a fluid construct, dependent on local social, political, and historical context for meaning but meaningless in the face of science. This innovative perspective informs the rest of the book, which addresses commonly held assumptions about problem behavior and the desire to change, and presents a social-science-based therapy model, applicable to a wide range of current approaches, that emphasizes both cultural patterns and client uniqueness. Among the highlights of the coverage: Common elements in therapy and healing across cultures. The psychological appeal of racial concepts despite scientific evidence to the contrary. Lessons psychology can learn from anthropology. Three types of therapeutic relationships, with strategies for working effectively in each. The phenomenon of discontinuous change in brief therapy. Solution-focused therapy from a cross-cultural perspective. Thought-provoking reading forpsychologists, psychiatrists, clinical social workers, and other mental health professionals as well as graduate students in these fields, The Concept of Race and Psychotherapy affirms the individuality--and the interconnectedness--of every client.

Culture and the Therapeutic Process: A Guide for Mental Health Professionals by Mark M. Leach (Editor); Jamie D. Aten (Editor) While there are numerous resources for practitioners on the subject, the ambiguity remains of what actually constitutes effective multicultural counseling and psychotherapy and how it should be incorporated into their sessions.nbsp; This book addresses the question of how to apply current theories and research with a unique "start-to-finish" approach, examining the role culture plays in each stage of the therapeutic process, from before the clinical intake to termination.nbsp; Each chapter is devoted to one of these stages and provides practical strategies, techniques, examples, and case studies.nbsp; The reader will find new ways to consider the influence of culture and expand their own knowledge and skills as a practitioner.

Culture, Heritage, and Diversity in Older Adult Mental Health Care by Maria Llorente (Editor); A. P. A. Council APA Council on Geriatric Psychiatry Health care organizations are beginning to recognize the importance of cultural competence as it relates to efficiency, quality, and equity in the delivery of care within a competitive health care market, and Culture, Heritage, and Diversity in Older Adult Mental Health Care is designed to train mental health clinicians to deliver culturally sensitive care to an increasingly diverse patient population. Projections indicate that 35% of patients older than age 65 will be from a racial or ethnic minority group by 2050, compared with 11% in 1970. Today's mental health practitioners require knowledge, sensitivity, and an understanding of institutionalized practices and systems that undermine their patients' health and well-being. The term culture is multifaceted and may refer to one's belief system, values, religion, race, socioeconomic status, ethnicity, language, sexual orientation, geographic location, educational level, age, occupational risks and exposures, and gender. The authors of the book examine mental health care through these lenses, teaching the reader about implicit biases and potential miscommunication and offering strategies for overcoming these difficulties. The editor, who has worked in leadership positions overseeing veterans' mental health services, has assembled an impressive and diverse roster of contributors, each with specific expertise in his or her assigned subject. * The ways in which cultural competency interacts with the six Accreditation Council for Graduate Medical Education core competencies are explored in detail. For example, in terms of patient care, cultural competency plays an important role in gathering subjective data about a patient that may ultimately impact outcomes. Teaching methods to increase cultural sensitivity and build skills in this area are highlighted, as are training modalities and clinician evaluation.* The effects of migration and acculturation on mental health are examined, providing clinicians with several theoretical frameworks for understanding the migratory experience in older adults and exploring psychosocial factors associated with psychological risk in aging immigrants.* Linguistic competence, defined broadly as effective communication with individuals speaking a nondominant language, is an essential component of culturally competent health care and is of particular importance in mental health care. Accordingly, the authors analyze linguistic competency in both administrative and clinical encounters and present strategies for achieving mastery in this critically important area.* The text provides an abundance of tables and pedagogical features designed to enhance comprehension, including learning objectives, key points, and study questions. Cultural competence in health care systems is defined as the ability to understand and integrate the features listed above into the provision of health care services. Culture, Heritage, and Diversity in Older Adult Mental Health Care prepares clinicians to provide sensitive, high-quality, culturally competent care to geriatric patients from diverse backgrounds and will prove indispensable as patient demographics continue to change.

Diversity in Action: Case Studies in Cultural Psychiatry by Steve Koh (Editor); Gabriela G. Mejia (Editor); Hilary M. Gould (Editor) This book presents an extensive collection of high-yield case vignettes with recommendations for a comprehensive approach to cultural psychiatry. Culture is defined from an anthropological perspective, with an emphasis on aspects of culture beyond race, ethnicity, and other traditional demographic categories. The goal of this book is to offer clinical applications of cultural psychiatry via examination of special populations, systems, and settings. With ever-changing geopolitical environments, institutional structures, and sociodynamics, attention and consideration of context is paramount. Theoretical models and specific frameworks for evaluating cultural influence on the manifestation, development, and treatment response of mental health illnesses are presented. The chapters are organized to showcase different ways in which culture plays into everyday clinical practice. Emphasis is placed on the full sum of the care delivery transaction within a larger context, including public and community systems of care. Real-world case examples are discussed in each chapter to help contextualize the dynamic nature that culture plays in practice across inpatient and outpatient settings. Each case presents with relevant academic and historical background and practical operational advice for psychiatrists providing care within these respective communities. The authors address diverse clinical cases related to refugee and asylum seekers, military service members, survivors of human trafficking, incarcerated populations, and more. Training recommendations and best practices are outlined including psychopharmacology, psychosocial treatments, and cultural adaptations to evidence based treatments. Diversity in Action: Case Studies in Cultural Psychiatry is a useful resource for all psychiatrists, psychologists, general practitioners, social workers, nurses, administrators, public policy officials, and all medical professionals working with a culturally diverse subset of patients seeking mental health.

DSM-5® Handbook on the Cultural Formulation Interview by Roberto Lewis-Fernández (Editor); Neil Krishan Aggarwal (Editor); Ladson Hinton (Editor); Devon E. Hinton (Editor); Laurence J. Kirmayer (Editor) DSM-5 Handbook of the Cultural Formulation Interview provides the background, context, and detailed guidance necessary to train clinicians in the use of the Cultural Formulation Interview (CFI), which was created as part of the 2007-2013 DSM revision process. The purpose of the CFI--and this unique handbook--is to make it easier for providers to account for the influence of culture in their clinical work to enhance patient-clinician communication and improve outcomes. Cultural psychiatry as a field has evolved enormously from the days when it was principally concerned with epidemiological and clinical studies of disease prevalence; it now examines a multitude of issues, primary among them the differing patient, family, and practitioner models of illness and treatment experiences within and across cultures. The editors, all of whom have been intimately involved in the evolution of the field, have designed the book and accompanying videos for maximum instructional and clinical utility. The Handbook boasts many strengths and useful features, including: * A detailed description of each of the three CFI components: a core 16-item questionnaire, which can be applied in any clinical setting with any patient by any mental health clinician; an informant version of the core CFI used to obtain information from caregivers; and 12 supplementary modules that expand on these basic assessments. This material facilitates implementation of the CFI by clinicians.* Over a dozen clinical vignettes are included to illustrate use of the three components, and the Handbook also includes multiple videos that demonstrate the application of portions of the core CFI, and several supplementary modules.* Strategies for incorporating the CFI into clinical training are identified and discussed, furthering the objective of developing culturally-sensitive and astute practitioners.* The theoretical bases of the CFI are explored, raising questions for discussion and identifying areas for further research. The CFI is a valuable tool for all patients, not just those judged to be culturally different. The CFI has been called the single most practically useful contribution of cultural psychiatry and medical anthropology to clinical psychiatry, primary care, and medicine in general. DSM-5 Handbook on the Cultural Formulation Interview is the only book on the market that equips readers with the skills and insight to incorporate the CFI into practice, making it a critically important addition to the clinical literature.

Early Intervention in Psychiatric Disorders Across Cultures by Eric Y. H. Chen (Editor); Antonio Ventriglio (Editor); Dinesh Bhugra (Editor) Evidence indicates a correlation between early intervention and improved response in psychiatric disorders. Yet the majority of evidence is from high-income countries, and there is a lack of evidence and resources on the impact of early intervention across cultures and in low- and middle-income countries. Early Intervention in Psychiatric Disorders across Cultures aims to bridge this gap by focusing on the evidence and methods of intervention in less affluent countries. It covers mood disorders, personality disorders, addictions, and other psychiatric conditions, whilst most research has focused on psychoses and bipolar disorder. Over 17 chapters, this resource guides the reader through an array of approaches to early intervention, from brain imaging and available care pathways, to cultural and societal factors. Part of the Oxford Cultural Psychiatry series, this resource offers readers a picture of the current health care pathways available as well as social, cultural, and ethical considerations to apply in practice.

Global Mental Health: Latin America and Spanish-Speaking Populations by Javier I. Escobar (Editor); Stanley Nkemjika (Contribution by); Humberto Marin (Contribution by); Miwa Yasui (Contribution by); Kathleen Pottick (Contribution by); Ethan Pearlstein (Contribution by); Maria Calvo (Contribution by); Eduardo Padilla (Contribution by); Marina Figueredo Aguiar (Contribution by); Gabriel de Erausquin (Contribution by); Carrie Bearden (Contribution by); Carlos Lopez Jaramillo (Contribution by) Global Mental Health provides an outline of the field of mental health with a particular focus on Latin America and the Spanish-speaking world. The book details evidence-based approaches being implemented globally and presents ongoing state of the art research on major mental disorders taking place in Latin America, including work being done on understanding Alzheimer's, Bipolar Disorder, Schizophrenia, and other psychoses. While supporting the initiative for building capacity of care in low income countries, the book warns about some of the potential risks related to the abuse of psychiatry, using examples from the past, focusing on early 20th century Spain.

Handbook of Race and Development in Mental Health by Edward C. Chang (Editor); Christina A. Downey (Editor) This project is unique in the field for a number of reasons, both in structure and in content. Specifically, it will have leading experts on specific age groups (Childhood to Adolescence, Young Adulthood to Middle Age, and The Elderly) within the cultural groups of interest (European-Americans, African-Americans, Asian-Americans, Hispanic-Americans, and Native Americans) contribute a chapter covering current research on both positive and negative functioning for each population. Each chapter will present basic demographic information, strengths that contribute to resilience, and three significant challenges each group faces to maintaining mental health. Each chapter will then include an integrative section, where ideas are advanced about how the strengths of each group can be harnessed to address the challenges that group faces. To conclude, each chapter will propose future directions for research which addresses integrative approaches to mental health for each group, and the implications that such approaches could have for future treatment. The main points of each section of each chapter will be visually summarized in a concluding table.

Institutional Racism in Psychiatry and Clinical Psychology: Race Matters in Mental Health by Suman Fernando This book examines the deep roots of racism in the mental health system. Suman Fernando weaves the histories of racial discourse and clinical practice into a narrative of power, knowledge, and black suffering in an ostensibly progressive and scientifically grounded system. Drawing on a lifetime of experience as a practicing psychiatrist, he examines how the system has shifted in response to new forms of racism which have emerged since the 1960s, highlighting the widespread pathologization of black people, the impact of Islamophobia on clinical practice after 9/11, and various struggles to reform. Engaging and accessible, this book makes a compelling case for the entrenchment of racism across all aspects of psychiatry and clinical psychology, and calls for a paradigm shift in both theory and practice.

The Massachusetts General Hospital Textbook on Diversity and Cultural Sensitivity in Mental Health by Ranna Parekh (Editor); Nhi-Ha T. Trinh (Editor) This edition is updated to include new research and clinical material for practitioners working with mental health patients of diverse backgrounds.  Written by experts in cultural sensitivity, the text begins by establishing innovative approaches to understanding diversity, tools for diversity educational training for health care providers, clinical interviewing techniques and effective strategies in having difficult conversations. Indirect approaches to understanding diversity and mental health come from unique chapters that range from the ways that journalists process and discuss mental health competency to the business model for cultural competency in health care. The second section of the book moves from the broader subjects to the needs of specific populations, including Native Americans, Latinos, Asians, African American, Middle Eastern, Refugee and LGBQT communities. The discussion includes understanding the complexities of making mental health diagnoses and the various meanings these diagnoses have for the socio-cultural group described. Each chapter also details biopsychosocial treatment options and challenges. The Massachusetts General Hospital Textbook on Diversity and Cultural Sensitivity in Mental Health, Second Edition, is an excellent resource for all clinicians working with diverse populations, including psychiatrists, primary care physicians, emergency room physicians, early career physicians and trainees, psychologists, nurses, social workers, researchers, and medical educators.

Racism and psychiatry: contemporary issues and interventions by Morgan Medlock (Editor); Derri Shtasel (Editor); Nhi-Ha T. Trinh (Editor); David R. Williams (Editor); Jerrold F. Rosenbaum (Editor) This book addresses the unique sociocultural and historical systems of oppression that have alienated African-American and other racial minority patients within the mental healthcare system.  This text aims to build a novel didactic curriculum addressing racism, justice, and community mental health as these issues intersect clinical practice.  Unlike any other resource, this guide moves beyond an exploration of the problem of racism and its detrimental effects, to a practical, solution-oriented discussion of how to understand and approach the mental health consequences with a lens and sensitivity for contemporary justice issues. After establishing the historical context of racism within organized medicine and psychiatry, the text boldly examines contemporary issues, including clinical biases in diagnosis and treatment, addiction and incarceration, and perspectives on providing psychotherapy to racial minorities.  The text concludes with chapters covering training and medical education within this sphere, approaches to supporting patients coping with racism and discrimination, and strategies for changing institutional practices in mental healthcare.   Written by thought leaders in the field, Racism and Psychiatry is the only current tool for psychiatrists, psychologists, administrators, educators, medical students, social workers, and all clinicians working to treat patients dealing with issues of racism at the point of mental healthcare. 

Sociocultural Issues in Psychiatry: A Casebook and Curriculum by Nhi-Ha T. Trinh (Editor); Justin A. Chen (Editor) As the demographics shift within the US population, the importance of culture on mental health diagnosis and treatment has become critical for education and clinical training in psychiatry. While it's impossible to gain an in-depth understanding of every culture, clinicians need to have the skills and knowledge required to provide culturally respectful care for an increasingly diverse clinical population. By explaining fundamental concepts in cultural psychiatry using a case-based format, clinicians and educators in the mental health fields will be able to reduce cultural clashes and unproductive clinical encounters. Although similar books have focused on providing guidelines for working with discrete populations (e.g., African Americans, Asian Americans, LGBTQ), the purpose of Sociocultural Issues in Psychiatry is to enhance clinicians' knowledge and skills by translating theory into practice across diverse patient populations and clinical contexts. Mental health clinicians at all levels, trainees, or practitioners, will benefit from the content and education provided in this book.

Understanding Uniqueness and Diversity in Child and Adolescent Mental Health by Matthew Hodes; Susan Shur-Fen Gau; Petrus J. De Vries Understanding Uniqueness and Diversity in Child and Adolescent Mental Health examines the determinates of individual differences in children and young people, along with the origins of maladjustment and psychiatric disorders. It addresses the ways in which interventions and mental health services can be developed and shaped to address individual differences amongst children. Topics cover the influence of economic adversities and gender differences on child development and life course, as well as the range of risk and protective factors associated with the onset and persistence of problems, including sections on anxiety disorders in infants, bipolar disorder, and tics and Tourette's. Additional sections focus on the potential for individualizing treatments as illustrated by pharmacogenomics, with another highlighting ways in which services can be adapted for specific environments, such as the needs of refugee children and systems of service delivery that can be enhanced by the use of telemedicine.

Alzheimer's Disease: Diagnosis and Treatment Guide by Arun Jha; Kaushik Mukhopadhaya This book provides a practically focused resource on the methodologies available for diagnosing and treating Alzheimer's disease. The number of individuals affected by the disease continues to grow and as such there is an ever-increasing need for clear easy-to-digest guidance on how to appropriately diagnose and treat these patients. Within this work, chapters provide concise informative details of what this form of dementia is, how it can be diagnosed, managed and prevented making it ideal for those with limited experience in dealing with these patients. Information is provided on how to use a variety of the latest relevant techniques including mental state examinations, functional assessments, special investigations and the available drug treatments. Alzheimer's Disease: Diagnosis & Treatment Guide is a concise clinical guide detailing how to diagnose and treat these patients. It's easy-to-follow ideal for use by front-line physicians and trainees, who have no previous experience of diagnosing and treating this disease. The assessment component of the book is based on the WHO Mental Health Gap Action Plan (mhGAP) Dementia Intervention Guide for non-specialized settings.

Behavioral and Psychological Symptoms of Dementia by Art C. Walaszek The number of geriatric psychiatrists, specialty fellowships, and practices has been declining relative to the increase in the number of older adults in the United States; critical shortages in care are the new norm. Behavioral and Psychological Symptoms of Dementia was designed to address this predicament by enabling primary care providers to access a solid knowledge base and the clinical experience required to meet the needs of their patients with dementia. The author has written a concise yet comprehensive book that covers the full range of behavioral and psychological symptoms of dementia (BPSD) encountered by patients, families, caregivers, and primary care providers. In addition, the book provides the necessary foundation for distinguishing the different types of dementia, critical elements of patient history needed to develop an appropriate treatment approach, and the basic medical examinations and lab work that should be performed. Each chapter begins with a brief précis; well-written descriptions of the major topic follow. The chapters explore the common types of behavioral and emotional symptoms and the important associated system issues relevant to dementia care, including elder abuse reporting, creation of advance directives and power of attorney arrangements, safety planning, and caregiver support.The book's strengths are many * Carefully chosen, realistic case examples bring the material to life in a vivid, compelling way.* An up-to-date review of the literature is presented, striking an appropriate balance between new and promising findings and current standard-of-care practices. The book also identifies significant gaps in the literature.* Standard-of-care pharmacological and psychosocial approaches in the management of BPSD are offered with a realistic understanding of the benefits and difficulties of implementing each.* Relevant information on complementary medicine is included, and the book covers personality, cultural, and spiritual domains so that the reader is cognizant of the whole-person approach in delivering dementia care.* Each chapter includes key points for quick and easy reference and resources to share with patients, families, and caregivers--a boon to the busy clinician. * Although intended as a practical guide for clinicians in a variety of fields, those in academia who specialize in geriatric medicine or psychiatry will find the book a useful way to organize and teach this material to students, residents, and fellows. Pragmatic and clinically oriented, Behavioral and Psychological Symptoms of Dementia will help primary care practitioners provide informed, compassionate care to older adults at risk for, or exhibiting, BPSD.

Clinical Manual of Alzheimer Disease and Other Dementias by Myron F. Weiner (Editor); Anne M. Lipton (Editor); American Psychiatric Association Staff (Contribution by) In Clinical Manual of Alzheimer Disease and Other Dementias, practicing psychiatrists and neurologists provide essential input into neuropsychiatric assessment and the diagnosis and treatment of a wide range of neuropsychiatric conditions, including Alzheimer disease and traumatic brain injury. The manual provides invaluable information on both evaluation/diagnosis and treatment. Case studies offer real-life clinical experiences by some of the country's leading experts in the field. Clinical Manual of Alzheimer Disease and Other Dementias * Includes DSM-IV-TR cognitive disorders and addresses other cognitive syndromes and psychiatric symptoms that may confound diagnosis.* Provides clinical insights into the diagnostic signs and symptoms of dementing illnesses, including Alzheimer disease, frontotemporal dementias, delirium, amnesia, and other cognitive disorders.* Reviews the psychiatric syndromes that are related to dementing illnesses and deals with their treatment.* Discusses the detection and management of depression in the evaluation of a person with a cognitive complaint or symptoms.* Emphasizes the behavioral disorders that accompany dementing illness and presents an approach to their pharmacological and nonpharmacological management.* Delineates clinical workup for medical conditions that may underly cognitive or other psychiatric symptoms.* Provides an overview of clinical tools and techniques for diagnosing cognitive dysfunction, including history taking, mental status evaluation, physical and neurological examination, and neuropsychological testing.* Presents an illustrated review of the most current techniques of neuroimaging in differential diagnosis.* Includes key clinical points in every chapter summarizing important concepts. In addition to topics covered in the textbook, the manual includes a chapter on community resources to enable clinicians to better support patients and families through local and national organizations and agencies. This text is a must-have reference for clinical psychiatrists, resident fellows, residents in training, medical students in psychiatry rotations, clinical psychologists, and psychiatric nurses.

Confabulation : views from neuroscience, psychiatry, psychology, and philosophy by William Hirstein (Editor) When people confabulate, they make an ill-grounded claim that they honestly believe is true. There have been countless fascinating examples of confabulatory behaviour - people falsely recalling events from their childhood, the subject who was partially blind but insisted he could see, the amputee convinced that he retained all his limbs, to the patient who believed that his own parents had been replaced by imposters. Though confabulations can result from neurological damage, they can also appear in perfectly healthy people. Yet, how can confabulators so often appear to be of sound mind, yet not see their own errors? This book brings together some of the most advanced thinking on confabulation in neuroscience, psychiatry, psychology, and philosophy, in an attempt to understand this phenomenon; what are the clinical symptoms of each type of confabulation? Which brain functions are damaged in clinical confabulators? What are the neuropsychological characteristics of each type? What causes confabulation in healthy individuals? One reason why the study of confabulation is important is that there is wide agreement that the malfunctions that produce confabulation are malfunctions in significant, high-level cognitive processes. With contributions from a range of leading psychologists, psychiatrists, neuroscientists, and philosophers, the book develops an interdisciplinary dialogue that promises to increase our understanding of confabulatory neurological patients, and perhaps help us better understand memory, consciousness, and human nature itself.

Dementia Care by Jonathan Waite; Rowan Harwood; Ian Morton; David Connelly Dementia can be a distressing condition, for the sufferer, and for families and other carers. Management of dementia is never easy, and involves facing some unpleasant problems and difficult choices. The right approach and expertise can minimise the unpleasantness and make dementia manageable, while inexperienced or inexpert management has the potential to cause unnecessary distress and disability, mis-directed resources, frustrated care staff, unduly long periods spent in hospital and premature care home placement.Dementia Care is a practical manual for health and social care professionals in their encounters with people with dementia. It covers a wide range of information in a short, easily-accessible handbook format and broadly follows the journey of a person with dementia from first presentation to health or social services, through problems and their management, to the final stages of the illness. The book is rooted in the extensive experience of the authors in managing dementia in the community, in hospital and care homes and hopes to make the necessary expertise available and accessible in a form that will be useful to the whole range of medical, health and social care staff looking after people with dementia and their families.

Dementia: from advanced disease to bereavement by Victor Pace (Editor); Adrian Treloar (Editor); Sharon Scott (Editor) The Oxford Specialist Handbooks series provides readers with clear, concise information on all that is needed to successfully train in the medical sub-specialties. Each book gives an overview of clearly defined procedures, skills, guidelines, and technologies and provides practical tips and case studies to supplement hands-on experience. Where appropriate, each book complements the revised curriculum as developed by the Specialist Advisory Committees.Dementia is a growing issue, exacerbated by improvements in health care which have led to an ageing population; currently three quarters of a million people suffer from dementia in the UK, and this is expected to rise to 1.8 million by 2050. This book concentrates on advanced disease and addresses issues such as pain management, decision-making, spiritual needs, communication, the Mental Health Capacity Act, dementia in the younger patient, and the carer's perspective.Written by specialists, this book will be invaluable for doctors and nurses involved in palliative medicine, geriatrics, and old-age psychiatry, and the generalist who treats the patient with dementia.

Dementia: mind, meaning, and the person by Julian C. Hughes (Editor); Stephen J. Louw (Editor); Steven R. Sabat (Editor) Dementia is an illness that raises important questions about our own attitudes to illness and aging. It also raises very important issues beyond the bounds of dementia to do with how we think of ourselves as people - fundamental questions about personal identity. Is the person with dementia the same person he or she was before? Is the individual with dementia a person at all? In a striking way, dementia seems to threaten the very existence of the self. This book brings together philosophers and practitioners to explore the conceptual issues that arise in connection with this increasingly common illness. Drawing on a variety of philosophers such as Descartes, Locke, Hume, Wittgenstein, the authors explore the nature of personal identity in dementia. They also show how the lives and selfhood of people with dementia can be enhanced by attention to their psychosocial and spiritual environment. Throughout, the book conveys a strong ethical message, arguing in favour of treating people with dementia with all the dignity they deserve as human beings. The book covers a range of topics, stretching from talk of basic biology to talk of a spiritual understanding of people with dementia. Accessibly written by leading figures in psychiatry and philosophy, the book presents a unique and long overdue examination of an illness that features in so many of our lives.

Frontotemporal Dementia by Bruce L. Miller Frontotemporal Dementia provides an in-depth look at the history, various types, genetics, neuropathology and psychosocial aspects of one of the most common but least understood causes of dementia, frontotemporal lobar degeneration, from one of the world's leading centers for the study of dementia. Aided by the latest research in diagnosis, mechanism and treatment, this book captures the rich and quickly changing landscape of a devastating neurodegenerative disease, and offers up-to-date clinical advice for patient care. Frontotemporal dementia, in particular, raises psychological and philosophical questions about the nature of self, free will, emotion, art and behavior - important topics for practitioners and families to appreciate as they care for the sufferer. This book includes case studies, photographs and figures from the leaders in the field and personal communication from the researchers driving these developments.

Memory Loss, Alzheimer's Disease, and Dementia: A Practical Guide for Clinicians by Andrew E. Budson; Paul R. Solomon With a focus on the practical, day-to-day tools needed by neurologists, psychiatrists, geriatricians, and others who work with the elderly, Memory Loss, Alzheimer's Disease and Dementia, 3rd Edition, is an indispensable, easy-to-read resource in this growing area. Clinical experts Drs. Andrew Budson and Paul Solomon cover the essentials of physical and cognitive examinations and laboratory and imaging studies for dementia and related illnesses, giving you the guidance you need to make accurate diagnosis and treatment decisions with confidence. Provides in-depth coverage of clinically useful diagnostic tests and the latest research findings and treatment approaches. Incorporates real-world case studies that facilitate the management of both common and uncommon conditions. Contains new chapters on Alzheimer's look-alikes and posterior cortical atrophy. Covers key topics such as chronic traumatic encephalopathy, primary age-related tauopathy (PART) and limbic-predominant, age-related TDP-43 encephalopathy (LATE), in addition to new criteria for dementia with Lewy bodies and posterior cortical atrophy. Includes current National Institute on Aging-Alzheimer's Association and DSM-5 criteria for Alzheimer's disease and mild cognitive impairment. Demonstrates how to use diagnostic tests such as the amyloid imaging scans florbetapir (Amyvid), flutemetamol (Vizamyl), and florbetaben (Neuraceq), which can display amyloid plaques in the living brains of patients, as well as the new tau scans. Includes access to more than two dozen videos that illustrate common tests, clinical signs, and diagnostic features. Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.

Practical Dementia Care by Peter V. Rabins (Editor); Constantine G. Lyketsos (Editor); Cynthia D. Steele (Editor) This is a comprehensive, yet practical guide to the care and management of patients with dementia from time of diagnosis to the end of life. It is intended for the increasing number of physicians, nurses, psychologists, social workers, rehabilitation therapists, and long-term care givers responsible for the care of individuals with dementia. In the Third Edition, the authors have increased their emphasis on the use of non-pharmacologic treatments for behavioral and neuropsychiatric symptoms and incorporated the previous edition's chapter on genetics into their discussion of specific diseases that cause dementia. Other sections that have received extensive revision or expansion include those on diagnostic techniques, early prevention, evaluation of clinical needs, and variations between sites of care.

Trial Designs and Outcomes in Dementia Therapeutic Research by Kenneth Rockwood; Serge Gauthier Given the increased attention by clinicians, researchers and the pharmaceutical industry to the management and treatment of dementia not only in the elderly but also in increasingly younger populations, the demands for effective evidence-based pharmaceutical control of dementia and quantitative assessment of outcomes have increased. Since some first steps in the early 1960's to the controversial landmark paper of Summers and colleagues, to the most recent trials, it is clear both that much progress has been made, and that much remains to be done. This book is written to take stock of what is now usefully known, and to speculate on directions for the future. Short Contents

Beyond depression: a new approach to understanding and management by Christopher Dowrick Is there an epidemic of depression sweeping the world, or are we radically altering our interpretation of normal human experiences? Do we need a dose of medication or a renewed sense of meaning?In this second edition of Beyond Depression, Christopher Dowrick - an academic general practitioner - takes a critical insider's look at commonly held views about the diagnosis and management of depression. He argues that our belief in depression as a medical condition is based on commercial, professional, organisational and cultural factors which combine to sustain the popularity of depression as a concept, which is based more on our values than on science.Based on the best contemporary evidence available, this second edition includes new research findings on the management of mild and recurrent depression, the possibility of a genetic basis to depression, and extended arguments on the limitations of screening, and the placebo effects of antidepressant medication. The author considers alternative ways of understanding the thoughts and feelings that we currently describe as depression, drawing on cross-cultural, religious, political and literary sources. He proposes a conceptual framework that provides a means of moving beyond depression as a medical concept and as a personal problem. When applied to encounters between doctors and patients in primary care it leads us towards enabling narratives, with an emphasis on listening and understanding rather than diagnosis and prescription.Beyond Depression combines a comprehensive analysis of current scientific evidence with an impressive review of linguistic, literary and philosophical perspectives. Moving seamlessly between controlled trials and Camus, from prescribing to Proust, the book is informed throughout by a series of sensitive case studies drawn from the author's personal experience.

Black Dogs and Blue Words: Depression and Gender in the Age of Self-Care by Kimberly K. Emmons His "black dog"--that was how Winston Churchill referred to his own depression. Today, individuals with feelings of sadness and irritability are encouraged to "talk to your doctor." These have become buzz words in the aggressive promotion of wonder-drug cures since 1997, when the Food and Drug Administration changed its guidelines for the marketing of prescription pharmaceuticals. Black Dogs and Blue Words analyzes the rhetoric surrounding depression. Kimberly K. Emmons maintains that the techniques and language of depression marketing strategies--vague words such as "worry," "irritability," and "loss of interest"--target women and young girls and encourage self-diagnosis and self-medication. Further, depression narratives and other texts encode a series of gendered messages about health and illness. As depression and other forms of mental illness move from the medical-professional sphere into that of the consumer-public, the boundary at which distress becomes disease grows ever more encompassing, the need for remediation and treatment increasingly warranted. Black Dogs and Blue Words demonstrates the need for rhetorical reading strategies as one response to these expanding and gendered illness definitions.

Bullying, Suicide, and Homicide: Understanding, Assessing, and Preventing Threats to Self and Others for Victims of Bullying by Butch Losey In our society, bullying is commonly seen as a normal, inescapable part of growing up that children and adolescents must simply endure. In Bullying, Suicide, and Homicide, Butch Losey challenges this viewpoint, arguing that bullying is not a part of childhood development, but rather an aberrant behavior that, for the victim, can lead to adverse decisions, such as suicide and homicide. He provides a detailed understanding of the relationship between bullying, suicide, and homicide and an assessment and response strategy that can be utilized by mental health professionals who work with children and adolescents. This strategy involves a three stage ecological approach: screening to identify warning signs for bullying, depression, suicide, and violence by means of the Bullying Lethality Identification System (BLIS), developed by Losey and a colleague; assessing the risks of suicide and threats of violence using specially tailored forms and tools; and mediating to identify appropriate interventions. All of the associated tools and forms that the author has created are included as appendices and on the accompanying CD. Losey's sensitive and compassionate treatment of this important subject will inform and motivate mental health professionals in their work with victims of bullying.

Caring for Patients with Depression in Primary Care by David S. Kroll Depression is the leading cause of disability in the United States, and the traditional framework for managing depression within a psychiatry practice--i.e., a single psychiatrist treating a single patient for up to an hour per week--comes up painfully short at the level of serving the population even if it can be highly effective for individuals. At the same time, the non-systematic way in which most patients identify the need to see a specialty provider in behavioral health leaves many stranded, regardless of how complex their needs are. Primary care is now often considered the "de facto mental health system" in the United States, and primary care providers have been charged with the impossible task of making up for the dearth of psychiatric specialty providers and somehow correcting the many inequities in access to care that remain.  Primary care providers shouldn't have to do this alone. Help can come in many forms, of course, and some primary care practices are luckyenough to have a consulting psychiatrist on-site, available to answer any questions that come up and see patients directly when they need an expert opinion. This is exactly what David S Kroll, MD, an Associate Vice Chair in the Department of Psychiatry at Brigham and Women's Hospital in Boston and an Assistant Professor at Harvard Medical School, does for a primary care practice that serves more than 17,000 patients with a wide range of medical, social, and psychiatric problems. But most primary care practices don't have this resource. This book replicates the expertise of a consulting psychiatrist in a concise volume that primary care providers can pull off their shelves whenever they have a question about managing depression. It ensures that no one has to do this on their own. Managing Depression in Primary Care contains fourteen chapters that anticipate the questions, problems, and practical challenges that are most likely to come up when managing depression in primary care. It covers the basic skills that are needed for treating depression when it occurs in a vacuum, but it also provides practical guidance on treating depression in the real world--where it will inevitably be complicated by other factors. It also covers important associated topics including suicide, substance use, and disability.

Depression by Raymond Lam Depression is a broad term that covers a wide spectrum of conditions ranging from mild despondency to major depressive disorder. It is one of the most common of all medical conditions, yet also one of the most difficult to recognise. There are many effective treatments from evidence-based psychotherapies to antidepressant medications and non-invasive somatic treatments.Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library this concise pocketbook outlines the best principles of care for depression, looking at early recognition, careful assessment and the selection of appropriate treatments. Demonstrating the clinical features and possible causes of clinical depression this pocketbook looks at the current treatment strategies and addresses the diagnostic and treatment issues that clinicians frequently encounter. Using relevant evidence and practical guidance the authors have tried to simplify and aid the management of a very complex disorder.

Depression and Brain Dysfunction by Frank Gilliam; Andres M. Kanner; Yvette Sheline This volume is a scholarly reference to published research results on the neurobiology and neuroanatomy of depression and the association of depression with disorders of the central nervous system. The book reviews and discusses aspects of recent research on the underlying mechanisms of depression, including neurotransmitter dysregulation, hypothal

Depression and Drugs: The Neurobehavioral Structure of a Psychological Storm by Martin M. Katz This book integrates the current state of knowledge on the association of neurochemical and psychological factors underlying the concept of depression or on the process and nature of the drug-induced changes that lead to recovery. Highlighting the results of two major multisite collaborative studies of the psychobiology of depression, the author demonstrates how more refined clinical methods uncover the initial behavioral actions of the drugs and chart the time course of their actions. The results disconfirm earlier textbook reported findings that these actions are delayed for several weeks beyond the almost immediate neurochemical effects. The "multivantaged" method makes possible distinguishing the clinical actions of different classes of antidepressant drugs.

Depression in Later Life by Robert C. Baldwin Depression affects between 10-15% of older people, making it the most frequently encountered mental health condition in later life. Despite this, the condition is easily missed in clinical practice or not adequately treated. Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library, this second edition of Depression in Later Life highlights areas of depression which are of special relevance to later life, how to diagnose depression in an older person, the overlap with dementia and various other physical illnesses, and important pharmacological and psychological considerations. All chapters have been updated with new data where relevant, and case vignettes are included to ensure the book is relatable and easy to read.

Depression in Parents, Parenting, and Children: Opportunities to Improve Identification, Treatment, and Prevention by Division of Behavioral and Social Sciences and Education; Board on Children, Youth, and Families; Committee on Depression, Parenting Practices, and the Healthy Development of Children; Institute of Medicine; National Research Council Depression is a widespread condition affecting approximately 7.5 million parents in the U.S. each year and may be putting at least 15 million children at risk for adverse health outcomes. Based on evidentiary studies, major depression in either parent can interfere with parenting quality and increase the risk of children developing mental, behavioral and social problems. Depression in Parents, Parenting, and Children highlights disparities in the prevalence, identification, treatment, and prevention of parental depression among different sociodemographic populations. It also outlines strategies for effective intervention and identifies the need for a more interdisciplinary approach that takes biological, psychological, behavioral, interpersonal, and social contexts into consideration. A major challenge to the effective management of parental depression is developing a treatment and prevention strategy that can be introduced within a two-generation framework, conducive for parents and their children. Thus far, both the federal and state response to the problem has been fragmented, poorly funded, and lacking proper oversight. This study examines options for widespread implementation of best practices as well as strategies that can be effective in diverse service settings for diverse populations of children and their families. The delivery of adequate screening and successful detection and treatment of a depressive illness and prevention of its effects on parenting and the health of children is a formidable challenge to modern health care systems. This study offers seven solid recommendations designed to increase awareness about and remove barriers to care for both the depressed adult and prevention of effects in the child. The report will be of particular interest to federal health officers, mental and behavioral health providers in diverse parts of health care delivery systems, health policy staff, state legislators, and the general public.

From Melancholia to Depression: Disordered Mood in Nineteenth-Century Psychiatry by Åsa Jansson This open access book maps a crucial but neglected chapter in the history of psychiatry: how was melancholia transformed in the nineteenth century from traditional melancholy madness into a modern biomedical mood disorder, paving the way for the emergence of clinical depression as a psychiatric illness in the twentieth century? At a time when the prevalence of mood disorders and antidepressant consumption are at an all-time high, the need for a comprehensive historical understanding of how modern depressive illness came into being has never been more urgent. This book addresses a significant gap in existing scholarly literature on melancholia, depression, and mood disorders by offering a contextualised and critical perspective on the history of melancholia in the first decades of psychiatry, from the 1830s until the turn of the twentieth century. 

Infectious Behavior: Brain-Immune Connections in Autism, Schizophrenia, and Depression by Paul H. Patterson In "Infectious Behavior," neurobiologist Paul Patterson examines the involvement of the immune system in autism, schizophrenia, and major depressive disorder. Although genetic approaches to these diseases have garnered the lion's share of publicity and funding, scientists are uncovering evidence of the important avenues of communication between the brain and the immune system and their involvement in mental illness. Patterson focuses on this brain-immune crosstalk, exploring the possibility that it may help us understand the causes of these common, but still mysterious, diseases. The heart of this engaging book, accessible to nonscientists, concerns the involvement of the immune systems of the pregnant woman and her fetus, and a consideration of maternal infection as a risk factor for schizophrenia and autism. Patterson reports on research that may shed light on today's autism epidemic. He also outlines the risks and benefits of both maternal and postnatal vaccinations. In the course of his discussion, Patterson offers a short history of immune manipulation in treating mental illness (recounting some frightening but fascinating early experiments) and explains how the immune system influences behavior and how the brain regulates the immune system, looking in particular at stress and depression. He examines the prenatal origins of adult disease and evidence for immune involvement in autism, schizophrenia, and depression. Finally, he describes the promise shown by recent animal experiments that have led to early clinical trials of postnatal and adult treatments for patients with autism and related disorders.

The Massachusetts General Hospital guide to depression: new treatment insights and options by Benjamin G. Shapero (Editor); David Mischoulon (Editor); Cristina Cusin (Editor) Major Depressive Disorder (MDD) is one of the most prevalent psychiatric disorders, with a lifetime prevalence rate of roughly 20%. MDD is a leading cause of disability and premature death worldwide, leads to greater impairment in work functioning than other chronic medical conditions, and has an estimated annual cost of $210 billion in the US.   The proposed text is designed for mental health professionals and will present state-of-the-art treatment options that are used in the Depression Clinical and Research Program (DCRP) at the Massachusetts General Hospital. The text provides different treatment options so that providers can 'think outside the box' of conventional interventions. The introductory sections discuss general themes about diagnosing and treating depression. The major body of the book, however, consists of chapters organized under the topics of new medication, new psychotherapy, alternative treatments, and consideration of specific populations and how to modify interventions to best treat these patients. Each chapter begins with a case vignette to illustrate key characteristics of the disorder process or treatment and reviews the history, research support, and new advances of these topics. In addition, the chapters include a description of how to apply this topic in treatment and frequently asked questions and answers.   This book will be a unique contribution to the field. Existing guides focus on individual treatments of Depression, or include brief descriptions of interventions as a whole. The DCRP has consistently been a forerunner of clinical treatments for depression and often treats challenging cases of this disorder.  This book will provide a practical and useful resource with wide applicability.

The Oxford Handbook of Depression and Comorbidity by C. Steven Richards (Editor); Michael W. O'Hara (Editor) Depression is frequently associated with other psychiatric disorders and is often related to chronic health problems. Depressive symptoms are also common in chronically distressed close relationships and severe interpersonal difficulties in families and at work. The topic of depressive comorbidity is clearly very important, and while recent research in this area has been methodologically sophisticated, well presented, and inherently interesting, there has not been a comprehensive, academic resource that covers recent developments in this area.The Oxford Handbook of Depression and Comorbidity brings together scholarly contributions from world-class researchers to present a careful and empirically based review of depressive comorbidity. Cutting-edge chapters address theory, research, and practice, while capturing the diversity, evidence-base, and importance of depressive comorbidity. Specific topics include the comorbidity between depression and PTSD, alcohol use, and eating, anxiety, panic, bipolar, personality, and sleep disorders, as well as schizophrenia, suicide, cardiovascular disease, cancer, pain, obesity, intimate relationships, and many more. The Oxford Handbook of Depression and Comorbidity is a unique and much-needed resource that will be helpful to a broad range of researchers and practitioners including clinical and counseling psychologists, psychiatrists, marital and family therapists, social workers, and counselors working in mental-health and general health-care settings, as well as students in these areas.

RAND Suicide Prevention Program Evaluation Toolkit by Joie D. Acosta; Amariah Becker; Alexandria Felton; Aaron Kofner; Rajeev Ramchand Evaluating suicide prevention programs can be challenging because suicide is a rare event and prevention programs are often complex and multifaceted. The RAND Suicide Prevention Program Evaluation Toolkit uses checklists, worksheets, and templates to help program staff design an evaluation that is appropriate for their program type, available resources, and expertise and offers guidance on analyzing the resulting data to inform improvements.

Severe Depression by Roger McIntyre; Jay Nathanson Major depressive disorder is highly prevalent, recurrent, and associated with inter-episodic dysfunction. Individuals with severe depression exhibit profound morbidity, co-morbidity, disability, cost, and mortality. Severe depression is a heterogeneous phenotype with a lack of standardized definition. The chronic and heterogeneous nature of severe depression results in a lower probability of spontaneous remission and often a chronic course. The complicated course of illness in severe depression results in frequent clinical visits and longer courses of therapy. Pharmacological treatment strategies for severe depression are selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, tricyclic antidepressants, serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors, norepinephrine-serotonin reuptake inhibitors, and monoamine oxidase inhibitors. These agents, alone and in various combinations, as well as psychosocial treatments, electroconvulsive therapy, transcranial magnetic stimulation, vagal nerve stimulation, and deep brain stimulation, are under investigation. In addition, a variety of novel augmentation strategies are being tested. Hitherto relatively few reviews, texts or monographs have focused on the diagnosis and management of severe depression. Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library, this concise pocketbook covers the clinical features and definition of severe major depressive disorder. It focuses on current treatment strategies as well as an algorithmic approach to selecting and sequencing therapies for individuals with severe depression. Novel systematic approaches as well as psychosocial strategies will also be reviewed. This book will serve as a valuable quick reference for practitioners in mental health (i.e. clinical psychiatrists, trainees, specialist nurses, as well as primary care providers). The book will also be of interest to private sectors and researchers.

Suicide Prevention by Navneet Kapur; Robert D. Goldney Over recent years research into suicidal behaviour has burgeoned, and the third edition of this successful pocketbook reflects major developments in the evidence base and clinical practice. New chapters cover risk assessment and system-wide approaches to suicide prevention, and the role of clinical guidelines and national policies is also considered. This edition features extensive updates to the epidemiology of suicidal behaviour across the world, and also considers the individual and societal causes of suicide, particularly the effect of recent economic downturns in many countries. The chapter on biological factors includes the current research on the genetics and neuroscience of suicide. The chapters on interventions discuss the latest evidence from systematic reviews and new randomized controlled trials and highlight implications for clinical practice. The positive and negative impacts of the web and social media on suicidal behaviour are a major focus of research activity and new sections have been included to reflect this. The "Frequently Asked Questions" section was well received in the previous edition and this has been revised further to include new/updated FAQs on euthanasia, assisted suicide, and suicide martyrdom.Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library series, this useful handbook is an invaluable resource and quick-reference guide.

Suicide Prevention: A Practical Guide for the Practitioner by Tatiana Falcone (Editor); Jane Timmons-Mitchell (Editor) This volume is a guide for the hospital workforce related to suicide prevention.  Written by experts in the field, this text is the only one that also includes the revised DSM-5 guidelines.  It is also the first to cover both prevention in one concise guide, offering a well-rounded approach to long- and short-term prevention.  The book begins by establishing the neurobiology of suicide before discussing the populations at risk for suicide and the various environments where they may present.  The book addresses the epidemiology, including groups at heightened risk; etiology, including several types of risk factors; prevention, including large-scale community-based activities; and postvention, including the few evidence-based approaches that are currently available. Unlike any other text on the market, this book does not simply focus on one particular demographic; rather, the book covers a wide range of populations and concerns, includingsuicide in youths, racial minorities, patients suffering from serious mental and physical illnesses, psychopharmacological treatment in special populations, and a wide array of challenging scenarios that are often not addressed in the very few up-to-date resources available. Suicide Prevention is an outstanding resource for psychiatrists, psychologists, hospitalists, primary care doctors, nurses, social workers, and all medical professionals who may interface with suicidal patients.

Understanding depression: a translational approach by Carmine M. Pariante (Editor); Randolph M. Nesse; David Nutt; Lewis Wolpert Depression is a major cause of morbidity throughout the world. Given that between 8 and 12% of the population (in most countries) will suffer from depression at some point in their lives, it is clearly a significant public health problem. As our knowledge of this illness has expanded in recent years, it has become clear that depression can no longer be viewed as a simple disorder of the brain. It has to be seen as a series of behavioural and biological changes that span mind, brain, genes, and body - indeed affecting both psychological and physical health. This book brings together world leaders in research on depression, to discuss, for the first time, in an interdisciplinary setting, both classical and innovative ideas to understand this devastating disorder. It presents neurobiological, psychological, genetic and evolutionary models, with a particular emphasis on the mechanisms linking the brain to the endocrine and the immune systems, and therefore linking depression to physical health. Opening with a powerful, personal, account of depression, that conveys something of the all-consuming, debilitating, nature of this illness, the book then presents cutting edge research from those at the frontiers of work in this area. The book will be valuable for all those in the brain sciences seeking a state of the art review of this global problem.

Depression and Type 2 Diabetes by Khalida Ismail (Editor); Andreas Barthel (Editor); Stefan R. Bornstein (Editor); Julio Licinio (Editor) Type 2 diabetes is a major global health concern, and is predicted to affect between 10% to 25% of the world's population in the next 20 years. This epidemic is mostly attributed to ageing populations and unhealthy lifestyles. Thusly, understanding how the mind interacts with the body is essential in unlocking the psychological, biological, and sociocultural processes that increase the risk of type 2 diabetes and make it such a difficult condition to treat. Depression is a common co-morbid condition and when both conditions are present, this poses a significant challenge to patients, clinicians, and health care systems globally.Depression and Type 2 Diabetes is a unique resource offering a fresh scientific approach to this frequent co-morbidity. Using the latest research and guidelines, this resource provides readers with a comprehensive overview of the subject at the different stages of human lifespan, from the uterine environment where the metabolic thermostat is first set, to growing old with diabetes.Written and edited by international experts in diabetes and depression, Depression and Type 2 Diabetes reviews, critiques, and advances the latest research on the prevalent and complex relationship between depression and type 2 diabetes.

Anorexia by Stefan Kiesbye (Editor) This volume explores the issues surrounding anorexia, a serious eating disorder affecting up to one percent of girls and women in the United States. Essays discuss the roles of sociocultural influences and genetics in causing anorexia; a possible connection to Asperger syndrome; the effectiveness of internet-based treatment programs; and the potential danger of pro-anorexia websites.

Behavioral Neurobiology of Eating Disorders by Roger A. H. Adan (Editor); Walter H. Kaye (Editor) The intention of this book was to have investigators describe an expert opinion on their field of research and cutting-edge work in their laboratory on the neurobiology and treatment of eating disorders.

Bulimia by Adriane Ruggiero (Editor) Editor Adriane Ruggiero has assembled twelve essays that offer varying perspectives on bulimia. Readers are encouraged to learn more about the complexities behind this eating disorder and are offered resources such as help organizations, and a bibliography for further research. Issues discussed include: the connection between shame and bulimia; the contributions of athletics to bulimia; the success rate of antidepressants as treatment; how the Internet factors in, and involuntary hospitalization.

Compulsive Eating Behavior and Food Addiction: Emerging Pathological Constructs by Pietro Cottone (Editor); Catherine F. Moore (Editor); Valentina Sabino (Editor); George F. Koob (Editor) Compulsive Eating Behavior and Food Addiction: Emerging Pathological Constructs is the first book of its kind to emphasize food addiction as an addictive disorder. This book focuses on the preclinical aspects of food addiction research, shifting the focus towards a more complex behavioral expression of pathological feeding and combining it with current research on neurobiological substrates. This book will become an invaluable reference for researchers in food addiction and compulsive eating constructs. Compulsive eating behavior is a pathological form of feeding that phenotypically and neurobiologically resembles the compulsive-like behaviors associated with both drug abuse and behavioral addictions. Compulsive eating behavior, including Binge Eating Disorder (BED), certain forms of obesity, and 'food addiction' affect an estimated 70 million individuals worldwide.

Food Addiction, Obesity, and Disorders of Overeating: An Evidence-Based Assessment and Clinical Guide by Claire E. Wilcox This book is written for providers of broad training backgrounds, and aims to help those who care for people with EDs, overweight and obesity provide evidence-based care. The goal of the book is to provide these providers with a straightforward resource summarizing the current standard of care. However, it goes further by also introducing the concept of food addiction (FA) as a model to understand some forms of overeating. This book discusses the pros and cons of embracing FA and reviews the evidence for and against the validity and utility of FA. By doing so, the chapters convey a "middle ground" approach to help people with obesity, BED, and bulimia nervosa plus FA symptomatology who also want to lose weight. The text discusses FA by reviewing several of the main ongoing controversies associated with the construct. It reviews both the clinical and neuroscientific evidence that some individuals' eating behavior mirrors that seen in substance use disorders (SUD), such as how their relationship with food appears to be "addictive". Chapters also discuss how many of the mechanisms known to underlie SUDs appear to drive overeating in animal models and humans. Finally, the text argues that the similarities between the brain mechanisms of addictive disorders and overeating behavior has the potential to open up new avenues for current treatment and treatment development.  Food Addiction, Obesity and Disorders of Overeating: An Evidence-Based Assessment and Clinical Guide is suited for both medical and mental health practitioners, including physicians in primary care or psychiatry, nurses, psychologists, social workers, medical students and medical residents. It could also be utilized by researchers in obesity and ED fields, stimulating ideas for future research and study design.

Hidden and Lesser-Known Disordered Eating Behaviors in Medical and Psychiatric Conditions by Emilia Manzato (Editor); Massimo. Cuzzolaro (Editor); Lorenzo Maria Donini (Editor) This book provides up-to-date information on lesser known eating disorders (EDs) and eating related disorders. EDs and eating-related disorders include a highly heterogeneous group of syndromes and symptoms characterized by abnormal eating and weight control behaviors that can appear in all genders and ages. EDs can lead to high rates of morbidity and mortality, especially if they are misdiagnosed and untreated.  The risk of underestimation is high for the lesser-known ED, and when unhealthy eating behaviors appear in unusual situations, such as some medical and psychiatric pathologies, adults and the elderly, sexual minorities etc.  The volume examines EDs in specific populations (the elderly, males, infants and toddlers, sexual minorities, etc.). Several chapters explore in detail lesser-known EDs (anorexia athletica, avoidant/restrictive food intake disorder, chewing and spitting, EDs by proxy, EDs after bariatric surgery, muscle dysmorphia, night-eating syndrome, nocturnal sleep-related eating disorder, orthorexia nervosa, pica, rumination disorder, etc.). Finally, other chapters address features of unhealthy eating and weight control behaviors associated with medical diseases (achalasia, craniopharyngioma, cystic fibrosis, cyclic vomiting syndrome, diabetes, dysphagia, Kleine-Levin syndrome, Klinefelter syndrome, Parkinson disease, Prader-Willi syndrome, Turner syndrome, etc.) The book will be a valuable resource for all health professionals who work in the fields of psychiatry, clinical psychology, eating disorders, obesity, medicine, clinical nutrition, public health, and prevention, allowing them to broaden their understanding of these disorders, and to enhance their clinical ability to diagnose them.

A Case-Based Approach to Emergency Psychiatry by Katherine Maloy (Editor) Working in an emergency department as a psychiatrist or mental health clinician requires an ability to gain a patient's rapport, establish a differential diagnosis, assess risk and make disposition decisions in a fast-paced and potentially chaotic setting. Patients may be medically ill, agitated, intoxicated, or suicidal, and resources for treatment may be difficult to access. A Case-Based Approach to Emergency Psychiatry provides the emergency department clinician with vivid and complex cases, discussed by psychiatrists who work daily in the emergency setting, that illustrate basic principles of assessment, diagnosis and treatment. These challenging and complex cases are based on the years of experience of the authors combined with current evidence-based practices and discussion. Risk assessment, psychosis, mood disorder, substance abuse, ethics, forensic issues, and personality disorders are discussed, along with child and adolescent, geriatric, and developmental disabilities. Special attention is also paid to alternatives to inpatient care, short-term crisis intervention, and the interface between medical and psychiatric illnesses. The case-based format allows the authors to link aspects of the clinical presentation to discussion and literature review in a memorable and compelling format.

Emergencies in Psychiatry by Basant Puri; Ian Treasaden Emergencies in Psychiatry provides a practical and problem-orientated accessible guide for those who have to deal with psychiatric emergencies. This book contains guidance on how to assess and manage these emergencies and how to manoeuvre successfully though the practical difficulties that may arise, whilst also avoiding medical, psychiatric, and legal pitfalls. A variety of specific emergencies and emergencies in different settings are covered, such as aggression and violence, victims of abuse, emergencies related to drug addiction, people with learning disabilities, and emergencies in old age psychiatry and primary care. The book is a must for medical students, Foundation Year doctors on psychiatry rotations, doctors working in accident and emergency departments, specialist psychiatric nurses, and general practitioners.

Emergency Psychiatry: Principles and Practice by Rachel Lipson Glick; Scott L. Zeller; Jon S. Berlin The field of emergency psychiatry is complex and varied, encompassing elements of general medicine, emergency medicine, trauma, acute care, the legal system, politics and bureaucracy, mental illness, substance abuse and addiction, current social issues, and more. In one comprehensive, highly regarded volume, Emergency Psychiatry: Principles and Practice brings together key principles from psychiatric subspecialties as well as from emergency medicine, psychology, law, medical ethics, and public health policy. Leading emergency psychiatrists write from their extensive clinical experience, providing evidence-based information, expert opinions, American Psychiatric Association guidelines, and case studies throughout the text. This fully up-to-date second edition covers all of the important issues facing psychiatry residents and practitioners working in today's emergency settings, or who encounter psychiatric emergencies in other medical settings.   Provides complete, invaluable information on every aspect of today's emergency psychiatry, including the areas of community, consultation/liaison, psychotherapy, substance abuse, psychopharmacology, disasters, children, geriatrics, administration, forensics, and much more. Reflects significant recent advances and changes in perspectives regarding crisis and emergency mental health care. Features a newly reorganized format covering Models and Standards of Patient Care, Research, and Education; General Principles of Care; Staffing and Support; Common Presenting Problems; Special Populations; and Policy and Special Topics. Includes new chapters on psychiatric boarding, staffing models, and inclusion of the family in crisis care, as well as additional special population chapters on college students, transgender individuals, prisoners, and immigrants and refugees. Covers specific approaches to common problems, such as alignment of the approach to agitation with Project BETA recommendations, and includes evidence-based management and treatment throughout. Discusses special topics such as legal issues that emergency mental health providers must be aware of, emergency telepsychiatry, best practices for working with police and law enforcement, crisis phone services, and disaster psychiatry. Enrich Your Ebook Reading Experience Read directly on your preferred device(s),such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook,powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. 

Helping Kids in Crisis: Managing Psychiatric Emergencies in Children and Adolescents by Fadi Haddad (Editor); Ruth S. Gerson (Editor) Helping Kids in Crisis: Managing Psychiatric Emergencies in Children and Adolescents provides expert guidance to practitioners responding to high-stakes situations, such as children considering or attempting suicide, cutting or injuring themselves purposely, and becoming aggressive or violently destructive. Children experiencing behavioral crises frequently reach critical states in venues that were not designed to respond to or support them--in school, for example, or at home among their highly stressed and confused families. Professionals who provide services to these children must be able to quickly determine threats to safety and initiate interventions to deescalate behaviors, often with limited resources. The editors and authors have extensive experience at one of the busiest and best regional referral centers for children with psychiatric emergencies, and have deftly translated their expertise into this symptom-based guide to help non-psychiatric clinicians more effectively and compassionately care for this challenging population. The book is designed for ease of use and its structure and features are helpful and supportive: * The book is written for practitioners in hospital or community-based settings, including physicians in training, pediatricians who work in office-based or emergency settings, psychologists, social workers, school psychologists, guidance counselors, and school nurses--professionals for whom child psychiatric resources are few.* Clear risk and diagnostic assessment tools allow clinicians working in settings without access to child mental health professionals to think like trained emergency room child psychiatrists--from evaluation to treatment. * The content is symptom-focused, enabling readers to swiftly identify the appropriate chapter, with decision trees and easy-to-read tables to use for quick de-escalation and risk assessment. * A guide to navigating the educational system, child welfare system, and other systems of care helps clinicians to identify and overcome systems-level barriers to obtain necessary treatment for their patients.* Finally, the book provides an extensive review of successful models of emergency psychiatric care from across the country to assist clinicians and hospital administrators in program design. An abundance of case examples of common emergency symptoms or behaviors provides professionals with critical, concrete tools for diagnostic evaluation, risk assessment, decision making, de-escalation, and safety planning. Helping Kids in Crisis: Managing Psychiatric Emergencies in Children and Adolescents is a vital resource for clinicians facing high-risk challenges on the front lines to help them intervene effectively, relieve suffering, and keep their young patients safe.

The Oxford Handbook of Behavioral Emergencies and Crises by Phillip M. Kleespies (Editor) The Oxford Handbook of Behavioral Emergencies and Crises includes the most up-to-date and valuable research on the evaluation and management of the most challenging patients or clients faced by mental health providers - individuals who are at high risk of suicide, of other-directed violence, or of becoming the victims of interpersonal violence. These are cases in which the outcome can be serious injury or death, and there can be negative consequences not only for the patient, but also for the patient's family and friends, for the assessing or treating clinician, and for the patient's clinic or medical center. Virtually all mental health clinicians with an active caseload will see individuals with such issues. This Handbook is comprised of chapters by leading clinicians, researchers, and scholars in this area of practice. It presents a framework for learning the skills needed for assessing and working competently with such high-risk individuals. Chapters draw a distinction between behavioral emergencies and crises, and between emergency intervention and crisis intervention. The book examines the inter-related aspects of the major behavioral emergencies; that is, for example, the degree to which interpersonal victimization may lead an individual on a pathway to later suicidal or violent behavior, or the degree to which suicidal individuals and violent individuals may share certain cognitive characteristics. This resource is not simply a knowledge base for behavioral emergencies; it also presents a method for reducing stress and acquiring skills in working with high-risk people.

Quick Guide to Psychiatric Emergencies: Tools for Behavioral and Toxicological Situations by Kimberly D. Nordstrom (Editor); Michael P. Wilson (Editor) This volume provides an "on-the-go" guide to the most common behavioral emergencies a physician may encounter. Each chapter represents a disease state or symptom cluster and concisely summarizes the disease state, provides background, symptoms and signs, differential diagnoses, and immediate and long-term treatment options. All chapters conclude with a diagnosis or treatment algorithm or another easy-to-use visual tool. Chapters named after a specific disease state or symptom cluster, arranged alphabetically for use in the field. The text begins with chapters covering patient evaluation: getting a good history, suicide risk assessment, physical exam, and when and how to use studies. Written by experts in psychiatry and emergency medicine, this text is the first to consider both medical perspectives in a concise guide. Quick Guide to Psychiatric Emergencies is an excellent resource for psychiatrists, emergency medicine physicians, residents, nurses, and other medical professionals that handle behavioral emergencies on a regular basis.

Breaking Points: Youth Mental Health Crises and How We All Can Help by Neely Laurenzo Myers A free ebook version of this title is available through Luminos, University of California Press's Open Access publishing program. Visit www.luminosoa.org to learn more. Unprecedented numbers of young people are in crisis today, and our health care systems are set up to fail them. Breaking Points explores the stories of a diverse group of American young adults experiencing psychiatric hospitalization for psychotic symptoms for the first time and documents how patients and their families make decisions about treatment after their release. Approximately half of young people refuse mental-health care after their initial hospitalization even though we know that better outcomes depend on early support for youth and families. In attempting to determine why this is the case, Neely Laurenzo Myers identifies what matters most to young people in crisis, passionately arguing that health care providers must attend not only to the medical and material dimensions of care but also to a patient's moral agency.

Computational Psychiatry: Mathematical Modeling of Mental Illness by Alan Anticevic (Editor); John D. Murray (Editor) Computational Psychiatry: Mathematical Modeling of Mental Illness is the first systematic effort to bring together leading scholars in the fields of psychiatry and computational neuroscience who have conducted the most impactful research and scholarship in this area. It includes an introduction outlining the challenges and opportunities facing the field of psychiatry that is followed by a detailed treatment of computational methods used in the service of understanding neuropsychiatric symptoms, improving diagnosis and guiding treatments. This book provides a vital resource for the clinical neuroscience community with an in-depth treatment of various computational neuroscience approaches geared towards understanding psychiatric phenomena. Its most valuable feature is a comprehensive survey of work from leaders in this field.

Neuropsychiatric Disorders and Epigenetics by Jacob Peedicayil (Editor); Dennis R. Grayson (Editor) Neuropsychiatric Disorders and Epigenetics is a comprehensive reference for the epigenetic basis of most common neuropsychiatric disorders. The volume is organized into chapters representing individual neuropsychiatric disorders, from addition to obesity contributed by leading experts in their respective fields. The epigenetic aspects of each disorder are discussed, in the context of the full range of epigenetic mechanisms including DNA modification, histone post-translational modification, chromatin organization and non-coding RNA. A particular emphasis is placed on potential epigenetic interventions, when the effects of environmental stimuli on epigenetic states is particularly relevant o disease. Recent discoveries in epigenetic research enabled by epic advances in genomic technologies have positioned the field for broad translation to therapeutic interventions for previously unmanageable disorders Neuropsychiatric disorders represent a prime target of epigenetic interventions as they are highly debilitating, often chronic diseases with enormous costs to society. Thus, this volume will help define epigenetics as a key player in neuropsychiatric disorders, highlighting the full spectrum of epigenetic mechanisms underlying such disorders and introducing the vast range of epigenetic therapies under development.

Population Mental Health: Evidence, Policy, and Public Health Practice by Neal Cohen (Editor); Sandro Galea (Editor) Over the last century public health efforts, such as immunization, safer food practices, public health education and promotion, improved sanitation, and water purification have been very successful in eradicating and controlling a host of diseases. The result has been a dramatic improvement in health and life expectancy. However, the impact that mental illnesses have on individuals and society as a whole has largely been overlooked by the discipline.This pioneering volume examines the evidence-base for incorporating mental health into the public health agenda by linking the available research on population mental health with public mental health policy and practice. Issues covered in the book include the influence of health and mental health policies on the care and well-being of individuals with mental illness, the interconnectedness of physical and mental disorders, the obstacles to adopting a public health orientation to mental health/mental illness, and the potential application of public health models of intervention.Setting out a unique and innovative model for integrated public mental health care, Population Mental Health identifies the tools and strategies of public health practice � surveillance and screening, early identification, preventive interventions, health promotion and community action � and their application to twenty-first century public mental health policy and practice.

Psychiatric epidemiology: searching for the causes of mental disorders by Ezra Susser; Sharon Schwartz; Alfredo Morabia; Evelyn J. Bromet; Melissa D. Begg (As told to); Jack M. Gorman (As told to); Mary-Claire King (As told to) Searching for the causes of mental disorders is as exciting as it it complex. The relationship between pathophysiology and its overt manifestations is exceedingly intricate, and often the causes of a disorder are elusive at best. This book is an invaluable resource for anyone trying to track these causes, whether they be clinical researchers, public health practitioners, or psychiatric epidemiologists-in-training. Uniting theory and practice in very clear language, it makes a wonderful contribution to both epidemiologic and psychiatric research. Rather than attempting to review the descriptive epidemiology of mental disorders, this book gives much more dynamic exposition of the thinking and techniques used to establish it.Starting out by tracing the brief history of psychiatric epidemiology, the book describes the study of risk factors as causes of mental disorders. Subsequent sections discuss approaches to investigation of biologic, genetic, or social causes and the statistical analysis of study results. The book concludes by following some of the problems involved in the search for genetic causes of mental disorders, and more complex casual relationships.

Psychiatric and Behavioral Aspects of Epilepsy: Current Perspectives and Mechanisms by Nigel C. Jones (Editor); Andres M. Kanner (Editor) Many people living with epilepsy also suffer from debilitating psychiatric and cognitive disorders. While these comorbidities have been recognized for centuries, their causation, and relationship to the epilepsy remains clouded in mystery. This volume highlights recent knowledge and findings as well as controversies in our current understanding of behavioral and psychiatric comorbidities of epilepsy.

Autonomy and Mental Disorder by Lubomira Radoilska (Editor) Autonomy is a fundamental though contested concept. For instance, most of us place great value on the opportunity to make our own decisions and to be able to lead a life of our own choosing. Yet there is stark disagreement on what is involved in being able to decide autonomously, as well as how important this is compared with other commitments. For example, the success of every group project requires that group members make decisions about the project collectively rather than each on their own. This disagreement notwithstanding, mental disorder is routinely assumed to put a strain on autonomy. However, it is unclear whether this is effectively the case and, if so, whether this is due to the nature of mental disorder or of the social stigma that is often attached to it. Autonomy and Mental Disorder is the first exploration of the nature and value of autonomy with reference to mental disorder. By reflecting on instances of mental disorder where autonomy is apparently compromised, it offers a systematic discussion of the underlying presuppositions of the present autonomy debates. In so doing, it helps address different kinds of emerging scepticism questioning either the appeal of autonomy as a concept or its relevance to specific areas of normative ethics, including psychiatric ethics. Written by leading figures in philosophy and psychiatry, Autonomy and Mental Disorder will appeal to a wide range of readers in these and related disciplines.

Bioprediction, Biomarkers, and Bad Behavior: Scientific, Legal, and Ethical Challenges by Ilina Singh (Editor); Walter P. Sinnott-Armstrong (Editor); Julian Savulecu (Editor) Many decisions in the legal system and elsewhere depend on predictions of bad behaviors, including crimes and mental illnesses. Some scientists have suggested recently that these predictions can become more accurate and useful if they are based in part on biological information, such as brain structure and function, genes, and hormones. The prospect of such bioprediction, however, raises serious concerns about errors and injustice. Can biological information significantly increase the accuracy of predictions of bad behavior? Will innocent or harmless people be mistakenly treated as if they were guilty or dangerous? Is it fair to keep people in prisons or mental institutions longer because of their biology? Will these new instruments of bioprediction be abused in practice within current institutions? Is bioprediction worth the cost? Do we want our government to use biology in this way? All of these scientific, legal, and ethical questions are discussed in this volume. The contributors are prominent neuroscientists, psychologists, sociologists, philosophers, ethicists, and legal scholars. This volume will interest everyone with hopes that bioprediction will solve problems or fears that bioprediction will be applied unjustly.

Clinical Handbook of Psychiatry and the Law by Thomas G. Gutheil; Paul S. Appelbaum Selected as a Doody's Core Title for 2025! Written by two renowned leaders in the field, the much-anticipated fifth edition of Clinical Handbook of Psychiatry and the Law offers mental health professionals authoritative guidance on how today's law affects clinical practice. Each chapter in this award-winning reference presents case examples of legal issues often seen in day-to-day practice; clearly explains the governing legal rules, their rationale, and their clinical impact; and offers concrete action guides to navigating clinicolegal dilemmas. It's a must-have resource for anyone in the mental health field who needs an easy-to-read, practical handbook addressing both longstanding legal/ethical issues and crucial recent developments in the field. Addresses recent developments including the impact of electronic health records on privacy and liability risks, new technologies, prescription drug monitoring programs, risk management in integrated care, the practitioner's role in assessing suitability for gun ownership, and more. Reflects timely issues such as changing attitudes toward seclusion and restraint, new medications for psychiatric disorders and the role of informed consent, and increased liability and scrutiny of expert witnesses. Presents real-world case examples using an engaging, easy-to-read writing style, and includes unique action guides in each chapter that specify practical approaches to clinicolegal dilemmas. A useful study aid to help prepare for the forensic psychiatry sections of specialty board examinations. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech.

Disability and Aging Discrimination: Perspectives in Law and Psychology by Richard L. Wiener (Editor); Steven L. Willborn (Editor) Two things are certain in the contemporary workplace: the aging of employees, and negative attitudes toward them - especially those with disabilities--by younger colleagues and supervisors. Yet related phenomena seem less clear: how do negative stereotypes contribute to discrimination on the job? And how are these stereotypes perceived in legal proceedings? Bringing theoretical organization to an often unfocused literature, Disability and Aging Discrimination offers research in these areas at the same level of rigor as research into racial and gender discrimination. The book applies Social Analytic Jurisprudence, a framework for testing legal assumptions regarding behavior, and identifies controversies and knowledge gaps in age-discrimination and disability law. Chapters provide historical background or present-day context for the prevalence of age and disability prejudices, and shed light on the psychosocial concepts that must be understood, in addition to medical considerations, to make improvements in legal standards and workplace policy. Among the topics covered: * Applying Social Analytic Jurisprudence to age and disability discrimination. * The psychological origins and social pervasiveness of ageism. * Growing older, working more: the boomer generation on the job. * Limitations of the Americans with Disabilities Act. * Disability and procedural fairness in the workplace. * Cross-cultural perspectives on stigma. The first volume of its kind, Disability and Aging Discrimination is essential reading for researchers, forensic and rehabilitation psychologists/psychiatrists, and those involved in the well-being of older and disabled workers.

Empirical Ethics in Psychiatry by Guy Widdershoven (Editor); Lieke van der Scheer (Editor); Tony Hope (Editor); John McMillan (Editor) Psychiatry presents a unique array of difficult ethical questions. However, a major challenge is to approach psychiatry in a way that does justice to the real ethical issues. Recently there has been a growing body of research in empirical psychiatric ethics, and an increased interest in how empirical and philosophical methods can be combined. 'Empirical Ethics in Psychiatry' demonstrates how ethics can engage more closely with the reality of psychiatric practice and shows how empirical methodologies from the social sciences can help foster this link. The book is divided into two sections. In the first section there are discussions of the possibility of empirical ethics from a theoretical standpoint and an overview of the history of empirical medical ethics in general. The second, larger section is made up of chapters, discussing a specific research project in empirical psychiatric ethics. The contributors reflect on their choice of method: how and why they combine empirical and philosophical work, and how the two approaches relate to each other. The chapters in the second part thus have two purposes. The first is to present examples of empirical ethics in psychiatry; the second is to reflect on the way in which empirical research can support ethical analysis. 'Empirical Ethics in Psychiatry' is a unique contribution to the field of bioethics and will be fascinating reading for all those working within bioethics, as well as mental health care professionals.

Epistemic Justice in Mental Healthcare: Recognising Agency and Promoting Virtues Across the Life Span by Lisa Bortolotti (Editor) This open access book explores epistemic justice in mental healthcare, bringing together perspectives from psychologists, psychiatrists, philosophers, activists, and lived experience researchers. Through eight chapters, authors identify threats to the agency of people who hear voices, experience depression, have psychotic symptoms, live with dementia, are diagnosed with personality disorders, and face serious mental health issues while receiving palliative care. Considering the power asymmetries in clinical interactions, where patients are vulnerable and healthcare professionals are uniquely placed to offer support, this book reaffirms the importance of recognizing patients as agents and collaborators. Topics covered include trust in the therapeutic relationship, dignity at the end of life, the social dimension of health, stigma in an acute ward, the harm caused by biases and stereotypes, the role of clinical communication, and the promise of digital health. Students, academic researchers, practitioners, as well as mental health charities will benefit from this timely collection.

Ethical Considerations at the Intersection of Psychiatry and Religion by John Peteet (Editor); Mary Lynn Dell (Editor); Wai Lun Alan Fung (Editor) Psychiatry and religion/spirituality (R/S) share an interest in human flourishing, a concern with beliefs and values, and an appreciation for community. Yet historical tensions between science and religion continue to impede dialogue, leaving clinicians uncertain about how to approach ethical questions arising between them. When are religious practices such as scrupulosity disordered? What distinguishes healthy from unhealthy religion? How should a therapist approach a patient's existential, moral or spiritual distress? What should clinicians do with patients' R/S convictions about faith healing, same-sex relationships, or obligations to others? Discussions of psychiatric ethics have traditionally emphasized widely accepted principles, generally admired virtues, and cultural competence. Relatively little attention has been devoted to the ways that R/S inform the values of patients and their clinicians, shape preferred virtues, and interact with culture. Ethical Considerations at the Intersection of Psychiatry and Religion aims to give mental health professionals a conceptual framework for understanding the role of R/S in ethical decision-making and serve as practical guidance for approaching challenging cases. Part I addresses general considerations, including the basis of therapeutic values in a pluralistic context, the nature of theological and psychiatric ethics, spiritual issues arising in diagnosis and treatment, unhealthy and harmful uses of religion, and practical implications of personal spirituality. Part II examines how these considerations apply in specific contexts: inpatient and outpatient, consultation-liaison, child and adolescent, geriatric, disability, forensic, community, international, addiction and disaster and emergency psychiatry, as well as in the work of religious professionals, ethics committees, psychiatric education, and research. Thick descriptions of case examples analyzed using the framework of Jonson and Winslow show the clinical relevance of understanding the contributions of religion and spirituality to patient preferences, quality of life, decision making, and effective treatment.

Is Evidence-Based Psychiatry Ethical? by Mona Gupta Rated as one of the top 15 breakthroughs in medicine over the last 150 years, evidence-based medicine (EBM) has become highly influential in medicine. Put simply, EBM promotes a seemingly irrefutable, principle: that decision-making in medical practice should be based, as much as possible, on the most up-to-date research findings. EBM has been particularly popular within psychiatry, a field that is haunted by a legacy of controversial interventions. For advocates, anchoring psychiatric practice in research data makes psychiatry more scientific valid and ethically legitimate. Few, however, have questioned whether EBM, a concept pioneered by those working in other areas of medicine, can be applied to psychiatric disorders. In this groundbreaking book, the Canadian psychiatrist and ethicist Mona Gupta analyzes the basic assumptions of EBM, and critically examines their applicability to psychiatry. By highlighting the basic ethical tensions between psychiatry and EBM, the author addresses the fundamental and controversial question - should psychiatrists practice evidence-based medicine at all?

Oxford Handbook of Psychiatric Ethics by John Z. Sadler (Editor); Werdie (C. W. ) Van Staden (Editor); K. W. M. (Bill) Fulford (Editor) Psychiatrists have written much about the explosive expansion of scientific knowledge of the brain which developed over the late 20th century and the early 21st century. Comparatively little has been written within the field of psychiatry about the changes in society and world culture over this same period, and even less on the scope of psychiatric ethics that would account for these changes. Yet psychiatric ethics is an excellent framework in which to examine social changes in the field over the past 25 years, changes which are dramatic in nature and profound in impact. Some of these social changes include multiculturalism and its associated diversity of values; the transition to the digital era with its new demands on confidentiality, clinical boundaries, and privacy; the empowerment of psychiatric service users as full participants and co-producers of care; the development of new technologies of assessment and treatment, varying in their invasiveness and risk; the recognition of expanded social roles for psychiatrists, and the associated virtues of psychiatric citizenship; and the development of new practice models, settings, participants, and oversight, all of which represent profound challenges and opportunities for the ethical practice of psychiatry. The Oxford Handbook of Psychiatric Ethics is the most comprehensive treatment of the field in history. The volume is organized into ten sections which survey the scope of the text: (1) Introduction, (2) People Come First, (3) Specific Populations, (4) Philosophy and Psychiatric Ethics, (5) Religious Contexts of Psychiatric Ethics, (6) Social Contexts of Psychiatric Ethics, (7) Ethics in Psychiatric Citizenship and the Law, (8) Ethics of Psychiatric Research, (9) Ethics and Values in Psychiatric Assessment and Diagnosis, (10) Ethics and Values in Psychiatric Treatment. Written and edited by an international team of experts, this landmark book provides a powerful and important review of psychiatric ethics in the 21st Century.

Practicing Patient Safety in Psychiatry by Geetha Jayaram Practicing Patient Safety in Psychiatry is an expertly written, ready-to-use practical book on patient safety that focuses on how to carefully (and courteously) treat patients in psychiatric care settings. Focusing on issues of clinical leadership, strategic planning, and how to prevent lapses, oversights and errors, Practicing Patient Safety in Psychiatry is designed for easy reading and reference.Building upon case-based questions and guidance, Dr. Geetha Jayaram and her team of contributors provide extensive clinical experience to highlight patient care aspects that are most problematic for practicing clinicians and nurses who wish to improve upon the culture of safety in their respective units of service.

Psychiatric Ethics by Sidney Bloch (Editor); Stephen A. Green (Editor)

Rationality, Diagnosis, and Patient Autonomy in Psychiatry by K Fulford, et al. Psychiatrists have written much about the explosive expansion of scientific knowledge of the brain which developed over the late 20th century and the early 21st century. Comparatively little has been written within the field of psychiatry about the changes in society and world culture over this same period, and even less on the scope of psychiatric ethics that would account for these changes. Yet psychiatric ethics is an excellent framework in which to examine social changes in the field over the past 25 years, changes which are dramatic in nature and profound in impact. Some of these social changes include multiculturalism and its associated diversity of values; the transition to the digital era with its new demands on confidentiality, clinical boundaries, and privacy; the empowerment of psychiatric service users as full participants and co-producers of care; the development of new technologies of assessment and treatment, varying in their invasiveness and risk; the recognition of expanded social roles for psychiatrists, and the associated virtues of psychiatric citizenship; and the development of new practice models, settings, participants, and oversight, all of which represent profound challenges and opportunities for the ethical practice of psychiatry. The Oxford Handbook of Psychiatric Ethics is the most comprehensive treatment of the field in history. The volume is organized into ten sections which survey the scope of the text: (1) Introduction, (2) People Come First, (3) Specific Populations, (4) Philosophy and Psychiatric Ethics, (5) Religious Contexts of Psychiatric Ethics, (6) Social Contexts of Psychiatric Ethics, (7) Ethics in Psychiatric Citizenship and the Law, (8) Ethics of Psychiatric Research, (9) Ethics and Values in Psychiatric Assessment and Diagnosis, (10) Ethics and Values in Psychiatric Treatment. Written and edited by an international team of experts, this landmark book provides a powerful and important review of psychiatric ethics in the 21st Century.

Rethinking the Ethics of Clinical Research: Widening the Lens by Alan Wertheimer Clinical research requires that some people be used and possibly harmed for the benefit of others. What justifies such use of people? This book provides an in-depth philosophical analysis of several crucial issues raised by that question. Much writing on the ethics of research with human subjects assumes that participation in research is a distinctive activity that requires distinctive moral principles. In most contexts, we allow people to choose the activities in which they engage. By contrast, people are permitted to participate in research only after Institutional Review Boards determine that it is appropriate for them to do so. Although we assume that consent to participate in research must be preceded by an elaborate disclosure of information, we make no such assumption in many other areas of life. Although it is thought to be morally problematic to provide financial inducements to prospective subjects, we make no such assumptions when we hire people as loggers, fishermen, and fire fighters. Although we readily accept the "off-shoring" of manufacturing, many regard the off-shoring of medical research with great skepticism. This book seeks to widen the lens through which we consider such issues. When we do so, we will find that many standard principles of research ethics are difficult to defend.The book first argues that because respect for "autonomy" has been a central tenet of research ethics, many have failed to recognize that the structure of the regulation of research is deeply paternalistic and have therefore failed to justify such paternalism. The book then rejects "the autonomous authorization" model that characterizes most writing in bioethics and argues for a "fair transaction" model. Although many worry that the use of financial payment to recruit research subjects is coercive or constitutes an undue inducement, the book argues that most of those worries are misplaced. Shifting its attention to research in developing societies, the book considers the claim that international researchers exploit research abroad often exploits its subjects. Finally, the book considers the claim that because researchers benefit from their use of research subjects, they acquire special obligations to them or their communities.

Suffering and Bioethics by Ronald M. Green (Editor); Nathan J. Palpant (Editor) Long before it cured disease, medicine aimed to relieve suffering - but despite that precedence, the relief of suffering often takes a back seat in today's biomedical research and treatment. Modern bioethics, too, has been slow to come to terms with suffering. Attention to ethical quandaries has sometimes displaced attention to the experience of patients.This book seeks to place suffering at the center of bioethical thinking once again. Among the questions its contributors explore are: What is the meaning of suffering? How does it relate to pain? If there can be pain without suffering, can there be suffering without pain? Does suffering require advanced cognitive abilities? Can animals suffer? Many believe that we have strong obligations to relieve or minimize suffering; what are the limits of these obligations? Does the relief of suffering justify the termination of a patient's life, as proponents of euthanasia maintain? What is the bearing of suffering on the cherished bioethical principle of autonomy? Can suffering impair a patient's ability to make reasoned choices? To what extent must the encounter with suffering be an important component of medical education? Do religious traditions ever move from efforts to explain and relieve suffering to positions that justify and promote it? The aim of this book is to undertake a new foray into this "foreign territory" of suffering. With a foreword by the distinguished bioethicist Daniel Callahan, its twenty-two chapters, authored by leading scholars in science and bioethics, are organized so as to examine suffering in its biological, psychological, clinical, religious, and ethical dimensions.

The Virtuous Psychiatrist: Character Ethics in Psychiatric Practice by Jennifer Radden; John Sadler The context for this interdisciplinary work by a philosopher and a clinician is the psychiatric care provided to those with severe mental disorders. Such a setting makes distinctive moral demands on the very character of the practitioner, it is shown, calling for special virtues and greater virtue than many other practice settings. In a practice so attentive to the patient's self identity, the authors promote a heightened awareness of cultural and particularly gender issues. By elucidating the nature of the moral psychology and character of the good psychiatrist, this work provides a sustained application of virtue theory to clinical practice. With its roots in Aristotelian writing, The Virtuous Psychiatrist presents virtue traits as habits, able to be cultivated and enhanced through training. The book describes these traits, and how they can be habituated in clinical training. A turn towards virtue theory within philosophy during the last several decades has resulted in important research on professional ethics. By approaching the ethics of psychiatric professionals in these virtue terms, Radden and Sadler's work provides an original application of this theorizing to practice. Of interest to both theorists and practitioners, the book explores the tension between the model of enduring character implicit in virtue theory and the segmented personae of role-specific moral responses. Clinical examples are provided, based upon dramaturgical vignettes (caseplays) which illustrate both the interactions of the case participants as well as the inner monologue of the clinician protagonist.

The Evidence-Based Guide to Antipsychotic Medications by Anthony J. Rothschild (Editor) The Evidence-Based Guide to Antipsychotic Medications is designed to provide both clinicians and residents with focused, comprehensive, and clinically relevant information regarding the use of antipsychotic medications to treat a broad range of psychiatric conditions--from mood and anxiety disorders to substance abuse, personality disorders, and schizophrenia. The volume editor is a renowned psychiatrist and author with more than 25 years of experience in both clinical and research settings diagnosing and treating patients with mood and psychotic disorders. In addition, each of the volume's 13 contributors is an expert with many years of clinical experience to draw on.The book is down-to-earth and reader-friendly and is structured for maximal utility in both coverage and format: * Key Clinical Points cap each chapter, synthesizing and summarizing the knowledge you can take away, and serving both as a refresher for those using the book as a reference and as a study aid to master the material.* Both FDA-approved and off-label use of antipsychotic medications are addressed, reflecting the reality of clinical practice on the front lines.* Use of antipsychotic medications in both the pediatric and geriatric populations, a potentially controversial subject, is addressed in a nonsensational, straight-forward manner.* The Appendixes provide a wealth of information in tabular format, including drug tables (names, strengths, formulations, pharmacokinetics, and dosing); advice on initiating and monitoring antipsychotic medications; common side effects and their management; and special considerations for use during pregnancy and breastfeeding. The Evidence-Based Guide to Antipsychotic Medications is the first in a new series that strives to take evidence-based psychiatry from gold standard to standard practice. Scientifically up-to-date and rigorous, yet accessible and easy to understand, this volume stands alone as an indispensable resource on the topic.

Is Evidence-Based Psychiatry Ethical? by Mona Gupta Rated as one of the top 15 breakthroughs in medicine over the last 150 years, evidence-based medicine (EBM) has become highly influential in medicine. Put simply, EBM promotes a seemingly irrefutable, principle: that decision-making in medical practice should be based, as much as possible, on the most up-to-date research findings. EBM has been particularly popular within psychiatry, a field that is haunted by a legacy of controversial interventions. For advocates, anchoring psychiatric practice in research data makes psychiatry more scientific valid and ethically legitimate. Few, however, have questioned whether EBM, a concept pioneered by those working in other areas of medicine, can be applied to psychiatric disorders. In this groundbreaking book, the Canadian psychiatrist and ethicist Mona Gupta analyzes the basic assumptions of EBM, and critically examines their applicability to psychiatry. By highlighting the basic ethical tensions between psychiatry and EBM, the author addresses the fundamental and controversial question - should psychiatrists practice evidence-based medicine at all?

The History of Problem Gambling: Temperance, Substance Abuse, Medicine, and Metaphors by Peter Ferentzy; Nigel E. Turner This book documents the history of ideas about problem gambling and its link to addictive disorders. The book uses a combination of literature review and conceptual and linguistic analysis to explore the way ideas about problem gambling gave changed over time. It examines the religious, socio-cultural, and medical influences on the development of the concept of problem gambling as a disease, along with the ways in which such ideas were influenced by attitudes about substance abuse. The history of mental illness, notably as it pertains to themes such as loss of control over behavior, is also addressed. The book ends with a discussion of the current status and future prospects, with an eye to which ideas about problem gambling and addictions seem most promising and which should perhaps be left behind.​

The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Psychiatry by Laura Weiss Roberts (Editor); David J. Kupfer (Foreword by) The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Psychiatry, first published more than 30 years ago, is a landmark text with a legacy of sound scholarship, expert knowledge, and effective pedagogy. Thoroughly revised and featuring new authors and content, the seventh edition raises the bar, adding age-related, cultural, societal, and population considerations in the practice of psychiatry to the authoritative text that generations of students, residents, and clinicians have heretofore relied upon. The book first focuses on foundational knowledge, with chapters on psychiatric interviewing, diagnostic formulation, developmental assessment, laboratory testing and neuroimaging, and ethical and legal aspects of clinical psychiatry, and then proceeds to a full presentation of psychiatric disorders in alignment with DSM-5. The third section offers an overview of treatment strategies and methods in present-day psychiatry, a combination of evidence-based biological interventions and psychotherapies, and gives a clear sense of exciting new directions in psychiatric therapeutics. The final section of the textbook is focused on the care of special patient populations, including women; children and adolescents; lesbian, gay, bisexual, and transgender individuals; older adults; and culturally diverse individuals. Many topics are new to this volume, including the following: * Suicide risk assessment, a critically important subject, is addressed in a new chapter that provides the reader with up-to-date knowledge needed to conduct a thorough, attuned, and accurate psychiatric interview in line with best practices.* A new chapter on the social determinants of mental health has been added, reflecting an increased emphasis on populations whose specific concerns have been historically underappreciated in American psychiatry, and illuminating factors that influence mental health needs and barriers to care in specific patient populations.* Precision psychiatry, an integrative approach that pulls together the scientific foundation of the discipline and recent technological advances and directs them toward closing the gap between discovery and clinical translation, is explored in a new chapter.* E-health strategies in mental health have become increasingly available to psychiatrists and other health professionals, especially in the mobile and monitoring spheres. A new chapter offers insights into these intriguing new options for delivering treatment.* A chapter on complementary and integrative therapies explores the integration of conventional medicine with alternative treatments for which there is an evidence base, providing an overview of nutrients, phytomedicines, hormones, mind-body practices, and electromagnetic treatments. With features such as key clinical points and recommended readings for further study, The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Psychiatry is a comprehensive course book, an indispensable reference, and the ultimate resource for clinical care.

Blueprints Psychiatry by Michael J. Murphy Concise and focused on high-yield content, this 6th Edition of Blueprints Psychiatry makes it easy for busy clerkship students to prep for shelf exams and the USMLE during moments of calm between busy hospital and clinical responsibilities. Part of the highly regarded Blueprints series, the book mirrors the major concepts and therapeutics of modern psychiatric practice, covering each major diagnostic category, each major class of somatic and psychotherapeutic treatment, legal issues, and special situations unique to the field. Now completely aligned with DSM-5, the Sixth Edition features a new full-color design, new images, and new case vignettes in every chapter. Updated: 100 updated Board-format questions with complete rationales appear in a question-and-answer section at the end of the book. New case vignettes with questions, answers, and full explanations in every chapter provide an ideal way to study. New design: A contemporary, full-color design makes navigation quick and easy. Up-to-date coverage: All diagnoses reflect those included in the current Diagnostic and Statistical Manual, 5th Edition (DSM-5). Pedagogically rich: Each brief chapter includes bolded key words, tables, figures, and key points to help residents succeed on exams. Complete: A Neural Basis section is included for each major diagnostic category. eBook available for purchase. Fast, smart, and convenient, today's eBooks can transform learning. These interactive, fully searchable tools offer 24/7 access on multiple devices, the ability to highlight and share notes, and more

Case Files Psychiatry, Sixth Edition by Eugene C. Toy; Debra L. Klamen REAL-LIFE CASES SHARPEN YOUR CRITICAL THINKING SKILLS FOR YOUR CLERKSHIP AND THE SHELF EXAM Case Files: Psychiatry presents realistic clinical scenarios to enhance and hone your clinical decision-making skills. Sixty high-yield cases illustrate essential concepts in psychiatric care. Each case begins with a vignette accompanied by relevant open-ended questions designed to teach diagnostic or therapeutic approaches relevant to psychiatry. The answers that follow emphasize mechanisms and underlying principles. This sixth edition features a new format with bulleted summaries, shorter paragraphs, and clearer headings. Realistic cases are accompanied by questions that encourage you to think through DSM-5 diagnostic criteria and therapeutic options Real-life psychiatry cases with high-yield discussions aligned to clerkship guidelines USMLE-style review questions and clinical pearls accompany each case Primer on how to approach clinical problems and think like an experienced doctor

Clinical Capsules: Psychiatry by Thieme Medical Publishers Clinical Capsules: Psychiatry is a collection of clinical learning modules covering mental, emotional, and behavioral conditions in children, adolescents, and adults created for students to reference during rotations and preparation for taking Shelf and USMLE exams. Originally derived from Thieme's authoritative German-language medical textbook content and digital learning platform, Via Medici, the modules have been translated and carefully adapted by 4th-year medical students and residents in the U.S. to fit the standards of practice in the U.S. health care system. Modules are templated and include Epidemiology, Pathogenesis, Signs and Symptoms, Diagnosis, and Treatment for psychiatric diseases and disorders commonly tested on Shelf and USMLE exams. The modules are also useful for exam preparation, with concise overviews, learning and exam tips, and high-yield facts, and clinical rotation support, with links to key treatment guidelines and other information for each disease and disorder. Additionally, volumes are organized by organ system and specialty with regularly updated information supplemented by illustrations, diagrams, radiographic images, and tables.

The Clinician in the Psychiatric Diagnostic Process by Massimo Biondi (Editor); Angelo Picardi (Editor); Mauro Pallagrosi (Editor); Laura Fonzi (Editor) The vast majority of mental health clinicians and researchers rely on diagnostic systems based on operational criteria. However, in their everyday practice, many clinicians also pay attention to their own feelings or intuitions about the patient. For an even greater number of clinicians, this process may occur inadvertently. Scholars from various fields are increasingly stressing the importance of complementing the emphasis on operational criteria with thoughtful attention to the subjective and intersubjective elements involved in a thorough psychopathological evaluation. This book aims at capturing the essence, implications and full potential of the clinician's subjective experience in the diagnosis and treatment of mental disorders. It gathers contributions from several different disciplines, such as phenomenology, neuroscience, the cognitive sciences, and psychoanalysis. It also presents the development, validation, and clinical application of a psychometric instrument thatreliably investigates the clinician's feelings, thoughts, and perceptions related to the clinical encounter.

Clinician's Thesaurus: The Guide to Conducting Interviews and Writing Psychological Reports by Edward L. Zuckerman This book has been replaced by Clinician's Thesaurus, Ninth Edition, ISBN 978-1-4625-5807-0.

A Companion to the Classification of Mental Disorders by John E. Cooper; Norman Sartorius A Companion to the Classification of Mental Disorders provides essential reading as a background and supplement to both the recently produced DSM-5 and the forthcoming ICD-11. It focuses on the processes of classification and diagnosis, and the uses for these classifications. The book emphasises the dangers of regarding any current psychiatric classification as true or complete, in view of the present partial state of knowledge about the causes and mechanisms of most mental and behavioural disorders.This book is unique in containing a number of chapters that give a brief history of the cooperative efforts and projects necessary for the production of internationally agreed psychiatric classifications. The discussion begins in 1965 with the US/UK Diagnostic study, the preparations for ICD-8 with its first international glossary, and the International Pilot Study of Schizophrenia, designed and coordinated by the World Health Organization. While recognizing the importance of the innovations of the DSM series of classifications of the American Psychiatric Association, the book also takes a truly international perspective. The expert authors are well placed to do this, having been personally involved in many of the collaborative studies and developments discussed. A Companion to the Classification of Mental Disorders is an illustration of how much international collaborative work has been necessary over several decades to produce the currently agreed classifications. There is still a long way to go, but a start has been made.

CURRENT Diagnosis & Treatment: Psychiatry, 4th Edition by Michael H. Ebert; Peter R. Martin; Molly McVoy; Robert J. Ronis; Sidney H. Weissman Quickly and accurately diagnose and treat the psychiatric disorders you will encounter in clinical practice CURRENT Diagnosis and Treatment: Psychiatry offers instant access to relevant etiology, phenomenology, pathophysiology, and drug information. Designed in the time-saving outline style that makes LANGE® CURRENT titles so popular, the book covers need-to-know information on interviewing techniques, emergency psychiatry, treatment strategies, psychiatry and the law, psychological testing, emergency psychiatry, and evaluating infants.  This authoritative resource reviews essential psychopharmacologic and psychotherapeutic approaches, and provides evaluation, testing, and decision-making tools and criteria. Renowned authorities on the subject, the editors have a cumulative 100+ years treating patients and teaching residents.   *  Covers both adult and pediatric disorders *  Reviews essential psychopharmacologic and psychotherapeutic approaches *  Provides evaluation, testing, and decision-making tools and criteria

Essentials of Mental Health by M. P. H. Moini; Anthony LoGalbo; Amparo Gutierrez; Patrick J. Aragon Essentials of Mental Health is an authoritative guide designed to provide comprehensive mental health knowledge that caters to professionals and students alike. The book reviews major mental disorders, including mood, anxiety, and personality disorders, as well as conditions like schizophrenia and sleep-wake disorders. Each disorder has specific symptoms, diagnostic criteria, and case studies to illustrate real-world applications. Special populations, such as older adults, women, children, and cultural minorities are given focused attention, underscoring unique mental health challenges and considerations. The book concludes with a comprehensive section on treatment options, ranging from hospital psychiatry to community-based services and psychotherapy techniques.It is a well-rounded resource that equips readers with the latest insights and practical tools for effective mental health care and intervention.- Discusses the epidemiology of mental health conditions- Written in an easy-to-read format with focus boxes for easy comprehension- Includes case studies for all listed major mental disorders

Fundamentals of Psychiatry for Health Care Professionals by Roberto Cavallaro (Editor); Cristina Colombo (Editor) The book provides all the relevant information to understand the mental illness through psychopathology, global clinical manifestations and clinical patterns. It equips the reader with the basic knowledge to identify psychiatric conditions occurring alone or in the context of other medical illnesses, to distinguish health psychology and psychiatry, and to know what to do, how to do it, and how to communicate with the patient and to cooperate with the psychiatrist.  The core chapters are dedicated to mental disorders diagnosed according to the DSM V, and are organized in sub-chapters with key feature boxes and schemes that will allow the global comprehension of the mental disorder and its clinical management. The work includes also a general chapter on psychopathology and one on psychopharmacology presenting the practical information about suggested doses, side effects, drug interactions and warnings for the main psychotropics. The final chapter deals with forensic and legalaspects. Fundamentals of Psychiatry for Health Care Professionals will appeal to a wide readership, from post graduate professionals who want to broaden their clinical knowledge of psychiatry to medical students and students of the health degree courses like Physiotherapy, Psychology, Nursing, or Dentistry.

Gabbard's Treatments of Psychiatric Disorders by Glen O. Gabbard (Editor) The definitive treatment textbook in psychiatry, this fifth edition of Gabbard's Treatments of Psychiatric Disorders has been thoroughly restructured to reflect the new DSM-5 categories, preserving its value as a state-of-the-art resource and increasing its utility in the field. The editors have produced a volume that is both comprehensive and concise, meeting the needs of clinicians who prefer a single, user-friendly volume. In the service of brevity, the book focuses on treatment over diagnostic considerations, and addresses both empirically-validated treatments and accumulated clinical wisdom where research is lacking. Noteworthy features include the following: * Content is organized according to DSM-5 categories to make for rapid retrieval of relevant treatment information for the busy clinician.* Outcome studies and expert opinion are presented in an accessible way to help the clinician know what treatment to use for which disorder, and how to tailor the treatment to the patient.* Content is restricted to the major psychiatric conditions seen in clinical practice while leaving out less common conditions and those that have limited outcome research related to the disorder, resulting in a more streamlined and affordable text.* Chapters are meticulously referenced and include dozens of tables, figures, and other illustrative features that enhance comprehension and recall. An authoritative resource for psychiatrists, psychologists, and psychiatric nurses, and an outstanding reference for students in the mental health professions, Gabbard's Treatments of Psychiatric Disorders, Fifth Edition, will prove indispensable to clinicians seeking to provide excellent care while transitioning to a DSM-5 world.

Goodwin and Guze's Psychiatric Diagnosis 7th Edition by Carol North; Sean Yutzy Acclaimed for its thorough yet concise overview of the natural history of psychiatric disorders, Goodwin and Guze's Psychiatric Diagnosis has been newly and extensively updated in this seventh edition. As in previous editions, each chapter systematically covers the definition, historical background, epidemiology, clinical picture, natural history, complications, family studies, differential diagnosis, and clinical management of each disorder. Terminology has been updated for consistency with changes made in DSM-5®. Recent epidemiologic and neurobiological findings are provided, including the long term course of mood disorders, genetics and neuroimaging of schizophrenia and mood and other disorders, cognitive changes in relation to depression and dementia, brain stimulation techniques, outcome studies of eating disorders, and epidemiology of substance use disorders.

Graduate Medical Education in Psychiatry: From Basic Processes to True Innovation by Matthew Macaluso (Editor); Tsutomu Sasao; Jon Butler This book functions as a guide for leaders in academic and non-academic settings who are interested in developing, managing, or improving new or existing psychiatry residency programs. It notes the complexity of administering a residency program with ready solutions and tactics.  Unique and comprehensive, this book contains chapters that focus on key areas of residency program management and innovation including but not limited to: meeting accreditation requirements, clinical and didactic curriculum, managing resident and faculty performance issues, research and scholarly activity in residency programs, rural training programs, and faculty development. Graduate Medical Education in Psychiatry is an invaluable resource for medical education leaders, as well as trainees and those interested in psychiatric residency or academic psychiatry in general.

In Defence of Psychiatric Diagnoses by Sam Fellowes This open access book makes a distinctive contribution by providing a novel defence of psychiatric diagnoses. It defends psychiatric diagnoses by portraying them as idealised models understood in a neo-Kantian sense. It reject accounts which see psychiatric diagnoses as biomedical entities or as natural kinds. Drawing upon this neo-Kantian approach to scientific models, the book provides a novel metaphysical account of what psychiatric diagnoses are and novel epistemological guidelines for constructing psychiatric diagnoses. Psychiatric diagnoses are portrayed as models which abstract away from particular aspects of particular people to create generalised models that are applicable to multiple people. In Defence of Psychiatric Diagnoses is essential reading for all scholars and researchers of the philosophy of science especially those focussing on the philosophy of psychiatry.

Kaplan and Sadock's Pocket Handbook of Clinical Psychiatry by Samoon Ahmad Concise and easy to use, Kaplan & Sadock's Pocket Handbook of Clinical Psychiatry, Seventh Edition, is an up-to-date guide to diagnosing the full range of psychiatric disorders in both adults and children. Written by Dr. Samoon Ahmad, this companion to Kaplan and Sadock's Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry offers brief summaries of psychiatric disorders, including key aspects of etiology, epidemiology, clinical features, and suggestions for treatment. Now in full color for the first time, it's an ideal ready reference for psychiatrists and other physicians, medical students on psychiatric rotations, psychiatric residents, and mental health professionals in psychology, social work, and nursing. Provides fully revised content throughout, with a particular focus on emerging trends in the identification of psychiatric disorders and newly developed therapeutic approaches Discusses the impact of COVID-19 with a dedicated chapter on the identification and management of the associated neuropsychiatric symptoms Offers new coverage of neuromodulation, cannabis, and psychedelics such as psilocybin, MDMA, and ketamine Features a new, full-color format for faster navigation and improved visual appeal Concludes each chapter with specific page and chapter references to more detailed coverage in Kaplan and Sadock's Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, Eleventh Edition Includes boxed, highlighted Clinical Hints for quick reference Uses an easy-to-scan outline format throughout, making it a perfect source of quick review for busy clinical practitioners, psychiatric residents, or students preparing for exams ,

Massachusetts General Hospital Comprehensive Clinical Psychiatry by Theodore A. Stern (Editor); Timothy E. Wilens (Editor); Maurizio Fava (Editor) The Massachusetts General Hospital is widely regarded as one of the world's premier psychiatric institutions. Massachusetts General Hospital Comprehensive Clinical Psychiatry, 3rd Edition, offers practical, informative, and hands-on advice from the staff of the esteemed MGH Department of Psychiatry, helping you put today's best practices to work for your patients. This authoritative reference covers a wide variety of clinical syndromes and settings, aided by superb graphics throughout. In one convenient volume, you'll have easy access to the answers you need to face and overcome any clinical challenge. Uses a reader-friendly and highly templated format with abundant boxed summaries, bulleted points, case histories, algorithms, references, and suggested readings. Contains new chapters on the Psychiatric Management of Patients with Cardiac, Renal, Pulmonary, and Gastrointestinal Disease; COVID-19 Infection; Burns, Trauma, and Intensive Care Unit Treatment; Care of LGBTQ Patients; and Mindfulness and Resilience. Covers key areas, such as Substance Use Disorders; Mood, Anxiety, and Psychotic Disorders; Emergency Psychiatry; Functional Neuroanatomy and the Neurologic Examination; Psychological and Neuropsychological Assessment; Military Psychiatry; Psychiatric Manifestations of Traumatic Brain Injury; Legal and Ethical Issues in Psychiatry; End of Life Care; and Approaches to Collaborative Care and Primary Care Psychiatry. Features key points for every chapter, updated DSM-5 criteria, and enhanced content on collaborative care and behavioral medicine, ensuring that your knowledge is thorough and up to date. Corresponds to the companion review volume, Massachusetts General Hospital Study Guide for Psychiatry Exams, 2nd Edition (ISBN: 978-0-443-11983-5). An eBook version is included with purchase. The eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references, with the ability to search, customize your content, make notes and highlights, and have content read aloud. Any additional digital ancillary content may publish up to 6 weeks following the publication date.

The Maudsley Handbook of Practical Psychiatry by Gareth Owen (Editor); Simon Wessely (Editor); Robin Murray (Editor) The Maudsley Handbook of Practical Psychiatry has long served trainees in psychiatry, presenting them with practical and essential advice. This new edition of the orange book provides guidance on the psychiatric and neuropsychiatric examination and interviewing of adults and childrennot just as a central skill, but as the basis for reaching a diagnosis, formulation and defining a treatment plan. It covers special interview situations, such as dealing with specific patient reactions, and other special problems, for example, conducting a complicated assessment in cases of self-harm. The book concludes with important legal issues and is supported by helpful appendices for ready-reference. As with previous editions, this sixth edition has been revised and rewritten with the full and active involvement of a group of consultant psychiatrists and trainees, making it a highly relevant and practical handbook for all psychiatrists whether learning or refreshing their skills.

The Medical Evaluation of Psychiatric Symptoms by Eric G. Meyer (Editor); Kelly L. Cozza (Editor); James A. Bourgeois (Editor) Every DSM-5 diagnosis includes an exclusion criterion that the disorder is not better explained by a medical condition.  Meeting this criterion can be difficult for a variety of reasons. The psychiatric signs and symptoms of medical disorders are not commonly emphasized in medical textbooks. Further, illness scripts for medical diagnoses do not often overlap with psychiatric disorders, making it difficult to know what medical conditions should be ruled out. For example, irritability is a common symptom in polycystic ovarian disorder, but PCOS is rarely on the differential for irritability.  Similarly, while hypothyroidism is commonly linked to the illness script of depression, patients with MDD may be just as likely to have diabetes - an infrequently considered diagnosis for depression.  "Buzzword" medical conditions that are commonly prioritized in medical student training can negatively influence classic illness scripts.  While such diagnostic possibilities make for good multiple-choice questions, they are frequently rare and may inadvertently undermine important common possibilities.  For example, a patient with chest pain in the context of anxiety is more likely to have asthma, acute coronary syndrome, or even a pulmonary embolism than pheochromocytoma.   In a recent white paper issued by the American Psychiatric Association, it has urged psychiatrists to better advocate for patients with severe mental illness who often lack access to primary care. But some psychiatrists may be unfamiliar with physical exam maneuvers and medical review of systems (ROS) questions.  Complex medical systems may delegate the physical exam to physicians outside of psychiatry, or there may be a temptation to rely on the emergency room's "medical clearance" as a "medical rule-out."  Both can result in decreased familiarity with physical exam techniques previously mastered as part of medical school.  A cursory review of the physical exam maneuvers and concise symptom-based medical ROS lists can alleviate some of these concerns. This book is intended to provide psychiatrists and physicians who routinely evaluate psychiatric symptoms with the tools needed to rule out medical conditions that could be causing those symptoms. It will start with an introduction that reviews why the text is needed and potential larger gaps in training that might contribute to the necessity for such a text. Each chapter thereafter will focus on a specific symptom.  Each symptom will be defined to ensure accuracy.  Then a differential of common medical conditions that can cause that psychiatric symptom will be provided.  For each diagnosis key history, physical exam, laboratory, and radiologic findings will be provided that help rule the condition out. Screening tools that can help rule out medical etiologies will also be provided.  Where available, positive predictive values (PPVs) will beprovided to help users understand the likelihood that a negative finding or result indicated that a medical disorder is not present. While individual aspects of this text exist in other formats, the comprehensive nature of our approach, descriptions of psychiatric symptoms to means of ruling out potential medical etiologies, is not currently available to providers.  This text will assist providers in ruling out medical etiologies of common psychiatric symptoms, ensuring patients are diagnosed correctly.  Such an improvement has the potential to dramatically improve patient outcomes.

New Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry by John R. Geddes (Editor); Nancy C. Andreasen (Editor); Guy M. Goodwin (Editor) Over its two editions, The New Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry has come to be regarded as one of the most popular and trusted standard psychiatry texts among psychiatrists and trainees. Bringing together 146 chapters from the leading figures in the discipline, it presents a comprehensive account of clinical psychiatry, with reference to its scientific basis and to the patient's perspective throughout.The New Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry, Third Edition has been extensively re-structured and streamlined to keep pace with the significant developments that have taken place in the fields of clinical psychiatry and neuroscience since publication of the second edition in 2009. The new edition has been updated throughout to include the most recent versions of the two main classification systems - the DSM-5 and the ICD-11 - used throughout the world for the diagnosis of mental disorders.In the years since publication of the first edition, many new and exciting discoveries have occurred in the biological sciences, which are having a major impact on how we study and practise psychiatry. In addition, psychiatry has fostered closer ties with philosophy, and these are leading to healthy discussions about how we should diagnose and treat mental illness. This new edition recognises these and other developments.Throughout, accounts of clinical practice are linked to the underlying science, and to the evidence for the efficacy of treatments. Physical and psychological treatments, including psychodynamic approaches, are covered in depth. The history of psychiatry, ethics, public health aspects, and public attitudes to psychiatry and to patients are all given due attention.

Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry by David Semple; Roger Smyth This new fourth edition of the Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry is the essential, evidence-based companion to all aspects of psychiatry, from diagnosis and conducting a clinical interview to management by subspecialty. Fully updated to reflect changes to the legislature and classification of psychiatric disorders, and with coverage of the anticipated ICD-11 coding, this Handbook provides the latest advances in both clinical practice and management today.As in previous editions, the Handbook is indexed alphabetically by ICD-10 and DSM-5 codes,as well as a list of acute presentations for quick access in emergency situations. The practical layout helps the reader in making clinical diagnosis, and suggested differential diagnosis makes this title an invaluable guide to provide reassurance to health professionals when dealing with psychiatric issues. With a new chapter on Neuropsychiatry and a re-written section on gender dysphoria to reflect the biological and cultural developments in understanding and research since the previous edition, and filled with clinical observations, guidance, and commentary that reflects the authors' practical experiences of working in psychiatry, this Handbook is the indispensable guide for all trainee and practising psychiatrists.

Pocket Psychiatry by John B. Taylor; Judith Puckett; Scott R. Beach Pocket Psychiatry, a new addition to the Pocket Notebook series, is written by residents for residents. A resource for essential information, in a high-yield, easy-to-use format, designed to help students, trainees, and others navigate the initial psychiatric evaluation and management of the most commonly encountered psychiatric conditions. With an emphasis on evidence-based information, Pocket Psychiatry, provides a rare concise and accessible resource, for must-know information on hospital- and clinic-based psychiatric care -- from history and physical exam to differential diagnosis testing to therapeutics  -- in the well known loose leaf pocket size format.  Bulleted lists, tables, diagrams, and algorithms make essential facts easy to find and retain. Progress logically from symptoms to differential diagnosis, workup and diagnosis, assessment of risks and benefits of available treatments, to treatment and prognosis. Review of the highest impact trials and literature guiding psychiatric care. Covers all major psychiatric diagnosis, plus management of psychiatric emergencies, the intersection of the legal system and psychiatry, and addition of quick reference for the most commonly used medications in psychiatric management.  Written by psychiatry and medicine residents from the Harvard University, and edited by senior faculty. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech.

Postpsychiatry by Patrick Bracken; Philip Thomas How are we to make sense of madness and psychosis? For most of us the words conjure up images from television and newspapers of seemingly random, meaningless violence. It is something to be feared, something to be left to the experts. But is madness best thought of as a medical condition? Psychiatrists and the drug industry maintain that psychoses are brain disorders amenable to treatment with drugs, but is this actually so? There is no convincing evidence that the brain is disordered in psychosis, yet governments across the world are investing huge sums of money on mental health services that take for granted the idea that psychosis is an illness to be treated with medication. Although some people who use mental health services find medication helpful, many do not, and resist the idea that their experiences are symptoms of illnesses like schizophrenia. Consequently they are forced into having treatment against their wishes. So, how do we make sense of this situation? Postpsychiatry addresses these questions. It involves an attempt to rethink some of the fundamental assumptions of mental health work, showing how recent developments in philosophy and ethics can help us to clarify some of the dilemmas and conflicts around different understandings of madness. Throughout, the authors examine the conflicting ways in which politicians, academics, and mental health professionals appear to understand madness, and contrast this with voices and experiences that are usually excluded - those of the people who use mental health services. They then examine the power of psychiatry to shape how we understand ourselves and our emotions, before considering some of the basic limitations of psychiatry as science to make madness meaningful. In the final section of the book they draw on evidence from service users and survivors, the humanities and anthropology, to point out a new direction for mental health practice. This new direction emphasises the importance of cultural contexts in understanding madness, placing ethics before technology in responding to madness, and minimising 'therapeutic' coercion.

Practical Exercises for Mental Health Professionals by Jordan Bawks; Shelley Mcmain; Anne Sonley; Tony Rousmaniere; Alexandre Magalhaes Vaz While there are many books that describe the theories and research of clinical psychology and psychiatry, there are few resources that provide structured simulations for rehearsal and advancement of the critical skills mental health professionals need in the field. Advanced Therapeutics, Clinical and Interpersonal Skills series aims to fill that gap. Authored and edited by leading experts, each volume in the series focuses on one subfield within mental health, providing concise and practical exercises for professionals. Each volume is based on an empirically based pedagogy that is structured, incremental, and tightly focused on the essential skills mental health professionals must acquire to obtain licensure/registration and work effectively with mental health patients. Practical Exercises for Mental Health Professionals is volume one in the series, focusing on providing concise and practical exercises for clinicians of any theoretical orientation and clinical role. These exercises include repairing alliance ruptures, motivating patients to address barriers to change, suicidal behavior strategies and establishing boundaries and limits. Each of these exercises have been tested by leading experts and clinics in the field.

Practical Psychiatry for Students and Trainees by A. M. O'Dwyer; M. Campion Are you unsure what to ask in a psychiatric clinical interview and how to ask it? Are you a medical student or trainee doctor that needs a fast hands-on guide to psychiatry? This handbook sets out clinical interviewing skills and clinical tips so you can deliver essential psychiatric care with confidence. Almost all medical graduates will encounter patients with mental health issues in general medical and surgical settings. Practical Psychiatry for Students and Trainees provides the foundational skillset you need for interviewing, assessing, and initially managing a patient with mental health issues. Organised into 19 short chapters, this resource leads you logically from how to interview a patient, to the psychiatric conditions likely to be encountered and their treatments. Packed with practical tips and clinical cases from a variety of medical professionals, this text delivers clear guidance and skills. Written by an experienced psychiatrist and a psychiatric trainee, this book provides you with the core knowledge and skills needed to deliver self-assured care to patients with mental health needs.

Psych notes: clinical pocket guide by Darlene D. Pedersen "The author should be commended for covering key mental health clinical features in this small easy to carry pocket guide. This will be valuable and extremely useful.as a quick reference guide in the clinical setting."-Jayalakshmi Jambunathan, PhD, MSN, MA, BSN, BSc, University of Wisconsin - Oshkosh, for Doody Enterprises, review of 1st Edition. This handy pocket guide delivers quick access to need-to-know information on basic behavioral theories, key aspects of psychiatric and crisis interventions, mental status assessments and exams, mental health history and assessment tools, and more. The 1st Edition was an AJN Book of the Year award winner. Completely revised and thoroughly updated, the 2nd Edition delivers even more resources and tools. And, readers will continue to find all of the features that make the Davis's Notes series so popular.

Psychiatric Care of the Medical Patient by Barry S. Fogel; Donna B. Greenberg The third edition of Psychiatric Care of the Medical Patient brings a classic reference text into the twenty-first century. It combines critical scholarship with the voice of expert clinicians who work at the interface of psychiatry with medical specialties. It is meant to be read for pleasure as well as consulted as a reference. The editors have worked with the authors to bring a consistent perspective to the book - one that sees the medical psychiatrist as an agent for bringing a more comprehensive perspective to medical care. Even seasoned and knowledgeable practitioners will find much that is new to them in this book.The volume covers topics in depth that other books in the field may not cover at all, such as the use of herbal and nutritional therapies for medical-psychiatric symptoms and syndromes, and the choice of questionnaires to supplement history-taking. It looks at old topics in a new way: The chapter on the physical examination applies psychometric considerations to the Babinski sign, describes the method and application of quantitative bedside olfactory testing, and discusses smartphone apps to improve the sensitivity of the examination.Psychiatric Care of the Medical Patient, 3rd Edition provides concepts and information to facilitate the dialogue between psychiatrists and general medical specialists - minimizing psychiatric jargon and speaking in the common language of caring and curious physicians.

The Psychiatric Consult: Navigating Challenging Treatment Plans by Alyson Gorun (Editor); Anna M. Kim (Editor); Janna Gordon-Elliott (Editor); Christian Umfrid (Editor) This book guides psychiatry trainees through some of the most common psychiatric consultation requests in the general medical hospital, using accessible, case-based narratives. Clinical case scenarios are used to demonstrate how to consider both medical and psychological factors involved in the consultation, and the approach to challenging interpersonal dynamics that may occur between the hospitalized patient and the primary medical team. Each case illustrates how to begin to think like a consultation-liaison psychiatrist in order to arrive at a diagnosis and formulate a treatment plan in complex clinical situations. Cases unfold in real time to highlight the critical role of the psychiatrist as liaison to the patient and medical team in order to guide psychiatric management and facilitate effective communication and treatment in the hospital. In addition to clinical cases, each chapter features a concise list of strategies to identify and address patient symptoms and behaviors, interpersonal dynamics, and barriers to care that arise in the hospital.   The Psychiatric Consult features resident-specific recommendations and a case-based format that make it a unique, realistic, and engaging learning tool.

Psychiatry: An Illustrated Color Text by Lesley Stevens; Ian Rodin The third edition of this award-winning book offers an accessible and fun way of learning about the basic principles and practice of psychiatry. Psychiatry: An Illustrated Colour Text, Third Edition provides a highly visual experience, with each topic covered across two pages that you can review and digest easily. For each spread there are summary boxes, questions and answers and self-assessment tasks that will help with understanding and revision. This wonderful book covers a wide range of subjects, from mental health services to different treatments, the full range of disorders, and psychiatry specialisations. It thus provides an ideal introduction to psychiatry for medical students or anyone learning about mental health for the first time. Introductory level coverage of a complex topic, presented in an engaging way Concise double page spreads for each topic - allows you to absorb information quickly Stimulating and easy to read, with summaries and revision aids throughout Full-colour line diagrams to demonstrate essential concepts Practical advice on patient care Modern pharmacological treatment of psychiatric disorders Fully updated throughout Information on the new Mental Health Act A new section on Neurodevelopmental disorders

Psychiatry: a Very Short Introduction by Tom Burns Psychiatry is now a highly visible activity - care in the community, compulsion, suicide, drug and alcohol abuse mean that few people are not touched by it. Indeed one in four of us will consult a psychiatrist in our life time. This book explains what psychiatry is, and what it is not. It starts with the identification of the major mental illnesses and why they are no longer considered just variations of 'normality'. It charts the rise of the Asylum and its demise with the developments of Care in the Community, and the flourishing of psychoanalysis and its later transformation into more accessible psychotherapies.More than any other branch of medicine psychiatry has been attacked and criticised. There is a long catalogue of abuses - from mundane neglect and bizarre treatments through to political abuse by totalitarian regimes. Modern psychiatry too brings with it new controversies such as the medicalization of normal life, the power of the drug companies and the use of psychiatry as an agent of social control. The book does not shy away from outlining these issues but provides the reader with a clear understanding of what psychiatry is capable of, and what it is not capable of, so that they can draw their own conclusions.

Shorter Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry by Paul Harrison; Philip Cowen; Tom Burns; Mina Fazel Widely recognized as the standard text for trainee psychiatrists, the Shorter Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry stands head and shoulders above the competition. The text has been honed over seven editions, displaying a fluency, authority, and insight rarely found in textbooks which makes the process of assimilating information effective and enjoyable.The book provides an introduction to all the clinical topics, sub-specialties, and major psychiatric conditions required by the trainee psychiatrist. Throughout, the authors emphasize the basic clinical skills required for full assessment and understanding of the patient. Discussion of treatment includes not only scientific evidence, but also practical problems in the management of patients in a family and social context. Full attention to ethical and legal issues is given within the evidence-based approach to practice provided in the text. Introductory chapters focus on recognition of signs and symptoms, classification and diagnosis, psychiatric assessment, and aetiology. Further chapters deal with all the major psychiatric syndromes, as well as providing detailed coverage of pharmacological and psychological treatments. The book gives equal prominence to ICD and DSM classifications - often with direct comparisons - making the book relevant to the practice of psychiatry throughout the world.Boasting greater use of summary boxes, tables, and lists within a new modern design, the Shorter Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry remains the most up-to-date secondary level textbook of psychiatry available. The extensive bibliography has been brought up-to-date and there are targeted reading lists for each chapter. The Shorter Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry fulfils all the study and revision needs of psychiatric trainees, but will also prove useful to medical students, GPs, qualified psychiatrists, and those in related fields who need to be kept informed with current psychiatric practice.

Study guide to psychiatry: a companion to The American Psychiatric Association Publishing textbook of psychiatry, seventh edition by Philip R. Muskin; Anna L. Dickerman; Claire Holderness; Vivian Liu Study Guide to Psychiatry is a question-and-answer companion that allows you to evaluate your mastery of the subject matter as you progress through The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Psychiatry, Seventh Edition. The Study Guide is made up of more than 400 questions divided into 44 individual quizzes containing up to 20 questions each that correspond to the chapters in the Textbook. Questions are followed by an Answer Guide that references relevant text (including page numbers) in the Textbook to allow quick access to needed information. Each answer is accompanied by a discussion that addresses the correct response and also (when appropriate) explains why other responses are not correct. The Study Guide's companion, The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Psychiatry, Seventh Edition, reflects advances in the understanding of the etiology, diagnosis, and treatment of psychiatric disorders as well as the positive, transformational change that has taken place in the field of psychiatry as a whole since the last edition. This edition incorporates a deep understanding of mechanisms of disease, novel therapeutic methods, evidence-based clinical approaches, and adaptive systems and models of care.

Vagueness in Psychiatry by Geert Keil (Editor); Lara Keuck (Editor); Rico Hauswald (Editor) Blurred boundaries between the normal and the pathological are a recurrent theme in almost every publication concerned with the classification of mental disorders. However, systematic approaches that take into account the philosophical discussions about vagueness are rare. This is the first volume to systematically draw various lines of philosophical and psychiatric inquiry together, including the debates about categorical versus dimensional approaches in current psychiatric classification systems, the principles of psychiatric classification, the problem of prodromal phases and sub-threshold disorders, and the problem of over-diagnosis in psychiatry, and to explore the connections of these debates to philosophical discussions about vagueness. The book consists of three parts. The first part encompasses historical and recent philosophical positions regarding the nature of demarcation problems in nosology. Here, the authors discuss the pros and cons of gradualist approaches to health and disease, and the relevance of philosophical discussions of vagueness for these debates. The second part of the book narrows the focus to psychiatric nosology. The authors approach the vagueness of psychiatric classification by drawing on contentious medical categories, such as PTSD or schizophrenia, and on the dilemmas of day-to-day diagnostic and therapeutic practice. Against this background, the chapters critically evaluate how current revisions of the ICD and DSM manuals conceptualise mental disorders and how they are applied in various contexts. The third part is concerned with social, moral, and legal implications that arise when being mentally ill is a matter of degree. Not surprisingly, the law is ill-equipped to deal with these challenges due to its binary logic. Still, the authors show that there are more and less reasonable ways of dealing with blurred boundaries and of arriving at warranted decisions in hard cases.

The Virtues in Psychiatric Practice by John R. Peteet (Editor) There is growing recognition of the value dimension in psychiatric practice, from the contributions of positive psychology, of documenting the role of virtues in human flourishing and in the medical practice. However, the place of virtues in psychiatric treatment remains largely unexplored. How does a need for virtues fit into the processes of diagnosis, formulation, and treatment? What patient problems and factors should influence the therapist to promote forgiveness, gratitude, humility, or accountability? What is the relationship between the therapist's and the patient's virtues? What is the relevance of religious or spiritual resources to the formation of virtue? How does the cultivation of a particular virtue relate to psychodynamic, behavioral, existential, or spiritual approaches? What ethical questions does it raise, and what are its implications for psychiatric education?The Virtues in Psychiatric Practice explores the role of the virtues in promoting human flourishing within the context of psychiatric practice. Chapters uses case examples to consider the incentives of fostering particular virtues; the place of this approach among psychodynamic, behavioral, existential, or spiritual approaches; and the relationship between the therapist's and the patient's values. Virtues highlighted include forgiveness, gratitude, accountability, self-transcendence, defiance, humility, compassion, love, and practical wisdom. This discussion is organized according to four basic capacities relevant to moral enhancement - self-control, niceness, intelligence, and positivity - which correspond to the four cardinal virtues according to Plato and Aquinas - temperance, justice, prudence, and courage.Edited by psychiatrist and scholar John R. Peteet and written for psychiatrists, psychologists, and medical ethicists, this book will connect recent scientific research on virtue with clinical practice. It therefore aims to give readers a fuller appreciation of the importance of virtue in the therapeutic encounter, a clearer understanding of clinical indications for focusing on particular virtues, and enhanced practical ways of promoting human growth.

Brain, Behavior and Epigenetics by Arturas Petronis (Editor); Jonathan Mill (Editor) Biomedical research in the first decade of the 21st century has been marked by a rapidly growing interest in epigenetics. The reasons for this are numerous, but primarily it stems from the mounting realization that research programs focused solely on DNA sequence variation, despite their breadth and depth, are unlikely to address all fundamental aspects of human biology. Some questions are evident even to non-biologists. How does a single zygote develop into a complex multicellular organism composed of dozens of different tissues and hundreds of cell types, all genetically identical but performing very different functions? Why do monozygotic twins, despite their stunning external similarities, often exhibit significant differences in personality and predisposition to disease? If environmental factors are solely the cause of such variation, why are similar differences also observed between genetically identical animals housed in a uniform environment? Over the last couple of decades, epigenetics has undergone a significant metamorphosis from an abstract developmental theory to a very dynamic and rapidly developing branch of molecular biology. This volume represents a compilation of our current understanding about the key aspects of epigenetic processes in the brain and their role in behavior. The chapters in this book bring together some of the leading researchers in the field of behavioral epigenetics. They explore many of the epigenetic processes which operate or may be operating to mediate neurobiological functions in the brain and describe how perturbations to these systems may play a key role in mediating behavior and the origin of brain diseases.

Epigenetics in Psychiatry by Jacob Peedicayil (Editor); Dennis R. Grayson (Editor); Dimitri Avramopoulos (Editor) Epigenetics in Psychiatry covers all major areas of psychiatry in which extensive epigenetic research has been performed, fully encompassing a diverse and maturing field, including drug addiction, bipolar disorder, epidemiology, cognitive disorders, and the uses of putative epigenetic-based psychotropic drugs. Uniquely, each chapter correlates epigenetics with relevant advances across genomics, transcriptomics, and proteomics. The book acts as a catalyst for further research in this potentially very important and useful area of psychiatry. The elucidation of basic principles of epigenetic biology points to the creation of more optimal and effective therapies for major classes of psychiatric disease. In this regard, epigenetic therapy, the use of drugs to correct epigenetic defects, may help in the pharmacotherapy of patients with these disorders. With time, such advances may eventually point to replacements for psychotropic drugs presently of symptomatic value and low efficacy. Moreover, there is evidence to suggest that other forms of treatment commonly used in the management of psychiatric disorders, like psychotherapy and electroconvulsive therapy, may also act by epigenetic mechanisms.

Gene-Environment Interactions in Psychiatry: Nature, Nurture, Neuroscience by Bart Ellenbroek; Ji Un Youn Gene-Environment Interactions in Psychiatry: Nature, Nurture, Neuroscience begins with the basic aspects of gene-environment studies, such as basic genetics, principles of animals modeling, and the basic processes of how environmental factors affect brain and behavior, with part two describing the most important psychiatric disorders in detail. Each chapter has a similar structure that includes a general description of the disorder that is followed by an analysis of the role of genes and how they are affected by environmental factors. Each chapter ends with a description of the most relevant animal models, again focusing on gene-environment interactions. The book concludes with a critical evaluation of the current research and an outlook for the (possible) future, offering a vignette into the fascinating world of nature, nurture, and neuroscience.

Genomics, Circuits, and Pathways in Clinical Neuropsychiatry by Thomas Lehner (Editor); Bruce L. Miller (Editor); Matthew W. State (Editor) This foundational work comprehensively examines the current state of the genetics, genomics and brain circuitry of psychiatric and neurological disorders. It consolidates discoveries of specific genes and genomic regions associated with these conditions, the genetic and anatomic architecture of these syndromes, and addresses how recent advances in genomics are leading to a reappraisal of the biology underlying clinical neuroscience. In doing so, it critically examines the promise and limitations of these discoveries toward treatment, and to the interdisciplinary nature of understanding brain and behavior. Coverage includes new discoveries regarding autism, epilepsy, intellectual disability, dementias, movement disorders, language impairment, disorders of attention, schizophrenia, and bipolar disorder. Genomics, Circuits, and Pathways in Clinical Neuropsychiatry focuses on key concepts, challenges, findings, and methods in genetics, genomics, molecular pathways, brain circuitry, and related neurobiology of neurologic and psychiatric disorders.

Neuropsychiatric Disorders and Epigenetics by Jacob Peedicayil (Editor); Dennis R. Grayson (Editor) Neuropsychiatric Disorders and Epigenetics is a comprehensive reference for the epigenetic basis of most common neuropsychiatric disorders. The volume is organized into chapters representing individual neuropsychiatric disorders, from addition to obesity contributed by leading experts in their respective fields. The epigenetic aspects of each disorder are discussed, in the context of the full range of epigenetic mechanisms including DNA modification, histone post-translational modification, chromatin organization and non-coding RNA. A particular emphasis is placed on potential epigenetic interventions, when the effects of environmental stimuli on epigenetic states is particularly relevant o disease. Recent discoveries in epigenetic research enabled by epic advances in genomic technologies have positioned the field for broad translation to therapeutic interventions for previously unmanageable disorders Neuropsychiatric disorders represent a prime target of epigenetic interventions as they are highly debilitating, often chronic diseases with enormous costs to society. Thus, this volume will help define epigenetics as a key player in neuropsychiatric disorders, highlighting the full spectrum of epigenetic mechanisms underlying such disorders and introducing the vast range of epigenetic therapies under development.

Psychiatric Genetics: A Primer for Clinical and Basic Scientists by Thomas Schulze (Editor); Francis McMahon (Editor) Psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are increasingly confronted with questions about the genetics of psychiatric illness, and the clinical applications of new genetic findings. Psychiatric Genetics: A Primer for Clinical and Basic Scientists addresses these questions through a straightforward introduction to the essentials of psychiatric genetics, complementing more comprehensive textbooks that may seem overwhelming for those new to the field. Written and edited by leaders in the field and the International Society of Psychiatric Genetics (ISPG), the book covers basic epidemiology, recruitment for human studies, phenotyping strategies, formal genetic and molecular genetic studies, statistical genetics, bioinformatics and genomics, pharmacogenetics, the most relevant animal models, and biobanking. Each chapter begins with a list of "take home" points that summarizes content, followed by a brief overview of current knowledge and suggestions for further reading. This Primer is ideal for medical students, psychiatric residents, psychiatrists, and basic neuroscience researchers who are interested in learning about the key concepts and recent advances in the exciting field of psychiatric genetics.

Absolute Geriatric Psychiatry Review: Essential Questions and Answers by Rajesh Tampi (Editor); Deena Tampi (Editor); Juan Young (Editor); Rakin Hoq (Editor); Kyle Resnick (Editor) This book provides a comprehensive yet concise review of geriatric psychiatry in preparation for the board exam, or for reference during practice. Written by experts in the field, this text thoroughly reviews over 500 developmental, biological, diagnostic, and treatment questions for board certification. Unlike any other text on the market, this book takes a broader approach to the subject, making it accessible for physicians as well as other clinicians, including nurses, therapists, and social workers. Absolute Geriatric Psychiatry Review is an excellent resource for all clinicians who will care for the mental health of aging patients, including psychiatrists, neurologists, psychologists, therapists, nurses, social workers, nursing home administrators, and all others.

Addiction in the Older Patient by Maria Sullivan (Editor); Frances Levin (Editor) This text focuses on the under-recognized and undertreated problem of addiction in later life. The widespread lack of clinical knowledge about this patient population can be traced to several sources: the systematic exclusion of older individuals from clinical trials; their reluctance to seek medical help owing to stigma and shame; the fact that additive disorders may be disguised by concurrent medical conditions; a lack of screening instruments tailored to an older population; and the low sensitivity of standard diagnostic criteria for detecting addiction in middle-aged and elderly adults who do not display the occupational and legal "red flags" seen in younger individuals. This volume provides the reader with a clear sense of the surprisingly high prevalence of alcohol and substance use disorders in older adults. For each of the major classes of addictive substances, both prescribed and illicit, this book highlights the key clinical issues that can complicate successful diagnosis. The authors describe strategies for initial engagement with the patient, including screening instruments, brief interventions which can be adapted to a primary care setting, emerging web-based and mobile technologies, and treatment strategies which are tailored to the age-appropriate needs of older adults, including older women - who have been found to be especially vulnerable to prescription drug misuse. With the aging of the baby boomers, a generation arriving in middle-age with greater exposure to alcohol and drugs than any previous cohort, the need for successful identification and effective treatment of alcohol and substance use disorders in later life has become a clinical imperative. Addiction in the Older Patient, whose editors bring more than 40 years of combined research and clinical experience in the field of addiction treatment, offers a comprehensive introduction to this underexplored and timely topic. This text synthesizes current clinical evidence to support the most effective strategies for discovering and treating addictive disorders in our older patients.

The American Psychiatric Publishing Textbook of Geriatric Psychiatry by David C. Steffens (Editor); Dan G. Blazer (Editor); Mugdha E. Thakur (Editor) The American Psychiatric Publishing Textbook of Geriatric Psychiatry is an indispensable resource for psychiatric clinicians and trainees charged with assessing, diagnosing, and treating mental disorders in our nation's burgeoning population of older adults, as well as the nurses and other professionals who provide critically important care day to day. Building on the prodigious strengths of previous editions, this revision is the most current, comprehensive, and systematic textbook of geriatric psychiatry available today, and the only one that is DSM-5 concordant. The text's organization is user-friendly and practical, with sections addressing the basic science of geriatric psychiatry, the diagnostic interview in late life, psychiatric disorders in late life, treatment, and special topics. In addition, an array of useful features are included: * The new DSM-5 structure and classifications have been integrated into every chapter, ensuring that readers understand how the changes impact diagnosis and patient care. * Not only do the authors provide up-to-date information on psychiatric disorders, they also contextualize that information for the geriatric population, presenting the latest thinking on the phenomenology, diagnosis, and assessment of late-life mental disorders such as dementia and other neurocognitive disorders, mood disorders, anxiety disorders, and circadian rhythm disorders. * All treatment sections have been thoroughly updated to incorporate the most recent knowledge and research findings on psychotherapeutic, psychopharmacological, and other somatic treatments.* The book offers an impressive set of graphical and illustrative features to help the reader comprehend and retain the material, including outlines, bulleted key points, and tables, as well as lists of essential readings to deepen understanding of complex topics. Widely recognized as the standard in its field, The American Psychiatric Publishing Textbook of Geriatric Psychiatry serves a critical need for clinicians challenged to meet the mental health needs of an aging population.

Casebook of Clinical Geropsychology: international perspectives on practice by Nancy Pachana (Editor); Ken Laidlaw (Editor); Bob Knight (Editor) Geropsychology - the field of psychology concerned with the psychological, behavioural, biological, and social aspects of aging - has developed rapidly in the past 2 decades, in response to the ever increasing aging population worldwide. This clinical casebook describes current best practice in managing complex cases involving common mental health issues in later life. It includes chapters by leading authorities in the field - both experienced clinicians and educators - who address contemporary issues in clinical work with older adults. It will be useful for clinicians wishing to update their practice, educators looking for case material to enrich their didactic courses, and students and fledgling practitioners seeking guidance in approaching casework with older adults. The book spans the international arena of practice, illustrating both universal themes in clinical work as well as regional practice issues that can inform health professionals more broadly.Each chapter is designed to inform the reader about the rich context in which clinical work occurs, including how the setting, the therapist's approach and the nature of the problem interact to influence outcomes. Throughout, the cases have been carefully chosen to reflect archetypal scenarios and provide practical, empirically informed guidance for assessment, formulation and interventions. The cases included deal with complex issues of diagnosis and formulation, assessment and intervention techniques, ethical and legal issues, and interdisciplinary perspectives that will appeal to a wide range of mental health professionals. The text provides points for reflection from the cases, as well as key references in the area, with an emphasis on current issues and theoretical perspectives. Providing a range of expertise in a single source, this book is an invaluable resource for anyone dealing with the mental health needs of older people.

Clinical Manual of Geriatric Psychiatry by Mugdha E. Thakur (Editor); Dan G. Blazer (Editor); David C. Steffens (Editor) Clinical Manual of Geriatric Psychiatry provides the most current information on psychiatric diagnoses seen in older patients in a concise format. Each chapter is broken into easily understandable, increasingly focused sections, and contains an extensive array of tables, references, and suggested readings. Chapters include clinically relevant information and evidence-based treatments for a wide range of topics and disorders: * The psychiatric interview of older adults, including history, family assessment, mental status examination, rating scales and standardized interviews, and effective communication techniques.* Psychopharmacology, including information on antidepressants, psychostimulants, antipsychotic medications, mood stabilizers, anxiolytics and sedative-hypnotics, and cognitive enhancers.* Diagnosis and treatment of delirium, dementia, mood disorders, schizophrenia, anxiety disorders, sleep disorders, and substance use disorders, including coverage of definition, epidemiology, clinical features, risk factors, diagnosis and differential diagnosis, prevention and management, and treatment guidelines.* Individual and group psychotherapy strategies, including individual and group-based cognitive-behavioral therapies, interpersonal psychotherapies, relaxation training, cognitive stimulation therapy, and behavioral therapies.* Clinical psychiatry in the nursing home, with a focus on cognitive disorders and behavioral disturbances, depression, treatment progress in this setting, and relevant federal regulations. Written by experts in geriatric psychiatry, this clinical manual provides a much-needed "field guide" for the care of nursing home patients and older adults. Busy clinicians, as well as researchers, residents, fellows, clinical psychologists, and social workers, will find this compact volume to be of the utmost value, as will anyone seeking to update their knowledge of geriatric psychiatry.

Culture, Heritage, and Diversity in Older Adult Mental Health Care by Maria Llorente (Editor) Health care organizations are beginning to recognize the importance of cultural competence as it relates to efficiency, quality, and equity in the delivery of care within a competitive health care market, and Culture, Heritage, and Diversity in Older Adult Mental Health Care is designed to train mental health clinicians to deliver culturally sensitive care to an increasingly diverse patient population. Projections indicate that 35% of patients older than age 65 will be from a racial or ethnic minority group by 2050, compared with 11% in 1970. Today's mental health practitioners require knowledge, sensitivity, and an understanding of institutionalized practices and systems that undermine their patients' health and well-being. The term culture is multifaceted and may refer to one's belief system, values, religion, race, socioeconomic status, ethnicity, language, sexual orientation, geographic location, educational level, age, occupational risks and exposures, and gender. The authors of the book examine mental health care through these lenses, teaching the reader about implicit biases and potential miscommunication and offering strategies for overcoming these difficulties. The editor, who has worked in leadership positions overseeing veterans' mental health services, has assembled an impressive and diverse roster of contributors, each with specific expertise in his or her assigned subject. * The ways in which cultural competency interacts with the six Accreditation Council for Graduate Medical Education core competencies are explored in detail. For example, in terms of patient care, cultural competency plays an important role in gathering subjective data about a patient that may ultimately impact outcomes. Teaching methods to increase cultural sensitivity and build skills in this area are highlighted, as are training modalities and clinician evaluation.* The effects of migration and acculturation on mental health are examined, providing clinicians with several theoretical frameworks for understanding the migratory experience in older adults and exploring psychosocial factors associated with psychological risk in aging immigrants.* Linguistic competence, defined broadly as effective communication with individuals speaking a nondominant language, is an essential component of culturally competent health care and is of particular importance in mental health care. Accordingly, the authors analyze linguistic competency in both administrative and clinical encounters and present strategies for achieving mastery in this critically important area.* The text provides an abundance of tables and pedagogical features designed to enhance comprehension, including learning objectives, key points, and study questions. Cultural competence in health care systems is defined as the ability to understand and integrate the features listed above into the provision of health care services. Culture, Heritage, and Diversity in Older Adult Mental Health Care prepares clinicians to provide sensitive, high-quality, culturally competent care to geriatric patients from diverse backgrounds and will prove indispensable as patient demographics continue to change.

Depression in Later Life by Robert C. Baldwin Depression affects between 10-15% of older people, making it the most frequently encountered mental health condition in later life. Despite this, the condition is easily missed in clinical practice or not adequately treated. Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library, this second edition of Depression in Later Life highlights areas of depression which are of special relevance to later life, how to diagnose depression in an older person, the overlap with dementia and various other physical illnesses, and important pharmacological and psychological considerations. All chapters have been updated with new data where relevant, and case vignettes are included to ensure the book is relatable and easy to read.

Essential Reviews in Geriatric Psychiatry by Rajesh R. Tampi (Editor); Deena Tampi (Editor); Juan J. Young (Editor); Meera Balasubramaniam (Editor); Pallavi Joshi (Editor) This book critically reviews 75 important published papers that influence the practice of geriatric psychiatry. This book will assist anyone who is interested in the care of older adults with psychiatric disorders. It was written by thought leaders who shape the way geriatric psychiatry is currently practiced in the United States. All the major psychiatric disorders in later life are covered including anxiety disorders, bipolar disorders, depressive disorders, neurocognitive disorders, psychotic disorders, sleep disorders, and substance use disorders. It also reviews important studies on suicides in late life and interventional procedures in geriatric psychiatry like the ECT, and also evaluates the adverse effects of psychotropic medications on older adults with psychiatric disorders.     The editors of the book along with input from members of the teaching and training committee of the American Association for Geriatric Psychiatry (AAGP) have chosen 75 published papers from the field of geriatric psychiatry that they believe provides the highest knowledge-yield/impact for practicing clinicians and educators in the field of geriatric mental health. The AAGP is a national association that represents and serves its members and the field of geriatric psychiatry. These 75 papers are critically appraised by the members of AAGP using a standardized format and a summary of these papers and their practical application is provided by these experts. This information can be used by anyone who wants to learn about the field of geriatric psychiatry.

Guide to the Psychiatry of Old Age by David Ames; Edmond Chiu; James Lindesay; Kenneth I. Shulman With rapid ageing of the world's population, psychiatry of old age has become a crucial discipline. This succinct guide to the scope and practice of the psychiatry of old age provides an up-to-date summary of existing knowledge, best practice and future challenges for the specialty, from a global perspective. From definitions and demography to epidemiology, aetiology, and principles of assessment, diagnosis and management, each chapter is sharp, clear and practical, enhanced by tables and diagrams for quick assimilation and reference on the ward or in the clinic. As well as the main psychiatric conditions encountered in old age, coverage also includes legal and ethical issues, and the neglected topic of alcohol and drug abuse in the elderly. Written by leading clinicians, teachers and researchers and offering a much-needed international focus, this compact guide is essential reading for practising psychiatrists and geriatricians, as well as trainees, nurses and medical students.

Handbook of Mental Health and Aging by Nathan Hantke (Editor); Amit Etkin (Editor); Ruth O'Hara (Editor) The Handbook of Mental Health and Aging, Third Edition provides a foundational background for practitioners and researchers to understand mental health care in older adults as presented by leading experts in the field. Wherever possible, chapters integrate research into clinical practice. The book opens with conceptual factors, such as the epidemiology of mental health disorders in aging and cultural factors that impact mental health. The book transitions into neurobiological-based topics such as biomarkers, age-related structural changes in the brain, and current models of accelerated aging in mental health. Clinical topics include dementia, neuropsychology, psychotherapy, psychopharmacology, mood disorders, anxiety, schizophrenia, sleep disorders, and substance abuse. The book closes with current and future trends in geriatric mental health, including the brain functional connectome, repetitive transcranial magnetic stimulation (rTMS), technology-based interventions, and treatment innovations.

Home-Based Medical Care for Older Adults: A Clinical Case Book by Jessica Colburn (Editor); Bruce Leff (Editor); Jennifer Hayashi (Editor); Mattan Schuchman (Editor) As the population of older adults in the U.S. continues to grow, medical house calls are increasingly part of a system of comprehensive home-based care for patients who have difficulty accessing office-.based care. Clinicians who have been trained mostly in office and hospital settings must adapt their usual approaches to accommodate a wide range of environmental, social, and physical circumstances that impact home-limited patients. Ideally, a comprehensive team of clinicians proficient in multiple domains of functional, social, and medical care can work together to address potential gaps in any one clinician's expertise. Unfortunately, such teams are still rare. This book aims to equip individual clinicians with the interdisciplinary knowledge, skills, and perspective they need to provide the best care possible with limited formal interdisciplinary support. This book offers 20 patient cases drawn from the collective experience of experts in home-based medical care from highly respected academic and clinical programs across the United States. Each case demonstrates a scenario that is frequently encountered and/or very important in home-based medical care practice. Each scenario frequently proves to be challenging for many professionals because it requires an approach or leverages aspects of care delivery that most are not trained in. Additionally, each scenario reflects an approach to care that is enhanced by interdisciplinary input. Finally, each case lends itself to a practical problem-solving approach that could be accomplished by most home-based medical care providers, even in the absence of an interdisciplinary team. Written by interdisciplinary experts in geriatric home-based care, this book serves as both an educational tool for learners in all related disciplines as well as a quick reference for experienced clinicians looking to augment their existing house call "toolbox." 

Improving Psychiatric Care for Older People: Barbara Robb’s Campaign 1965-1975 by Claire Hilton This book is open access under a CC BY 4.0 license. This book tells the story of Barbara Robb and her pressure group, Aid for the Elderly in Government Institutions (AEGIS). In 1965, Barbara visited 73-year-old Amy Gibbs in a dilapidated and overcrowded National Health Service psychiatric hospital back-ward. She was so appalled by the low standards that she set out to make improvements. Barbara's book Sans Everything: A case to answer was publicly discredited by a complacent and self-righteous Ministry of Health. However, inspired by her work, staff in other hospitals 'whistle-blew' about events they witnessed, which corroborated her allegations. Barbara influenced government policy, to improve psychiatric care and health service complaints procedures, and to establish a hospitals' inspectorate and ombudsman. The book will appeal to campaigners, health and social care staff and others working with older people, and those with an interest in policy development in England, the 1960s, women's history and the history of psychiatry and nursing.

Mental Health, Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities and the Ageing Process by Vee P. Prasher (Editor); Philip W. Davidson (Editor); Flavia H. Santos (Editor) This book brings together findings from research and clinical practice, with comprehensive coverage of the important aspects of mental health in ageing persons with intellectual and developmental  disabilities. It is crucial for professionals involved in the care of persons with all intellectual  and developmental  disabilities to have a broad understanding of the essential range of issues, and therefore this book provides a truly multi-disciplinary perspective, complete with many figures and illustrations to underline the key points. Undoubtedly, research and clinical practice are much more advanced in the general ageing population than in persons with intellectual and developmental disabilities, and so professionals and academics must be made fully aware of commonalities and idiosyncrasies of older people with intellectual and developmental disabilities. This book presents the ongoing developments concerningmental health and aging, which will become relevant to the intellectually disabled population. Through experience, this book also acknowledges that the impact on the persons themselves and on their carers always needs to be taken into account, with treatment programs established with a multi-faceted team approach in mind. Avoiding the jargon of many titles in this area while maintaining the hands-on approach of clinical practice, this book meshes the practical and scientific worlds, with all chapters written by leading experts in the field. Beyond the US, the IASSIDD support expands the book message worldwide.  

The Oxford Handbook of Clinical Geropsychology by Nancy A. Pachana (Editor); Ken Laidlaw (Editor) Throughout the world, the population of older adults continues to grow. The rise in geriatric populations has seen an increase in research on clinical diagnostic, assessment, and treatment issues aimed at this population. Clinical geropsychologists have increased their interest both in providing mental health services as well as developing approaches to improve quality of life for all older adults. The Oxford Handbook of Clinical Geropsychology is a landmark publication in this field, providing broad and authoritative coverage of the research and practice issues in clinical geropsychology today, as well as innovations expanding the field's horizons. Comprising chapters from the foremost scholars in clinical geropsychology from around the world, the handbook captures the global proliferation of activity in this field. In addition to core sections on topics such as sources of psychological distress, assessment, diagnosis, and intervention, the handbook includes valuable chapters devoted to methodological issues such as longitudinal studies and meta-analyses in the field, as well as new and emerging issues such as technological innovations and social media use in older populations. Each chapter offers a review of the most pertinent international literature, outlining current issues as well as important cultural implications and key practice issues where relevant, and identifying possibilities for future research and policy applications.The book is essential to all psychology researchers, practitioners, educators, and students with an interest in the mental health of older adults. In addition, health professionals - including psychiatrists, social workers, mental health nurses, and trainee geriatric mental heatlh workers - will find this a invaluable resource. Older adults comprise a growing percentage of the population worldwide. Clinical psychologists with an interest in older populations have increased the amount of research and applied knowledge about effectively improving mental health later in life, and this book captures that information on an international level. The book addresses how to diagnose, assess and treat mental illness in older persons, as well as ways to improve quality of life in all older persons. It has a great breadth of coverage of the area, including chapters spanning how research is conducted to how new technologies such as virtual reality and social media are used with older people to improve mental health. The book would appeal to all psychology researchers, practitioners, educators and students with an interest in the mental health of older adults. It would also appeal to other health professionals, including psychiatrists, social workers, and mental health nurses who work with older people. It is a valuable resource for trainee geriatric mental health workers because it highlights key readings and important practice implications in the field.

Old Age Psychiatry by Bart Sheehan; Salman Karim; Alistair Burns This handbook covers the scientific, clinical and service background for practitioners involved in the care of older people with psychiatric disorders. Expanding older populations and increasing attention on mental disorder in old age have focused attention on the need for responsive, humane, efficient and effective services. The greatest interest has been in the identification and treatment of dementia; it has also become clear how very common the other psychiatric disorders including depression, schizophrenia, anxiety disorders and substance abuse are in older age. While specialist services proliferate, more general services, for example in general hospital medical teams, or adult community psychiatric services, continue to manage many older people with psychiatric illness. This handbook provides a clear grounding in the scientific and moral basis of the speciality and up-to-date evidence on how to proceed in the most commonly encountered clinical situations in a manageable and easy-to-use format . It will be of value to specialists, to those setting up services, to non-specialists treating older patients and to students learning about these disorders. All three authors are busy clinicians in old age psychiatry as well as active teachers and researchers in this area. Through international professional and research links, they marry a UK to an international perspective.

Oxford Textbook of Old Age Psychiatry by Tom Dening (Editor); Alan Thomas (Editor) The Oxford Textbook of Old Age Psychiatry, Second Edition, previously called Psychiatry in the Elderly, is an updated and revised version of this popular and highly respected textbook.The book has established itself as the standard textbook in its field due to its unique combination of comprehensive coverage, clear writing, and authoritative and up-to-date information. This new edition maintains these strengths, with chapters covering the basic sciences underpinning old age psychiatry, clinical practice, psychiatric services for older people, specific disorders, and medico-legal and ethical issues. This new updated edition involves 96 contributors from around the world bringing a truly global perspective to the textbook, and highlighting both the common burdens and the differences in management from country to country.New chapters have been included to reflect the development of old age care, covering palliative care, ethics of caring, and living and dying with dementia. Chapters have been revised and updated throughout with expanded chapters including those on brain stimulation therapies, memory clinics and services, and capacity, which has been extended to include all mental capacity and decision making. Broad in its coverage, written by experts in their fields, and maintaining a clear structure throughout, the new second edition of the Oxford Textbook of Old Age Psychiatry is the essential reference for all old age psychiatrists as well as all those interested in the mental health care of older people.

Practical Strategies in Geriatric Mental Health: Cases and Approaches by Laura B. Dunn (Editor); Erin L. Cassidy-Eagle (Editor) The experienced editors of Practical Strategies in Geriatric Mental Health: Cases and Approaches recognize that older patients can pose unique challenges to general practitioners working outside this specialty, and that the shortage of geriatric mental health specialists makes the creation of trustworthy, user-friendly resources more critical than ever. In response, they produced this book to be accessible not only to physicians and mental health practitioners, but also to a broader audience of care and service providers for older adults, such as social workers and nurses. From the depressed patient who has not responded to one or more trials of antidepressants and is now losing weight and rarely leaving home, to the patient with major neurocognitive disorder whose behavior has become increasingly difficult for caregivers, older adults frequently present with complex diagnostic and treatment challenges. Each chapter focuses on a specific symptom or disorder (e.g., depressive symptoms/syndromes, anxiety, neurocognitive disorder with behavioral disturbance, grief) and begins with a "chief complaint," borrowed from common real-world clinical scenarios. A brief clinical vignette portrays how the chief complaint is often presented, followed by relevant discussion of practical approaches to assessment, diagnosis, and treatment. These cases bring the material to life and illustrate relevant clinical applications, as well as the nuances of common presentations. * Chapters are consistent in structure, flowing from the case illustration to diagnostic and assessment tools to treatment options, and ending with a return to the case to integrate the material presented.* Clinical guidelines and assessment tools suitable for both nonexperts and experts are provided for use in clinical encounters to assess functioning and treatment effectiveness.* Easy-to-follow algorithms, brief behavioral interventions, additional resources (e.g., organizations, websites, books to recommend to patients and families), and clear, take-home pearls are also included, making this text a valuable repository of usable information.* The text acknowledges the reality that the patient belongs to a family system. Family members, who are often also caregivers, have questions and fears--and their own medical and mental health conditions. Accordingly, the authors carefully consider family input and influence on the clinical situation. Comorbid medical conditions, the increased likelihood of medication interactions, and the presence of cognitive changes all can complicate and confuse the clinical picture. Practical Strategies in Geriatric Mental Health: Cases and Approaches brings the geriatric psychiatrist's knowledge base and armamentarium to the reader, who will find its guidance essential and empowering.

The Oxford Handbook of Hoarding and Acquiring by Randy O. Frost (Editor); Gail Steketee (Editor) Hoarding involves the acquisition of and inability to discard large numbers of possessions that clutter the living area of the person collecting them. It becomes a disorder when the behavior causes significant distress or interferes with functioning. Hoarding can interfere with activities of daily living (such as being able to sit in chairs or sleep in a bed), work efficiency, family relationships, as well as health and safety. Hoarding behavior can range from mild to life-threatening. Epidemiological findings suggest that hoarding occurs in 2-6% of the adult population, making it two to three times more common than obsessive-compulsive disorder. The fifth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-5) now includes Hoarding Disorder as a distinct disorder within the OCD and Related Anxiety Disorders section, creating a demand for information about it. The Oxford Handbook of Hoarding and Acquiring is the first volume to detail the empirical research on hoarding. Including contributions from all of the leading researchers in the field, this comprehensive volume is divided into four sections in addition to introductory and concluding chapters by the editors: Phenomenology, Epidemiology, and Diagnosis; Etiology; Assessment and Intervention; and Hoarding in Special Populations. The summaries of research and clinical interventions contained here clarify the emotional and behavioral features, diagnostic challenges, and nature of the treatment interventions for this new disorder. This handbook will be a critical resource for both practitioners and researchers, including psychiatrists, psychologists, neurologists, epidemiologists, social workers, occupational therapists, and other health and mental health professionals who encounter clients with hoarding problems in their practice and research.

Possessed: A Cultural History of Hoarding by Rebecca R. Falkoff In Possessed, Rebecca R. Falkoff asks how hoarding?once a paradigm of economic rationality?came to be defined as a mental illness. Hoarding is unique among the disorders included in the American Psychiatric Association's DSM-5, because its diagnosis requires the existence of a material entity: the hoard. Possessed therefore considers the hoard as an aesthetic object produced by clashing perspectives about the meaning or value of objects. The 2000s have seen a surge of cultural interest in hoarding and those whose possessions overwhelm their living spaces. Unlike traditional economic elaborations of hoarding, which focus on stockpiles of bullion or grain, contemporary hoarding results in accumulations of objects that have little or no value or utility. Analyzing themes and structures of hoarding across a range of literary and visual texts?including works by Nikolai Gogol, Arthur Conan Doyle, Carlo Emilio Gadda, Luigi Malerba, Song Dong and E. L. Doctorow?Falkoff traces the fraught materialities of the present to cluttered spaces of modernity: bibliomaniacs' libraries, flea markets, crime scenes, dust-heaps, and digital archives. Possessed shows how the figure of the hoarder has come to personify the economic, epistemological, and ecological conditions of modernity. Thanks to generous funding from New York University and its participation in TOME (Toward an Open Monograph Ecosystem), the ebook editions of this book are available as Open Access (OA) volumes from Cornell Open (cornellpress.cornell.edu/cornell-open) and other Open Access repositories.

Clinical Management of the Homeless Patient: Social, Psychiatric, and Medical Issues by Elspeth Cameron Ritchie (Editor); Maria Llorente (Editor) This volume highlights the socioeconomic concerns related to medical care for homeless patients and places them at the interface of common psychiatric and medical problems clinicians encounter. Written by experts in psychiatry and other medical specialties, this volume is a concise, yet comprehensive overview of the homeless crisis, its costs, and ultimately, best practices for improved outcomes.  The text begins by examining the scope and epidemiology of the problem and discusses its costs.  It then examines the best practices for both physical and psychiatric care before concluding with a section on working with special populations that have unique concerns across the country including LGBTQ, women, children, veterans, and aging adults. As the first medical book on homelessness, it is designed to cover a broad range of concerns in a concise, practical fashion for all clinicians working with homeless patients.   Clinical Management of the Homeless Patient is written by and for psychiatrists, general internists, geriatricians, pediatricians, addiction medicine physicians, VA physicians, and all others who may encounter this crisis in their work.  

Homelessness and Mental Health by João Mauricio Castaldelli-Maia (Editor); Antonio Ventriglio (Editor); Dinesh Bhugra (Editor) Whilst the number of people currently experiencing homelessness cannot be precisely estimated due to varying definitions across countries and cultures, the link between homelessness and mental health disorders is undeniable. Both are strongly affected by social and economic determinants such as poverty, migration, unemployment, access to healthcare, and urbanization and, as a result, providing optimal care in the community requires understanding of the cultural context. Part of the Oxford Cultural Psychiatry series, this unique resource provides an overview of the connection between homelessness and mental health around the globe. Over 27 chapters it offers up-to-date research and policy evidence with an emphasis on developing models of social care and rehabilitation at a local level that enable easy access to mental health services. Written and edited by experts drawn from different cultural and geographical perspectives, this unique resource covers key topics such as COVID-19, dental issues, and chronic pain, the experiences of specific vulnerable groups, as well as case studies from specific countries.

Nowhere to Go: The Tragic Odyssey of the Homeless Mentally Ill by E. Fuller Torrey This open access book attempts to answer the question, "Why are so many severely mentally ill people homeless or incarcerated?"  Updated since it's original 1988 release, this book tracks the history of this question in the United States. The answer begins in 1955, when the United States deinstitutionalized the 559,000 patients who were in state mental hospitals. Today, only 35,000 remain. In 1963, Congress funded President Kennedy's proposed federally funded Community Mental Health Centers (CMHCs), whose main purpose was to provide care for the patients being released from the hospitals. However, most of the CMHCs never did so, but rather became counseling centers for individuals with less serious mental illnesses. The lack of psychiatric aftercare for severely mentally ill individuals resulted in more than 200,000 of them who are homeless and more than 250,000 others who are in jails and prisons. This story also includes little known details such as the role played by conscientious objectors who worked in the state hospitals during WWII; Rosemary Kennedy's psychosis; the influence of the conservative John Birch society on Presidents Nixon and Reagan; and mental health myths incorrectly attributed to Reagan. Finally, the book discusses what needs to be done to improve the mental illness treatment system. This is an ideal guide for psychiatrists, psychologists, and members of the public who are concerned about homelessness.

Brain Imaging in Behavioral Medicine and Clinical Neuroscience by Lawrence H. Sweet (Editor); Ronald A. Cohen (Editor) Rapid developments in brain neuroimaging methods have occurred over the past decade. These advances have revolutionized cognitive and behavioral neuroscience, and are likely to have major influence on clinical psychological, psychiatric, and neurological practice over the coming years. There are a number of excellent books that focus on specific neuroimaging methods, such as fMRI. Furthermore, cognitive and neuroscience texts have increasingly incorporated functional brain neuroimaging. Yet, there are few books to date that consider and review emerging research in the application of brain neuroimaging methods for the study and assessment of behavioral and cognitive disorders. This book provides a broad coverage of current research trends in the clinical application of brain neuroimaging methods in the context of behavioral medicine, neuropsychology, and related areas of medical psychology. It uniquely integrates current neuroimaging methods and studies with current behavioral medicineresearch, and presents knowledge derived from recent developments in the fields of functional and structural brain imaging. By integrating information from experimental behavioral medicine with clinical insights, this book will serve as a source book for neuropsychologists, psychologists, neurologists, psychiatrists, and other professionals in both clinical practice and academic context. This integration results in the reader having a greater understanding of how the brain controls behavior, the disturbances of behavior that may occur with different disorders, and what clinicians should consider when assessing or working with patients with behavioral problems.

Neuroimaging and Neurophysiology in Psychiatry by David Linden An introduction to Neuroimaging and Neurophysiology in Psychiatry, this book explains the basic physics and physiology behind the main techniques of neuroimaging, including MRI and PET, and non-invasive neurophysiology. This title covers all the clinically relevant aspects of neuroimaging and neurophysiology methods. It includes individual chapters on techniques, diagnostic disease markers, and neurophysiological treatments to ensure psychiatrists are familiar with the clinical relevance of reported abnormalities.With the latest research, Neuroimaging and Neurophysiology in Psychiatry is an invaluable and easy-to-read reference that will help practising psychiatrists in the evaluation of the use of neuroimaging methods in clinical, research, and forensic settings.

Neuroimaging in Human Memory: linking cognitive processes to neural systems by Frank Rösler (Editor); Charan Ranganath (Editor); Brigitte Röder (Editor); Rainer Kluwe (Editor) In the past 20 years, neuroimaging has provided us with a wealth of data regarding human memory. However, to what extent can neuroimaging constrain, support or falsify psychological theories of memory? To what degree is research on the biological bases of memory actually guided by psychological theory?In looking at the close interaction between neuroimaging research and psychological theories of human memory, this book presents a state-of-the-art exploration of imaging research on human memory, along with accounts of the significance of these findings with regard to fundamental psychological questions. The book starts with a summary of some of the conceptual problems we face in understanding neuroimaging data. It then looks at the four areas of human memory research that have been most intensively studied with modern brain imaging tools - Learning and consolidation, Working memory control processes and storage, Long-term memory representations, and Retrieval control processes. Throughout, the book shows how brain imaging methods, such as functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI) and electroencephalography (EEG), can help us increase our knowledge of how human memory is organized, how memory representations are stored, consolidated and retrieved, and how access to memory contents is controlled. With all chapters written by leading researchers in the field, the book will be essential for all those interested in the psychology and neuroscience of memory.

Neuroimaging Personality, Social Cognition, and Character by John R. Absher (Editor); Jasmin Cloutier (Editor) Neuroimaging Personality, Social Cognition, and Character covers the science of combining brain imaging with other analytical techniques for use in understanding cognition, behavior, consciousness, memory, language, visual perception, emotional control, and other human attributes. Multidimensional brain imaging research has led to a greater understanding of character traits such as honesty, generosity, truthfulness, and foresight previously unachieved by quantitative mapping. This book summarizes the latest brain imaging research pertaining to character with structural and functional human brain imaging in both normal individuals and those with brain disease or disorder, including psychiatric disorders.By reviewing and synthesizing the latest structural and functional brain imaging research related to character, this book situates itself into the larger framework of cognitive neuroscience, psychiatric neuroimaging, related fields of research, and a wide range of academic fields, such as politics, psychology, medicine, education, law, and religion.

PET and SPECT in Psychiatry by Rudi A. J. O. Dierckx (Editor); Andreas Otte (Editor); Erik F. J. de Vries (Editor); Aren van Waarde (Editor); Iris E. Sommer (Editor) This book provides a comprehensive overview of the use of PET and SPECT in the classic psychiatric disorders such as depression, bipolar disorder, anxiety disorders, and schizophrenia. In addition, it discusses the application of these functional neuroimaging techniques in a variety of other conditions, including sleep disorders, eating disorders, autism, and chronic fatigue syndrome. The new edition has been extensively revised and updated to reflect the latest advances and results in nuclear imaging within the field. Most chapters are written jointly by a clinical psychiatrist and a nuclear medicine expert to ensure a multidisciplinary approach. This state of the art compendium will be of value for all who have an interest in the field of neuroscience, from psychiatrists and radiologists/nuclear medicine specialists to interested general practitioners and cognitive psychologists. Companion volumes on the use of PET and SPECT in neurology and for the imaging of neurobiological systems complete a trilogy.

Immunopsychiatry: A Clinician's Introduction to the Immune Basis of Mental Disorders by Antonio L. Teixeira (Editor); Moises E. Bauer (Editor) In recent years, a dedicated effort has been made to understand the immune dysfunction that is associated with major psychiatric disorders. The expanding knowledge of the immune system as a major homeostatic system has been very helpful in indicating new potential biomarkers and therapeutic targets to reduce the burden of psychiatric disorders. Indeed, immune cells, their secreted molecules, and cell signalling events are highly promising. Yet, the literature on immunology of psychiatric disorders is still dispersed, and only a few attempts have been made to consolidate the current knowledge in this expanding area.This book assembles and presents the available data on the immune/inflammatory dysfunction in psychiatric disorders, indicating the potential of immune mechanisms as either biomarkers or therapeutic targets, as well as discussing the challenges ahead of incorporating this knowledge into clinical practice. An international team of senior experts in the field review all psychiatric disorders in order to provide an integrated, in-depth understanding of the role of immune changes in psychiatric diseases for mental health clinicians as well as for researchers in immunology, psychiatry, neurology, and pharmacology.

Longer-Term Psychiatric Inpatient Care for Adolescents: A Multidisciplinary Treatment Approach by Philip Hazell (Editor) This open access book describes the theoretical underpinnings and operational aspects of delivering longer-term inpatient psychiatric care to adolescents experiencing severe, unremitting mental illness. The authorship is drawn from the multidisciplinary team that supports the Walker Adolescent Unit, located in Sydney, Australia. The book begins with an account of the planning and development of the unit, an examination of the physical environment, and the adaptations that have been made to ensure its functionality. There follows a consideration of the therapeutic milieu. The book describes clinical processes such as admission and discharge planning, formulation and case review. There is information about the specific roles of professionals and the therapies that they provide. The book describes the steps taken to maintain and enhance the physical wellbeing of patients. There are chapters dedicated to governance, and to training and education. The final chapterdescribes how the unit responded to challenges created by the COVID-19 pandemic.

Oxford Textbook of Inpatient Psychiatry by Alvaro Barrera (Editor); Caroline Attard (Editor); Rob Chaplin (Editor) Inpatient mental health care is an essential part of community-based mental health care in the UK. Patients admitted to acute mental health wards are often experiencing high levels of distress and acute mental illness and need to be assessed, managed, and treated by a wide team of mental health care professionals. Inpatient care is often a traumatic experience for patients and their relatives which can define their relationship with mental health care services. Reforming inpatient psychiatry is a priority for both patients and staff, yet there are few reference texts on this psychiatric specialty. The Oxford Textbook of Inpatient Psychiatry bridges this gap by offering a comprehensive and pragmatic guide to the UK's inpatient mental health care system today. Written and edited by a multidisciplinary team, this innovative resource discusses the real-life experiences and challenges of a wide range of professionals working on acute mental health wards. Organized into 8 sections this resource covers nursing, team leadership, multidisciplinary work, psychology, and medical aspects. Individual chapters address key topics such as the management of children and adolescents, and contain information on up-to-date research and best practice. Focusing on the dignity and autonomy of patients, this unique resource offers a model for clinical and organizational practice both at a national and international level.

Integrated Care: Working at the Interface of Primary Care and Behavioral Health by Lori E. Raney (Editor) The goals of Integrated Care: Working at the Interface of Primary Care and Behavioral Health are to educate psychiatrists about the fundamental shift underway in health care and to prepare them to be successful and effective in the new health care arena. The passage and implementation of the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act presents an opportunity for newly insured patients and for funding models of integrated care, enabling psychiatrists to have a more significant population-level impact. The only book of its kind, the guide defines integrated care, reviews the evidence base, and addresses the three potential benefits of this model of care: improved outcomes, cost containment, and enhanced patient experience (also known as the "triple aim"). The new models of integrated care presented in this book are population-based, which is the key to improved outcomes, and they represent a change in how medicine in general and psychiatry in particular will approach health care delivery moving forward. The book's features are both high-impact and user-friendly: * The book is divided into two sections, "Behavioral Health in Primary Care Settings" and "Primary Care in Behavioral Health Care Settings," with Section 1 focused on improving the detection and treatment of behavioral health conditions by integrating behavioral health services into primary care settings and Section 2 focused on improving the health status of patient populations with serious mental illness by integrating primary care into behavioral health treatment.* Each chapter presents a set of "core principles of effective collaborative care," which serve as a guide for the structure and provision of care for the varying models, regardless of the setting.* Contributors provide dozens of examples that highlight the impact psychiatrists can make in achieving the triple aim of improved outcomes, cost containment, and enhanced experience.* Detailed case vignettes integrated throughout the book bring concepts to life and help clinicians to understand and improve the patient-provider relationship. The information presented in these chapters allows both practicing psychiatrists and those in training to develop a skill set essential to designing, working in, teaching, or promoting an integrated care program within a health care system. Evidence based and timely, Integrated Care: Working at the Interface of Primary Care and Behavioral Health is a must read for clinicians in the brave new world of health care reform.

The Integrated Case Management Manual: Value-Based Assistance to Complex Medical and Behavioral Health Patients by Roger G. Kathol; Michelle Squire; Rachel Andrew; Peter Dehnel Thoroughly revised and updated since its initial publication in 2010, the second edition of this gold standard guide for case managers again helps readers enhance their ability to work with complex, multimorbid patients, to apply and document evidence-based assessments, and to advocate for improved quality and safe care for all patients. Much has happened since Integrated Case Management (ICM), now Value-Based Integrated Case Management (VB-ICM), was first introduced in the U.S. in 2010. The Integrated Case Management Manual: Valued-Based Assistance to Complex Medical and Behavioral Health Patients, 2nd Edition emphasizes the field has now moved from "complexity assessments" to "outcome achievement" for individuals/patients with health complexity. It also stresses that the next steps in VB-ICM must be to implement a standardized process, which documents, analyzes, and reports the impact of VB-ICM services in removing patient barriers to health improvement, enhancing quality and care coordination, and lowering the financial impact to patients, providers, and employer groups.  Written by two expert case managers who have used VB-ICM in their large fully disseminated VB-ICM program and understand its practical deployment and use, the second edition also includes two authors with backgrounds as physician support personnel to case managers working with complex individuals. This edition builds on the consolidation of biopsychosocial and health system case management activities that were emphasized in the first edition. A must-have resource for anyone in the field, The Integrated Case Management Manual: Value-Based Assistance to Complex Medical and Behavioral Health Patients, 2nd Edition is an essential reference for not only case managers but all clinicians and allied personnel concerned with providing state-of-the-art, value-based integrated case management.

Brain Stimulation Therapies for Clinicians by Mark S. George; Edmund S. Higgins; Michael R. Trimble (Foreword by) Brain stimulation--focally applying electricity to the brain--is a field with a rapidly expanding and promising array of techniques, which already have proven efficacy in treating conditions ranging from Parkinson's disease to chronic and acute pain to depression. Comprehensively surveying the landscape of current practice, Brain Stimulation Therapies for Clinicians provides a clear and straightforward analysis of the many therapeutic applications, along with the technologies and techniques involved in each. The book begins with a thoughtful, and occasionally macabre, history of electrical stimulation of the brain. The authors then provide an accessible and concise overview of electricity and its effects on the brain. The essence of the book, though, is its thorough exploration of the clinical applications of electrical stimulation. Brain Stimulation Therapies for Clinicians covers the wide range of existing electrical stimulation therapies, including electroconvulsive therapy (ECT), vagus nerve stimulation (VNS), transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS), deep brain stimulation (DBS), and a host of other clinical applications. Each chapter examines a particular therapy, including its history, an overview of the techniques involved, its clinical indications, side effects, and a critical review of the literature surrounding its efficacy. Designed as an approachable and thorough reference for the practicing clinician, the book includes many features to assist in evaluating the variety of stimulation therapies. * The book as a whole is an excellent-quick start guide to help practitioners make informed choices about brain stimulation therapies. The background on the basics of electricity is useful for those not intimately familiar with these concepts. * A thorough glossary helps the clinician navigate the jargon and decode the alphabet soup surrounding current practice.* Clear and useful diagrams and schematics illustrate all essential points.* Interesting sidebars highlight fascinating and occasionally amusing potential applications of brain stimulation techniques--and offer a glimpse into the sometimes grim history of human brain experimentation.* The authors' careful attention to evidence-based literature helps clinicians determine which techniques have proven efficacy and which claims are unsupported.* Each chapter features a comprehensive bibliography of references for further reading. Brain Stimulation Therapies for Clinicians is an essential reference for any clinician, or even potential patient, interested in understanding electrical stimulation as therapy.

Clinical Manual of Electroconvulsive Therapy by Mehul V. Mankad; John L. Beyer; Richard D. Weiner; Andrew Krystal Increasingly, electroconvulsive therapy (ECT) is recognized as a proven, effective, and even life-saving intervention in certain mood and thought disorders when other treatments have had little or no effect. Despite the proven efficacy and safety of this standard treatment in psychiatry, its availability is variable. Part of this disparity in access is related to misunderstanding by laypersons regarding the treatment and its potential adverse effects. Adequate education and training of psychiatrists and their support staff are essential to ensuring patients' access to this vital treatment tool. The authors of Clinical Manual of Electroconvulsive Therapy offer this expansive yet reader-friendly volume to help psychiatrists successfully incorporate ECT into their clinical practices. It is also a valuable resource for medical students and psychiatric residents, as well as experienced clinicians and researchers. The book updates the 1985 original and 1998 second edition of Electroconvulsive Therapy: A Programmed Text, and provides readers with a scheduled approach to understanding the fundamental concepts of ECT while offering practical guidance for establishing and maintaining an ECT program. Topics include the history of ECT, indications for use, patient referral and evaluation, the basics of ECT, clinical applications, anesthetics and other medications, seizure monitoring and management, ictal motor and cardiovascular response, adverse effects, and maintenance ECT. Included are detailed descriptions of recent advances including ultra-brief pulse ECT, oxygenation, muscle relaxation, and other modifications that have made this very effective treatment much safer and more acceptable to patients. Currently, it is estimated that more than 100,000 people receive ECT treatments each year in the U.S. Indications for use of ECT are for mood disorders such as major depressive disorder and mania, and thought disorders including schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder. Indications for use in other psychiatric disorders and general medical disorders such as Parkinson's disease, which appears to respond especially well to ECT, are reviewed as well. This highly-readable manual is a must-have for the library of any clinician interested in or currently practicing ECT: * Provides background information on the origins of psychiatric treatments preceding ECT, including efforts using hydrotherapy and insulin comas * Includes an algorithm for the management of ECT seizure adequacy* Discusses contraindications as well as the potential adverse effects of ECT, including cognitive changes and cardiovascular complications* Provides specific information about ECT device manufacturers, reprintable patient information sheets, and a written informed consent form This clinical manual comprehensively explores and explains the available knowledge regarding ECT--based on extensive research over the past 70 years--in order to help potential ECT clinicians make informed choices about the development and management of their ECT program.

Deep Brain Stimulation: A New Frontier in Psychiatry by Damiaan Denys (Editor); Matthijs Feenstra (Editor); Rick Schuurman (Editor) Deep Brain Stimulation: A New Frontier in Psychiatry provides an overview of current developments and the future possibilities of deep brain stimulation for patients with therapy-refractory psychiatric disorders. The side-by-side presentation of clinical applications and animal research provides a truly translational approach. Also included is a special chapter on the ethical issues involved in deep brain stimulation in psychiatry. Deep brain stimulation of selected brain areas has been shown to result in a substantial improvement of symptoms and quality of life in patients suffering from obsessive-compulsive disorder, major depressive disorder and drug addiction. Although it is still an experimental therapy and the number of psychiatric patients that are treated is low, its effectiveness and safety makes deep brain stimulation the most promising therapy for treating other serious and life-threatening psychiatric conditions.

Interventional Psychiatry: Road to Novel Therapeutics by Joao L. de Quevedo (Editor); André R. Brunoni (Editor); Clement Hamani (Editor) Recent advances in pharmacology and brain stimulation have led to the development of novel treatments for psychiatric disorders. These new advances have led to the development of a new subspecialty, Interventional Psychiatry. Interventional Psychiatry: Road to Novel Therapeutics reviews all specialized treatments including device-based interventions such as electroconvulsive therapy (ECT), repetitive transcranial magnetic stimulation (rTMS), and deep brain stimulation (DBS). This book discusses the procedure-based pharmacologic interventions including ketamine infusion therapy and psychedelic therapies. Internationally contributed, this book outlines the state of the field, as well as implications for training and the role of the interventional psychiatrist in treatment teams.

Neurotechnology and Brain Stimulation in Pediatric Psychiatric and Neurodevelopmental Disorders by Lindsay M. Oberman (Editor); Peter G. Enticott (Editor) Neurotechnology and Brain Stimulation in Pediatric Psychiatric and Neurodevelopmental Disorders provides a comprehensive overview of neurotechnological devices as potential treatments for psychiatric and neurodevelopmental disorders in children and adolescents. Many neuropsychiatric disorders are covered such as Autism Spectrum Disorder, ADHD, Depression, Tourette's Syndrome, and OCD. Different device-based treatments are discussed such as Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation, Transcranial Direct Current Stimulation, Deep Brain Stimulation, Chronotherapy, and Neurofeedback.

Building Motivational Interviewing Skills: A Practitioner Workbook by David B. Rosengren Many tens of thousands of mental health and health care professionals have used this essential book--now significantly revised with 70% new content reflecting important advances in the field--to develop and sharpen their skills in motivational interviewing (MI). Clear explanations of core MI concepts are accompanied by carefully crafted sample dialogues, exercises, and practice opportunities. Readers build proficiency for moving through the four processes of MI--engaging, focusing, evoking, and planning--using open-ended questions, affirmations, reflective listening, and summaries (OARS), plus information exchange. In a large-size format for easy photocopying, the volume includes more than 80 reproducible worksheets. Purchasers get access to a companion website where they can download and print the reproducible materials. New to This Edition Fully revised and restructured around the new four-process model of MI. Chapters on exploring values and goals and "finding the horizon." Additional exercises, now with downloadable worksheets. Teaches how to tailor OARS skills for each MI process. Integrates key ideas from positive psychology. Winner (First Place)--American Journal of Nursing Book of the Year Award, Adult Primary Care Category See also Motivational Interviewing, Fourth Edition: Helping People Change and Grow, by William R. Miller and Stephen Rollnick, and Motivational Interviewing and CBT: Combining Strategies for Maximum Effectiveness, by Sylvie Naar and Steven A. Safren. This book is in the Applications of Motivational Interviewing series, edited by Stephen Rollnick, William R. Miller, and Theresa B. Moyers.

Clinical Manual for the Psychiatric Interview of Children and Adolescents by Claudio Cepeda Because of the importance of the interview in assessing behavioral disorders of childhood, practitioners need to refine the techniques they normally use with adults. This book offers a comprehensive and practical guide to the child and adolescent psychiatric interview, providing an outline of how first to elicit data from younger patients and their families, then how to organize and integrate this information to form a definitive program of care. Clinical Manual for the Psychiatric Interview of Children and Adolescents shows how to focus the exploration of common psychiatric syndromes while offering guidance in such matters as general principles of interviewing, use of the AMSIT in mental status examinations, and evaluation of both internalizing and externalizing symptoms. The manual is exceptionally practical, illustrated with clinical vignettes and enhanced with quick-reference tables that summarize key points. In addition to covering the psychiatric evaluation, it also brings users up to speed on such topics as neuropsychiatric assessment, psychiatric formulation, comorbidities, resistances, and countertransference. It expands greatly on the coverage in the author's previous book, Concise Guide to the Psychiatric Interview of Children and Adolescents, and features five new chapters: * Diagnostic and Therapeutic Engagement, showing how to achieve a positive and benevolent bond with both child and family through such traits as warmth, acceptance, humor, and empathic attunement, as well as how to respond to "reverse engagement"* Special Interviewing Techniques, helping examiners confront circumstances in which standard approaches are ineffective through such methods as role reversal, the double-chair technique, and the use of drawings to illuminate the child's issues* Family Assessment, presenting areas of inquiry such as marital or intergenerational conflict that need to be understood in order to gain a broad perspective of the family's organization and functioning* Providing Post evaluation Feedback to Families, emphasizing the importance of tact and sensitivity while helping the practitioner anticipate complications posed by situations such as divorce or abuse* Evaluation of Special Populations, alerting the examiner to relevant approaches when confronted with situations ranging from burn trauma to sensory deficits to displaced or refugee children "Anyone who wonders how best to approach psychiatric interviewing of children and adolescents will find this work a valuable guide," wrote the Journal of Clinical Psychiatry of Dr. Cepeda's Concise Guide. His manual now offers an even better handle on these difficult-to-manage situations.

Interviewing Children and Adolescents: Skills and Strategies for Effective DSM-5® Diagnosis by James Morrison; Kathryn Flegel This instructive clinical resource has given thousands of clinicians and students essential skills for evaluating infants through adolescents with any type of mental health issue. Principles for conducting age-appropriate clinical interviews with children of varying ages and their parents--including the use of toys, drawing, dolls, and other forms of play--are illustrated with annotated sample transcripts. The book provides crucial information for accurately diagnosing a wide range of mental and behavioral disorders. User-friendly features include concise explanations of diagnostic criteria, coding notes, interview pointers for specific disorders, vivid vignettes, and a sample written report. New to This Edition *Current terminology, codes, and diagnostic criteria integrated throughout the case examples and disorder-specific discussions. *Features both DSM-5 and ICD-10-CM codes. *Essential Features--prototypes that encapsulate the symptoms and other diagnostic elements of each disorder. *Reproducible tool (Questionnaire for Parents) that can be downloaded and printed for repeated use. *Additional disorders and vignettes.

Motivational Interviewing: A Guide for Medical Trainees by Antoine Douaihy (Editor); Thomas M. Kelly (Editor); Melanie A. Gold (Editor) This may be the single most important book you ever buy during your medical training. Rotations come and go, exams come and go, but regardless of specialty, patient-care will be at the heart of your practice. It is no exaggeration to say that motivational interviewing (MI) has transformed the way doctors engage with patients, families, and colleagues alike. MI is among the most powerful tools available to promote behavior change in patients. In an age of chronic diseases (diabetes, hypertension, heart disease, obesity), behavior change is no longer limited to substance use or the field of psychiatry - maladaptive choices and behaviors that negatively impact health outcomes are rampant. There is an explosion of research projects using MI or adaptations of MI in the behavioral health medicine field in the past decade. Hospitalizations can't make people change. How marvelous is it that an evidence-based health behavior change approach (MI) can help people change the outcomes of their illnesses and the course of their lives.This therapeutic approach is not a form of psychotherapy and is not the stuff of cobwebs and old leather couches. MI is readily integrated into regular ward rounds and office visits and provides an effective and efficient approach to patients clinical encounters.Written by experts in the field and medical trainees across medicine, this is the first MI guide of its kind. Its explores how MI enhances contact with patients from every level of training, following an accessible, succinct approach. This book covers the application of MI method and skills into practice and also includes numerous clinical scenarios, personal reflections and online animated clinical vignettes (video clips) that share the challenges and successes the authors have focused. Furthermore this book is endorsed by the pioneers of MI: William R. Miller and Stephen Rollnick.

Motivational interviewing: helping people change and grow by William R. Miller; Stephen Rollnick Now in a fully rewritten fourth edition, this is the authoritative presentation of motivational interviewing (MI), the powerful approach to facilitating change. It has been updated and streamlined to be even more user-friendly as a practitioner guide and course text. MI originators William R. Miller and Stephen Rollnick elucidate the four tasks of MI--engaging, focusing, evoking, and planning--and vividly demonstrate what they look like in action. A wealth of vignettes and interview examples illustrate the dos and don'ts of successful implementation in diverse contexts. The book reviews the evidence base for the approach and covers ways to assess the quality of MI. The companion website provides reflection questions, annotated case material, and additional helpful resources.   New to This Edition Most of the book is entirely new. Addresses the breadth of MI applications not only in counseling and psychotherapy, but also in health care, education, coaching, management, and other contexts. Discusses delivering MI remotely, simple versus complex affirmations, strategic use of directional questions, ethical considerations, and other new or expanded topics. Increased emphasis on using MI throughout a client's process of change and growth, not just in the preparatory stage. Pedagogical Features New or updated online materials, including reflection questions and annotated cases. Key points at the end of each chapter. "Personal Perspective" and "For Therapists" boxes in every chapter. Extensive glossary. New self-assessment tool that targets the component skills of MI. See also Building Motivational Interviewing Skills, Second Edition: A Practitioner Workbook, by David B. Rosengren, and Motivational Interviewing and CBT: Combining Strategies for Maximum Effectiveness, by Sylvie Naar and Steven A. Safren. This book is in the Applications of Motivational Interviewing series, edited by Stephen Rollnick, William R. Miller, and Theresa B. Moyers.

The Psychiatric Interview by Daniel J. Carlat Selected as a Doody's Essential Title for 2025! Focusing on the practical skills needed to establish rapport with patients and gain valuable clinical insights,The Psychiatric Interview, 5th Edition, offers a practical, concise approach to improving interviewing skills. Noted psychiatrist and award-winning mental  health journalist Dr. Daniel J. Carlat uses a proven combination of mnemonics, specific techniques for approaching threatening topics, and phrasing examples to illustrate the nuances of the interviewing process, making this easy-to-digest text essential reading for trainees and practitioners in psychiatry, psychology, nursing, social work, and related fields.  Offers a concise, real-world approach to the psychiatric interview, filled with tips and pearls to develop confidence in interviewing  Brings you up to speed with the DSM 5-TR and current research, and includes a new chapter on techniques for the agitated patient and a new discussion of prolonged grief  Contains focused, practical sections on general principles of effective interviewing, obtaining the psychiatric history, and interviewing for diagnosis  Uses mnemonics and pocket cards to help you understand and remember key elements of the effective interview  Provides clear techniques for approaching threatening topics, and shows how relationships that are endangered can be repaired  Presents information in an engaging, conversational manner, helping you form an alliance with each patient in order to promote cooperation and effective treatment    Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience  Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone.  Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. 

Intimate partner violence: an evidence-based approach by Rahn Kennedy Bailey (Editor) This book is designed to present a comprehensive and state-of-the-art review of the psychopathology and epidemiology of domestic violence, accompanied by related medical and legal considerations.  The introductory sections define domestic violence and its challenges.  The major body of the book is devoted to individual topics in various communities and subgroups, covering their behavioral and mental implications.  Topics include disparities and special populations, subtypes of offenders, ethical and legal components, impacts of gun ownership, and many other challenges.  Each chapter begins with a case study to illustrate the issue presented, concluding with resources and guidelines when available. Intimate Partner Violence is an excellent resource for all clinicians who may encounter victims and perpetrators of domestic violence, including general, child, and forensic psychiatrists, emergency medicine physicians, primary care physicians, pediatricians, psychologists, social workers, school counselors, and all others.

Intimate Partner Violence: A Health-Based Perspective by Connie Mitchell (Editor) Intimate partner violence is a challenging problem that health professionals encounter on a daily basis. This volume thoroughly compiles the current knowledge and health science and provides a strong foundation for students, educators, clinicians, and researchers on prevention, assessment, and intervention.

Mental Health, Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities and the Ageing Process by Vee P. Prasher (Editor); Philip W. Davidson (Editor); Flavia H. Santos (Editor) This book brings together findings from research and clinical practice, with comprehensive coverage of the important aspects of mental health in ageing persons with intellectual and developmental  disabilities. It is crucial for professionals involved in the care of persons with all intellectual  and developmental  disabilities to have a broad understanding of the essential range of issues, and therefore this book provides a truly multi-disciplinary perspective, complete with many figures and illustrations to underline the key points. Undoubtedly, research and clinical practice are much more advanced in the general ageing population than in persons with intellectual and developmental disabilities, and so professionals and academics must be made fully aware of commonalities and idiosyncrasies of older people with intellectual and developmental disabilities. This book presents the ongoing developments concerningmental health and aging, which will become relevant to the intellectually disabled population. Through experience, this book also acknowledges that the impact on the persons themselves and on their carers always needs to be taken into account, with treatment programs established with a multi-faceted team approach in mind. Avoiding the jargon of many titles in this area while maintaining the hands-on approach of clinical practice, this book meshes the practical and scientific worlds, with all chapters written by leading experts in the field. Beyond the US, the IASSIDD support expands the book message worldwide.  

Oxford Textbook of the Psychiatry of Intellectual Disability by Sabayasachi Bhaumik (Editor); Regi Alexander (Editor) Intellectual Disability (ID) describes a lifelong condition of heterogeneous aetiology, associated with the impairment of intellectual functioning (IQ 70), significant impairment of adaptive skills, and onset before the age of 18 years. People with ID experience significant physical and mental health problems like associated sensory/motor impairments and epilepsy, some of which are contributed to by underlying primary causes. Psychiatric problems are also three times more common in people with ID in comparison to the general population. The psychiatry of ID is a core part of training to be a psychiatrist yet there are limited resources on this topic aimed at both trainees and practising clinicians alike. Oxford Textbook of the Psychiatry of Intellectual Disability bridges this gap by providing up-to-date evidence-based content on the assessment, diagnosis, and management of psychiatry in people with ID. Featuring 28 chapters written by international experts in the field, the Oxford Textbook of the Psychiatry of Intellectual Disability presents fresh global insight and coverage of the subject. Chapters cover key topics from the developmental aspects of ID, mental disorders in childhood, and behaviour phenotypes, through to physical health, dementia and other disorders associated with ageing. Each chapter provides trustworthy evidence and a wealth of practical advice for clinical situations, including case studies in community and hospital settings, and multiple choice questions for self-evaluation and consolidation of knowledge.

Treating NVLD in Children: Professional Collaborations for Positive Outcomes by Jessica Broitman (Editor); John M. Davis (Editor) Children with nonverbal learning disabilities (NVLD) have needs that can take many forms and may, over time, require consultation and collaboration with professionals from several fields. Given that multiple specialists may be involved in working with children with NVLD - as well as the array of treatment variables - even seasoned practitioners may find themselves in confusing situations.   Treating NVLD in Children takes a developmental view of how the problems and needs of young people with nonverbal learning disabilities evolve and offers a concise guide for professionals who are likely to contribute to treatment. Expert practitioners across specialties in psychology, education, and rehabilitative therapy explain their roles in treatment, the decisions they are called on to make, and their interactions with other professionals. Collaborative interventions and teamwork are emphasized, as are transitions to higher learning, employment, and the adult world.  Among the book's key features are:  A new four-subtype model of NVLD, with supporting research. A brief guide to assessment, transmitting results, and treatment planning. Chapters detailing the work of psychologists, therapists, coaches, and others in helping children with NVLD. Material specific to improving reading, writing, and mathematics. Overview of issues in emotional competency and independent living. An instructive personal account of growing up with NVLD.  Treating NVLD in Children: Professional Collaborations for Positive Outcomes is a key resource for a wide range of professionals working with children, including school and clinical child psychologists; educational psychologists and therapists; pediatricians; social workers and school counselors; speech and language therapists; child and adolescent psychiatrists; and marriage and family therapists.

The Medical Model in Mental Health: An Explanation and Evaluation by Ahmed Samei Huda Many published books that comment on the medical model have been written by doctors, who assume that readers have the same knowledge of medicine, or by those who have attempted to discredit and attack the medical practice. Both types of book have tended to present diagnostic categories in medicine as universally scientifically valid examples of clear-cut diseases easily distinguished from each other and from health; with a fixed prognosis; and with a well-understood aetiology leading to disease-reversing treatments. These are contrasted with psychiatric diagnoses and treatments, which are described as unclear and inadequate in comparison. The Medical Model in Mental Health: An Explanation and Evaluation explores the overlap between the usefulness of diagnostic constructs (which enable prognosis and treatment decisions) and the therapeutic effectiveness of psychiatry compared with general medicine. The book explains the medical model and how it applies in mental health, assuming little knowledge or experience of medicine, and defends psychiatry as a medical practice.

Movement Disorders in Psychiatry by Antonio Teixeira (Editor); Erin Furr Stimming (Editor); William G. Ondo (Editor) Movement Disorders in Psychiatry examines the complex interface between movement disorders and psychiatry, addressing both specific movement disorders in psychiatry and behavioral syndromes associated with diseases categorized as movement disorders. This volume provides an overview of clinical definitions and pathophysiology of movement disorders and reviews specific movement disorders associated with drugs of abuse and psychotropic medications, including tardive dyskinesia, akathisia, and neuroleptic malignant syndrome. Further chapters discuss movement disorders seen in primary psychiatric disorders, such as autism and schizophrenia, as well as diseases with concurrent movement disorder and behavioral symptoms, such as Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease, frontotemporal dementia, Tourette's syndrome, and autoimmune conditions. Movement Disorders in Psychiatry offers an in-depth perspective on movement disorders with treatment and practical management strategies for related challenges in clinical practice.

Biomarkers in Neuropsychiatry: A Primer by Antonio L. Teixeira (Editor); Natalia P. Rocha (Editor); Michael Berk (Editor) This book presents the 'state of the art' of biomarkers research in neuropsychiatric conditions, from dementia to eating disorders, as well as providing methodological, practical and ethical issues related to the development of biomarkers. Biomarkers have revolutionized clinical research and practice in most fields of medicine, but psychiatry has lagged behind. However, in the last decade, there has been a growing expectation that biomarkers will advance and, ultimately, reframe psychiatry research and practice. Biomarkers might inform about diagnosis, therapeutics, prognosis, contributing to a 'personalized medicine'. Understanding their meaning, possibilities and limitations will help clinicians, researchers and students in the related areas navigate and excel in the challenging and ever changing field of neuropsychiatric disorders.

Brain Imaging in Behavioral Medicine and Clinical Neuroscience by Lawrence H. Sweet (Editor); Ronald A. Cohen (Editor) Rapid developments in brain neuroimaging methods have occurred over the past decade. These advances have revolutionized cognitive and behavioral neuroscience, and are likely to have major influence on clinical psychological, psychiatric, and neurological practice over the coming years. There are a number of excellent books that focus on specific neuroimaging methods, such as fMRI. Furthermore, cognitive and neuroscience texts have increasingly incorporated functional brain neuroimaging. Yet, there are few books to date that consider and review emerging research in the application of brain neuroimaging methods for the study and assessment of behavioral and cognitive disorders. This book provides a broad coverage of current research trends in the clinical application of brain neuroimaging methods in the context of behavioral medicine, neuropsychology, and related areas of medical psychology. It uniquely integrates current neuroimaging methods and studies with current behavioral medicineresearch, and presents knowledge derived from recent developments in the fields of functional and structural brain imaging. By integrating information from experimental behavioral medicine with clinical insights, this book will serve as a source book for neuropsychologists, psychologists, neurologists, psychiatrists, and other professionals in both clinical practice and academic context. This integration results in the reader having a greater understanding of how the brain controls behavior, the disturbances of behavior that may occur with different disorders, and what clinicians should consider when assessing or working with patients with behavioral problems.

Casebook of Neuropsychiatry by Trevor A. Hurwitz (Editor); Warren T. Lee (Editor) Casebook of Neuropsychiatry provides a fascinating tour of the critical subspecialty of neuropsychiatry, which combines neurology and psychiatry to address organic disturbances in the central nervous system that give rise to mental diseases. The book is comprised of 11 chapters, with subjects ranging from apathy to hyperkinetic states, and from depression to psychobehavioral disinhibition. The chapters are further divided into 38 cases, each of which takes the reader from clinical presentation through differential diagnosis and diagnostic workup, to current treatment options. Although the book is written in an engaging, narrative style, it has a strong, thoroughly up-to-date scientific foundation. Each case is placed in the appropriate neurobiological context, thus enhancing both the reader's clinical skills and his or her neuropsychiatric knowledge. The book's many beneficial features include: * Complete coverage of the neurological diseases and treatments, including detailed material on the behavioral affiliations of the frontal, temporal and parietal cortices; limbic system; and basal ganglia;* Charts, illustrations, and imaging, which allow the reader access to all the diagnostic and medical historical documentation necessary to fully understand each case;* "Key Clinical Points" provided at the end of each chapter, which focus the reader's attention on the most important facts and strategies; and* Suggested readings, which afford readers the opportunity to deepen and enhance their knowledge and understanding. By grounding the field of neuropsychiatry in real-life clinical problems, the editors have created an engaging and practical volume that allows psychiatrists, neurologists, residents, and others to update their knowledge of current neuropsychiatric thinking, sharpen their diagnostic skills, and fully appreciate the nuance and substance of this rapidly growing field.

Clinical neuropsychology: A pocket handbook for assessment by Michael W. Parsons (Editor); Michelle M. Braun (Editor) Fully revised and updated, this pocket handbook for clinical assessment covers a comprehensive range of neurological, neuropsychological, neuropsychiatric, and neurobehavioral syndromes and disorders. Now in its fourth edition, this ready reference helps the busy clinician or doctoral-level trainee select from among hundreds of tests and assessment techniques in clinical neuropsychology. It guides clinicians in developing tailored, hypothesis-driven approaches for assessing patients with a broad range of common neuropsychological syndromes and neurological disorders.  This book is an invaluable diagnostic guide designed to fit into a lab coat pocket for accessible and immediate use.     Major updates to the new edition include: A revamped approach to contemporary neuropsychological assessment that incorporates cultural factors, mood, emotion and affect, medications, cognitive functioning and electrophysiology data, as well as emerging trends including tele-neuropsychology, positive neuropsychology, and consumer‑focused reports. New and expanded coverage of topics including updates on neurodegenerative disorders and mild cognitive impairment (MCI); lifestyle interventions to maximize cognitive functioning in MCI and dementia; chronic traumatic encephalopathy (CTE), autoimmune disorders, and motor disorders. An increased emphasis on neuropsychiatric syndromes. New topics include intellectual disabilities, the impact of marijuana and alcohol on cognitive functioning, anxiety disorders/PTSD, and an expanded focus on mood disorders. Updated online resources to support teaching and learning through neuroimaging figures and video demonstrations of exam techniques, and extended reading lists that have been expanded and more fully integrated into assessment chapters.

Cognitive Neuroscience, Development, and Psychopathology: Typical and Atypical Developmental Trajectories of Attention by Jacob A. Burack (Editor); James T. Enns (Editor); Nathan A. Fox (Editor) The disciplines of cognitive neuroscience, development, and psychopathology are complementary in the study of human perception and attention, even though each discipline emerges from a decidedly different and sometimes incompatible worldview. The meeting of researchers across these disciplines results in a fruitful cross-fertilization that ultimately leads to better science within each discipline and a joint scientific endeavor that is greater than the sum of its parts.Cognitive Science, Development, and Psychopathology: Typical and Atypical Developmental Trajectories of Attention unites scholars sharing common interests in the development of attention and related areas of functioning with different perspectives and methodologies. The volume does not impose a single framework for discussing the relevant issues, but rather the authors highlight the importance of their own approaches to the study of the typical and atypical development of attention. Drs. Burack, Enns, and Fox have organized the chapters into three sections: Atypical Environments, Threat, and the Development of Individual Differences in Attention; The Organization of the Development of Attention in Typical and Atypical Processing; and The Case of Orienting Attention in Developing an Integrated Science. Discussion topics include cognitive bias modification, attention and the development of anxiety disorders, deficient anchoring, reflexive and abnormal social orienting in autism, and social attention. This volume is a unique and critical resource for researchers in communication disorders, developmental and cognitive psychology, human development, neuroscience, and educational and counseling psychology.

Encyclopedia of Clinical Neuropsychology by Jeffrey Kreutzer (Editor); John Luca (Editor); Bruce Caplan (Editor) This encyclopedia serves as a unified, comprehensive reference for professionals involved in the diagnosis, evaluation, and rehabilitation of adult patients and children with neuropsychological disorders. It addresses psychological, psychosocial, and psychiatric aspects of an array of neurological disorders, emphasizing treatment and rehabilitation, not just assessment and diagnosis.

Functional Neuromarkers for Psychiatry: Applications for Diagnosis and Treatment by Juri D. Kropotov Functional Neuromarkers for Psychiatry explores recent advances in neuroscience that have allowed scientists to discover functional neuromarkers of psychiatric disorders. These neuromarkers include brain activation patterns seen via fMRI, PET, qEEG, and ERPs. The book examines these neuromarkers in detail--what to look for, how to use them in clinical practice, and the promise they provide toward early detection, prevention, and personalized treatment of mental disorders. The neuromarkers identified in this book have a diagnostic sensitivity and specificity higher than 80%. They are reliable, reproducible, inexpensive to measure, noninvasive, and have been confirmed by at least two independent studies. The book focuses primarily on the analysis of EEG and ERPs. It elucidates the neuronal mechanisms that generate EEG spontaneous rhythms and explores the functional meaning of ERP components in cognitive tasks. The functional neuromarkers for ADHD, schizophrenia, and obsessive-compulsive disorder are reviewed in detail. The book highlights how to use these functional neuromarkers for diagnosis, personalized neurotherapy, and monitoring treatment results.

Genomics, Circuits, and Pathways in Clinical Neuropsychiatry by Thomas Lehner (Editor); Bruce L. Miller (Editor); Matthew W. State (Editor) This foundational work comprehensively examines the current state of the genetics, genomics and brain circuitry of psychiatric and neurological disorders. It consolidates discoveries of specific genes and genomic regions associated with these conditions, the genetic and anatomic architecture of these syndromes, and addresses how recent advances in genomics are leading to a reappraisal of the biology underlying clinical neuroscience. In doing so, it critically examines the promise and limitations of these discoveries toward treatment, and to the interdisciplinary nature of understanding brain and behavior. Coverage includes new discoveries regarding autism, epilepsy, intellectual disability, dementias, movement disorders, language impairment, disorders of attention, schizophrenia, and bipolar disorder. Genomics, Circuits, and Pathways in Clinical Neuropsychiatry focuses on key concepts, challenges, findings, and methods in genetics, genomics, molecular pathways, brain circuitry, and related neurobiology of neurologic and psychiatric disorders.

Kaufman's Clinical Neurology for Psychiatrists by Mark J. Milstein; Jillian Rosengard; David Myland Kaufman; Howard L. Geyer The only reference to focus on the must-know aspects of neurology for psychiatrists, Kaufman's Clinical Neurology for Psychiatrists, 9th Edition, brings you up to date with the knowledge you need to excel on the American Board of Psychiatry and Neurology and other examinations. It fully covers the exam topics you'll encounter, along with new content, high-quality illustrations, and multiple-choice questions. In addition, this book prepares you for clinical work in the 21st century. Discusses timely, clinically-relevant topics such as chronic and acute traumatic brain injury, Alzheimer's disease, correctible causes of dementia, violence, neurologic illnesses that present with symptoms of autism, illicit drug use, stroke, migraine, Parkinson's disease, tardive dyskinesia current treatments, and more.  Includes nearly 2,000 multiple-choice questions both in print and online-all written to help you succeed on the ABPN certifying exam.  Features new content, new and improved clinical illustrations: life-like patient sketches, anatomy line drawings, CTs, MRIs, and EEGs.  Explains each condition's neurologic and psychiatric features, easily performed office and bedside examinations, appropriate tests, differential diagnosis, and management options.   Correlates neurologic illnesses with the DSM-5.  Enhanced eBook version included with purchase. Your enhanced eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references from the book on a variety of devices.

A Life Course Approach to Mental Disorders by Sasha Rudenstine (Editor); Ezra Susser (Editor); Sandro Galea (Editor); Karestan C. Koenen (Editor) A Life Course Approach to Mental Disorders examines the interplay of social and biological factors in the production of a wide range of mental disorders throughout life, from the peri-natal period through to old age. The aging into adulthood of numerous birth cohorts, especially over the past twenty years, has provided increasing evidence that mental disorders previously perceived to emerge in adulthood may have their origins early in life. This book brings together, in a single resource, the research in life course epidemiology of mental disorders, forging a consensus on the current science and pointing the way forward for the field. Assembling researchers across disparate disciplines including epidemiology, developmental psychopathology, psychiatric genetics, sociology, developmental cognitive neuroscience, and epigenetics the book reviews the methods and synthesizes existing knowledge about the life course epidemiology of mental disorders in populations. It also presents discussions of the mechanisms that drive the production of mental disorders over the life course including emerging areas of research in the field. A Life Course Approach to Mental Disorders brings together the state-of-the-art science of life course epidemiology to inform training, research, practice and policy with regard to mental disorders. The first comprehensive articulation of a life course perspective in the area, it will be a key resource for academics, researchers and students.

Massachusetts General Hospital Psychopharmacology and Neurotherapeutics by Theodore A. Stern (Editor); Joan A. Camprodon (Editor); Maurizio Fava (Editor) Offering user-friendly, authoritative guidance on cutting-edge psychopharmacologic and somatic treatments for psychiatric and neurologic conditions, Massachusetts General Hospital Psychopharmacology and Neurotherapeutics, 2nd Edition, helps you put today's best approaches to work for your patients. Composed of topical chapters primarily from the third edition of Stern et al.'s Massachusetts General Hospital Comprehensive Clinical Psychiatry, this fully revised resource focuses on current psychotropic treatments, electroconvulsive therapy, and neurotherapeutics, making it an ideal quick reference for psychiatrists, psychologists, internists, and nurse practitioners. Brings you up-to-date information on key topics in the field, including the application of anticonvulsants, anxiolytics, mood stabilizers, and psychostimulants; drug-drug interactions; side effects; treatment adherence; and more Includes detailed coverage of antidepressants, antipsychotics, and antianxiety medications, as well as advances in caring for patients with treatment-resistant depression and new legal considerations when prescribing psychotropics Covers recent progress on the use of neurotherapeutic interventions, such as transcranial magnetic stimulation, vagal nerve stimulation, and deep brain stimulation Contains a new chapter on the pharmacotherapy of movement disorders (derived from Stern et al.'s MGH Handbook of General Hospital Psychiatry, 8th Edition) Features a user-friendly, highly templated format with abundant boxed summaries, bulleted points, case histories, algorithms, updated references, and suggested readings Offers updated DSM-5-TR criteria alongside peerless, hands-on advice from members of the esteemed MGH Department of Psychiatry An eBook version is included with purchase. The eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references, with the ability to search, customize your content, make notes and highlights, and have content read aloud. Additional digital ancillary content may publish up to 6 weeks following the publication date

Molecular and Functional Models in Neuropsychiatry by Jim J. Hagan (Editor) The development of more effective treatments for neuropsychiatric disorders requires scientific progress on a broad front. Animal models have a vital role to play in advancing the field. When deployed in conjunction with detailed study of these diseases in man they bring the power to make controlled experimental interventions which allow the functional consequences of genetic variations and polymorphisms to be understood in terms of their cellular, systems and behavioural effects. Further, they provide a means by which complex cognitive and behavioural phenomena may be dissected and understood. Finally, they provide a bridge to understanding the effects of drugs on the functioning of the central nervous system, thereby improving our understanding of the actions of those drugs in man.

Neurobiology of Psychiatric Disorders by Thomas E. Schlaepfer (Editor); Charles B. Nemeroff (Editor) This new volume in the Handbook of Clinical Neurology presents a comprehensive review of the fundamental science and clinical treatment of psychiatric disorders. Advances in neuroscience have allowed for dramatic advances in the understanding of psychiatric disorders and treatment. Brain disorders, such as depression and schizophrenia, are the leading cause of disability worldwide. It is estimated that over 25% of the adult population in North America are diagnosed yearly with at least one mental disorder and similar results hold for Europe. Now that neurology and psychiatry agree that all mental disorders are in fact, "brain diseases," this volume provides a foundational introduction to the science defining these disorders and details best practices for psychiatric treatment.

The Neurobiology of Schizophrenia by Ted Abel (Editor); Thomas Nickl-Jockschat (Editor) The Neurobiology of Schizophrenia begins with an overview of the various facets and levels of schizophrenia pathophysiology, ranging systematically from its genetic basis over changes in neurochemistry and electrophysiology to a systemic neural circuits level. When possible, the editors point out connections between the various systems. The editors also depict methods and research strategies used in the respective field. The individual backgrounds of the two editors promote a synthesis between basic neuroscience and clinical relevance.

Neurocognitive Behavioral Disorders: An Interdisciplinary Approach to Patient-Centered Care by Maureen Nash (Editor); Sarah Foidel (Editor) Dementia, now known as major neurocognitive disorder, is not one monolithic disease. Nor is behavior disturbance driven by one particular neurocognitive dysfunction. In fact if we are able to understand it, behavior is an excellent form of nonverbal communication. There are many different causes of dementia. A major challenge with both researching and implementing interventions is viewing dementia and related behaviors as single entities. This approach leaves room for critical errors in the treatment of dementia patients, beginning with misdiagnosis.  This book approaches dementia by reviewing cognitive and functional assessments to provide a more accurate diagnosis, which then allows physicians to design specific interventions that are tailored to the person and their challenges. Because person centered care is vital to quality of life and longevity to an aging patient, this understanding of individual needs is vital. Written by experts in the field,this book incorporates the latest evidence-based behavioral interventions matched to specific deficits. Behavioral management focuses not on controlling behavior, but using it to teach staff and caregivers how to interpret common actions and maximize function for people with major neurocognitive disorders. Quality of life and individualized care planning will be the theme and the book will provide practical case examples. The book begins by introducing dementia and other neurocognitive illnesses, contextualizing them both historically and contemporarily.  Next, the text focuses on the comprehensive assessment of a person with neurocognitive challenges in order to identify strengths and understand what the person is trying to communicate with their behavior.  This process allows individualized care planning and behavioral (non-pharmacologic) management to meet the cognitive challenges and maximize individual strengths and thereby improve outcomes, makingthis a cutting edge resource.

Neuroimaging and Neurophysiology in Psychiatry by David Linden An introduction to Neuroimaging and Neurophysiology in Psychiatry, this book explains the basic physics and physiology behind the main techniques of neuroimaging, including MRI and PET, and non-invasive neurophysiology. This title covers all the clinically relevant aspects of neuroimaging and neurophysiology methods. It includes individual chapters on techniques, diagnostic disease markers, and neurophysiological treatments to ensure psychiatrists are familiar with the clinical relevance of reported abnormalities.With the latest research, Neuroimaging and Neurophysiology in Psychiatry is an invaluable and easy-to-read reference that will help practising psychiatrists in the evaluation of the use of neuroimaging methods in clinical, research, and forensic settings.

Neurologic-Psychiatric Syndromes in Focus - Part II: From Psychiatry to Neurology by J. Bogousslavsky (Editor, Contribution by) After a period in which neurology and psychiatry have become more and more defined, neurologists' interest in psychiatric topics, and vice versa, has increased. This book provides readers with an overview of the most representative neuropsychiatric syndromes such as Ganser and Capgras syndromes. It fills an existing gap in current literature and reintroduces a clinical approach. Additionally, there is a historical perspective throughout time with a focus on the most relevant clinical syndromes, offering distinct value to readers. With this approach, the book serves as a useful and stimulating guide on the diagnosis and management of neurologic psychiatric syndromes. It is for neurologists, neurosurgeons, psychiatrists, and all others interested in neuropsychiatric topics because these syndromes also called 'uncommon' may in fact be more frequent than the literature suggests.

Neuropsychiatric Disorders and Epigenetics by Jacob Peedicayil (Editor); Dennis R. Grayson (Editor) Neuropsychiatric Disorders and Epigenetics is a comprehensive reference for the epigenetic basis of most common neuropsychiatric disorders. The volume is organized into chapters representing individual neuropsychiatric disorders, from addition to obesity contributed by leading experts in their respective fields. The epigenetic aspects of each disorder are discussed, in the context of the full range of epigenetic mechanisms including DNA modification, histone post-translational modification, chromatin organization and non-coding RNA. A particular emphasis is placed on potential epigenetic interventions, when the effects of environmental stimuli on epigenetic states is particularly relevant o disease. Recent discoveries in epigenetic research enabled by epic advances in genomic technologies have positioned the field for broad translation to therapeutic interventions for previously unmanageable disorders Neuropsychiatric disorders represent a prime target of epigenetic interventions as they are highly debilitating, often chronic diseases with enormous costs to society. Thus, this volume will help define epigenetics as a key player in neuropsychiatric disorders, highlighting the full spectrum of epigenetic mechanisms underlying such disorders and introducing the vast range of epigenetic therapies under development.

Neuropsychiatry Case Studies by Josef Priller (Editor); Hugh Rickards (Editor) This book comprises succinct, accessible clinical cases in neuropsychiatry. Each clinical case has a specific and practical learning point, concerned with assessment, diagnosis, treatment or general approach. Each case models clinical reasoning and shows how the 'puzzle' in the case changed the future practice of the author. Neuropsychiatry Case Studies is divided into sections relating to specific areas of neuropsychiatry, including dementias, movement disorders, autoimmune encephalopathies and epilepsy, amongst others. This book is aimed at trainee doctors in neurology and psychiatry and will also be of interest to fully trained doctors, nurses, psychologists and other allied health professionals working in this area.​

Neuropsychological Interviewing of Adults by Yana Suchy (Editor)

The neuroscience of clinical psychiatry : the pathophysiology of behavior and mental illness by Edmund Higgins Selected as a Doody's Core Title for 2022 and 2023! Bridge the gap between neuroscience and mental illness/mental health with this straightforward and reader-friendly resource! The Neuroscience of Clinical Psychiatry, 3rd Edition is a highly readable, in-depth text ideal for residents studying for boards, practicing psychiatrists, and any mental health professional seeking an overview of the neuroscience revolution. Focusing on the basic neuroscientific concepts underlying normal behavior and commonly encountered disorders, Dr. Edmund S. Higgins and Dr. Mark S. George make complex information enjoyable, relevant, and easy to understand, ensuring that this Third Edition continues to be a trusted source of information on the neurologic underpinnings of psychiatric disorders. Thoroughly covers the intersection of clinical psychiatry and neuroscience, including updated research and today's best practices. Offers a superbly written text, packed with essential information and featuring humorous details that keep readers engaged and focused. Provides questions at the end of every chapter for self-assessment and review. Includes high-quality illustrations, tables, and graphs that help readers learn complex concepts quickly and easily. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience with Enhanced Video, Audio and Interactive Capabilities! Read directly on your preferred device(s ), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone Easily convert to audiobook , powering your content with natural language text-to-speech Adapt for unique reading needs , supporting learning disabilities, visual/auditory impairments, second-language or literacy challenges, and more

Neurotechnology and Brain Stimulation in Pediatric Psychiatric and Neurodevelopmental Disorders by Lindsay M. Oberman (Editor); Peter G. Enticott (Editor) Neurotechnology and Brain Stimulation in Pediatric Psychiatric and Neurodevelopmental Disorders provides a comprehensive overview of neurotechnological devices as potential treatments for psychiatric and neurodevelopmental disorders in children and adolescents. Many neuropsychiatric disorders are covered such as Autism Spectrum Disorder, ADHD, Depression, Tourette's Syndrome, and OCD. Different device-based treatments are discussed such as Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation, Transcranial Direct Current Stimulation, Deep Brain Stimulation, Chronotherapy, and Neurofeedback.

Perception, action, and consciousness : sensorimotor dynamics and two visual systems by Nivedita Gangopadhyay (Editor); Michael Madary (Editor); Finn Spicer (Editor) What is the relationship between perception and action, between an organism and its environment, in explaining consciousness? These are issues at the heart of philosophy of mind and the cognitive sciences. This book explores the relationship between perception and action from a variety of interdisciplinary perspectives, ranging from theoretical discussion of concepts to findings from recent scientific studies. It incorporates contributions from leading philosophers, psychologists, neuroscientists, and an artificial intelligence theorist. The contributions take a range of positions with respect to the view that perception is an achievement by an agent acting in a complex environment in which sensorimotor dynamics constitute an essential ingredient to perceptual experience. A key focus of the book is on the debate about action-oriented theories of visual perception versus the dual-visual systems hypothesis The former champions the role of sensorimotor dynamics in perceptual awareness while the latter favours a functional dichotomy between perception and action. At least on the surface, these two approaches are in conflict. Where one emphasizes the interdependence of action and perception, the other suggests that action and perception are functionally distinct. The dialogue between these two approaches brings out wider theoretical issues underlying the research paradigm of cognitive sciences and philosophy of mind. Exploring one of the major debates in the philosophy and psychology, this book is fascinating reading for all those in the cognitive sciences and philosophy of mind.

Psychiatry and Clinical Neuroscience by Charles Zorumski; Eugene Rubin Research in neuroscience is revolutionizing how we think about psychiatric diagnosis and treatment. Psychiatric disorders reflect dysfunction of the human mind and involve changes in cognition, emotion, and motivation. Understanding how the neural networks that underlie these mental functions become dysfunctional holds great promise for devising innovative approaches to diagnosis and treatment. Scientific progress is being driven, in part, by advances in human functional neuroimaging, which is being used to characterize the activity of specific brain circuits at rest and during the performance of specific tasks. Moreover, advances in clinical neuroscience are being coupled with expanding knowledge about genetics and cellular and synaptic neuroscience. Taken together, these advancements offer the hope of much more mechanism-based approaches to treatment in the future. Better understanding of neural circuits also can provide the basis for innovative psychotherapeutic strategies that take advantage of brain plasticity for purposes of neurorehabilitation. In this book, we examine recent developments in the field of network neuroscience and their potential impact on clinical psychiatry, including the way that psychiatrists are trained and interact with other medical specialties and mental health professionals.

Sleep and Neuropsychiatric Disorders: by Ravi Gupta (Editor); David N. Neubauer (Editor); Perumal S.R. Pandi (Editor) This book explores the intricate links between sleep and neuropsychiatric diseases. In clinical settings, understanding the development, treatment, and management of neuropsychiatric diseases poses a substantial challenge. Neuropsychiatric disorders place a significant cost on society, affecting the health of people affected, care providers, and the general community. Sleep and neuropsychiatric disease are inextricably linked. Sleep disorders are widespread in these populations and are frequently overlooked in neurology and psychiatry. The book offers readers up-to-date information on different facets of the bidirectional connections between sleep and neuropsychiatric diseases. Following the initial fundamental science part, a unique series of chapters concentrate on the behavioural manifestations of sleep problems, a hitherto unexplored field. Additional chapters include patient evaluation techniques as well as public health implications of sleep disorders. The individual chapters cover all main mental and neurological diseases where a change in sleep is evident, and recent concepts in pathogenesis, presentation, evaluation, and treatment. Neuropsychotropic drugs must be seen as a double-edged sword when it comes to sleep and sleep disorders. Overall, this book is an excellent resource for learning about neuropsychiatric diseases and how they affect sleep while simultaneously being impacted by sleep.

Clinical Guide to Obsessive Compulsive and Related Disorders by Jon E. Grant; Samuel R. Chamberlain; Brian L. Odlaug Clinical Guide to Obsessive Compulsive and Related Disorders is a complete, comprehensive overview of OCD and related disorders (trichotillomania, excoriation disorder, hoarding disorder, body dysmorphic disorder, and tic disorders). The book covers underlying causes, clinical presentations and treatments. The book serves as a primer for clinicians in training and those already in practice who have little if any background in these disorders. It discusses the pharmacological and psychosocial treatments for both adults and children with an emphasis on providing practical information for clinicians to use in their everyday practices. Based on the DSM-5, the book uses the latest evidence-based information regarding treatments including medication options, behavioral therapies, alternative treatments, and recent developments in surgical treatment. This book will provide students, residents, interns and even veteran clinicians with a basic understanding of OCD and disorders that are often associated with OCD. In addition, members of the public and those affected by these disorders may use this book to enhance their personal knowledge of the subject matter presented.

Dropping the Baby and Other Scary Thoughts by Karen Kleiman; Amy Wenzel What if I drop my baby when I go down the steps? What if I burn the baby in the bathtub? Thoughts like these can be frightening to new mothers, but are a common symptom pregnant and postpartum women can experience. Dropping the Baby and Other Scary Thoughtsnbsp;addresses the nature of these intrusive, negative and unwanted thoughts. Kleiman and Wenzel offer answers to the women who seek information, clarification, and validation in this useful resource for healthcare professionals working with these mothers. Written by two clinicians who have established themselves as leading experts and authors in this specialized field, this book maintains a compassionate tone that will be a voice familiar to many women in the postpartum community. Whether you must confront these negative notions personally or in your practice, this book will explain what these thoughts are, why they are there, and what can be done about them.

Obsessive-Compulsive and Related Disorders by Dan Stein; Naomi Fineberg; Samar Reghunandanan Providing clinicians and patients with the latest developments in research, this new edition is a succinct and practical introduction to the diagnosis, evaluation and management of OCD and other related disorders. Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library series, this pocketbook includes individual chapters on the phenomenology, pathogenesis, pharmacotherapy and psychotherapy of OCD and other related disorders, and features fully updated content and research. The book also includes a helpful resources chapter, and an Appendix with summaries of the major rating scales used to assess patients with OCD, which will be of use to both clinicians and patients.Obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD) and Obsessive-compulsive-related disorders (OCRDs) are anxiety disorders characterized by obsessions and compulsions, and varying degrees of anxiety and depression. OCRDs are considered to be one of the most disabling of psychiatric disorders and they present a tremendous economic and social burden, both for the affected individual, their family, and for society at large. In contrast to other psychiatric conditions of a comparable or lesser prevalence and patient burden, relatively little is understood about the aetiology, and cognitive effects of OCRDs.

Obsessive-compulsive spectrum disorders: refining the research agenda for DSM-V by Eric Hollander (Editor); Joseph Zohar (Editor); Paul J. Sirovatka (Editor); Darrel A. Regier (Editor) The five-year process of preparing for the revision of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual (DSM) has been organized around a series of conferences convened by the American Psychiatric Association, in collaboration with the World Health Organization and the U.S. National Institutes of Health, to address the future of psychiatric diagnosis. Obsessive-Compulsive Spectrum Disorders: Refining the Research Agenda for DSM-V is the fruit of one of those conferences and presents the most academically sound, thought-provoking, and timely papers from the proceedings. As the conference and book demonstrate, recent advances in psychiatric diagnosis suggest a new approach to obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD) classification: * Research into the pathogenesis of OCD increasingly supports reclassification out of the anxiety disorders and into a separate group of obsessive-compulsive-related disorders (OCRDs). * The relationships among OCRDs may be better defined, delineated, and understood if the current categorical diagnostic approach is supplemented with a dimensional approach which assesses obsessive-compulsive symptom domains.* Obsessive-compulsive disorders are believed to be underdiagnosed in patients who complain of broad symptoms of anxiety, and reclassification of OCD as an OCRD would promote more careful examination of distinct obsessive-compulsive symptoms, yield more accurate diagnosis, and result in more effective treatments.* Reclassification may facilitate future research directions in examining the biological underpinnings of these disorders. In addition to examining the genetic, neurological, and ethno-cultural bases for OCRDs, the book gives special attention to disorders that cross current diagnostic categories, including: * Body dysmorphic disorder (BDD)* Tourette's syndrome and trichotillomania* Impulse-control disorders The process leading to publication of DSM-V is by its nature an exhaustive and complex one, and the conferences play a critical role in reviewing relevant research, assessing the status of scientific knowledge, and advancing that knowledge base. Obsessive-Compulsive Spectrum Disorders: Refining the Research Agenda for DSM-V represents the cutting-edge thinking that will culminate in new diagnoses, classifications, and standards of practice for this debilitating set of disorders. Clinicians and academicians will be fascinated by this glimpse into the next generation of the DSM-V.

Rationality and compulsion: applying action theory to psychiatry by Lennart Nordenfelt Rationality and Compulsion presents a unique examination of mental illness - derived from philosophical action theory. Delusion is common to many mental disorders, resulting in actions that, though perhaps rational to the individual, might seem entirely inappropriate or harmful to others. So what is it that causes these actions, and why do they continue? The theory expounded in this book shows how the key to this problem might be compulsion. This book presents a new analysis of the notion of compulsion - developed from action theory. The books starts with an introduction to action theory (for the benefit of non-philosophers). It then shows how insights from action theory can help us better understand mental illness, before developing an analysis of compulsion that emphasizes the element of unavoidability. The book argues that what is fundamentally disturbing to the person suffering from delusion is not so much the fact that the disorder tends to lead to irrational actions but rather the fact that he or she is unable to avoid performing these actions. The individual is or feels compelled to act in the way he or she does. The book contains some concrete illustrations of this idea as applied to several psychiatric diagnoses, such as paranoia, phobia, and psychopathy. Rationality and Compulsion is a highly original new work from a leading figure in the philosophy and psychiatry movement. It will advance our understanding of mental illness, and be valuable for psychiatrists, psychologists, as well as philosophers.

Biological Psychiatry of Cancer and Cancer Treatment by Andrew Hodgkiss As long-term cancer survival becomes a widely-shared experience, the quality of life of people living with and beyond a cancer diagnosis is increasingly important. Optimising the prevention and treatment of any psychiatric consequences of certain tumours and treatments is now central to high-quality cancer care. Biological Psychiatry of Cancer and Cancer Treatment provides the reader with expert guidance on how to prevent, detect and manage the "organic" psychiatric disorders experienced by people with cancer. Containing 13 chapters on topics from "Surgery and Radiotherapy", and "Hormone and Cytokine treatments" to "Clinical Psychiatric Assessment of Patients with Cancer" this unique resource offers readers with fully up-to-date and high-quality information on how to enhance the quality of life for patients living with, and beyond cancer.Offering a unique approach to oncology and psycho-oncology, Biological Psychiatry of Cancer and Cancer Treatment is an invaluable resource for academic psychiatrists, liaison psychiatrists, neuropsychiatrists, Oncologists, neuro-oncologists, palliative medicine doctors and drug development scientists.

Handbook of psychiatry in palliative medicine: psychosocial care of the terminally ill by William Breitbart (Editor); Harvey Chochinov (Editor) Psychiatric, or psychosocial, palliative care has transformed palliative medicine. Palliation that neglects psychosocial dimensions of patient and family experience fails to meet contemporary standards of comprehensive palliative care. While a focus on somatic issues has sometimes overshadowed attention to psychological, existential, and spiritual end-of-life challenges, the past decade has seen an all encompassing, multi-disciplinary approach to care for the dying take hold.Written by internationally known psychiatry and palliative care experts, the Handbook of Psychiatry in Palliative Medicine is an essential reference for all providers of palliative care, including psychiatrists, psychologists, mental health counselors, oncologists, hospice workers, and social workers.

Adolescent Mental Health by Terje Ogden; Kristine Amlund Hagen Adolescence is a period characterized by both increased susceptibility to risks and new-found strength to withstand them. Whilst most young people are well equipped to manage the changes associated with growing up, other maladjusted and marginalized adolescents already have, or are at risk of developing, mental health problems. Adolescent Mental Health: Prevention and Intervention is a concise and accessible overview of our current knowledge on effective treatment and prevention programs for young people with mental health problems. Whilst addressing some of the most common mental health issues among young people, such as behavioral problems and drug-related difficulties, it also offers a fuller understanding of the evidence-based treatment and prevention programs that are built upon what we know about how these behavioral and emotional problems develop and are sustained. The volume illustrates contemporary and empirically supported interventions and prevention efforts through a series of case studies. It has been fully updated in line with the latest NICE and DSM-V guidelines, and now includes an added chapter on implementation, and what factors facilitate implementation processes of intervention efforts. Adolescent Mental Health: Prevention and Intervention will be essential reading for students and practitioners in the fields of child welfare and mental health services, and any professional working with adolescents at risk of developing mental health problems.

Assessing and Treating Low Incidence/High Severity Psychological Disorders of Childhood by Stefan C. Dombrowski; Karen L. Gischlar; Martin Mrazik During the past several decades, interest in children's psychological disorders has grown steadily within the research community, resulting in a burgeoning knowledge base. The majority of the attention and funding, not surprisingly, has focused on the more prevalent and well-known conditions. Although this raises the odds that young people with more well-known disorders such as ADHD, autism, and learning disorders will receive much-needed professional assessment and intervention, children with less frequently encountered disorders may experience a higher risk of misdiagnosis and inappropriate treatment. Useful data has been scattered throughout the literature for severe-but-less-frequent childhood psychological disorders, including: fire setting; gender identity disorder; impulse control disorders (i.e., kleptomania, trichotillomania, intermittent explosive disorder); selective mutism; Munchausen by proxy; childhood schizophrenia; gang involvement; sexual offending; self-injurious behavior; and feral children. This concise volume offers up-to-date information on these conditions, which, though relatively rare, may have profound effect not only on the children themselves but also their families, friends, and the community at large. Coverag e of each disorder is presented in an accessible format covering: Overview and history. Description and diagnostic classification, with proposed changes to the DSM-V. Etiology and theory. Assessment tools and interview protocols. Commonly used psychological and pharmacological treatment options. Current research issues and directions for future investigation. Assessing and Treating Low Incidence/High Severity Psychological Disorders of Childhood is a must-have reference for researchers, clinicians, practitioners, and graduate students in clinical child and school psychology, pediatrics, psychiatry, social work, schoolcounseling, education, and public policy.

Bipolar Disorder in Youth: Presentation, Treatment and Neurobiology by Stephen M. Strakowski (Editor); Melissa P. DelBello (Editor); Caleb M. Adler (Editor) Bipolar disorders affect up to 3% of the world's population and are the 6th leading cause of disability worldwide. The estimated annual costs of bipolar disorder approach $50 billion in the United States, and the associated societal and personal suffering is immeasurable. Bipolar disorder is a lifelong illness that typically begins in mid-adolescence, thereby disrupting healthy developmental processes. It is also a progressive illness, making early intervention even more critical. As the disorder presents differently in youth as it does in adults, considerable controversy exists around the diagnosis in young people. The neurobiological factors leading to the onset of bipolar disorder reflect abnormalities in adolescent brain development. Bipolar disorder is strongly heritable and therefore, these developmental abnormalities likely represent the culmination of processes that precede the expression of symptoms. Current studies of children who are at risk for bipolar disorder are identifying these processes. Again, controversy exists about how to move these neuroscience gains forward to help affected individuals and, particularly to manage children at risk to delay or prevent the onset or progression of bipolar disorder.With these considerations in mind, Bipolar Disorder in Youth provides a timely, focused review of the diagnosis, treatment, and neurobiology of bipolar disorder in youth. It addresses current controversies and resolves those in which evidence is available. The book is organized into three sections based on these topics to provide comprehensive discussions to aid clinicians managing these individuals in their practices, as well as scientists trying to advance the field. The three editors are widely recognized experts in bipolar disorder, and the authors of each chapter represent international experts in the respective topics. Consequently, this book is the most comprehensive volume available discussing this important population and is a "must" for the libraries of clinicians and scientists working with bipolar children and adolescents.

Breaking Points: Youth Mental Health Crises and How We All Can Help by Neely Laurenzo Myers A free ebook version of this title is available through Luminos, University of California Press's Open Access publishing program. Visit www.luminosoa.org to learn more. Unprecedented numbers of young people are in crisis today, and our health care systems are set up to fail them. Breaking Points explores the stories of a diverse group of American young adults experiencing psychiatric hospitalization for psychotic symptoms for the first time and documents how patients and their families make decisions about treatment after their release. Approximately half of young people refuse mental-health care after their initial hospitalization even though we know that better outcomes depend on early support for youth and families. In attempting to determine why this is the case, Neely Laurenzo Myers identifies what matters most to young people in crisis, passionately arguing that health care providers must attend not only to the medical and material dimensions of care but also to a patient's moral agency.

Care of Children Exposed to the Traumatic Effects of Disaster by Jon A. Shaw; Zelde Espinel; James M. Shultz Care of Children Exposed to the Traumatic Effects of Disaster addresses the effects of disaster on children and their families, and explores the various resources that mental health practitioners and others who routinely interact with children, such as teachers, first responders, health care professionals, child care providers, child welfare professionals, and faith-based community members, can use to help them in their hour of need. The three co-authors have had extensive, and intensive, experience working with disaster victims and preparing both professionals and laypeople to intervene effectively in extreme events. Those on the front lines will find the book's practical and insightful observations, techniques, and strategies indispensible. Specifically, the book * Explains not only how to provide basic support services and brief interventions but how to recognize children in distress, to actively support positive coping skills, to monitor children's well-being in the aftermath of disaster and to identify those who need more intensive evaluation and intervention.* Encompasses a broad range of disasters, from the "natural" (such as earthquakes, tsunamis, tornadoes, and hurricanes) to the human generated (such as wars, civil strife, ethnic conflict, and acts of terrorism).* Provides a timeline of psychological responses to disaster, with its impact phase and cascade of secondary adversities in the aftermath of disaster, which establishes helpful benchmarks to those providing support.* Includes numerous tables and figures that convey complex information in an intuitive, easy-to-understand way. Care of Children Exposed to the Traumatic Effects of Disaster emphasizes the critical importance of effective therapeutic intervention--which restores function, enhances recovery, and creates a safe and secure environment--and explains how to mobilize family and social supports to achieve that goal.

Child and Adolescent Psychiatry by Robyn Thom (Editor); Christopher McDougle (Editor) Part of the What Do I Do Now? Psychiatry series, Child and Adolescent Psychiatry provides a practical biopsychosocial approach to assessing and treating psychiatric disorders in children and adolescents. Case studies covered include neurodevelopmental disorders, schizophrenia, mood disorders, anxiety disorders, obsessive-compulsive and related disorders, trauma and stressor-related disorders, factitious disorder imposed on another, feeding and eating disorders, encopresis, gender dysphoria, substance-related and addictive disorders, and delirium. Each chapter includes an overview of the epidemiology of the disorder, common signs and symptoms, key aspects of the clinical assessment, and a biopsychosocial treatment approach with considerations based upon the age and developmental stage of the patient.

Clinical Manual for the Psychiatric Interview of Children and Adolescents by Claudio Cepeda Because of the importance of the interview in assessing behavioral disorders of childhood, practitioners need to refine the techniques they normally use with adults. This book offers a comprehensive and practical guide to the child and adolescent psychiatric interview, providing an outline of how first to elicit data from younger patients and their families, then how to organize and integrate this information to form a definitive program of care. Clinical Manual for the Psychiatric Interview of Children and Adolescents shows how to focus the exploration of common psychiatric syndromes while offering guidance in such matters as general principles of interviewing, use of the AMSIT in mental status examinations, and evaluation of both internalizing and externalizing symptoms. The manual is exceptionally practical, illustrated with clinical vignettes and enhanced with quick-reference tables that summarize key points. In addition to covering the psychiatric evaluation, it also brings users up to speed on such topics as neuropsychiatric assessment, psychiatric formulation, comorbidities, resistances, and countertransference. It expands greatly on the coverage in the author's previous book, Concise Guide to the Psychiatric Interview of Children and Adolescents, and features five new chapters: * Diagnostic and Therapeutic Engagement, showing how to achieve a positive and benevolent bond with both child and family through such traits as warmth, acceptance, humor, and empathic attunement, as well as how to respond to "reverse engagement"* Special Interviewing Techniques, helping examiners confront circumstances in which standard approaches are ineffective through such methods as role reversal, the double-chair technique, and the use of drawings to illuminate the child's issues* Family Assessment, presenting areas of inquiry such as marital or intergenerational conflict that need to be understood in order to gain a broad perspective of the family's organization and functioning* Providing Post evaluation Feedback to Families, emphasizing the importance of tact and sensitivity while helping the practitioner anticipate complications posed by situations such as divorce or abuse* Evaluation of Special Populations, alerting the examiner to relevant approaches when confronted with situations ranging from burn trauma to sensory deficits to displaced or refugee children "Anyone who wonders how best to approach psychiatric interviewing of children and adolescents will find this work a valuable guide," wrote the Journal of Clinical Psychiatry of Dr. Cepeda's Concise Guide. His manual now offers an even better handle on these difficult-to-manage situations.

Clinical Manual of Child and Adolescent Psychopharmacology by Molly McVoy (Contribution by); Ekaterina Stepanova (Contribution by); Robert L. Findling (Contribution by) Updated to include a succinct yet thorough review of the most recent evidence-based information and data-driven best treatment practices in child and adolescent psychiatry, this fourth edition of the Clinical Manual of Child and Adolescent Psychopharmacology not only examines the evidence for treating mental health disorders in younger patients but also illuminates how clinical trials of various methodologies can inform different aspects of clinical practice. Organized by DSM-5-TR diagnosis rather than drug class, this clinically accessible volume offers an exhaustive analysis of the use of psychotropic agents in disorders that include * Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder* Depressive disorders* Autism spectrum disorder* Early schizophrenia and psychotic illnesses* Eating disorders Comprehensive medication tables allow for easy reference of dosing, side effects, and tips for management. Additionally, key points at the conclusion of each chapter summarize essential information for treating clinicians. With a depth of information unmatched by any other guide, this new edition of the Clinical Manual of Child and Adolescent Psychopharmacology is an indispensable desktop reference for clinicians working with young patients.

Clinical Manual of Pediatric Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry by Richard J. Shaw; David R. DeMaso Clinical Manual of Pediatric Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry offers a comprehensive guide for mental health clinicians, trainees, and students to pediatric consultation-liaison psychiatry (CLP), a specialized area of psychiatry whose practitioners have particular expertise in the diagnosis and management of psychiatric disorders in complex physically ill children and adolescents. Patients commonly fall into one of three descriptive categories: those with comorbid emotional and physical illnesses that complicate each other's management; those with distressing somatic symptoms plus abnormal thoughts, feelings, and behavior in response to these symptoms; and those with psychiatric symptoms that are a direct consequence of a physical illness and/or its treatment. The text, authored by two luminaries in pediatric psychiatry, thoroughly explores the challenges faced by these patients and pediatric practitioners and mental health professionals who together care for them, addressing, in a concrete and practical manner, the wide variety of issues encountered in the pediatric hospital. These concerns range from how to address treatment nonadherence in children to how to conduct a psychosocial assessment of a solid organ transplant recipient. The text's carefully chosen features and valuable content include: * Historical context for the evolution of "pediatric psychosomatic medicine" to "pediatric consultation-liaison psychiatry," ensuring an accurate, up-to-date representation of the field and proper integration with DSM-5 classification.* Detailed clinical assessment protocols, with guidance for exploring interrelated domains such as illness factors, emotional impact, family functioning, and social relationships. These practical, step-by-step guides assist the consultant in conducting a comprehensive psychiatric/psychological assessment.* A target symptom-oriented chapter on psychopharmacology in the physically ill child, which offers guidance on management of acute agitation, insomnia, fatigue, depression, and anxiety. The treatment algorithms presented are designed to be easily understood by non-psychiatric clinicians.* Guidance on the use of practical interventions to help physically ill children undergoing traumatic medical procedures, including hypnosis, progressive muscle relaxation, and breathing techniques. These specific techniques will help the clinician in assisting distressed patients. The previous edition was considered the gold standard for books in the field. This new, thoroughly revised iteration of Clinical Manual of Pediatric Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry will doubtless inspire similar acclaim for its rigor, accessibility, and clinical wisdom.

Clinical Manual of Youth Addictive Disorders by Yifrah Kaminer (Editor); Ken C. Winters (Editor) This long-awaited follow-up to the classic text Clinical Manual of Adolescent Substance Abuse Treatment presents the latest research on substance use and substance use disorders (SUDs) in adolescents 12-18 and emerging adults 18-25 years of age. This new manual offers a substantive update of the previous manual's 16 chapters, offering 7 additional chapters devoted to important new topics, such as pediatric primary care assessment and intervention, electronic tools, specific substances (e.g., cannabis, opioids, alcohol), and much more. Psychiatrists, psychologists, social workers, and substance abuse specialists, as well as applied researchers and public health professionals, will find this new manual a research-rich and clinically compelling resource for understanding disease course, prevention, diagnosis, substance-specific interventions, co-occurring disorders, and issues related to special populations. The strengths of this text, edited by two of the foremost experts on addiction among youth, are many: * Because youth are not simply "miniature adults," the book uses a developmentally informed approach to understand the onset of substance use and the trajectory to SUD and behavioral addictive disorders.* An extensive section of the book is devoted to epidemiology, diagnosis, and interventions for specific substances of abuse, including alcohol, tobacco, cannabis, and opioids. The full range of interventions are described for each, including pharmacotherapy, cognitive-behavior therapy, motivational enhancement, and psychosocial strategies.* An introduction on the nature of the association between co-occurring disorders is followed by chapters on internalizing disorders (such as depression), suicidal behavior, psychotic disorders, externalizing disorders (such as attention-deficit/hyperactivity), and behavioral addictions * Special chapters are devoted to the management of youth with SUDs in the juvenile justice system and the consequences, for the child, of maternal substance use during pregnancy. Advances in research and clinical strategies make both topics timely. * Three appendixes complete the book. The first offers resources for screening and assessment tools, the second provides a select list of websites for parents who are seeking advice and resources about drug prevention and intervention, and the third lists websites containing general information about self-help, including how to find local AA or NA meetings. Emerging research on developmental psychopathology and adolescent development has implications for how we view current prevention, intervention, and treatment paradigms, and Clinical Manual of Youth Addictive Disorders is indispensable in helping the reader understand and implement effective strategies for these patients and their families.

Complex Disorders in Pediatric Psychiatry: A Clinician's Guide by David I. Driver; Shari Thomas Get a quick, expert overview of complex childhood psychiatric disorders from Drs. David I. Driver and Shari Thomas of Healthy Foundations Group. This practical resource presents a summary of today's current knowledge and best approaches to topics from gender dysphoria to childhood onset schizophrenia and other complex psychiatric disorders. Comprehensive guide for any professional working with children. Consolidates today's evidence-based information on complex childhood psychiatric disorders into one convenient resource. Provides must-know information on evaluation and management. Covers a range of psychiatric disorders of children including psychosis, autoimmune encephalitides, delirium, concussions, ADHD, irritability, sleep disorders, and eating disorders.

Concise Guide to Child and Adolescent Psychiatry by Mina K. Dulcan; Rachel R. Ballard; Poonam Jha; Julie M. Sadhu Much like the patients on which it focuses, the field of pediatric mental health continues to grow and develop. Among other advances, the body of clinical research and the number of empirically supported treatments have grown, evaluation practices have been refined, and awareness of emotional and behavioral problems in youth has increased. Stay up-to-date on significant DSM-5 changes to psychiatric nomenclature and criteria--and the developments that have spurred them--with the Concise Guide to Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. This fifth edition prunes older content while distilling and incorporating clinically relevant findings, and features: * Reorganized diagnostic chapters that reflect updates to DSM-5 * Tables of selected diagnostic criteria from DSM-5 for quick reference* Relevant treatment methods for each section on a specific disorder or clinical situation* An informative chapter dedicated to pharmacological treatments--from stimulant medications and antidepressants to antipsychotics and anticonvulsants* Suggested additional readings for those interested in learning more about particular topics* Recommended published and on-line information resources for parents An indispensable primer on child and adolescent psychiatry for medical and mental health students and clinical trainees, this guide also serves as an ideal, quick-reference update for practicing physicians, nurses, and advanced practice nurses. Complex theoretical notions, new research, and areas of controversy have been simplified in the interest of brevity and ease of reference, making this a useful resource for professionals in special education, child welfare, and juvenile justice, as well as parents.

Depression in Parents, Parenting, and Children: Opportunities to Improve Identification, Treatment, and Prevention by Division of Behavioral and Social Sciences and Education; Board on Children, Youth, and Families; Committee on Depression, Parenting Practices, and the Healthy Development of Children; Institute of Medicine; National Research Council Depression is a widespread condition affecting approximately 7.5 million parents in the U.S. each year and may be putting at least 15 million children at risk for adverse health outcomes. Based on evidentiary studies, major depression in either parent can interfere with parenting quality and increase the risk of children developing mental, behavioral and social problems. Depression in Parents, Parenting, and Children highlights disparities in the prevalence, identification, treatment, and prevention of parental depression among different sociodemographic populations. It also outlines strategies for effective intervention and identifies the need for a more interdisciplinary approach that takes biological, psychological, behavioral, interpersonal, and social contexts into consideration. A major challenge to the effective management of parental depression is developing a treatment and prevention strategy that can be introduced within a two-generation framework, conducive for parents and their children. Thus far, both the federal and state response to the problem has been fragmented, poorly funded, and lacking proper oversight. This study examines options for widespread implementation of best practices as well as strategies that can be effective in diverse service settings for diverse populations of children and their families. The delivery of adequate screening and successful detection and treatment of a depressive illness and prevention of its effects on parenting and the health of children is a formidable challenge to modern health care systems. This study offers seven solid recommendations designed to increase awareness about and remove barriers to care for both the depressed adult and prevention of effects in the child. The report will be of particular interest to federal health officers, mental and behavioral health providers in diverse parts of health care delivery systems, health policy staff, state legislators, and the general public.

Diagnostic Dilemmas in Child and Adolescent Psychiatry: Philosophical Perspectives by Christian Perring (Editor); Lloyd Wells (Editor) Though many of the ethical issues important in adult mental health are of relevance in the child, there are a considerable number of issues special to children. Many of the dilemmas faced pertain to diagnosis, treatment, the protection of the child, as well as the child's own developing intelligence and moral judgement. In addition, there are cases where the interests of the parents may conflict with the interests of the child. For example, the interests of a mother with schizophrenia might best be served by her continuing to look after her child, but the child's interests might require that a substitute placement be found. Diagnostic Dilemmas in Child and Adolescent Psychiatry is the first in the IPPP series to explore this highly complex topic. It brings together a collection of clinicians and philosophers who consider a range of topics central to the diagnosis and treatment of children and adolescents affected by mental disorders.

Disruptive Mood: Irritability in Children and Adolescents by Argyris Stringaris; Eric Taylor A practical guide to understanding and treating children and adolescents prone to extreme levels of angry outbursts, Disruptive Mood: Irritability in Children and Adolescents is based on the very latest research and theory. Providing both a clinical and scientific perspective on irritability in children, this book is a timely look at recent developments in the field. Abnormal states of anger are a common reason for referral to child health services, and cause concern in clinics, schools, and families. Misdiagnosis and treatment can stem from a lack of understanding of the mechanisms involved in high levels of anger in children, and Disruptive Mood: Irritability in Children and Adolescents provides clear guidance on the development of abnormal states of anger, their consequences for later development, and how to assess and make differential diagnoses between them. A useful resource for clinical practice, this book is concise and accessible, and offers tools for evaluating treatments. Disruptive Mood: Irritability in Children and Adolescents is designed for practitioners involved in child and adolescent mental health and education and researchers who need an introduction to this complex field.

Dulcan's Textbook of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry by Mina K. Dulcan (Editor) Already a foundational resource in the field, Dulcan's Textbook of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry has been updated in the third edition, including the latest research and clinical advances. An expanded chapter on telehealth acknowledges the changes and challenges posed by the COVID-19 pandemic and also discusses e-mental health options that support primary care providers, who are often the front line in mental health treatment. Two completely new chapters on pediatric consultation liaison psychiatry examine the history, clinical practice models, scope of interventions, and pharmacological considerations that are relevant to treatment of medically ill children and those seen in primary care--more important than ever, with the significant increase in the number of children with mental health care needs who are seen by pediatricians. In addition, readers will find thorough, DSM-5-aligned insight from dozens of experts on: * Neurodevelopmental and other psychiatric disorders, including disorders affecting somatic function, with clinical descriptions, epidemiology, risk factors, diagnosis, treatment options, and more* A full range of psychosocial treatments, including those focused on both individuals and families, as well as therapeutic milieus and systemic models of care* The principles and application of psychopharmacology, from antidepressants to antipsychotic medications to mood stabilizers and medications for ADHD* Specialized issues, including cultural and religious considerations, gender and sexual diversity, and legal and ethical issues Each chapter features summary points for ease of reference and extensive references for continued study. Working with young patients, who are changing and evolving with age throughout the course of treatment, and their families presents very real and distinct challenges. This latest edition of Dulcan's Textbook of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry provides child and adolescent psychiatrists, pediatricians, family physicians, general psychiatrists, child neurologists, psychologists, advanced practice nurses, psychiatric social workers, and other practitioners the depth and breadth of knowledge needed to treat children and adolescents effectively.

Girls at Risk: Swedish Longitudinal Research on Adjustment by Anna-Karin Andershed (Editor) Until recently, boys and men provided the template by which problem behaviors in girls and women were measured. With the shift to studying female development and adjustment through female perspectives comes a need for knowledge of trajectories of at-risk girls' behavior as they mature. Girls at Risk: Swedish Longitudinal Research on Adjustment fills this gap accessibly and compassionately. Its lifespan approach relates the pathologies of adolescence to later outcomes as girls grow up to have relationships, raise families, and take on adult roles in society. Coverage is balanced between internalizing behaviors, traditionally considered to be more common among females, and externalizing ones, more common among males. The book's detailed review of findings includes several major longitudinal studies of normative and clinical populations, and the possibility of early maturation as a risk factor for pathology is discussed in depth. Contributors not only emphasize "what works" in intervention and prevention but also identify emerging issues in assessment and treatment. An especially powerful concluding chapter raises serious questions about how individuals in the healing professions perceive their mission, and their clients. Although the studies are from one country--Sweden--the situations, and their potential for successful intervention, transcend national boundaries, including: * Adolescent and adult implications of pubertal timing. * Eating disorders and self-esteem. * Prevention of depressive symptoms. * Understanding violence in girls with substance problems. * Lifespan continuity in female aggression and violence. * A life-course perspective in girls' criminality. With insights beyond the beaten path, Girls at Risk provides a wealth of information for researchers, clinicians and related professionals, and graduate students in child and school psychology; psychiatry; education;social work; psychotherapy and counseling; and public health.

Handbook of Child and Adolescent Anxiety Disorders by Dean McKay (Editor); Eric A. Storch (Editor) Is it school refusal or separation anxiety disorder? Can preschoolers have panic attacks? Does food neophobia really exist? For readers seeking ways to improve assessment, case conceptualization, or treatment plans as well as a more general understanding of anxiety disorders among children, the Handbook of Child and Adolescent Anxiety Disorders addresses these and many other complex issues. A straightforward companion to the diagnostic manuals, this volume crosses theoretical boundaries to describe in depth the wide range of children's anxiety disorders and to explain the developmental nuances that separate them from their adult analogues.Coverage includes:Diagnostic and etiological models of children's anxiety disorders (i.e., genetic, cognitive-behavioral, taxonomic, neuropsychological, dimensional).Differential diagnosis guidelines for generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), phobic conditions, obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), and posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) in youth.Ancillary factors in child and adolescent anxiety (e.g., personality, temperament, parenting issues, and comorbid conditions).Psychological, pharmacological, and combined treatments for childhood anxiety disorders.Special populations and emerging areas of interest, including anxiety disorders in the contexts of chronic health problems and developmental disabilities.The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Anxiety Disorders is a must-have reference for researchers, clinicians, and graduate students in psychology, psychiatry, social work and counseling as well as allied professionals in hospitals, community mental health centers, schools, and private practice.

Handbook of Juvenile Forensic Psychology and Psychiatry by Elena L. Grigorenko (Editor) Juvenile justice centers have a long tradition as an unfortunate stop for young offenders who need mental health care. Reports estimate that as many as 70% of the youth in detention centers meet criteria for mental health disorders. As juvenile justice systems once again turn their focus from confinement to rehabilitation, mental health providers have major opportunities to inform and improve both practice and policy. The Handbook of Juvenile Forensic Psychology and Psychiatry explores these opportunities by emphasizing a developmental perspective, multifaceted assessment, and evidence-based practice in working with juvenile offenders. This comprehensive volume provides insights at virtually every intersection of mental health practice and juvenile justice, covering areas as wide-ranging as special populations, sentencing issues, educational and pharmacological interventions, family involvement, ethical issues, staff training concerns, and emerging challenges. Together, its chapters contain guidelines not only for changing the culture of detention but also preventing detention facilities from being the venue of choice in placing troubled youth. Key issues addressed in the Handbook include: Developmental risks for delinquency. Race and sex disparities in juvenile justice processing. Establishing standards of practice in juvenile forensic mental health assessment. Serving dually diagnosed youth in the juvenile justice system. PTSD among court-involved youth. Female juvenile offenders. Juvenile sex offenders. The Handbook of Juvenile Forensic Psychology and Psychiatry is an essential reference for researchers, professors, allied clinicians and professionals, and policy makers across multiple fields, including child and school psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, developmental psychology, criminology, juvenile justice, forensic psychology, neuropsychology, social work, and education.

Helping Kids in Crisis: Managing Psychiatric Emergencies in Children and Adolescents by Fadi Haddad (Editor); Ruth S. Gerson (Editor) Helping Kids in Crisis: Managing Psychiatric Emergencies in Children and Adolescents provides expert guidance to practitioners responding to high-stakes situations, such as children considering or attempting suicide, cutting or injuring themselves purposely, and becoming aggressive or violently destructive. Children experiencing behavioral crises frequently reach critical states in venues that were not designed to respond to or support them--in school, for example, or at home among their highly stressed and confused families. Professionals who provide services to these children must be able to quickly determine threats to safety and initiate interventions to deescalate behaviors, often with limited resources. The editors and authors have extensive experience at one of the busiest and best regional referral centers for children with psychiatric emergencies, and have deftly translated their expertise into this symptom-based guide to help non-psychiatric clinicians more effectively and compassionately care for this challenging population. The book is designed for ease of use and its structure and features are helpful and supportive: * The book is written for practitioners in hospital or community-based settings, including physicians in training, pediatricians who work in office-based or emergency settings, psychologists, social workers, school psychologists, guidance counselors, and school nurses--professionals for whom child psychiatric resources are few.* Clear risk and diagnostic assessment tools allow clinicians working in settings without access to child mental health professionals to think like trained emergency room child psychiatrists--from evaluation to treatment. * The content is symptom-focused, enabling readers to swiftly identify the appropriate chapter, with decision trees and easy-to-read tables to use for quick de-escalation and risk assessment. * A guide to navigating the educational system, child welfare system, and other systems of care helps clinicians to identify and overcome systems-level barriers to obtain necessary treatment for their patients.* Finally, the book provides an extensive review of successful models of emergency psychiatric care from across the country to assist clinicians and hospital administrators in program design. An abundance of case examples of common emergency symptoms or behaviors provides professionals with critical, concrete tools for diagnostic evaluation, risk assessment, decision making, de-escalation, and safety planning. Helping Kids in Crisis: Managing Psychiatric Emergencies in Children and Adolescents is a vital resource for clinicians facing high-risk challenges on the front lines to help them intervene effectively, relieve suffering, and keep their young patients safe.

Integrative Play Therapy by Athena A. Drewes; Sue C. Bratton; Charles E. Schaefer An integrative approach to play therapy blending various therapeutic treatment models and techniques Reflecting the transition in the field of play therapy from a "one size fits all" approach to a more eclectic framework that integrates more than one perspective, Integrative Play Therapy explores methods for blending the best theories and treatment techniques to resolve the most common psychological disorders of childhood. Edited by internationally renowned leaders in the field, this book is the first of its kind to look at the use of a multi-theoretical framework as a foundation for practice. With discussion of integrative play treatment of children presenting a wide variety of problems and disorders--including aggression issues, the effects of trauma, ADHD, anxiety, obsessive-compulsive disorders, social skills deficits, medical issues such as HIV/AIDS, and more--the book provides guidance on: Play and group therapy approaches Child-directed play therapy with behavior management training for parents Therapist-led and child-led play therapies Cognitive-behavioral therapy with therapeutic storytelling and play therapy Family therapy and play therapy Bibliotherapy within play therapy An essential resource for all mental health professionals looking to incorporate play therapy into treatment, Integrative Play Therapy reveals unique flexibility in integrating theory and techniques, allowing practitioners to offer their clients the best treatment for specific presenting problems.

Interviewing Children and Adolescents: Skills and Strategies for Effective DSM-5® Diagnosis by James Morrison; Kathryn Flegel This instructive clinical resource has given thousands of clinicians and students essential skills for evaluating infants through adolescents with any type of mental health issue. Principles for conducting age-appropriate clinical interviews with children of varying ages and their parents--including the use of toys, drawing, dolls, and other forms of play--are illustrated with annotated sample transcripts. The book provides crucial information for accurately diagnosing a wide range of mental and behavioral disorders. User-friendly features include concise explanations of diagnostic criteria, coding notes, interview pointers for specific disorders, vivid vignettes, and a sample written report. New to This Edition *Current terminology, codes, and diagnostic criteria integrated throughout the case examples and disorder-specific discussions. *Features both DSM-5 and ICD-10-CM codes. *Essential Features--prototypes that encapsulate the symptoms and other diagnostic elements of each disorder. *Reproducible tool (Questionnaire for Parents) that can be downloaded and printed for repeated use. *Additional disorders and vignettes.

Lewis's Child and Adolescent Psychiatry: A Comprehensive Textbook by Andrés Martin (Editor); Fred R. Volkmar (Editor); Michael H. Bloch (Editor) For 25 years, Lewis's Child and Adolescent Psychiatry has been the cornerstone of every child and adolescent psychiatrist's library. Now, three colleagues of Dr. Lewis at the world-renowned Yale Child Study Center, have substantially updated and revised this foundational textbook for its long-awaited fifth edition, the first in ten years. Encyclopedic in scope, it continues to serve as a broad reference, deftly encompassing and integrating scientific principles, research methodologies, and everyday clinical care. Feautres: Ideal for anyone involved in the study or practice of child and adolescent psychiatry. Includes new content on Research Domain Criteria (RDoC) approach advanced by the National Institute of Mental Health. Section on telepsychiatry has been expanded, and psychopharmacology content has been updated and re-organized into five distinct yet linked components. Chapters cover ethics, research methodologies, treating diverse populations, evidence-based practice, common disorders and syndromes, treatment options, legal issues, and more. All royalties from the sale of the book will go to the Break the Cycle initiative of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. Your book purchase includes a complimentary download of the enhanced eBook for iOS, Android, PC & Mac. Take advantage of these practical features that will improve your eBook experience: The ability to download the eBook on multiple devices at one time -- providing a seamless reading experience online or offline. Powerful search tools and smart navigation cross-links that allow you to search within this book, or across your entire library of VitalSource eBooks. Multiple viewing options that enable you to scale images and text to any size without losing page clarity as well as responsive design. The ability to highlight text and add notes with one click.

The Little Book of Child and Adolescent Development by Karen Gilmore; Pamela Meersand The book presents a modern, psychoanalytically-informed chronological view of how the mind develops from infancy through young adulthood. It is a comprehensive work which integrates analytic theories and concepts with a contemporary systems model of development and draws on scholarly research from neighboring fields.

Longer-Term Psychiatric Inpatient Care for Adolescents: A Multidisciplinary Treatment Approach by Philip Hazell (Editor) This open access book describes the theoretical underpinnings and operational aspects of delivering longer-term inpatient psychiatric care to adolescents experiencing severe, unremitting mental illness. The authorship is drawn from the multidisciplinary team that supports the Walker Adolescent Unit, located in Sydney, Australia. The book begins with an account of the planning and development of the unit, an examination of the physical environment, and the adaptations that have been made to ensure its functionality. There follows a consideration of the therapeutic milieu. The book describes clinical processes such as admission and discharge planning, formulation and case review. There is information about the specific roles of professionals and the therapies that they provide. The book describes the steps taken to maintain and enhance the physical wellbeing of patients. There are chapters dedicated to governance, and to training and education. The final chapterdescribes how the unit responded to challenges created by the COVID-19 pandemic.

Mental Health Strategies for Pediatric Care by Susan G. Forman; Jeffrey D. Shahidullah; Cody A. Hostutler; Cori M. Green; Rebecca A. Baum This new guide will help clinicians recognize and manage emerging mental health issues using interventions that are designed for the primary care setting. Mental Health Strategies for Pediatric Care provides a framework for identifying and understanding the common factors and common elements of mental health care and, as a natural outgrowth, incorporating the following considerations into daily practice: ·       Eliciting patient and family social and mental health concerns ·       Increasing patient and family understanding of social and mental health problems ·       Managing mental health issues that have resulted in functional problems but not reached the level of a diagnosable disorder ·       Using therapeutic strategies that are an early, first-line approach to common mental health concerns ·       Developing positive patient and family attitudes about seeking treatment from social service or mental health specialists ·       Supporting the patient and family in maintaining emotional and behavioral change that results from mental health specialty treatment ·       And more!

Neurotechnology and Brain Stimulation in Pediatric Psychiatric and Neurodevelopmental Disorders by Lindsay M. Oberman (Editor); Peter G. Enticott (Editor) Neurotechnology and Brain Stimulation in Pediatric Psychiatric and Neurodevelopmental Disorders provides a comprehensive overview of neurotechnological devices as potential treatments for psychiatric and neurodevelopmental disorders in children and adolescents. Many neuropsychiatric disorders are covered such as Autism Spectrum Disorder, ADHD, Depression, Tourette's Syndrome, and OCD. Different device-based treatments are discussed such as Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation, Transcranial Direct Current Stimulation, Deep Brain Stimulation, Chronotherapy, and Neurofeedback.

Opportunities to Promote Children's Behavioral Health: Health Care Reform and Beyond: Workshop Summary by Forum on Promoting Children's Cognitive, Affective, and Behavioral Health; Board on Children, Youth, and Families; Institute of Medicine; Division of Behavioral and Social Sciences and Education Staff; Noam I. Keren (Editor); Steve Olson (Editor); National Academies of Sciences, Engineering, and Medicine The Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act (ACA), which was signed into law in 2010, has several provisions that could greatly improve the behavioral health of children and adolescents in the United States. It requires that many insurance plans cover mental health and substance use disorder services, rehabilitative services to help support people with behavioral health challenges, and preventive services like behavioral assessments for children and depression screening for adults. These and other provisions provide an opportunity to confront the many behavioral health challenges facing youth in America. To explore how the ACA and other aspects of health care reform can support innovations to improve children's behavioral health and sustain those innovations over time, the Forum on Promoting Children's Cognitive, Affective, and Behavioral Health held a workshop on April 1-2, 2015. The workshop explicitly addressed the behavioral health needs of all children, including those with special health needs. It also took a two-generation approach, looking at the programs and services that support not only children but also parents and families. This report summarizes the presentations and discussions of this workshop.

The Oxford Handbook of Infant, Toddler, and Preschool Mental Health Assessment by Rebecca DelCarmen-Wiggins (Editor); Alice S. Carter (Editor) This fully updated new edition of The Oxford Handbook of Infant, Toddler, and Preschool Mental Health Assessment remains the leading reference for those seeking to understand and assess mental health in infants and young children. Detailing the latest empirical research on measures and methods of infant and young child assessment and providing clinically applicable information for practitioners, this handbook takes a closer look at current developmentally based conceptualizations of mental health function and dysfunction in infants and young children as well as current and new diagnostic criteria in specific disorders such as sensory modulation dysfunction, autism spectrum disorders, affective disorders, and post-traumatic stress disorder. Presented in four sections, chapters correspond to four broad themes: contextual factors in early assessment; temperament and regulation in assessment of young children; early problems and disorders; and translation and varied applied settings for assessment. Each chapter presents state of the science information on valid, developmentally based clinical assessment and makes recommendations based on developmental theory, empirical findings, and clinical experience. Chapters have been added to this second edition covering family assessment, early care and educational environments, new approaches for distinguishing temperament from psychopathology, assessing language, and implementing second stage screening and referral. The volume recognizes and highlights the important role of developmental, social, and cultural contexts in approaching the challenge of assessing early problems and disorders. This new, updated volume will be an ideal resource for teachers, researchers, and a wide variety of clinicians and trainees including child psychologists and psychiatrists, early interventionists, and early special educators.

Pediatric Mental Health: A Compendium of AAP Clinical Practice Guidelines and Policies by American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP) This new compendium is your source for trustworthy recommendations on quality care of children and adolescents with mental health issues. It features one new AAP clinical practice guideline on ADHD and 32 AAP policy statements and clinical and technical reports on mental health. Within the compendium, you will find the collected results of the AAP Committee on Psychosocial Aspects of Child and Family Health, the Committee on Pediatric Emergency Medicine, and the Section on Developmental and Behavioral Pediatrics, in addition to select polices from other AAP groups. This compendium covers 33 different mental health topics and is organized into 8 sections for easy reference: Mental health competencies Attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) Adversity and toxic stress Depression and bipolar disorder Mental health/behavioral problems Maltreatment Mental health emergencies Special pediatric populations and support

Pediatric psychopharmacology: principles and practice by Andrés Martin (Editor); Lawrence Scahill (Editor); Christopher Kratochvil (Editor) When the first edition of Pediatric Psychopharmacology published in 2002, it filled a void in child and adolescent psychiatry and quickly established itself as the definitive text-reference in pediatric psychopharmacology. While numerous short, clinically focused paperbacks have been published since then, no competitors with the scholarly breadth, depth, and luster of this volume have emerged. In the second edition, Christopher Kratochvil, MD, a highly respected expert in pediatric psychopharmacology, joins the outstanding editorial team led by Dr. Martin and Dr. Scahill. In the new edition, the editors streamline the flow of information to reflect the growth in scientific data since the first edition appeared. The overall structure of the book remains the same, with major sections on underlying biology; somatic interventions; assessment and treatment; and special considerations.

A Practical Guide to Child and Adolescent Mental Health Screening, Evidence-Based Assessment, Intervention, and Health Promotion by Bernadette Mazurek Melnyk (Editor); Pamela Lusk (Editor) "This book is a thorough and relevant first step for health professionals to learn about mental health disorders among children and adolescents, from diagnosis to treatment to resources and prevention." -Richard H. Carmona, MD, MPH, FACS 17th Surgeon General of the United States (From the Foreword) Updated with new research findings and best evidence-based practices, the third edition of this quick-access guide aids practitioners in preventing, screening, diagnosing, and managing children and adolescents who present with mental health symptoms and disorders. This new edition describes key changes in the field with an emphasis on trauma and stressor-related disorders, cognitive behavioral therapy/skills building, suicidal and self-harming behaviors, substance abuse disorders, prescribing antidepressants to youth, and promoting mental health in schools. New and updated screening tools, instruments, and interventions add to the therapeutic arsenal, along with diagnostic criteria, case studies, and risk factors. In addition, this guide delivers new information on care for the caregiver and new technologies to enhance life balance. The third edition continues to deliver the essential "nuts and bolts" of evidence-based content in a practical and user-friendly format. Grounded in DSM-V criteria and diagnoses, with a holistic view of the patient, this guide contains a wealth of resources, including screening tools, parent/patient handouts, and other resources to educate families about mental health disorders and ways to foster patient wellness. New to the Third Edition: Describes new evidence-based programs to enhance mental health and well-being Presents updated educational materials for families and caregivers Featured chapters: Evidence-based Assessment and Management of Trauma and Stressor Related Disorders Evidence-based Assessment and Management of Adverse Childhood Experiences Evidence-based Assessment and Management of Substance Abuse and Addiction Spectrum Evidence-based Assessment and Management of Anxiety Disorders Evidence-based Assessment and Management of Depressive Disorders Promoting Mental Health in Schools Self-Care for Clinicians Who Care for Children and Adolescents with Mental Health Problems Key Features: Provides a tool kit for healthcare professionals to enhance care and improve outcomes Contains a variety of valid and reliable screening tools for mental health disorders in children and teens Addresses concise, evidence-based assessment and management guidelines Includes downloadable access to patient education handouts, resources, and a variety of other resources for children, teens, and parents

Principles and Practice of Child and Adolescent Forensic Mental Health by M. d. Elissa P. Benedek; Elissa P. Benedek (Editor); Peter Ash (Editor); Charles L. Scott (Editor) When care of younger patients raises thorny legal questions, you need answers you can trust: that's why this book belongs on every clinician's reference shelf. Principles and Practice of Child and Adolescent Forensic Mental Health is a timely and authoritative source that covers issues ranging from child custody to litigation concerns as it walks clinicians through the often-confusing field of depositions and courtroom testimony. The book expands on the 2002 volume Principles and Practice of Child and Adolescent Forensic Psychiatry winner of the 2003 Manfred S. Guttmacher Award, to meet pressing twenty-first-century concerns, from telepsychiatry to the Internet, while continuing to cover basic issues, such as forensic evaluation, psychological screening, and the interviewing of children for suspected sexual abuse, that are important to both new and experienced practitioners. Many of its chapters have been entirely rewritten by new authors to provide fresh insight into such topics as child custody; juvenile law; abuse, neglect, and permanent wardship cases; transcultural, transracial, and gay/lesbian parenting and adoption; and the reliability and suggestibility of children's statements. It also includes significant material not found in the previous volume: * Two chapters on special education offer an introduction to screening instruments and help practitioners determine a child's potential need for special education programs and services.* A chapter on cultural competence helps readers improve the accuracy and responsiveness of forensic evaluations and minimize the chance of an unjust outcome resulting from misguided expert opinion.* The section on youth violence features three new chapters--Taxonomy and Neurobiology of Aggression, Prevention of School Violence, and Juvenile Stalkers--plus a newly written chapter on assessment of violence risk, offering guidance on how to confront problems such as bullying and initiate effective family interventions.* A chapter on psychiatric malpractice and professional liability addresses these legal concerns with an eye toward cases involving minors.* A chapter on psychological autopsy covers evaluation of the circumstances surrounding pediatric suicides, describing various types of equivocal deaths and discussing legal issues such as admissibility of the autopsy in court.* A newly written chapter on the Internet expands the previous book's focus on child pornography to help practitioners deal with issues ranging from online threats to emotional and legal consequences of interactions in cyberspace. This is a valuable reference not only for practitioners in psychiatry and the mental health field but also for attorneys and judges. It opens up a field that may be too often avoided and helps professionals make their way through legal thickets with confidence.

Promoting the Emotional and Behavioral Success of Youths: A Practical Guide for Clinicians by Sergio V. Delgado; Ernest V. Pedapati; Jeffrey R. Strawn Clinicians often have difficulty helping the parents of youth with emotional and behavioral difficulties and fail to recognize that often it is the youth's cognitive and learning weaknesses that drive their maladaptive behaviors. This book aims to help clinicians further understand the roots of youth's maladaptive behaviors. It also addresses the impact of youth's varied cognitive abilities on their behaviors and problems with self-esteem, particularly in youth that do not meet the diagnostic criteria for a formal learning disability. While many clinicians view learning deficits as impairments in specific academic skills, these deficits go beyond varied learning abilities and often experience difficulties in emotional, social, and behavioral functioning. These impairments vary from child to child and it is crucial to develop practical interventions for improved self-esteem and emotional success. Varied learning abilities reflect a neurodevelopmental problem in youth that can lead to difficulties with their emotional, social, and academic functioning and limit their intellectual potential. There are often treatment impasses when a youth's behavioral problems do not improve with traditional forms of psychotherapy and medication. The practical individualized interventions recommended in this book will: 1) decrease conflict in day-to-day interactions between youth and parents, 2) improve self-esteem and 3) help to achieve realistic social, emotional and academic goals. The text will help clinicians determine which maladaptive behaviors are a result of cognitive deficits and not "symptoms" of a disease-based mental disorder. Written by experts in the field, Promoting the Emotional and Behavioral Success of Youths reviews appropriate interventions in the context of the public health strategies that address the prevention of secondary socio-economic aspects as a result of cognitive weaknesses, such as realistic educational needs, career and employment choices. Clinicians will be able to use this book to develop "best fit" multimodal interventions to help parents of youth develop adaptive behaviors.

Psychiatric Interview of Children and Adolescents by Claudio Cepeda; Lucille Gotanco The psychiatric interview is the foundation of the psychotherapeutic process and is critically important to establish trust, elicit useful responses, assess patient behavior and psychopathology, and establish treatment goals and plans. Building on the success of its predecessor, a highly regarded guide to interviewing young patients and their families, Psychiatric Interview of Children and Adolescents, has been thoroughly updated and painstakingly revised to address emerging issues and evolving treatment strategies in an accessible, down-to-earth, and comprehensive style and structure. The book retains its comprehensive coverage of the principles of interviewing, use of the AMSIT model for mental status examinations, and evaluation of both internalizing and externalizing symptoms, as well as its coverage of neuropsychiatric assessment, psychiatric formulation, comorbidities, resistances, and countertransference. Additional features, either notable or new to this book, include: * The importance of diagnostic and therapeutic engagement in establishing trust with the patient and family, and techniques for forging a positive emotional connection, which the authors view as an essential responsibility for the clinician and a linchpin of successful practice.* A new chapter on the psychiatric evaluation of preschoolers and very young children, which recognizes that assessment cannot be conducted based solely on adult report, and which presents the "multiples" model: multiple sessions, multiple informants, multiple experts, multiple modes of assessment, multicultural approach, and multiaxial emphasis.* Expanded coverage of bullying, including cyber bullying, which has a pervasive and potentially pernicious effect on young people steeped in social media.* Recognition, both throughout the book and in a separate chapter on family assessment, that behavior problems in a child or young adult cannot be understood without the relational context of the family, and that any family member's problems are best understood as manifestations of dysfunctions within the broader family unit.* Expanded coverage of the factors and issues involved in evaluating children and adolescents from special populations, including those with neurodevelopmental disorders or intellectual disabilities; those who are disadvantaged, displaced, or victims of discrimination; and those with posttraumatic stress disorder related to terrorism or burn trauma. The book's instructional aims are enhanced by the use of carefully chosen and compellingly crafted clinical vignettes that illustrate vital concepts and techniques, and key points at the end of each chapter help the reader identify and remember the most important material. Psychiatric Interview of Children and Adolescents will help clinicians master the skills and attain the insight they require to accurately assess and effectively treat this most vulnerable of patient populations.

Resilience in Children, Adolescents, and Adults: Translating Research into Practice by Sandra Prince-Embury (Editor); Donald H. Saklofske (Editor) Resilience in Children, Adolescents, and Adults: Translating Research into Practice recognizes the growing need to strengthen the links between theory, assessment, interventions, and outcomes to give resilience a stronger empirical base, resulting in more effective interventions and strength-enhancing practice. This comprehensive volume clarifies core constructs of resilience and links these definitions to effective assessment. Leading researchers and clinicians examine effective scales, questionnaires, and other evaluative tools as well as instructive studies on cultural considerations in resilience, resilience in the context of disaster, and age-appropriate interventions. Key coverage addresses diverse approaches and applications in multiple areas across the lifespan. Among the subject areas covered are: - Perceived self-efficacy and its relationship to resilience. - Resilience and mental health promotion in the schools. - Resilience in childhood disorders. - Critical resources for recovering from stress. - Diversity, ecological, and lifespan issues in resilience. - Exploring resilience through the lens of core self-evaluation. Resilience in Children, Adolescents, and Adults is an important resource for researchers, clinicians and allied professionals, and graduate students in such fields as clinical child, school, and developmental psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, education, counseling psychology, social work, and pediatrics.

The Science of Adolescent Risk-Taking: Workshop Report by Board on Children, Youth and Families Staff; Institute of Medicine Staff; National Research Council Staff; Division of Behavioral and Social Sciences and Education Staff; Committee on the Science of Adolescence Fans of The Great Gatsby, Libba Bray's The Diviners, and Bright Young Things will be captivated by Janet Fox's Roaring Twenties tale. Two girls. One gangster. A deadly secret. When Josephine's father ships her off to live with her rich cousins on the glittering island of Manhattan, he says it's to find a husband. But Jo knows better--there's trouble brewing, and in 1925, all that glitters is not gold. Caught up in a swirl of her cousin's bobbed-hair set--and the men that court them--Jo soon realizes that this world of jazz and gangsters and their molls hides a nest of lies. But when she befriends the girlfriend of one of the most powerful and dangerous gangesters in town, Jo begins to uncover secrets--secrets that threaten an empire and could destroy everyone she loves. Jo is faced with a choice: hang on to her soul, or lose herself in the decade of decadence.

Textbook of Pediatric Psychosomatic Medicine by Richard J. Shaw (Editor); David R. DeMaso (Editor) The Textbook of Pediatric Psychosomatic Medicine provides a comprehensive, empirically based knowledge of assessment and treatment issues in children and adolescents with physical illness. Scholarly, authoritative, and evidence based, it is the first volume of its kind and will help to define the field going forward. Addressing a very wide range of medical subspecialties, this volume is a first step for researchers who want to obtain a review of the psychiatric issues in their respective specialties. In addition, the book offers many special features, including * An exceptionally strong section on psychopharmacology in the medical setting, which is complemented by a comprehensive set of reference tables on psychopharmacological agents, including doses, side effects, and indications for use in the physically ill child.* Definitive chapters on less commonly reviewed topics that are of particular relevance for clinicians who treat physically ill children, including pediatric palliative care, Munchausen syndrome by proxy, and pediatric feeding disorders.* Coverage of key legal and forensic issues in pediatric psychosomatic medicine.* Presentation of material in graphical and tabular formats for maximal usefulness, including templates of specific questions for assessing common psychiatric symptoms and flowcharts illustrating step-by-step approaches to pain and somatoform disorders.* Relevance to a broad range of professionals, including psychiatrists, pediatricians, psychologists, nurses, medical students, and social workers who work with children in medical settings. * May be adopted as a textbook for psychology undergraduate classes, social work internships, and both general and child psychiatry residency training programs. The editors are recognized both nationally and internationally as being among the foremost experts for their respective fields, and they have assembled the leading practitioners of pediatric psychosomatic medicine to create this volume. The only complete text on pediatric psychosomatic medicine, this volume is destined to prove seminal in the field and indispensable in the clinician's library.

Transition-age youth mental health care: bridging the gap between pediatric and adult psychiatric care by Vivien Chan (Editor); Jennifer Derenne (Editor) Over the course of the last two decades, improved practices in child and adolescent mental healthcare have led to a decreased environment of stigma, which also led to an increased identification and treatment of mental health disorders in children and youth.  Considering that treatment and outcomes are improved with early intervention, this is good news. However, the success gained in the field of child and adolescent psychiatry leads to a new challenge: transitioning from adolescent care to adult care. It has been known for some time that children, adult, and geriatric patients all have unique needs where it comes to mental healthcare, yet limited work has been done where it comes to the shifting of the lifespan.  Where it comes to the child-adult transition--defined as those in their late teens and early/mid-20s--there can be multiple barriers in seeking mental healthcare that stem from age-appropriate developmental approaches as well as include systems of care needs.  Apart from increasing childhood intervention, the problem is exacerbated by the changing social dynamics: more youths are attending college rather than diving straight into the workforce, but for various reasons these youths can be more dependent on their parents more than previous generations. Technology has improved the daily lives of many, but it has also created a new layer of complications in the mental health world.  The quality and amount of access to care between those with a certain level of privilege and those who do not have this privilege is sharp, creating more complicating factors for people in this age range.  Such societal change has unfolded so rapidly that training programs have not had an opportunity to catch up, which has created a crisis for care.  Efforts to modernize the approach to this unique age group are still young, and so no resource exists for any clinicians at any phase in their career.  This book aims to serve as the first concise guide to fill this gap in the literature.   The book will be edited by two leading figures in transition age youth, both of whom are at institutions that have been at the forefront of this clinical work and research. This proposed mid-sized guide is therefore intended to be a collaborative effort, written primarily by child and adolescent psychiatrists, and also with adult psychiatrists. The aim is to discuss the developmental presentation of many common mental health diagnoses and topics in chapters, with each chapter containing clinically-relevant "bullet points" and/or salient features that receiving providers, who are generally, adult-trained, should keep in mind when continuing mental health treatment from the child and adolescent system.  Chapters will cover a wide range of challenges that are unique to transition-age youths, including their unique developmental needs, anxiety, mood, and personality disorders at the interface of this development, trauma and adjustment disorders, special populations, and a wide range of other topics.  Each chapter will begin with a clinical pearl about each topic before delving into the specifics.

Understanding Uniqueness and Diversity in Child and Adolescent Mental Health by Matthew Hodes; Susan Shur-Fen Gau; Petrus J. De Vries Understanding Uniqueness and Diversity in Child and Adolescent Mental Health examines the determinates of individual differences in children and young people, along with the origins of maladjustment and psychiatric disorders. It addresses the ways in which interventions and mental health services can be developed and shaped to address individual differences amongst children. Topics cover the influence of economic adversities and gender differences on child development and life course, as well as the range of risk and protective factors associated with the onset and persistence of problems, including sections on anxiety disorders in infants, bipolar disorder, and tics and Tourette's. Additional sections focus on the potential for individualizing treatments as illustrated by pharmacogenomics, with another highlighting ways in which services can be adapted for specific environments, such as the needs of refugee children and systems of service delivery that can be enhanced by the use of telemedicine.

Youth Mental Health: Approaches to Emerging Mental Ill-Health in Young People by Alison R. Yung; Jack Cotter; Patrick D. McGorry This book highlights the field of youth mental health and why it is a specialty distinct from both child and adolescent and adult mental health. Youth Mental Health: Approaches to Emerging Mental Ill-Health in Young People examines issues such as mental health literacy, e-Health, family, psychological, vocational and pharmacological interventions. The authors also discuss issues that are particularly pertinent to young people, such as suicidality, substance abuse, gender identity and sexuality, attention deficit disorder and eating disorders. Taking a preventative focus, this book presents evidence for youth mental health as an important and growing field, makes the case for the reform of existing service structures to better serve this group and outlines the latest specialised approaches to treatment. Drawing on the knowledge and expertise of leading thinkers in youth mental health, this book is instrumental for mental health professionals who wish to design new specialised mental health systems for young people.

Antisocial personality disorder: treatment, management and prevention by National Collaborating Centre for Mental Health The NICE guideline takes the first comprehensive view of antisocial personality disorder and is an invaluable resource to enable professionals to improve the outcomes for people with the disorder, who often have significant impairments. Being able to prevent and properly manage antisocial personality disorder will also have considerable social implications. This publication brings together all of the evidence that led to the recommendations in the NICE guideline, and draws on a wide literature, including evidence for the management of offending behaviour. It includes a review of interventions in children and young people with conduct disorder, which may prevent the development of antisocial personality disorder; risk assessment and management; organisation and experience of care; and a range of interventions for adults with antisocial personality disorder, including psychological interventions, treatment for comorbid disorders, therapeutic communities and pharmacological interventions. The book also contains a useful overview of antisocial personality disorder, including ethical considerations.

Cognitive Neuroscience, Development, and Psychopathology: Typical and Atypical Developmental Trajectories of Attention by Jacob A. Burack (Editor); James T. Enns (Editor); Nathan A. Fox (Editor) The disciplines of cognitive neuroscience, development, and psychopathology are complementary in the study of human perception and attention, even though each discipline emerges from a decidedly different and sometimes incompatible worldview. The meeting of researchers across these disciplines results in a fruitful cross-fertilization that ultimately leads to better science within each discipline and a joint scientific endeavor that is greater than the sum of its parts.Cognitive Science, Development, and Psychopathology: Typical and Atypical Developmental Trajectories of Attention unites scholars sharing common interests in the development of attention and related areas of functioning with different perspectives and methodologies. The volume does not impose a single framework for discussing the relevant issues, but rather the authors highlight the importance of their own approaches to the study of the typical and atypical development of attention. Drs. Burack, Enns, and Fox have organized the chapters into three sections: Atypical Environments, Threat, and the Development of Individual Differences in Attention; The Organization of the Development of Attention in Typical and Atypical Processing; and The Case of Orienting Attention in Developing an Integrated Science. Discussion topics include cognitive bias modification, attention and the development of anxiety disorders, deficient anchoring, reflexive and abnormal social orienting in autism, and social attention. This volume is a unique and critical resource for researchers in communication disorders, developmental and cognitive psychology, human development, neuroscience, and educational and counseling psychology.

The Evidence-Based Guide to Antipsychotic Medications by Anthony J. Rothschild (Editor) The Evidence-Based Guide to Antipsychotic Medications is designed to provide both clinicians and residents with focused, comprehensive, and clinically relevant information regarding the use of antipsychotic medications to treat a broad range of psychiatric conditions--from mood and anxiety disorders to substance abuse, personality disorders, and schizophrenia. The volume editor is a renowned psychiatrist and author with more than 25 years of experience in both clinical and research settings diagnosing and treating patients with mood and psychotic disorders. In addition, each of the volume's 13 contributors is an expert with many years of clinical experience to draw on.The book is down-to-earth and reader-friendly and is structured for maximal utility in both coverage and format: * Key Clinical Points cap each chapter, synthesizing and summarizing the knowledge you can take away, and serving both as a refresher for those using the book as a reference and as a study aid to master the material.* Both FDA-approved and off-label use of antipsychotic medications are addressed, reflecting the reality of clinical practice on the front lines.* Use of antipsychotic medications in both the pediatric and geriatric populations, a potentially controversial subject, is addressed in a nonsensational, straight-forward manner.* The Appendixes provide a wealth of information in tabular format, including drug tables (names, strengths, formulations, pharmacokinetics, and dosing); advice on initiating and monitoring antipsychotic medications; common side effects and their management; and special considerations for use during pregnancy and breastfeeding. The Evidence-Based Guide to Antipsychotic Medications is the first in a new series that strives to take evidence-based psychiatry from gold standard to standard practice. Scientifically up-to-date and rigorous, yet accessible and easy to understand, this volume stands alone as an indispensable resource on the topic.

Mapping the edges and the in-between: a critical analysis of borderline personality disorder by Nancy Potter Borderline Personality Disorder (BPD) is a diagnosis given to ten percent of all those seen in outpatient mental health facilities and twenty percent of those seen in inpatient psychiatric units. This is a significant number of people in the Western world. Yet many of the core concepts and symptoms that underlie this diagnosis are questionable. Many of the attitudes and actions of carers are based on assumptions about those with BPD that cry out for analysis, with both cultural and gender norms interacting with clinical diagnosis and treatment, to the detriment of both carers and patients. This book considers how we diagnose BPD, looking at the key constructs: identity disturbance, inappropriate or excessive anger, unstable relationships, impulsivity, self-injurious behaviour, and manipulativity. It starts by looking at the cultural and gender assumptions and norms behind BPD, drawing upon philosophical, clinical, anthropological, and sociological literature. Combining philosophical analysis with clinical experience and patients' writings, it clarifies the constructs so that the reader can understand the messiness and complexity that frames this diagnosis and treatment. After examining the current state of these constructs, and their effects on carer/patient interactions, Part II sees an application of virtue theory to therapeutic treatment with BPD patients. It looks at three virtues that are particularly important for clinicians and other carers to cultivate when working with BPD patients: trustworthiness, the virtue of giving uptake, and empathy. It argues that, in their absence, not only are clinicians' attitudes harmful to patients but that the status of the diagnosis is actually compromised. Mapping the Edges and the In-Between presents a compelling argument that Borderline Personality Disorder needs to be approached in a new light - one that will benefit patients.

Mentalization-based Treatment for Borderline Personality Disorder: A Practical Guide by Anthony Bateman; Peter Fonagy Mentalizing - the ability to understand oneself and others by inferring the mental states that lie behind overt behavior - develops during childhood within the context of a secure attachment relationship. It is crucial to self-regulation and constructive, intimate relationships. Failure to retain mentalizing, particularly in the midst of emotional interactions, is a core problem in borderline personality disorder and results in severe emotional fluctuations, impulsivity, and vulnerability to interpersonal and social interactions. Mentalization-based treatment for borderline personality disorder is a 'How to Do It' book outlining a clinically proven treatment for Borderline Personality Disorder. Containing illustrative clinical examples, it details precisely how to develop and implement treatment and is a companion to the highly successful book Psychotherapy for Borderline Personality Disorder - mentalization based treatment. This practical guide explains how to treat borderline patients by helping them develop a more robust mentalizing capacity within the context of an attachment relationship. It provides the practitioner with everything they need to know about how to practise mentalizing treatment in day patient and out-patient settings. Enough theory is provided to orientate the clinician and there is step-by-step practical advice on the assessment of mentalizing and interpersonal relationships, how to structure treatment, the use of basic mentalizing interventions and how to apply them, as well as information on what not to do. In addition, it includes a check list to be used in the assessment of mentalizing and a self-rating exercise for practitioners to evaluate their adherence to mentalizing.

The Origins of Antisocial Behavior: a developmental perspective by Christopher R. Thomas (Editor); Kayla Pope (Editor) Antisocial behaviors including bullying, violence, and aggression have been an area of intense interest among researchers, clinicians, policy makers, and the general public because of their grievous consequences on individuals and society. Our understanding of the origins and development of these behaviors in individuals has recently progressed with the application of new scientific advancements and technologies such as neuroimaging, genomics, and research methods that capture behavioral changes in the first few years of life.The Origins of Antisocial Behavior: A Developmental Perspective provides an overview of the recent research on the development of antisocial behavior and synthesizes this information to inform readers not only of the risks, but also how they interact, to result in antisocial and aggressive behavior. The volume is divided into three sections: advances in neuroscience, advances in behavioral and clinical research, and legal and policy implications. Specific topics include genetic markers and aggressive behavior, the use of fMRI to track adolescent brain development, the role of peer influences on aggression, parenting and temperament, screening tools for diagnosing antisocial behavior in toddlers and adolescents, and how new research will influence interventions, policy, and future study. Experts from genetics, neuroimaging, and developmental science discuss the insights these scientific approaches have provided in understanding how nature and the environment interact in the emergence of antisocial behavior. The Origins of Antisocial Behavior is an important and unique resource that will be of use to developmental scientists, mental health professionals, and policymakers involved in the juvenile justice system.

Stepped Care for Borderline Personality Disorder: Making Treatment Brief, Effective, and Accessible by Joel Paris Synthesizing the latest research and treatment developments, Stepped Care for Borderline Personality Disorder: Making Treatment Brief, Effective, and Accessible aims to make treatment for borderling personality disorder (BPD) more accessible by providing clinicians with innovative brief and targeted intervention methods. Focusing on integrative treatment models, it offers clinicians a vital guide to the management of patients who are difficult to treat. Acknowleding the early developmental roots of BPD, the book includes sections on BPD in adolescence, childhood precursors of the disorder, and a broad range of etiological factors. It looks at the pitfalls clinicians face when trying to treat BPD, and offers a roadmap to avoiding them.

Responsibility and Psychopathy: interfacing law, psychiatry, and philosophy by Luca Malatesti (Editor); John McMillan (Editor) Psychopaths have emotional impairments that can be expressed in persistent criminal behaviour. UK and US law has traditionally excused disordered individuals for their crimes citing these emotional impairments as a cause for their criminal behaviour. The discussion of whether psychopaths are morally responsible for their behaviour has long taken place in the realm of philosophy. However, in recent years, this has moved into scientific and psychiatric investigation, fundamentally so with the development of Robert Hare's diagnostic tool, the Psychopathy Checklist.Responsibility and Psychopathy explores the moral responsibility of psychopaths. It engages with problems at the interface of law, psychiatry, and philosophy, and is divided into three parts providing relevant interdisciplinary background information to address this main problem. The first part discusses the public policy and legal responses to psychopathy. It offers an introduction to the central practical issue of how public policy should respond to psychopathy, giving insights for those arguing about the responsibility of psychopaths.The second part introduces recent scientific advancements in the classification, description, and explanation of psychopathy. In particular, Robert Hare illustrates and defends his Psychopathy Checklist (PCL). Surveys of the most recent brain imaging studies on psychopaths and the prospects for treatment are also included. The third part of the volume includes chapters covering the most significant dimensions of philosophical debate on the moral and criminal responsibility of psychopaths. In relation to this issue, philosophers have considered whether psychopathic offenders possess moral understanding and/or are capable of controlling their criminal behaviour. This part illustrates how answering these questions involves investigating highly debated and central philosophical problems. These difficulties concern the nature of moral understanding, the significance of emotive and cognitive faculties in moral understanding and motivation, and the most appropriate account of moral and criminal responsibility that can justify a response to the psychopathic offenders.Exploring one of the most contentious topics of our time, this book is fascinating reading for psychiatrists, philosophers, criminologists, and lawyers.

Banned Emotions: How Metaphors Can Shape What People Feel by Laura Otis Who benefits and who loses when emotions are described in particular ways? How do metaphors such as "hold on" and "let go" affect people's emotional experiences? Banned Emotions, written by neuroscientist-turned-literary scholar Laura Otis, draws on the latest research in neuroscience and psychology to challenge popular attempts to suppress certain emotions. This interdisciplinary book breaks taboos by exploring emotions in which people are said to "indulge": self-pity, prolonged crying, chronic anger, grudge-bearing, bitterness, and spite. By focusing on metaphors for these emotions in classic novels, self-help books, and popular films, Banned Emotions exposes their cultural and religious roots.Examining works by Dante, Dickens, Dostoevsky, Kafka, Forster, and Woolf in parallel with Bridesmaids, Fatal Attraction, and Who Moved My Cheese?, Banned Emotions traces pervasive patterns in the ways emotions are represented that can make people so ashamed of their feelings, they may stifle emotions they need to work through. The book argues that emotion regulation is a political as well as a biological issue, affecting not only which emotions can be expressed, but who can express them, when, and how.

Emotions and Personhood: Exploring Fragility - Making Sense of Vulnerability by Giovanni Stanghellini; Rene Rosfort How does a person experience emotions? What is the relationship between the experiential and biological dimensions of emotions? How do emotions figure in a person's relation to the world and to other people? How do emotions feature in human vulnerability to mental illness? Do they play a significant role in the fragile balance between mental health and illness? If emotions are in fact significant, how are they relevant for treatment?Emotions and personhood are important notions within the field of mental health care. What they are, and how they are related though, is less evident. This book provides a framework for understanding this relationship. The authors argue for an account of emotions and personhood that attempts to understand human emotions from the combined approach of philosophy and psychopathology, taking its models particularly from hermeneutical phenomenology and from dialectical psychopathology. Within the book, the authors develop a basic set of concepts for understanding what emotional experience means for a human person, with the assumption that human emotional experience is fragile - a fact which entails vulnerability to mental disturbance. Drawing on research from psychiatry, psychopathology, philosophy, and neuroscience, the book will be valuable for both students and researchers in these disciplines, and more broadly, within the field of mental health.

Personalized Psychiatry by Bernhard Baune (Editor) Personalized Psychiatry presents the first book to explore this novel field of biological psychiatry that covers both basic science research and its translational applications. The book conceptualizes personalized psychiatry and provides state-of-the-art knowledge on biological and neuroscience methodologies, all while integrating clinical phenomenology relevant to personalized psychiatry and discussing important principles and potential models. It is essential reading for advanced students and neuroscience and psychiatry researchers who are investigating the prevention and treatment of mental disorders.

Maladapting Minds: philosophy, psychiatry, and evolutionary theory by Pieter R. Adriaens (Editor); Andreas De Block (Editor); Mariano Artigas; William R. Shea; Geoffrey Miller (Foreword by) Ever since Darwin, psychiatrists have been tempted to put evolutionary theory to use in their efforts to understand and explain mental disorders. Varying in success, scope and scientific rigour, these attempts have often caught the attention of philosophers. There are many studies about how the philosophy of psychiatry has been informed by twentieth-century 'continental' philosophy (in focusing on topics such as embodiment, narrativity and gender) as well as 'analytic' philosophy (in focusing on more conceptual issues). Thus far, however, there are simply no studies about how philosophical issues in psychiatric theory and practice can be, and have been informed by evolutionary theory. Maladapting Minds explores the relationship between evolutionary theory and philosophy of psychiatry. In particular, it discusses a number of reasons why philosophers of psychiatry should take an interest in evolutionary explanations of mental disorders, and, more generally, in evolutionary thinking. The many chapters deal with evolutionary accounts of various mental disorders, including phobias, fetishism, developmental disorders, depression, autism spectrum disorders, and schizophrenia. Written by both world-class philosophers, psychologists and evolutionary psychiatrists, this volume illustrates that many debates in contemporary philosophy of psychiatry are profoundly influenced by evolutionary approaches to mental disorders. In doing so, it represents the very first attempts to critically explore the interface between evolutionary theory and philosophy of psychiatry. It is important reading for psychiatrists, philosophers of mind, and evolutionary psychologists.

The Oxford Handbook of Philosophy and Psychiatry by Kwm Fulford (Editor); Martin Davies (Editor) Philosophy has much to offer psychiatry, not least regarding ethical issues, but also issues regarding the mind, identity, values, and volition. This has become only more important as we have witnessed the growth and power of the pharmaceutical industry, accompanied by developments in the neurosciences. However, too few practising psychiatrists are familiar with the literature in this area. The Oxford Handbook of Philosophy and Psychiatry offers the most comprehensive reference resource for this area ever published. It assembles challenging and insightful contributions from key philosophers and others to the interactive fields of philosophy and psychiatry. Each contributions is original, stimulating, thorough, and clearly and engagingly written - with no potentially significant philosophical stone left unturned. Broad in scope, the book includes coverage of several areas of philosophy, including philosophy of mind, science, and ethics. For philosophers and psychiatrists, The Oxford Handbook of Philosophy and Psychiatry is a landmark publication in the field - one that will be of value to both students and researchers in this rapidly growing area.

Philosophical Issues in Psychiatry IV by Kenneth S. Kendler (Editor); Josef Parnas (Editor) The revisions of both DSM-IV and ICD-10 have again focused the interest of the field of psychiatry and clinical psychology on the issue of nosology. This interest has been further heightened by a series of controversies associated with the development of DSM-5 including the fate of proposed revisions of the personality disorders, bereavement, and the autism spectrum. Major debate arose within the DSM process about the criteria for changing criteria, leading to the creation of first the Scientific Review Committee and then a series of other oversight committees which weighed in on the final debates on the most controversial proposed additions to DSM-5, providing important influences on the final decisions. Contained within these debates were a range of conceptual and philosophical issues. Some of these - such as the definition of mental disorder or the problems of psychiatric "epidemics" - have been with the field for a long time. Others - the concept of epistemic iteration as a framework for the introduction of nosologic change - are quite new.This book reviews issues within psychiatric nosology from clinical, historical and particularly philosophical perspectives. The book brings together a range of distinguished authors - including major psychiatric researchers, clinicians, historians and especially nosologists - including several leaders of the DSM-5 effort and the DSM Steering Committee. It also includes contributions from psychologists with a special interest in psychiatric nosology and philosophers with a wide range of orientations. The book is organized into four major sections: * The first explores the nature of psychiatric illness and the way in which it is defined, including clinical and psychometric perspectives. * The second section examines problems in the reification of psychiatric diagnostic criteria, the problem of psychiatric epidemics, and the nature and definition of individual symptoms. * The third section explores the concept of epistemic iteration as a possible governing conceptual framework for the revision efforts for official psychiatric nosologies such as DSM and ICD and the problems of validation of psychiatric diagnoses.* The book ends by exploring how we might move from the descriptive to the etiologic in psychiatric diagnoses, the nature of progress in psychiatric research, and the possible benefits of moving to a living document (or continuous improvement) model for psychiatric nosologic systems. The result is a book that captures the dynamic cross-disciplinary interactions that characterize the best work in the philosophy of psychiatry.

Recovery of People with Mental Illness: Philosophical and Related Perspectives by Abraham Rudnick (Editor) It is only in the past 20 years that the concept of "recovery" from mental health has been more widely considered and researched. Before then, it was generally considered that "stability" was the best that anyone suffering from a mental disorder could hope for. But now it is recognised that, throughout their mental illness, many patients develop new beliefs, feelings, values, attitudes, and ways of dealing with their disorder. The notion of recovery from mental illness is thus rapidly being accepted and is inserting more hope into mainstream psychiatry and other parts of the mental health care system around the world. Yet, in spite of conceptual and other challenges that this notion raises, including a variety of interpretations, there is scarcely any systematic philosophical discussion of it. This book is unique in addressing philosophical issues - including conceptual challenges and opportunities - raised by the notion of recovery of people with mental illness. Such recovery - particularly in relation to serious mental illness such as schizophrenia - is often not about cure and can mean different things to different people. For example, it can mean symptom alleviation, ability to work, or the striving toward mental well-being (with or without symptoms). The book addresses these different meanings and their philosophical grounds, bringing to the fore perspectives of people with mental illness and their families as well as perspectives of philosophers, mental health care providers and researchers, among others.The important new work will contribute to further research, reflective practice and policy making in relation to the recovery of people with mental illness. It is essential reading for philosophers of health, psychiatrists, and other mental care providers, as well as policy makers.

What Is Mental Illness? by Richard J. McNally According to a major health survey, nearly half of all Americans have been mentally ill at some point in their lives more than a quarter in the last year. Can this be true? What exactly does it mean, anyway? What s a disorder, and what s just a struggle with real life? This lucid and incisive book cuts through both professional jargon and polemical hot air, to describe the intense political and intellectual struggles over what counts as a real disorder, and what goes into the DSM, the psychiatric bible. Is schizophrenia a disorder? Absolutely. Is homosexuality? It was till gay rights activists drove it out of the DSM a generation ago. What about new and controversial diagnoses? Is social anxiety disorder a way of saying that it s sick to be shy, or female sexual arousal disorder that it s sick to be tired? An advisor to the DSM, but also a fierce critic of exaggerated overuse, McNally defends the careful approach of describing disorders by patterns of symptoms that can be seen, and illustrates how often the system medicalizes everyday emotional life. Neuroscience, genetics, and evolutionary psychology may illuminate the biological bases of mental illness, but at this point, McNally argues, no science can draw a bright line between disorder and distress. In a pragmatic and humane conclusion, he offers questions for patients and professionals alike to help understand, and cope with, the sorrows and psychopathologies of everyday life. "

Practicing Positive Psychiatry by Fredrike Bannink; Frenk Peeters A highly practical book for all mental health professionals wanting to know how to apply positive psychiatry into their daily work. Positive psychiatry is the science and practice of psychiatry and clinical psychology that seeks to understand and promote well-being among people who have or are at high risk of developing mental illnesses. In this new approach, the person takes center stage, not the disease, and the focus is not only on repairing the worst, but also on creating the best in our patients.The authors from the fields of medicine and clinical psychology present over 40 applications and many cases and stories to illustrate the four pillars of positive psychiatry: positive psychology, solutionfocused brief therapy, the recovery-oriented approach, and nonspecific factors. This book shows how mental health professionals can significantly increase patient collaboration to co-create preferred outcomes through discovering possibilities, and competences and through building hope, optimism, and gratitude. Essential reading for psychiatrists, clinical psychologists, other professionals working in the field of mental health care as well as students who want to take a positive focus to make psychiatry faster, lighter, and yes, more fun. We have high hopes that positive psychiatry will become a firm part of the psychiatry of the future.

Embitterment: Societal, Psychological, and Clinical Perspectives by Michael Linden (Editor); Andreas Maercker (Editor) Embitterment is a distinct state of mood known to everyone. It can be seen in the context of exceptional though "normal" negative life events. It is an emotional reaction e.g. to humiliation, to being severely disappointed by others, or to violations of basic values. Embitterment is accompanied by other emotions like feelings of hopelessness and helplessness, poor moods and a lack of drive, and aggression towards oneself and others. It can end in suicide or even murder-suicide and in a distinct pathological state known as "Posttraumatic Embitterment Disorder (PTED)". But despite the high prevalence rates, the detrimental effects on individuals and its forensic and societal importance, embitterment has yet to receive due scientific attention. In this book pioneers in embitterment research summarize the current knowledge on embitterment, its triggers, phenomenology and consequences. The work is intended to stimulate international debate and to contribute to a better understandingof embitterment and a deeper appreciation of the impact of exceptional but normal negative life events on psychological well-being.

Mental Health of Refugees: Etiology and Treatment by Paul M. G. Emmelkamp The book provides a comprehensive review of mental health in refugees by discussing its multiple dimensions, and analyzing epidemiology, etiology, and culturally adapted assessment and treatment.  Key topics include why certain refugees cope successfully with traumatic experiences while others do not, and the biological, psychological, and social processes underlying posttraumatic stress disorder, common mental disorders, substance abuse and personality disorders. The text examines topics such as complexities of diagnosis, treatment, and recovery for refugees. Furthermore, the roles of culture, social support, and mental health workers in the process of overcoming mental health problems in refugees are discussed. Together, the chapters provide an in-depth examination of the current understood causes, and impacts of mental health problems and treatment of refugees to inform future work in the field. The book gives its readers a solid basis for understanding mental health problems of refugees and sets out to present practitioners with a state-of-the-art summary of all the latest developments and practical guidance. Furthermore, this book provides the practitioner with instructions on how culturally adapted treatments can be used not only with adults, but also with children and young people to help the practitioner to prepare for working with this difficult client group. Drawing from a range of different fields of study, this text will appeal to readers across psychological, mental health, medical, and academic disciplines.

Mental Health of Refugees and Asylum Seekers by Dinesh Bhugra (Editor); Tom Craig (Editor); Kamaldeep Bhui (Editor) Thoughout the world the number of refugees and asylum seekers continues to increase at an astonishing rate. Given that most will have left their country due to persecution, war, or appalling violations of their human rights, many will have specific mental health needs. Cultural and socioeconomic factors play a major role in expressions of distress, help seeking, pathways into care, and acceptance or rejection of treatments. Being a refugee or asylum seeker raises questions about an individual's self respect and altered identity. Too often though, the needs of this population are ignored by policy makers and clinicians, and these people are left to fend for themselves.Mental Health of Refugees and Asylum Seekers presents both the theoretical and practical aspects of the mental health needs of refugees and asylum seekers. It looks at the impact of migration on mental health and adjustment, collective trauma, individual identity, and diagnostic fallacies. A practical section highlights cultural factors, ethnopsychopharmacology, therapeutic interaction, therapeutic expectation and psychotherapy. The final part of the book focuses on special problems - such as bereavement, sexual violence, and post traumatic stress disorders, as well as considering mental health problems in special groups, such as child refugees.This book will be an essential resource for all mental health professionals- helping them better understand the needs of refugees and asylum seekers, how their problems can be managed, and how they can best be helped.

The Politics of War Trauma: The Aftermath of World War II in Eleven European Countries by Jolande Withuis (Editor); Annet Mooij (Editor) This important study compares the policies and attitudes towards the health consequences of WWII in eleven European countries: Austria, Belgium, Denmark, East-Germany, France, Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Norway, Poland and West-Germany. It shows the remarkably asynchronous development of the medical approach to the survivors in these countries. In a truly interdisciplinary and innovative way, the book connects aspects of the aftermath of war that are not usually analyzed together in the context of the political and cultural histories of the Cold War, welfare state, memory and psychiatry.

Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder: Basic Science and Clinical Practice by Peter Shiromani (Editor); Joseph E. LeDoux (Editor); Terrence Keane (Editor); Priyattam J. Shiromani Post-traumatic stress disorder is a psychiatric illness that can occur in anyone who has experienced a life-threatening or violent event. The trauma can be due to war, terrorism, torture, natural disasters, violence, or rape. In PTSD the brain areas that are likely to be affected are the hippocampus (memory), amygdala (fear association), the prefrontal cortex (cognitive processing), and the ascending reticular activating system (arousal). The chemical of interest is norepinephrine, which is released during a stressful event and is part of the fight-or-flight response meant to mobilize the body to action.The objective of this title is to outline the neurobiology of post-traumatic stress disorder and provide treatment strategies for clinicians. The chapter material from this book has evolved from a seminar on PTSD held recently under the auspices of the VA Boston Healthcare System, Boston University Medical Center and Harvard Medical School.  We propose a book that will focus on the epidemiology, neurobiology, MRI studies, animal models, arousal and sleep issues, clinical trials, and treatment strategies for clinicians. Treatment will cover such topics as guidelines for treating posttraumatic stress disorder, PTSD and the use of mental health services, cognitive intervention therapy, and large scale clinical trials in PTSD. This collection will be a vital source of information to clinicians and neuroscientists.

Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder: A Guide for Primary Care Clinicians and Therapists by J. F. Pagel PTSD is in no way an easy diagnosis for the patient, the provider, or the therapist. It is a diagnosis developed at the border of our capacity to handle extreme stress, a marker diagnosis denoting the limits of our capacity for functioning in the stress of this modern world. For both individuals and society, PTSD marks the limits of our available compassion and our capacity to protect ourselves from the dangers of the environment and other humans. PTSD is often a chronic disease, forming at a place where mind sometimes no longer equals the brain, a point at which individual patient requirements often trump theory and belief. There are treatments for PTSD that work, and many that do not. This book presents evidence, rather than theory, anecdote, or case report.  Psychological approaches including prolonged exposure, imagery rehearsal therapy and EMDR have a greater than 75% positive short-term response when used to treat PTSD. Yet these treatments vary markedlyand have different, even contradictory underlying theory and objectives for treatment. Medications, rarely indicated as primary therapy, can be used to treat symptoms and address comorbid PTSD diagnoses. Treatment of sleep apnea in the PTSD population produces a positive effect on symptoms and a reduction in morbidity and mortality across the span of life. Complementary treatments offer the many individuals chronically affected by PTSD assistance in coping with symptoms and opportunities to attempt to functionally integrate their experience of trauma.

Posttraumatic Stress Disorder: Scientific and Professional Dimensions by Julian D. Ford This authored text-reference will be the first comprehensive text in the rapidly growing field of psychological trauma and posttraumatic stress disorder.According to the NIMH, approximately 5.2 million American adults already suffer from post traumatic stress disorder. Caused by everything from combat experience to violent personal assaults to natural disasters and accidents, the incidence of PTSD has already reached epidemic proportions. The profound impact of psychological trauma and the need for proactive and scientifically-based approaches to timely prevention and evidence based treatment is unarguable and mental health programs are seeing a significant rise in the number of PTSD courses offered and services required. As a result, scholars, researchers, educators, clinicians, and trainees in the health care and human and social services need a concise and comprehensive source of authoritative information on psychological trauma and posttraumatic stress. This volume will offer a foundational understanding of the field as well cover key controversies, the influence of culture and gender, and describe state-of-the-art research and clinical methodologies in down-to-earth terms. Clinical case studies will be used liberally.

Refugee Mental Health by Jamie D. Aten (Editor); Jenny Hwang (Editor) This book is an in-depth practical guide for mental health practitioners working across diverse theoretical orientations to provide mental health services tailored to the needs of refugees.  These needs are felt more keenly than ever as displaced populations continue to grow. Refugees often experience high rates of psychological distress, and appropriate mental health care services remain severely underdeveloped. Chapters in this edited volume outline research-supported psychological interventions that can be used in a culturally sensitive manner. They cover important topics like cultural humility, issues in screening and assessments, and specific ethical dilemmas when working with refugees. The book explores the ways in which Western interventions such as cognitive behavior therapy, group therapy, expressive therapy, and school-based programs have been adapted to serve resettled refugee populations. Strengths and limitations of these approaches as well as recommendations for incorporating more holistic frameworks in practice are discussed, providing mental health professionals with a better understanding of the psychological issues associated with the refugee experience and best practices for treatment. 

Veteran and Military Mental Health: A Clinical Manual by Christopher H. Warner (Editor); Carl A. Castro (Editor) This book addresses mental health treatment for veterans and active military personnel. In addition to examining foundational practices in the sub-field, it contains specifically tailored content concerning the recent collapse of the United States (US) installed Afghanistan government. The book is conscious of the myriad of complex emotions that veterans who fought for the past twenty years may be experiencing.  Organized into four parts, the book begins with the foundations of veteran and military mental health culture as patients transition from active duty to veteran status, understand the present stigma and barriers to care and reflect on their deployment experience. Part two delves into the specifics of the healthcare system in which military personnel find themselves at various points in their career, including deployment and returning home. Following this, chapters examine the critically unique conditions found in patients, such as sleep disorders, traumatic brain injury,homelessness, substance abuse, and sexual trauma. The book closes with discussions on veterans and their families that focus on the effects of deployment on a military person's loved ones and their mental state upon returning home.   Timely, socially conscious, and comprehensive, the Clinical Manual on Veteran and Military Mental Health is an invaluable resource for mental health professionals receiving new military personnel patients and who have seen a significant shift in their patients due to recent events. 

When Johnny and Jane Come Marching Home: How All of Us Can Help Veterans by Paula J. Caplan A psychologist's impassioned call to stop labeling our traumatized war veterans as mentally ill and a guide to how every citizen can help returning vets. Traumatized veterans returning from our wars in Iraq and Afghanistan are often diagnosed as suffering from a psychological disorder and prescribed a regimen of psychotherapy and psychiatric drugs. But why, asks psychologist Paula J. Caplan in this impassioned book, is it a mental illness to be devastated by war? What is a mentally healthy response to death, destruction, and moral horror? In When Johnny and Jane Come Marching Home, Caplan argues that the standard treatment of therapy and drugs is often actually harmful. It adds to veterans' burdens by making them believe wrongly that they should have "gotten over it"; it isolates them behind the closed doors of the therapist's office; and it makes them rely on often harmful drugs. The numbers of traumatized veterans from past and present wars who continue to suffer demonstrate the ineffectiveness of this approach. Sending anguished veterans off to talk to therapists, writes Caplan, conveys the message that the rest of us don't want to listen--or that we don't feel qualified to listen. As a result, the truth about war is kept under wraps. Most of us remain ignorant about what war is really like--and continue to allow our governments to go to war without much protest. Caplan proposes an alternative: that we welcome veterans back into our communities and listen to their stories, one-on-one. (She provides guidelines for conducting these conversations.) This would begin a long overdue national discussion about the realities of war, and it would start the healing process for our returning veterans.

Caring for Patients with Depression in Primary Care by David S. Kroll Depression is the leading cause of disability in the United States, and the traditional framework for managing depression within a psychiatry practice--i.e., a single psychiatrist treating a single patient for up to an hour per week--comes up painfully short at the level of serving the population even if it can be highly effective for individuals. At the same time, the non-systematic way in which most patients identify the need to see a specialty provider in behavioral health leaves many stranded, regardless of how complex their needs are. Primary care is now often considered the "de facto mental health system" in the United States, and primary care providers have been charged with the impossible task of making up for the dearth of psychiatric specialty providers and somehow correcting the many inequities in access to care that remain.  Primary care providers shouldn't have to do this alone. Help can come in many forms, of course, and some primary care practices are luckyenough to have a consulting psychiatrist on-site, available to answer any questions that come up and see patients directly when they need an expert opinion. This is exactly what David S Kroll, MD, an Associate Vice Chair in the Department of Psychiatry at Brigham and Women's Hospital in Boston and an Assistant Professor at Harvard Medical School, does for a primary care practice that serves more than 17,000 patients with a wide range of medical, social, and psychiatric problems. But most primary care practices don't have this resource. This book replicates the expertise of a consulting psychiatrist in a concise volume that primary care providers can pull off their shelves whenever they have a question about managing depression. It ensures that no one has to do this on their own. Managing Depression in Primary Care contains fourteen chapters that anticipate the questions, problems, and practical challenges that are most likely to come up when managing depression in primary care. It covers the basic skills that are needed for treating depression when it occurs in a vacuum, but it also provides practical guidance on treating depression in the real world--where it will inevitably be complicated by other factors. It also covers important associated topics including suicide, substance use, and disability.

Essentials of Psychiatry in Primary Care: Behavioral Health in the Medical Setting by Robert C. Smith; Dale D'Mello; Gerald G. Osborn; Laura Freilich; Francesca C. Dwamena; Heather S. Laird-Fick An innovative psychiatry textbook that presents behavioral disorders from the perspective of what is seen in medical settings The goal of Essentials of Psychiatry in Primary Care is not to make psychiatrists out of medical clinicians, but rather, to help clinicians manage common behavioral conditions that most often present in a medical setting.  Essentials of Psychiatry in Primary Care seeks to integrate medicine and psychiatry --- as the authors' systems-based biopsychosocial model proposes. The book identifies physical symptoms as a common mode of presentation of mental health problems and describes how to integrate them with psychological symptoms to make diagnoses of mental disorders. Essentials of Psychiatry in Primary Care also details a behaviorally defined, evidence-based mental healthcare model that can be effectively used in a medical setting.  The combined experiences in primary care of the authors --- who specialize in both general internal medicine and psychiatry --- provide the perfect background for a book of this nature. Having trained medical students, as well as internal and family medicine residents since 1986, their experience and research demonstrates the information they outline is effective and associated with improved mental and physical health outcomes. 

Handbook of Psychiatric Disorders in Adults in the Primary Care Setting by Robert Hudak; Jessica M. Gannon Since psychiatric training in medical school is brief in duration (often 4-8 weeks only), and minimal to nonexistent in many residency programs, most primary care physicians are not adequately equipped to treat psychiatric disorders, despite the fact that this role promises a significant portion of the average physician's practice. This book provides non-psychiatric physicians, especially primary care physicians, with the tools to successfully diagnose and treat psychiatric disorders in their practices. Primary care physicians are the largest prescribers of psychiatric medications in the US, where they also provide the bulk of psychiatric diagnoses and treatment, especially in traditionally underserved areas.  Every chapter is devoted to each of the major psychiatric disorders that a primary care physician is likely to encounter in clinical practice.  They are formatted in a nearly identical way to make the text both easy to read and quickly peruse as a reference.Each chapter also includes a clinical description of the disorder, the proper method (including questions to ask, or screening tools, etc.) to make an accurate diagnosis, and differential diagnoses to consider.  Additionally, appropriate treatment(s) for the diagnoses are indicated in a stepwise fashion.  Chapters also contain information on medical tests that may be appropriate to order to rule out medical conditions, as well as details on proper routine health screening for individuals on specific medications and/or mental health diagnoses. To optimize accessibility of medication prescribing information, several tables of the medications that are commonly prescribed for each disorder will be indicated.   This may lead to some redundancy of information, as there is considerable overlap in medication and dosing strategies for different illnesses, ex antipsychotics for bipolar disorder and schizophrenia and antidepressants for Major Depressive Disorder and Anxiety Disorders.   However, duplication of information assists in readability and user friendliness, as doctors will not have to flip through different parts of a book or refer to an appendix every time they wish to look up specific medication related information. Written by experts in the field, Handbook of Psychiatric Disorders in Adults in the Primary Care Setting is a valuable resource to aid in the proper assessment and treatment of psychiatric disorders by the physicians who are most likely to see and treat these patients. Most psychiatric textbooks are probably not appropriate for most primary care physicians as they contain far too much specialized information that they do not need to know and do not often contain clinical steps and guidelines for treatment.  This text fulfills a pressing clinical need.

Mental Disorders in Primary Care: A Guide to Their Evaluation and Management by Andre F. Carvalho (Editor); Roger S. McIntyre (Editor); Oxford Editor; André F. Carvalho (Editor) Mental disorders are highly prevalent in the primary care setting, yet are frequently misdiagnosed and often inappropriately treated. The presence of unrecognized or misdiagnosed mental disorders is associated with increased service utilization and health care costs, and can significantly impact the patient's quality of life and risk of suicide. Written by experts from around the world, Mental Disorders in Primary Care offers readers with a comprehensive and evidence-based guide to the diagnosis and treatment of mental disorders in the primary care setting. Containing 21 chapters on a variety of psychiatric disorders, such as depressive disorders and substance use disorders, and key topics for discussion such as drug interactions, and collaborative care, Mental Disorders in Primary Care is essential reading for clinicians treating patients in a primary care setting.Fully up-to-date to reflect DSM-5's taxonomy of psychiatric disorders, this resource provides readers with a global and comprehensive guide to the diagnosis and treatment of patients with mental disorders.

Pharmacological Treatment of Mental Disorders in Primary Health Care by World Health Organization Staff This manual attempts to provide simple, adequate and evidence-based information to health care professionals in primary health care especially in low- and middle-income countries to be able to provide pharmacological treatment to persons with mental disorders. The manual contains basic principles of prescribing followed by chapters on medicines used in psychotic disorders; depressive disorders; bipolar disorders; generalized anxiety and sleep disorders; obsessive compulsive disorders and panic attacks; and alcohol and opioid dependence. The annexes provide information on evidence retrieval, assessment and synthesis and the peer view process.

Primary Care Psychiatry by Robert M. McCarron Selected as a Doody's Core Title for 2022 and 2023! Perfect for primary care physicians, nurse practitioners, and PAs, who are routinely confronted with behavioral health disorders among patients in a primary care setting, the second edition of this unique multimedia handbook--now affiliated with the Association of Medicine and Psychiatry--sits at the intersection of primary care and psychiatry. You'll find much that is new: updated fundamentals on depression, anxiety, psychosis, substance, and eating disorders, as well as overviews on CBT, motivational therapy, and common pharmacological therapies. With contributors from the worlds of both psychiatry and primary care, you have a perfect package on how to integrate the two in order to deliver better mental health care for your patients. Ebook now features 30-minute educational videos, instructional PowerPoint slides, and a 15-question multiple-choice assessment for every chapter. Includes tips on navigating the psychiatric interview and updated DSM-5 diagnostic criteria. Disorder-specific chapters follow a handy templated format: clinical highlights, diagnosis, treatment, medications, practice tips, and more. True-to-life case studies and patient scenarios illuminate key concepts in psychiatry. Guidance on navigating the Collaborative Care Model and applying the primary care psychiatry assessment. Packed with easy-to-read figures and tables that helps make information easy to digest and implement. Enhance Your eBook Reading Experience Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech.

Primary Care Psychiatry Handbook by Shawn Hersevoort Written by a psychiatrist who works full-time in the primary care setting, Primary Care Psychiatry Handbook is a quick, practical guide to the key diagnostic and therapeutic information you need to offer optimal mental health care to your patients. Derived from Primary Care Psychiatry, 2nd Edition, this high-yield, point of care handbook uses quick-reference tables, key points, and more to help you answer the question, "What do I do right now?" Delivers precisely the information needed by primary care providers who need to quickly confirm a psychiatric diagnosis or treatment option. Helps you understand potential underlying mental health issues such as depression, which often go unrecognized and under-treated in the primary care setting. Features mnemonics, key points, up-to-date drug information, clinical notes, Abbreviations and acronyms, tables, full-color figures, and more - all designed for quick reference at the point of care. Features up to date information on each subject drawn from the most current academic, research, and organizational psychiatry sources. Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone. Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech.

Before Prozac: The Troubled History of Mood Disorders in Psychiatry by Edward Shorter Psychiatry today is a barren tundra, writes medical historian Edward Shorter, where drugs that don't work are used to treat diseases that don't exist. In this provocative volume, Shorter illuminates this dismal landscape, in a revealing account of why psychiatry is "losing ground" in the struggle to treat depression.Naturally, the book looks at such culprits as the pharmaceutical industry, which is not inclined to market drugs once the patent expires, leading to the endless introduction of new - but not necessarily better - drugs. But the heart of the book focuses on an unexpected villain: the FDA, the very agency charged with ensuring drug safety and effectiveness. Shorter describes how the FDA permits companies to test new products only against placebo. If you can beat sugar pills, you get your drug licensed, whether or not it is actually better than (or even as good as) current medications, thus sweeping from the shelves drugs that may be superior but have lost patent protection. The book also examines the FDA's early power struggles against the drug industry, an influence-grab that had little to do with science, and which left barbiturates, opiates, and amphetamines all underprescribed, despite the fact that under careful supervision they are better at treating depression, with fewer side effects, than the newer drugs in the Prozac family. Shorter also castigates academia, showing how two forms of depression, melancholia and nonmelancholia - "as different from each other as chalk and cheese" - became squeezed into one dubious classification, major depression, which was essentially a political artifact born of academic infighting.An astonishing and troubling look at modern psychiatry, Losing Ground is a book that is sure to spark controversy for years to come.

Biological Basis of Sex Differences in Psychopharmacology by Jo C. Neill (Editor); Jayashri Kulkarni (Editor) Sex matters! Are there differences between the sexes when it comes to brain function and the behaviours that result? This volume attempts to answer this fundamental question. If the answer is 'yes' then this should impact upon our approach to treating mental illness in humans, and to modelling it in animals, as we look for aetiological and pharmacological solutions.

Clinical Manual of Psychopharmacology in the Medically Ill by Stephen J. Ferrando (Editor); James L. Levenson (Editor); James A. Owen (Editor) A comprehensive yet practical guide to the prescription of psychotropic medications in patients with medical illness, Clinical Manual of Psychopharmacology in the Medically Ill is designed to be useful to clinicians practicing in a broad range of specialties, from the psychosomatic medicine specialist caring for a delirious patient with cancer to the general medical practitioner prescribing an antidepressant to a diabetic patient who recently had a myocardial infarction. This manual * Provides useful psychotropic prescribing protocols that can be employed by primary care physicians, psychiatrists, and other medical professionals.* Reviews fundamental principles of psychotropic drug prescribing across medical specialties.* Educates clinicians regarding the growing evidence base supporting the safety and efficacy of psychopharmacological treatments for a diverse range of psychiatric problems in medically ill patients.* Provides clinically relevant information concerning psychopharmacology in the medically ill, including pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic principles, drug-drug interactions, and organ system disease-specific issues. Clinical Manual of Psychopharmacology in the Medically Ill is divided into two sections. The first supplies fundamental background information for prescribing psychotropics across medical disease states, including discussion of pharmacodynamics and pharmacokinetics, drug-drug interaction principles, major systemic adverse effects of psychotropic drugs, and alternate routes of psychotropic drug administration. The second section addresses psychopharmacological treatment in specific organ system diseases, such as renal and cardiovascular disease, as well as other relevant subspecialty areas, such as critical care, organ transplantation, pain, and substance use disorders. Authored by experts in the field, chapters contain the following: * Key differential diagnostic considerations, including adverse neuropsychiatric side effects of disease-specific medications* Disease-specific pharmacokinetic principles in drug prescribing, including interactions between psychotropic drugs and disease-specific drugs* Useful tables summarizing information on adverse neuropsychiatric side effects of disease-specific medications, adverse disease-specific side effects of psychotropic drugs, and drug-drug interactions* Extensive referencing of source material to allow readers to expand their knowledge in specific areas This manual, beyond serving as a clinical guide, should become a mainstay of curricula in general psychiatric residency programs, psychosomatic medicine fellowships, and nonpsychiatric residency training programs that prepare physicians to provide safe and effective psychopharmacological treatment for patients with medical illness.

Clinician's Guide to Psychopharmacology by Joseph Sadek This book employs a direct and clear approach to understanding the medications used in the treatment of psychiatric disorders. A range of areas, such as prescription errors, dosage modification in renal and hepatic dysfunction, augmentation strategies in treatment resistant patients, and recent findings from various clinical trials are addressed. Given its clear, straightforward approach, the book will be a valuable guide for all clinicians working with patients with psychiatric illness.

Depression and Drugs: The Neurobehavioral Structure of a Psychological Storm by Martin M. Katz This book integrates the current state of knowledge on the association of neurochemical and psychological factors underlying the concept of depression or on the process and nature of the drug-induced changes that lead to recovery. Highlighting the results of two major multisite collaborative studies of the psychobiology of depression, the author demonstrates how more refined clinical methods uncover the initial behavioral actions of the drugs and chart the time course of their actions. The results disconfirm earlier textbook reported findings that these actions are delayed for several weeks beyond the almost immediate neurochemical effects. The "multivantaged" method makes possible distinguishing the clinical actions of different classes of antidepressant drugs.

Drugs in Psychiatry by Basant K. Puri Part of the Drugs in series, the updated second edition of this practical pocketbook summarizes essential information on all the major drugs currently used in clinical psychiatric practice. Beginning with a brief discussion on drugs in psychiatry, the text moves on to consider the principles of psychopharmacology, which form the foundation of the sound, scientifically based use of drugs in psychiatry. Details are then given, in turn, of the main non-depot antipsychotic drugs, antipsychotic depot injections, antimanic drugs, tricyclic and related antidepressant drugs, monoamine-oxidase inhibitors, selective serotonin re-uptake inhibitors, and other antidepressants. This practical pocketbook is an essential companion for all medical staff involved in psychopharmacology, both for learning and quick reference.

The Evidence-Based Guide to Antipsychotic Medications by Anthony J. Rothschild (Editor) The Evidence-Based Guide to Antipsychotic Medications is designed to provide both clinicians and residents with focused, comprehensive, and clinically relevant information regarding the use of antipsychotic medications to treat a broad range of psychiatric conditions--from mood and anxiety disorders to substance abuse, personality disorders, and schizophrenia. The volume editor is a renowned psychiatrist and author with more than 25 years of experience in both clinical and research settings diagnosing and treating patients with mood and psychotic disorders. In addition, each of the volume's 13 contributors is an expert with many years of clinical experience to draw on.The book is down-to-earth and reader-friendly and is structured for maximal utility in both coverage and format: * Key Clinical Points cap each chapter, synthesizing and summarizing the knowledge you can take away, and serving both as a refresher for those using the book as a reference and as a study aid to master the material.* Both FDA-approved and off-label use of antipsychotic medications are addressed, reflecting the reality of clinical practice on the front lines.* Use of antipsychotic medications in both the pediatric and geriatric populations, a potentially controversial subject, is addressed in a nonsensational, straight-forward manner.* The Appendixes provide a wealth of information in tabular format, including drug tables (names, strengths, formulations, pharmacokinetics, and dosing); advice on initiating and monitoring antipsychotic medications; common side effects and their management; and special considerations for use during pregnancy and breastfeeding. The Evidence-Based Guide to Antipsychotic Medications is the first in a new series that strives to take evidence-based psychiatry from gold standard to standard practice. Scientifically up-to-date and rigorous, yet accessible and easy to understand, this volume stands alone as an indispensable resource on the topic.

Kaplan and Sadock's Pocket Handbook of Psychiatric Drug Treatment by Samoon Ahmad Now in vibrant full color, Kaplan and Sadock's Pocket Handbook of Psychiatric Drug Treatment, 8th Edition, remains your reference of choice for easy-to-find information on the full spectrum of psychiatric drug therapies. Written by Dr. Samoon Ahmad, this trusted resource provides a wealth of data for each drug, presenting information in a clear, concise manner for quick, efficient retrieval. This edition brings you fully up to date in the field, with new information on cannabis, psychedelics, psychotropic medicines and medical comorbidities, genetics and pharmacogenomics testing, and more.  Includes new chapters on cannabis; psychedelics such as psilocybin, MDMA, and ketamine; and genetics and the role of pharmacogenomics testing, brain stimulation, and other novel technologies in psychiatry  Includes many new FDA-approved drugs, as well as updated information about drug selection and use that reflects both research data and clinical experience  Addresses the complex relationship between the use of psychotropic medicines and medical comorbidities, including metabolic complications, with emphasis on recognition, investigations, treatment, and management  Provides a wealth of data for each drug: chemical name; preparation and dosages; pharmacologic actions; indications for use and clinical applications; use in children, elderly persons, and pregnant and nursing women; side effects and adverse and allergic reactions; and drug-drug interactions  Ideal for psychiatrists and other physicians, as well as psychiatric residents, medical students, clinical psychologists, psychiatric nurses, and other professionals who provide care for patients with mental illness    Enrich Your eBook Reading Experience  Read directly on your preferred device(s), such as computer, tablet, or smartphone.  Easily convert to audiobook, powering your content with natural language text-to-speech. 

Life-Threatening Effects of Antipsychotic Drugs by Peter Manu (Editor); Robert J. Flanagan (Editor); Kathlyn J. Ronaldson (Editor) Life-Threatening Effects of Antipsychotic Drugs describes in detail more than 20 life-threatening effects associated with antipsychotics, presents the best available data on their incidence and case fatality, and gives comprehensive advice on diagnosis, management and preventive strategies. In addition, the book discusses the benefit of antipsychotic medication in a range of therapeutic indications, and demonstrates the gain in life-expectancy associated with clozapine use in severe mental illness despite its serious, potentially life-threatening adverse effects.

Massachusetts General Hospital Psychopharmacology and Neurotherapeutics by Theodore A. Stern (Editor); Joan A. Camprodon (Editor); Maurizio Fava (Editor) Offering user-friendly, authoritative guidance on cutting-edge psychopharmacologic and somatic treatments for psychiatric and neurologic conditions, Massachusetts General Hospital Psychopharmacology and Neurotherapeutics, 2nd Edition, helps you put today's best approaches to work for your patients. Composed of topical chapters primarily from the third edition of Stern et al.'s Massachusetts General Hospital Comprehensive Clinical Psychiatry, this fully revised resource focuses on current psychotropic treatments, electroconvulsive therapy, and neurotherapeutics, making it an ideal quick reference for psychiatrists, psychologists, internists, and nurse practitioners. Brings you up-to-date information on key topics in the field, including the application of anticonvulsants, anxiolytics, mood stabilizers, and psychostimulants; drug-drug interactions; side effects; treatment adherence; and more Includes detailed coverage of antidepressants, antipsychotics, and antianxiety medications, as well as advances in caring for patients with treatment-resistant depression and new legal considerations when prescribing psychotropics Covers recent progress on the use of neurotherapeutic interventions, such as transcranial magnetic stimulation, vagal nerve stimulation, and deep brain stimulation Contains a new chapter on the pharmacotherapy of movement disorders (derived from Stern et al.'s MGH Handbook of General Hospital Psychiatry, 8th Edition) Features a user-friendly, highly templated format with abundant boxed summaries, bulleted points, case histories, algorithms, updated references, and suggested readings Offers updated DSM-5-TR criteria alongside peerless, hands-on advice from members of the esteemed MGH Department of Psychiatry An eBook version is included with purchase. The eBook allows you to access all of the text, figures, and references, with the ability to search, customize your content, make notes and highlights, and have content read aloud. Additional digital ancillary content may publish up to 6 weeks following the publication date

Pediatric psychopharmacology: principles and practice by Andrés Martin (Editor); Lawrence Scahill (Editor); Christopher Kratochvil (Editor) When the first edition of Pediatric Psychopharmacology published in 2002, it filled a void in child and adolescent psychiatry and quickly established itself as the definitive text-reference in pediatric psychopharmacology. While numerous short, clinically focused paperbacks have been published since then, no competitors with the scholarly breadth, depth, and luster of this volume have emerged. In the second edition, Christopher Kratochvil, MD, a highly respected expert in pediatric psychopharmacology, joins the outstanding editorial team led by Dr. Martin and Dr. Scahill. In the new edition, the editors streamline the flow of information to reflect the growth in scientific data since the first edition appeared. The overall structure of the book remains the same, with major sections on underlying biology; somatic interventions; assessment and treatment; and special considerations.

Pharmacological Treatment of Mental Disorders in Primary Health Care by World Health Organization Staff This manual attempts to provide simple, adequate and evidence-based information to health care professionals in primary health care especially in low- and middle-income countries to be able to provide pharmacological treatment to persons with mental disorders. The manual contains basic principles of prescribing followed by chapters on medicines used in psychotic disorders; depressive disorders; bipolar disorders; generalized anxiety and sleep disorders; obsessive compulsive disorders and panic attacks; and alcohol and opioid dependence. The annexes provide information on evidence retrieval, assessment and synthesis and the peer view process.

Textbook of Pediatric Psychosomatic Medicine by Richard J. Shaw (Editor); David R. DeMaso (Editor) The Textbook of Pediatric Psychosomatic Medicine provides a comprehensive, empirically based knowledge of assessment and treatment issues in children and adolescents with physical illness. Scholarly, authoritative, and evidence based, it is the first volume of its kind and will help to define the field going forward. Addressing a very wide range of medical subspecialties, this volume is a first step for researchers who want to obtain a review of the psychiatric issues in their respective specialties. In addition, the book offers many special features, including * An exceptionally strong section on psychopharmacology in the medical setting, which is complemented by a comprehensive set of reference tables on psychopharmacological agents, including doses, side effects, and indications for use in the physically ill child.* Definitive chapters on less commonly reviewed topics that are of particular relevance for clinicians who treat physically ill children, including pediatric palliative care, Munchausen syndrome by proxy, and pediatric feeding disorders.* Coverage of key legal and forensic issues in pediatric psychosomatic medicine.* Presentation of material in graphical and tabular formats for maximal usefulness, including templates of specific questions for assessing common psychiatric symptoms and flowcharts illustrating step-by-step approaches to pain and somatoform disorders.* Relevance to a broad range of professionals, including psychiatrists, pediatricians, psychologists, nurses, medical students, and social workers who work with children in medical settings. * May be adopted as a textbook for psychology undergraduate classes, social work internships, and both general and child psychiatry residency training programs. The editors are recognized both nationally and internationally as being among the foremost experts for their respective fields, and they have assembled the leading practitioners of pediatric psychosomatic medicine to create this volume. The only complete text on pediatric psychosomatic medicine, this volume is destined to prove seminal in the field and indispensable in the clinician's library.

Cognitive Therapy for Chronic Pain: A Step-by-Step Guide by Beverly E. Thorn This go-to manual--now revised and significantly expanded with more than 50% new material--has enabled thousands of clinicians to effectively treat clients with chronic pain. In the face of today's growing opioid crisis, pain self-management techniques are needed now more than ever. The volume shows how to implement 10 treatment modules that draw on proven cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) strategies. In a convenient large-size format, it includes 58 reproducible client handouts and assessment tools that purchasers can photocopy from the book or download and print from the companion website. The website also offers access to downloadable audio recordings of relaxation exercises narrated by the author, plus supplemental resources for treating clients with lower levels of literacy. New to This Edition *Incorporates over a decade of important advances in pain research and clinical practice. *Treatment modules that allow clients to enter a group at any point after an introductory session. *Expanded with motivational enhancement, relaxation, and mindfulness techniques. *Many new handouts, assessment tools, and therapist scripts, as well as audio downloads. *Orients and engages clients using state-of-the-art research on how the brain processes pain.

Psychosomatic Medicine by Kurt Ackerman (Editor); Andrea Dimartini (Editor) Psychosomatic Medicine (PM) is a rapidly developing subspecialty of psychiatry focusing on psychiatric care of patients with other medical disorders. PM specialists diagnose and manage psychiatric symptoms in a variety of medical settings, optimize their patients' medical care, and expand understanding regarding the role of psychological factors in health and disease. PM practitioners may function as psychiatric consultants in hospital-based wards, primary providers in med-psych units, or collaborative practitioners integrated with inpatient and outpatient medical teams. PM practitioners strive to stay current with the latest research and practice guidelines in a burgeoning field involving complex interactions and combinations of illnesses. To address these challenges, this book provides practical instruction from PM clinicians, educators and researchers, covering core clinical concepts routinely used in practice. Psychosomatic Medicine serves as an educational resource covering salient psychosomatic medicine topics for trainees and colleagues in psychiatry and other medical specialties. A history of PM contextualizes the field, and an overview of psychiatric consultation in the general medical setting emphasizes specifics of psychosomatic interviewing, physical examination, and collaboration with primary medical services. The remaining chapters cover the diagnosis and management of conditions commonly encountered by the psychosomatic psychiatrist: assessment and treatment of psychiatric disorders in a medical setting; assessment of decisional capacity; use of psychotropic medication in medically-compromised patients; management of delirium, cognitive and somatoform disorders; psychiatric manifestations of neurologic and other general medical conditions; emergent complications of psychiatric medication and illicit substance use; and special topics pertinent to PM. Finally, future directions in PM are explored in fascinating detail.

Somatization and Psychosomatic Symptoms by Kyung Bong Koh (Editor) This book, with contributions emanating from the 21st World Congress of Psychosomatic Medicine held in Seoul in August 2011, presents the latest evidence-based information about the mechanisms, assessment, and management of psychosomatic disorders from a biopsychosociocultural perspective. Somatization is a process characterized by excessive or inappropriate focus on physical symptoms that are medically unexplained. It is highly prevalent in primary care medicine, as somatoform (psychosomatic) disorders tend to be chronic and can cause significant personal suffering and social problems as well as financial burden.​  ​

Study Guide to Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry: A Companion to The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Psychosomatic Medicine and Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry, Third Edition by Philip R. Muskin Study Guide to Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry is a question-and-answer companion that allows you to evaluate your mastery of the subject matter as you progress through The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Psychosomatic Medicine and Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry, Third Edition. The Study Guide is made up of approximately 390 questions divided into 39 individual quizzes with an average of 10 questions each that correspond to chapters in the textbook. Questions are followed by an answer guide that references relevant text (including page numbers) in the textbook to allow quick access to needed information. Each answer is accompanied by a discussion that not only addresses the correct response but also explains why other responses are not correct. The Study Guide's companion, The American Psychiatric Association Publishing Textbook of Psychosomatic Medicine and Consultation-Liaison Psychiatry, Third Edition, has been thoroughly updated to reflect the rapidly expanding evidence base in the field. This textbook addresses general principles in evaluation and management (including legal and ethical issues); psychiatric symptoms and disorders in the medically ill; psychological and social aspects of diseases affecting the various organ systems; and psychiatric interventions for this patient population.

Mental Health of Refugees and Asylum Seekers by Dinesh Bhugra (Editor); Tom Craig (Editor); Kamaldeep Bhui (Editor) Thoughout the world the number of refugees and asylum seekers continues to increase at an astonishing rate. Given that most will have left their country due to persecution, war, or appalling violations of their human rights, many will have specific mental health needs. Cultural and socioeconomic factors play a major role in expressions of distress, help seeking, pathways into care, and acceptance or rejection of treatments. Being a refugee or asylum seeker raises questions about an individual's self respect and altered identity. Too often though, the needs of this population are ignored by policy makers and clinicians, and these people are left to fend for themselves.Mental Health of Refugees and Asylum Seekers presents both the theoretical and practical aspects of the mental health needs of refugees and asylum seekers. It looks at the impact of migration on mental health and adjustment, collective trauma, individual identity, and diagnostic fallacies. A practical section highlights cultural factors, ethnopsychopharmacology, therapeutic interaction, therapeutic expectation and psychotherapy. The final part of the book focuses on special problems - such as bereavement, sexual violence, and post traumatic stress disorders, as well as considering mental health problems in special groups, such as child refugees.This book will be an essential resource for all mental health professionals- helping them better understand the needs of refugees and asylum seekers, how their problems can be managed, and how they can best be helped.

Mental Health of Refugees: Etiology and Treatment by Paul M. G. Emmelkamp The book provides a comprehensive review of mental health in refugees by discussing its multiple dimensions, and analyzing epidemiology, etiology, and culturally adapted assessment and treatment.  Key topics include why certain refugees cope successfully with traumatic experiences while others do not, and the biological, psychological, and social processes underlying posttraumatic stress disorder, common mental disorders, substance abuse and personality disorders. The text examines topics such as complexities of diagnosis, treatment, and recovery for refugees. Furthermore, the roles of culture, social support, and mental health workers in the process of overcoming mental health problems in refugees are discussed. Together, the chapters provide an in-depth examination of the current understood causes, and impacts of mental health problems and treatment of refugees to inform future work in the field. The book gives its readers a solid basis for understanding mental health problems of refugees and sets out to present practitioners with a state-of-the-art summary of all the latest developments and practical guidance. Furthermore, this book provides the practitioner with instructions on how culturally adapted treatments can be used not only with adults, but also with children and young people to help the practitioner to prepare for working with this difficult client group. Drawing from a range of different fields of study, this text will appeal to readers across psychological, mental health, medical, and academic disciplines.

Refugee Mental Health by Jamie D. Aten (Editor); Jenny Hwang (Editor) This book is an in-depth practical guide for mental health practitioners working across diverse theoretical orientations to provide mental health services tailored to the needs of refugees.  These needs are felt more keenly than ever as displaced populations continue to grow. Refugees often experience high rates of psychological distress, and appropriate mental health care services remain severely underdeveloped. Chapters in this edited volume outline research-supported psychological interventions that can be used in a culturally sensitive manner. They cover important topics like cultural humility, issues in screening and assessments, and specific ethical dilemmas when working with refugees. The book explores the ways in which Western interventions such as cognitive behavior therapy, group therapy, expressive therapy, and school-based programs have been adapted to serve resettled refugee populations. Strengths and limitations of these approaches as well as recommendations for incorporating more holistic frameworks in practice are discussed, providing mental health professionals with a better understanding of the psychological issues associated with the refugee experience and best practices for treatment. 

Arts Therapies in Psychiatric Rehabilitation by Umberto Volpe (Editor) This book explores possible approaches to and uses of art therapy in mental health settings. Reflecting the latest scientific evidence, it represents a major step toward the harmonization of practices in the field, filling the gap between the theory and practice of art therapy. The book is divided into four major sections, corresponding to the main artistic domains: visual art therapy, music therapy, dance movement therapy, and drama therapy. Gathering the research and insights of leading professionals from around the globe, the book offers a diverse and balanced mix of perspectives.  Accordingly, it will appeal to a broad readership including psychiatrists, psychologists, social workers, occupational therapists, psychiatric rehabilitation technicians, nurses, educators, art therapists, and students.

The Effectiveness of Rehabilitation for Cognitive Deficits by Peter W. Halligan (Editor); Derick T. Wade (Editor) Many patients with brain damage are left with a range of neuropsychological deficits that impair normal cognitive process. It is generally recognised that these less obvious cognitive deficits (including memory, language, perception, attention and executive disorders) militate against full recovery often to a greater extent than more traditional medical deficits (e.g. paralysis, sensory loss, etc). Recognition of this has helped fuel the exponential growth in cognitive neuropsychology and neuroscience over the past 30 years. In turn, this theoretical approach has been used to guide and inform the development of cognitive therapies designed to remediate cognitive impairments and their functional consequences. Cognitive rehabilitation has over the last decade grown to become an established and influential therapeutic approach. There is now a considerable body of knowledge describing the principles and theoretical basis for analysing and directing treatments to selective cognitive deficits. Despite this, the clinical effectiveness and extent to which cognitive theory can inform therapeutic treatment has been questioned. It is timely, therefore, to evaluate and discuss the type and quality of evidence used in support of cognitive rehabilitation. In this book, some of the most influential clinicians and cognitive neuroscientists in the world critically review and discuss the effectiveness of rehabilitation methods currently used to treat patients with cognitive impairments following acquired brain damage. It provides a much needed critique and consensus about what should constitute best practice. The book will be valuable for all those who have to deal with the neuropsychological and neurological effects of brain damage, including, neuropsychologists, neuropsychiatrists, neurologists, experimental pscyhologists, and neuroscientists.

Recovery and Major Mental Disorders by Bernardo Carpiniello (Editor); Antonio Vita (Editor); Claudio Mencacci (Editor) The book provides a clear and comprehensive description of both personal and clinical recovery in severe mental disorders, including schizophrenia and related disorders, and mood disorders such as major depression and bipolar disorders. Divided into two main parts: recovery in schizophrenia and related disorders, and recovery in mood disorders, it offers a broad overview of the factors associated with better or worse outcomes in terms of recovery, as well as the rates (how many people affected by mental disorders may gain recovery), and the time course (how long people affected by mental disorders take to recover) of recovery. It also discusses in detail the pharmacological and psychosocial interventions that can be considered recovery-oriented. Covering the main aspects of recovery in major mental disorders, the book is intended for professionals, scholars, students and anyone interested in mental health.

Recovery of People with Mental Illness: Philosophical and Related Perspectives by Abraham Rudnick (Editor) It is only in the past 20 years that the concept of "recovery" from mental health has been more widely considered and researched. Before then, it was generally considered that "stability" was the best that anyone suffering from a mental disorder could hope for. But now it is recognised that, throughout their mental illness, many patients develop new beliefs, feelings, values, attitudes, and ways of dealing with their disorder. The notion of recovery from mental illness is thus rapidly being accepted and is inserting more hope into mainstream psychiatry and other parts of the mental health care system around the world. Yet, in spite of conceptual and other challenges that this notion raises, including a variety of interpretations, there is scarcely any systematic philosophical discussion of it. This book is unique in addressing philosophical issues - including conceptual challenges and opportunities - raised by the notion of recovery of people with mental illness. Such recovery - particularly in relation to serious mental illness such as schizophrenia - is often not about cure and can mean different things to different people. For example, it can mean symptom alleviation, ability to work, or the striving toward mental well-being (with or without symptoms). The book addresses these different meanings and their philosophical grounds, bringing to the fore perspectives of people with mental illness and their families as well as perspectives of philosophers, mental health care providers and researchers, among others.The important new work will contribute to further research, reflective practice and policy making in relation to the recovery of people with mental illness. It is essential reading for philosophers of health, psychiatrists, and other mental care providers, as well as policy makers.

Christianity and Psychiatry by John R. Peteet (Editor); H. Steven Moffic (Editor); Ahmed Hankir (Editor); Harold G. Koenig (Editor) This book aims to help readers appreciate the many-faceted relationship between Christianity, one of the world's major faith traditions, and the practice of psychiatry. Chapter authors in this book first consider challenges posed by historical antagonisms, church-based mental health stigma, and controversy over phenomena such as hearing voices. Next, others explore both how Christians often experience conditions such as mood and psychotic disorders, disorders in children and adolescents, moral injury and PTSD, and ways that their faith can serve as a resource in their healing. Twelve Step spirituality, originally informed by Christianity, is the subject of a chapter, as are issues raised for Christians by disability, death and dying. A set of chapters then focuses on the state of integration of Christian beliefs and practices into psychotherapy, treatment delivery, educational programming, clergy/clinician collaboration, and treatment by a non-Christian psychiatrist. Finally, there are chapters by a mental health professional who has been a patient, a Jewish psychiatrist, a Muslim psychiatrist knowledgeable about Christianity and psychiatry in the Muslim majority world, and a Christian psychiatrist.  These chapters provide context, diversity and personal perspectives.  Christianity and Psychiatry is a valuable resource for mental health professionals seeking to understand and address the particular challenges that arise when caring for Christian patients. 

Ethical Considerations at the Intersection of Psychiatry and Religion by John Peteet (Editor); Mary Lynn Dell (Editor); Wai Lun Alan Fung (Editor) Psychiatry and religion/spirituality (R/S) share an interest in human flourishing, a concern with beliefs and values, and an appreciation for community. Yet historical tensions between science and religion continue to impede dialogue, leaving clinicians uncertain about how to approach ethical questions arising between them. When are religious practices such as scrupulosity disordered? What distinguishes healthy from unhealthy religion? How should a therapist approach a patient's existential, moral or spiritual distress? What should clinicians do with patients' R/S convictions about faith healing, same-sex relationships, or obligations to others? Discussions of psychiatric ethics have traditionally emphasized widely accepted principles, generally admired virtues, and cultural competence. Relatively little attention has been devoted to the ways that R/S inform the values of patients and their clinicians, shape preferred virtues, and interact with culture. Ethical Considerations at the Intersection of Psychiatry and Religion aims to give mental health professionals a conceptual framework for understanding the role of R/S in ethical decision-making and serve as practical guidance for approaching challenging cases. Part I addresses general considerations, including the basis of therapeutic values in a pluralistic context, the nature of theological and psychiatric ethics, spiritual issues arising in diagnosis and treatment, unhealthy and harmful uses of religion, and practical implications of personal spirituality. Part II examines how these considerations apply in specific contexts: inpatient and outpatient, consultation-liaison, child and adolescent, geriatric, disability, forensic, community, international, addiction and disaster and emergency psychiatry, as well as in the work of religious professionals, ethics committees, psychiatric education, and research. Thick descriptions of case examples analyzed using the framework of Jonson and Winslow show the clinical relevance of understanding the contributions of religion and spirituality to patient preferences, quality of life, decision making, and effective treatment.

Resilience in Children, Adolescents, and Adults: Translating Research into Practice by Sandra Prince-Embury (Editor); Donald H. Saklofske (Editor) Resilience in Children, Adolescents, and Adults: Translating Research into Practice recognizes the growing need to strengthen the links between theory, assessment, interventions, and outcomes to give resilience a stronger empirical base, resulting in more effective interventions and strength-enhancing practice. This comprehensive volume clarifies core constructs of resilience and links these definitions to effective assessment. Leading researchers and clinicians examine effective scales, questionnaires, and other evaluative tools as well as instructive studies on cultural considerations in resilience, resilience in the context of disaster, and age-appropriate interventions. Key coverage addresses diverse approaches and applications in multiple areas across the lifespan. Among the subject areas covered are: - Perceived self-efficacy and its relationship to resilience. - Resilience and mental health promotion in the schools. - Resilience in childhood disorders. - Critical resources for recovering from stress. - Diversity, ecological, and lifespan issues in resilience. - Exploring resilience through the lens of core self-evaluation. Resilience in Children, Adolescents, and Adults is an important resource for researchers, clinicians and allied professionals, and graduate students in such fields as clinical child, school, and developmental psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, education, counseling psychology, social work, and pediatrics.

Trauma and Resilience among Displaced Populations : A Sociocultural Exploration by Gail Womersley This open access book provides an enriched understanding of historical, collective, cultural, and identity-related trauma, emphasising the social and political location of human subjects. It therefore presents a socio-ecological perspective on trauma, rather than viewing displaced individuals as traumatised "passive victims".   The vastness of the phenomenon of trauma among displaced populations has led it to become a critical and timely area of inquiry, and this book is an important addition to the literature. It gives an overview of theoretical frameworks related to trauma and migration--exploring factors of risk and resilience, prevalence rates of PTSD, and conceptualisations of trauma beyond psychiatric diagnoses; conceptualises experiences of trauma from a sociocultural perspective (including collective trauma, collective aspirations, and collective resilience); and provides applications for professionals working with displaced populations in complex institutional, legal, and humanitarian settings. It includes case studies based on the author's own 10-year experience working in emergency contexts with displaced populations in 11 countries across the world. This book presents unique data collected by the author herself, including interviews with survivors of ISIS attacks, with an asylum seeker in Switzerland who set himself alight in protest against asylum procedures, and women from the Murle tribe affected by the conflict in South Sudan who experienced an episode of mass fainting spells. This is an important resource for academics and professionals working in the field of trauma studies and with traumatised groups and individuals.

Brief Interventions for Psychosis: A Clinical Compendium by Basant Pradhan (Editor); Narsimha Pinninti (Editor); Shanaya Rathod (Editor) This book offers a clinical guide that brings together a broad range of brief interventions and their applications in treating psychosis. It describes two core approaches that can narrow the current, substantial gap between the need for psychotherapeutic interventions for all individuals suffering from psychosis, and the limited mental health resources available. The first approach involves utilizing the standard therapeutic modalities in the context of routine clinical interactions after adapting them into brief and effective formats. To that end, the book brings in experts on various psychotherapeutic modalities, who discuss how their particular modality could be adapted to more effectively fit into the existing system of care delivery. The second approach, addressed in detail, is to extend the availability of these brief interventions by utilizing the circle of providers as well as the social circle of the clients so that these interventions can be provided in a coordinated and complementary manner by psychiatrists, psychologists, clinical social workers, case managers, peer support specialists and other providers on the one hand, and by family members, friends, social and religious institutions on the other.

Cognizance of Schizophrenia: A Profound Insight into the Psyche by Indranath Chatterjee (Editor) This book provides the reader with a thorough understanding of schizophrenia as a complex brain disorder by explaining the various aspects investigated for its cognizance from epigenetics to chemistry and physics to computational approaches. The book covers the key notions of schizophrenia from a variety of facets such as neurogenetics, neurochemistry, neuropharmacology, neurobiology, psychotherapy, psychiatric treatment, cognitive studies, behavioral and societal studies, and computational neurosciences. Individual chapters are focused on crucial topics such as cognitive-behavioral therapy, brain functioning, computational neuroscience, neuro-imaging, and many more. This book explains each section and chapter with utmost clarity to maintain comprehensiveness for every kind of reader. This book covers various classical as well as recent topics from basic to advance level knowledge regarding schizophrenia. The book's contributions regarding its inclusivity of topics, comprehensiveness of language, diversity in knowledge, and focus on the subject will attract all kinds of readers. It can be considered a single comprehensive handy reference book for beginners, including medical students, neuroscientists, researchers, clinicians, and medical practitioners. Cognizance of Schizophrenia will be an invaluable asset for all who are involved in neuroscience research or clinical studies.

Delusions in Context by Lisa Bortolotti This open access book offers an exploration of delusions--unusual beliefs that can significantly disrupt people's lives. Experts from a range of disciplinary backgrounds, including lived experience, clinical psychiatry, philosophy, clinical psychology, and cognitive neuroscience, discuss how delusions emerge, why it is so difficult to give them up, what their effects are, how they are managed, and what we can do to reduce the stigma associated with them. Taken as a whole, the book proposes that there is continuity between delusions and everyday beliefs. It is essential reading for researchers working on delusions and mental health more generally, and will also appeal to anybody who wants to gain a better understanding of what happens when the way we experience and interpret the world is different from that of the people around us. 

A Dictionary of Hallucinations by Jan Dirk Blom The Dictionary of Hallucinations, second edition, is an alphabetical listing of issues pertaining to hallucinations and other misperceptions. They can be roughly divided into four categories: 1.    Definitions of individual hallucinatory symptoms 2.    Medical conditions and substances associated with the mediation of hallucinations 3.    Historical figures who are known to have experienced hallucinations 4.    Miscellaneous issues Each of the definitions of individual hallucinatory symptoms includes:       a definition of the term its etymological origin the year of introduction (if known) a reference to the author or authors who introduced the term (if known) a description of the current use a brief explanation of theetiology and pathophysiology of the symptom at hand (if known) references to related terms references to the literature The second edition of A Dictionary of Hallucinations serves as a reference manual for neuroscientists, psychiatrists, psychiatric residents, psychologists, neurologists, historians of psychiatry, general practitioners, and academics dealing professionally with concepts of hallucinations and other sensory deceptions. This new edition provides updated information and references, and includes newly discovered hallucinations, bringing together contributions by other authorities within the field, with all the entries edited by Prof. Blom. Doody's Review: The book's purpose is to provide a collection of terms and related information for a variety of clinical and non-clinical applications, that can serve as a springboard for further inquiry about specific and lesser-known sensory phenomena. Not only does this book meet its objectives, but it fills a void in providing a comprehensive list of technical terms matched to otherwise hard-to-describe human experiences.    

Feeling Unreal: Depersonalization and the Loss of the Self by Daphne Simeon; Jeffrey Abugel Feelings of depersonalization-derealization, or a sense of detachment from one's normal sense of self, are not uncommon. People often describe being outside of themselves, or watching themselves as if in a movie, during "unreal" circumstances such as a car crash or other trauma. This is the mind's normal dissociative reaction at work. This protective system can go awry, however, and can be triggered by ongoing, lower-level stresses, childhood neglect, or certain drugs. Despite its prevalence, depersonalization is often misunderstood and is understudied compared to other conditions such as schizophrenia and bipolar disorder.First published in 2006, Feeling Unreal, Depersonalization Disorder and the Loss of the Self was the first book of its kind to delve into the mysterious phenomenon of Depersonalization-Derealization Disorder (DDD). This fully revised and updated edition describes extensive new findings on the origins of DDD, the brain science supporting the diagnosis, and cutting-edge treatment approaches. DDD is examined from medical and psychiatric perspectives, but as the authors reveal, it also emerges in literary, philosophical and spiritual investigations. Feeling Unreal thoroughly explores these different aspects in a fascinating and essential resource that is clear and accessible to medical professionals and general readers alike. Physicians, mental health professionals, families, and those who have experienced DDD themselves will find with this book trustworthy and cutting-edge information on DDD, on its history and treatment, and on its place in literature and philosophy as well as in contemporary society.

Hallucinations: a guide to treatment and management by Frank Laroi (Editor); André Aleman (Editor) Hallucinations are a troublesome and distressing symptom for countless patients who suffer from psychiatric or neurological conditions. In recent years, a number of new treatment strategies have been developed to help patients suffering from these symptoms. This book brings together the work of leading experts in this area, to provide a practical guide to the assessment, evaluation, and treatment of hallucinations. It includes a range of interventions, including: Pharmacological, Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation, Cognitive Behavioural Therapy, Hallucinations focused Integrative Therapy (HIT), normalizing techniques, coping strategies, self-help approaches, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, Attention Training Technique, Competitive Memory Training, appraisal-based cognitive therapy, and cognitive therapy for command hallucinations. As well as providing practical advice, the chapters also contain overviews of the respective areas of research, including references to the evidence base for each intervention - highlighting those interventions in need of more empirical support. Each chapter describes how to evaluate and treat the patient, often using clinical vignettes or case studies to illustrate the treatment process.The book will be a valuable guide for psychiatrists, clinical psychologists, and counsellors, increasingly required to help patients suffering from these distressing symptoms.

Hallucinations: Research and Practice by Jan Dirk Blom (Editor); Iris E. C. Sommer (Editor) The work aims to provide an overview of the field of contemporary hallucinations research. It will consist of 28 chapters, the writing of which will be put out to international experts specialized in the specific fields at hand. The work aims to be unique, in that it intends to cover many different types of hallucination, and to approach the subject matter from four different perspectives, i.e., conceptual, phenomenological, neuroscientific, and therapeutic.

Infectious Behavior: Brain-Immune Connections in Autism, Schizophrenia, and Depression by Paul H. Patterson In "Infectious Behavior," neurobiologist Paul Patterson examines the involvement of the immune system in autism, schizophrenia, and major depressive disorder. Although genetic approaches to these diseases have garnered the lion's share of publicity and funding, scientists are uncovering evidence of the important avenues of communication between the brain and the immune system and their involvement in mental illness. Patterson focuses on this brain-immune crosstalk, exploring the possibility that it may help us understand the causes of these common, but still mysterious, diseases. The heart of this engaging book, accessible to nonscientists, concerns the involvement of the immune systems of the pregnant woman and her fetus, and a consideration of maternal infection as a risk factor for schizophrenia and autism. Patterson reports on research that may shed light on today's autism epidemic. He also outlines the risks and benefits of both maternal and postnatal vaccinations. In the course of his discussion, Patterson offers a short history of immune manipulation in treating mental illness (recounting some frightening but fascinating early experiments) and explains how the immune system influences behavior and how the brain regulates the immune system, looking in particular at stress and depression. He examines the prenatal origins of adult disease and evidence for immune involvement in autism, schizophrenia, and depression. Finally, he describes the promise shown by recent animal experiments that have led to early clinical trials of postnatal and adult treatments for patients with autism and related disorders.

The Madness of Fear: A History of Catatonia by Edward Shorter; Max Fink What are the real disease entities in psychiatry? This is a question that has bedeviled the study of the mind for more than a century yet it is low on the research agenda of psychiatry. Basic science issues such as neuroimaging, neurochemistry, and genetics carry the day instead. There is nothing wrong with basic science research, but before studying the role of brain circuits or cerebral chemistry, shouldn't we be able to specify how the various diseases present clinically? Catatonia is a human behavioral syndrome that for almost a century was buried in the poorly designated psychiatric concept of schizophrenia. Its symptoms are well-know, and some of them are serious. Catatonic patients may die as their temperatures accelerate; they become dehydrated because they refuse to drink; they risk inanition because they refuse to eat or move. Autistic children with catatonia may hit themselves repeatedly in the head. We don't really know what catatonia is, in the sense that we know what pneumonia is. But we can identify it, and it is eminently treatable. Clinicians can make these patients better on a reliable basis. There are few other disease entities in psychiatry of which this is true. So why has there been so little psychiatric interest in catatonia? Why is it simply not on the radar of most clinicians? Catatonia actually occurs in a number of other medical illnesses as well, but it is certainly not on the radar of most internists or emergency physicians. In The Madness of Fear, Drs. Shorter and Fink seek to understand why this "vast field of ignorance" exists. In the history of catatonia, they see a remarkable story about how medicine flounders, and then seems to find its way. And it may help doctors, and the public, to recognize catatonia as one of the core illnesses in psychiatry.

The Neurobiology of Schizophrenia by Ted Abel (Editor); Thomas Nickl-Jockschat (Editor) The Neurobiology of Schizophrenia begins with an overview of the various facets and levels of schizophrenia pathophysiology, ranging systematically from its genetic basis over changes in neurochemistry and electrophysiology to a systemic neural circuits level. When possible, the editors point out connections between the various systems. The editors also depict methods and research strategies used in the respective field. The individual backgrounds of the two editors promote a synthesis between basic neuroscience and clinical relevance.

On the Trail of the Morning Star: Psychosis as Self-Discovery by Dorothea Buck; Susanne Antonetta (Editor); Eva Lipton-Ormond (Translator)

Schizophrenia and the Fate of the Self by Paul Lysaker; John Lysaker With advances in medical technology and with many large scale, longitudinal studies now underway, social and biological science have built a convincing case that the varieties of madness subsumed by the label schizophrenia are created, fueled, and sustained by genetic, biochemical and environmental factors. However, with the ever more detailed models of the neurobiological and social systems out of which schizophrenia is born, it is possible to overlook how suffering persons actually experience their symptoms and navigate their way through life. This book is unique in focusing on the experiences of those who have schizophrenia, and who must make sense of and live with this condition. It explores how schizophrenia disrupts person's experiences of themselves as beings in the world and how that disruption poses enduring barriers to recovery - barriers not reducible to issues of social justice or biology. After presenting a model of how disturbances in self-experience are related to but not identical with symptoms and dysfunction, it looks at the implications for the development of therapies that might provide greater opportunities for recovery. The book provides a highly readable and humane examination of this common condition.

Schizophrenia and Its Treatment: where is the progress by Matthew M. Kurtz This volume aims to explain why, despite profound advances in psychological science and neuroscientific analyses of schizophrenia, outcomes for the disorder have changed little over the past 100 years. More specifically, the book provides a critical analysis of the limiting role on treatment development of diagnostic classifications and views of the disorder as caused by a core pathology, and instead promotes the idea of individually tailored, multimodal treatment for distinct disorder features (e.g., positive symptoms, cognitive deficits). Each of these features of schizophrenia may or may not be present in different individuals with the same diagnosis. These features may also bear little functional relationship to one another. This aim is achieved through a critical integration of contemporary psychological scientific and neuroscientific analyses of schizophrenia, as well as research on psychological and somatic treatments. Historical perspectives on diagnosis and treatment are considered as well.

Schizophrenia and Related Disorders by Michael J. Marcsisin; Jason B. Rosenstock; Jessica M. Gannon Psychotic disorders are common and important psychiatric conditions, and patients suffering from psychosis can be challenging to assess and manage. In this new monograph, experts in schizophrenia and related psychoses review the current state of science in this area, and provide a practical and readable overview of the how to diagnose and treat individuals presenting with these disorders. This pocket-sized text features call-out boxes, case descriptions, practical tips, and general guidelines that should be ideal for medical students, residents, young mental health professionals, and trainees in other fields.Beginning with a history of psychosis, the authors proceed to explore the phenomenology of symptoms and experiences and how these can be used in clinical assessment. Diagnostic criteria are reviewed, along with common conditions in the differential diagnosis. Subsequent chapters tackle epidemiology, course and prognosis, and the neurobiology of psychotic disorders. The book concludes with chapters on treatment, both somatic and psychosocial, including discussion of novel interventional approaches and service delivery.The authors of this text are a mix of clinician-educators and scientific investigators, all with experience teaching trainees; this pocket-sized book has been developed to help young professionals easily gain a basic understanding of the complexities and challenges of psychotic disorders. Self-assessment questions, resources, and references will assist, but what really sets this book apart is the accessibility and concision of the text, ideal for individuals learning about or reviewing psychosis.

Schizophrenia: Evolution and Synthesis by Steven M. Silverstein (Editor); Bita Moghaddam (Editor); Til Wykes (Editor) Leading researchers address conceptual and technical issues in schizophrenia and suggest novel strategies for advancing research and treatment. Despite major advances in methodology and thousands of published studies every year, treatment outcomes in schizophrenia have not improved over the last fifty years. Moreover, we still lack strategies for prevention and we do not yet understand how the interaction of genetic, developmental, and environmental factors contribute to the disorder. In this book, leading researchers consider conceptual and technical obstacles to progress in understanding schizophrenia and suggest novel strategies for advancing research and treatment. The contributors address a wide range of critical issues: the construct of schizophrenia itself; etiology, risk, prediction, and prevention; different methods of modeling the disorder; and treatment development and delivery. They identify crucial gaps in our knowledge and offer creative but feasible suggestions. These strategies include viewing schizophrenia as a heterogeneous group of conditions; adopting specific new approaches to prediction and early intervention; developing better integration of data across genetics, imaging, perception, cognition, phenomenology, and other fields; and moving toward an evidence-based, personalized approach to treatment requiring rational clinical decision-making to reduce functional disability. Contributors Robert Bittner, Robert W. Buchanan, Kristin S. Cadenhead, William T. Carpenter, Jr., Aiden Corvin, Daniel Durstewitz, André A. Fenton, Camilo de la Fuente-Sandoval, Jay A. Gingrich, Joshua A. Gordon, Chloe Gott, Peter B. Jones, René S. Kahn, Richard Keefe, Wolfgang Kelsch, James L. Kennedy, Matcheri S. Keshavan, Angus W. MacDonald III, Anil K. Malhotra, John McGrath, Andreas Meyer-Lindenberg, Kevin J. Mitchell, Bita Moghaddam, Vera A. Morgan, Craig Morgan, Kim T. Mueser, Karoly Nikolich, Patricio O'Donnell, Michael O'Donovan, William A. Phillips, Wulf Rössler, Louis Sass, Akira Sawa, Jeremy K. Seamans, Steven M. Silverstein, William Spaulding, Sharmili Sritharan, Heike Tost, Peter Uhlhaas, Aristotle Voineskos, Michèle Wessa, Leanne M. Williams, Ashley Wilson, Til Wykes

Social Cognition in Psychosis by Kathryn Eve Lewandowski (Editor); Ahmed Moustafa (Editor) Social Cognition in Psychosis combines current research on phenotypes, neurobiology, and existing evidence on the assessment and treatment of various forms of psychoses. The book presents various treatment options, including assessment approaches, tools and training methods that aid in the rehabilitation of patients with psychotic disorders. Social cognition is a set of psychological processes related to understanding, recognizing, processing and appropriately using social stimuli in one's environment. Individuals with psychotic disorders consistently exhibit impairments in social cognition. As a result, social cognition has been an important target for intervention, with recent efforts trying to enhance early recovery among individuals with psychotic disorders.

Treatment Response and Resistance in Schizophrenia by Oliver Howes (Editor) Treatment resistant schizophrenia (TRS) is common, affecting approximately a third of patients diagnosed. Despite the prevalence of TRS, the best approach to practical management is often unclear to clinicians and patients. Treatment Response and Resistance in Schizophrenia offers a practical, clinically focused guide to TRS and the real-world challenges faced by those impacted. Over 14 chapters this resource covers the principles and practice of TRS, from the definition, epidemiology, and clinical assessment, to the pharmacological, physical, and psychological management of treatment resistance. All chapters have been written by internationally leading experts in the field to ensure busy clinicians have high-quality, applicable content that is rooted in real clinical experiences. A chapter of case studies is included to link real-life scenarios to each of the instructive chapters, illustrating approaches to practical management and application.Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library, this useful pocket book is an invaluable resource and quick reference for psychiatrists, psychiatry trainees, and other mental health practitioners, as well as clinical psychologists, primary care physicians, and specialist nurses.

Understanding Psychosis: issues and challenges for sufferers, families, and friends by Donald Capps When a loved one is struck with psychosis, people often misunderstand what is happening and why. They may feel helpless or confused or frightened, not knowing what to do with or for the sufferer or how to handle the situation themselves. This book takes a look at psychosis and how it has been handled over the last century or so. Beginning with a definition of psychosis and moving to a consideration of how people who suffer from it were once institutionalized and are now expected to be cared for at home, the author traces the challenges families and communities face, considers the plight of sufferers and what they experience, and offers case examples throughout to illustrate the onset of psychosis, the infringement it makes on personal and professional life, and the toll it takes on sufferers and caregivers alike. Capps covers the magnitude of the problem, the treatment of sufferers, the warning signs, facts and realities of recovery, treatments, prevention, and coping strategies for family members and caregivers. Readers will come away from this work with a better understanding of psychosis in the context in which it occurs, and what to do for themselves and their loved one as they navigate daily life, the mental health system, and family dynamics.

Seasonal Affective Disorder: practice and research by Timo Partonen (Editor); S. R. Pandi-Perumal (Editor) Seasonal affective disorder (SAD), or winter depression, is a mood disorder related to the change in the seasons and lack of exposure to daylight. It affects 1 in 100 adults in western countries. SAD is a rare example of a psychiatric disorder with a clear, identifiable biological cause. The new edition of this award winning book brings together distinguished scientists and opinion leaders to discuss the current and anticipated developments in the study and care of Seasonal Affective Disorder. Highlighting the clinical diagnosis and management of Seasonal Affective Disorder (SAD), this book provides a valuable resource for all whom are involved in the health care for patients with SAD. This book deals with the range of therapeutic measures that are available for the treatment of SAD. In addition, this book elucidates potential areas of research that have emerged such as the study of the circadian pacemaker and the night-time sleep structure and their interaction that influences mood.

Bullying, Suicide, and Homicide: Understanding, Assessing, and Preventing Threats to Self and Others for Victims of Bullying by Butch Losey In our society, bullying is commonly seen as a normal, inescapable part of growing up that children and adolescents must simply endure. In Bullying, Suicide, and Homicide, Butch Losey challenges this viewpoint, arguing that bullying is not a part of childhood development, but rather an aberrant behavior that, for the victim, can lead to adverse decisions, such as suicide and homicide. He provides a detailed understanding of the relationship between bullying, suicide, and homicide and an assessment and response strategy that can be utilized by mental health professionals who work with children and adolescents. This strategy involves a three stage ecological approach: screening to identify warning signs for bullying, depression, suicide, and violence by means of the Bullying Lethality Identification System (BLIS), developed by Losey and a colleague; assessing the risks of suicide and threats of violence using specially tailored forms and tools; and mediating to identify appropriate interventions. All of the associated tools and forms that the author has created are included as appendices and on the accompanying CD. Losey's sensitive and compassionate treatment of this important subject will inform and motivate mental health professionals in their work with victims of bullying.

Healing the Hurt Within: Understand Self-injury and Self-harm, and Heal the Emotional Wounds by Jan Sutton Skillfully woven together with empathic insight into the lives and minds of those who self-injure, "Healing the Hurt Within" is replete with the latest developments in the field, informative statistical data, instructive diagrams, carefully selected resources, case studies, expert testimonies, and practical self-help activities. The author's warmth, compassion, and regard for those caught in the cycle of self-injury shines through the pages of this profoundly enlightening and extensively updated 3rd edition. "Healing the Hurt Within" offers: solace, hope, and direction to those who self-injure; guidance to family and friends supporting a loved one who self-injures; and, guidelines to professionals and voluntary caregivers on how to respond to clients that self-injure. Contents: 1. Exploring self-injury and self-harm; 2. Looking beyond the myths; 3. Further insights into self-injury; 4. Media assertions and attitudes to self-injury, the magnitude of the problem and controversies; 5. Two research studies examined; 6. Childhood trauma, negative core beliefs, perfectionism and self-injury; 7. The cycle of self-injury and the eight Cs of self-injury;8. Dissociation and self-injury; 9. Hurting and healing: true stories; 10. Heal thyself; 11. Guide for family, friends and teens considering self-injury; 12. Guidance for those working with self-injury and related issues; 13. Creative works contributors; Appendix 1; Appendix 2; Appendix 3; Appendix 4; Appendix 5; Appendix 6; References; Resources; Further reading; Index.

Self-Mutilation by Mary E. Williams (Editor) This essential guidebook explores issues surrounding self-mutilation by placing opinions from a wide range of sources in a pro versus con format. Across three chapters, readers will evaluate whether it is a serious problem, what factors cause people to hurt themselves, and how self-injurers can really be helped. Essayist Wendy Lader reports that body art is a form of self-mutilation while Shannon Larratt claims body art is a form of self-expression. Mary Fischer reports that the Internet encourages self-mutilation while Bridges Tharp reports that stress and anxiety are the causes of it. By reading these debating essays and the several more provided, readers will obtain an educated, balanced view of this topic.

Arousal in Neurological and Psychiatric Diseases by Edgar Garcia-Rill (Editor) Arousal in Neurological and Psychiatric Diseases focuses on the dysregulation of arousal found in many neurological and psychiatric disorders. Chapters describe the physiology of each process, how it presents in each disorder, and the most appropriate treatment(s). The book also imparts the understanding of the RAS as a system that not only modulates waking, but also survival mechanisms, such as fight vs. flight responses and other reflexes. This book helps neuroscientists, sleep researchers, neurologists and psychiatrists understand the basic mechanisms that modulate arousal in health and disease. In addition, it promotes therapies that can alter the severity and manifestation of multiple disorders.

Clinical Manual of Sexual Disorders by Richard Balon (Editor); Robert Taylor Segraves (Editor) Sexuality is an integral part of gender identity, self-image, and overall well-being. Sexual dysfunctions present in all cultures and ethnicities around the world. Sexual problems have an especially high prevalence among patients with psychiatric syndromes--yet, in recent years, the field of psychiatry has shifted away from the treatment of sexual disorders. Clinical Manual of Sexual Disorders is the first comprehensive text in decades to address the management and treatment of sexual dysfunctions and disorders. Using a conceptual model that incorporates biological, psychological, and cultural interventions as its guiding principle, the book explores and evaluates the epidemiology of sexual disorders and paraphilias, sexual dysfunctions with comorbid psychiatric disorders, sexual problems associated with various medications, and sexual disorders in specific patient populations. Written by 25 contributing clinical specialists from around the world, the text combines conceptual shifts within the field of human sexuality with the latest research findings into a practical three-part volume. The first four chapters cover general areas relevant to the clinical understanding of human sexuality and sexual dysfunctions within the frame of psychiatry. The second part of the book outlines the major sexual dysfunctions, including male erectile disorder, female arousal disorder, premature ejaculation, and paraphilias. And the final chapters address the management of sexual issues in two unique patient populations that are often neglected in other textbooks--children and adolescents and older adults. The book includes several unique features to further enhance learner retention * Tables, charts, figures, and illustrations to enhance the reading material* Evaluations, questionnaires and other patient materials * Take-away points on key clinical issues at the end of each chapter* Case examples from the authors' own practices* References for further reading Restoration of sexual function can improve the quality of life for many individuals with and without psychiatric disorders, making recognition and treatment of sexual problems of utmost importance to any general psychiatric practice. As the only text of its kind, Clinical Manual of Sexual Disorders provides a concise, clinically-oriented biopsychosocial guide to the management and treatment of sexual dysfunction that is appropriate for all psychiatric, clinical, and educational settings.

Psychiatry and Sexual Medicine: A Comprehensive Guide for Clinical Practitioners by Michal Lew-Starowicz (Editor); Annamaria Giraldi (Editor); Tillmann H. C. Krueger (Editor) Psychiatry meets sexual medicine! This book explores the links between mental and sexual health and provides guidance for the treatment of the most common sexual problems.  The book fills the need of many clinicians and trainees who work in the field of psychiatry and sexual medicine. Offering comprehensive and clearly structured information, case presentations, and key messages this book focuses on sharing essential knowledge and skills of recognized experts in the field. Get inspired by the vivid interactions of psychiatry and sexual medicine and help your patients on their way to improved sexual health!

Sexual Orientation and Psychodynamic Psychotherapy: sexual science and clinical practice by Richard Friedman; Jennifer Downey This book bridges psychoanalytic thought and sexual science. It brings sexuality back to the center of psychoanalysis and shows how important it is for students of human sexuality to understand motives that are often irrational and unconscious. The authors present a new perspective about male and female development, emphasizing the ways in which sexual orientation and homophobia appear early in life. The clinical section of the book focuses on the psychodynamics and treatment of homophobia and internalized homophobia.

Management of Sleep Disorders in Psychiatry by Amit Chopra (Editor); Piyush Das (Editor); Karl Doghramji (Editor) Management of Sleep Disorders in Psychiatry provides the most comprehensive and evidence-based review of the clinical management of DSM-V based sleep-wake disorders in patients with psychiatric disorders. This book is organized into three sections that focus on the basics of sleep medicine, clinical features and treatment of DSM-V sleep-wake disorders, and evidence-based management of sleep disorders commonly associated with a range of DSM-V based psychiatric disorders. The first section orients the reader to topics such as sleep physiology, neural mechanisms of wakefulness and sleep, circadian rhythms, effects of sleep on cognition, history taking in sleep medicine, and clinical application of technical procedures used in the field of sleep medicine. The second section adopts a unique perspective of using DSM-V classification of sleep-wake disorders to integrate the management of sleep disorders with mainstream clinical psychiatry. This section features a comprehensive chapter on pediatric sleep-wake disorders, a topic of interest to fellows and practicing clinicians specializing in child and adolescent psychiatry. The third section offers the most comprehensive review of comorbidity, shared pathophysiology, and clinical management of sleep disorders within the context of a wide range of DSM-V based psychiatric disorders. This section also highlights important topics such as delirium, neurocognitive disorders, effects of psychotropic medications on sleep, neurological disorders, pain disorders, forensic sleep medicine, and eating disorders. This clinically-oriented resource provides case vignettes and clinical pearls to illustrate the diagnosis and treatment of sleep disorders in the setting of a variety of psychiatric presentations. Additionally, each chapter includes a self-assessment section with multiple-choice questions that helps the reader solidify their clinical skills and prepare for the board and certification examinations for topics pertinent to sleep-wake disorders in psychiatry.

Sleep Disorders (Oxford Psychiatry Library) by Sue Wilson; David Nutt Sleep dysfunction is one of the primary symptoms reported by patients with psychiatric disorders, and specifically those suffering from anxiety and depressive disorders. Conversely, primary insomnia and other sleep disorders produce symptoms of mood disturbance that are quite similar to those reported by patients with psychiatric disorders. Because of this overlap in the symptoms and treatments for insomnias and psychiatric disorders, it is important for clinicians to be able to accurately identify the root cause of sleep dysfunction in individual patients in order to optimize treatment. Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library series, Sleep Disorders provides clinicians with an overview of current understanding of sleep physiology, the pathophysiology of sleep disturbance, and the diagnosis and treatment of sleep disorders. This second edition includes new sections covering sleep problems in children, sleep in the elderly, and sleep in pregnancy and menopause, as well as new algorithms from the British Association of Psychopharmacology's (BAP's) new Consensus Guidelines on the management of sleep disorders.

Sleep and Neuropsychiatric Disorders: by Ravi Gupta (Editor); David N. Neubauer (Editor); Perumal S.R. Pandi (Editor) This book explores the intricate links between sleep and neuropsychiatric diseases. In clinical settings, understanding the development, treatment, and management of neuropsychiatric diseases poses a substantial challenge. Neuropsychiatric disorders place a significant cost on society, affecting the health of people affected, care providers, and the general community. Sleep and neuropsychiatric disease are inextricably linked. Sleep disorders are widespread in these populations and are frequently overlooked in neurology and psychiatry. The book offers readers up-to-date information on different facets of the bidirectional connections between sleep and neuropsychiatric diseases. Following the initial fundamental science part, a unique series of chapters concentrate on the behavioural manifestations of sleep problems, a hitherto unexplored field. Additional chapters include patient evaluation techniques as well as public health implications of sleep disorders. The individual chapters cover all main mental and neurological diseases where a change in sleep is evident, and recent concepts in pathogenesis, presentation, evaluation, and treatment. Neuropsychotropic drugs must be seen as a double-edged sword when it comes to sleep and sleep disorders. Overall, this book is an excellent resource for learning about neuropsychiatric diseases and how they affect sleep while simultaneously being impacted by sleep.

Alcohol, psychiatry and society: Comparative and transnational perspectives, c. 1700-1990s by Waltraud Ernst (Editor); Thomas Müller (Editor) The medicalisation of alcohol use has become a prominent discourse that guides policy makers and impacts public perceptions of alcohol and drinking. This book maps the historical and cultural dimensions of the phenomenon. Emphasising medical attitudes and theories regarding alcohol and the changing perception of alcohol consumption in psychiatry and mental health, it explores the shift from the use of alcohol in clinical treatment and as part of dietary regimens to the emergence of alcoholism as a disease category that requires medical intervention and is considered a threat to public health. An electronic edition of this book is freely available under a Creative Commons (CC BY-NC-ND) licence.

Educating Health Professionals to Address the Social Determinants of Mental Health: Proceedings of a Workshop by National Academies of Sciences, Engineering, and Medicine; Health and Medicine Division; Board on Global Health; Global Forum on Innovation in Health Professional Education; Erin Hammers Forstag (Editor); Patricia A. Cuff (Editor) The social determinants of mental health involve the economic, social, and political conditions into which one is born that influence a person's mental health - and, in particular, that affect the likelihood a person raised in deficient or dangerous conditions often associated with poverty will develop persistent mental health challenges throughout his or her life. To explore how health professions education and practice organizations and programs are currently addressing social determinants that contribute to mental health disparities across the lifespan, the Global Forum on Innovation in Health Professional Education of the National Academies of Sciences, Engineering, and Medicine hosted a workshop in Washington, DC on November 14-15, 2019. This publication summarizes the presentation and discussion of the workshop.

Handbook of the Sociology of Mental Health by Carol S. Aneshensel (Editor); Jo C. Phelan (Editor); Alex Bierman (Editor) This second edition of the Handbook of the Sociology of Mental Health features theory-driven reviews of recent research with a comprehensive approach to the investigation of the ways in which society shapes the mental health of its members and the lives of those who have been diagnosed as having a mental illness The award-winning Handbook is distinctive in its focus on how the organization and functioning of society influences the occurrence of mental disorder and its consequences. A core issue that runs throughout the text concerns the differential distribution of mental illness across various social strata, defined by status characteristics such as gender, race/ethnicity, socioeconomic status, and age. The contributions to this volume shed light on the social, cultural, and economic factors that explain why some social groups have an elevated risk of disorder. They also address the social repercussions of mental disorder for nbsp;individuals, including stigmatization within the larger society, and for their families and social networks. The second edition of this seminal volume includes substantial updates to previous chapters, as well as seven new chapters on: -The Individual's Experience of Mental Illness.--The Medicalization of Mental Illness.---Age, Aging, and Mental Health.- -Religion and Mental Health.- -Neighborhoods and Mental Health.- -Mental Health and the Law--and Public Beliefs about Mental Illness. nbsp; nbsp;

A Life Course Approach to Mental Disorders by Sasha Rudenstine (Editor); Ezra Susser (Editor); Sandro Galea (Editor); Karestan C. Koenen (Editor) A Life Course Approach to Mental Disorders examines the interplay of social and biological factors in the production of a wide range of mental disorders throughout life, from the peri-natal period through to old age. The aging into adulthood of numerous birth cohorts, especially over the past twenty years, has provided increasing evidence that mental disorders previously perceived to emerge in adulthood may have their origins early in life. This book brings together, in a single resource, the research in life course epidemiology of mental disorders, forging a consensus on the current science and pointing the way forward for the field. Assembling researchers across disparate disciplines including epidemiology, developmental psychopathology, psychiatric genetics, sociology, developmental cognitive neuroscience, and epigenetics the book reviews the methods and synthesizes existing knowledge about the life course epidemiology of mental disorders in populations. It also presents discussions of the mechanisms that drive the production of mental disorders over the life course including emerging areas of research in the field. A Life Course Approach to Mental Disorders brings together the state-of-the-art science of life course epidemiology to inform training, research, practice and policy with regard to mental disorders. The first comprehensive articulation of a life course perspective in the area, it will be a key resource for academics, researchers and students.

Measuring Mental Disorders: Psychiatry, Science and Society by Philippe Le Moigne (Editor) This book is a collective work draws on the perspective of social sciences, mobilizing perspectives from the sociology of science, the history of psychiatry, medical ethnography and public policy analysis. This initiative, which has no precedent in social sciences, is surrounded by an original, if not apparently paradoxical statement: considering that the deployment of these processes, strictly formal and depersonalized, is justified in becoming the rule in a society known as "individuals".

Population Mental Health: Evidence, Policy, and Public Health Practice by Neal Cohen (Editor); Sandro Galea (Editor) Over the last century public health efforts, such as immunization, safer food practices, public health education and promotion, improved sanitation, and water purification have been very successful in eradicating and controlling a host of diseases. The result has been a dramatic improvement in health and life expectancy. However, the impact that mental illnesses have on individuals and society as a whole has largely been overlooked by the discipline.This pioneering volume examines the evidence-base for incorporating mental health into the public health agenda by linking the available research on population mental health with public mental health policy and practice. Issues covered in the book include the influence of health and mental health policies on the care and well-being of individuals with mental illness, the interconnectedness of physical and mental disorders, the obstacles to adopting a public health orientation to mental health/mental illness, and the potential application of public health models of intervention.Setting out a unique and innovative model for integrated public mental health care, Population Mental Health identifies the tools and strategies of public health practice � surveillance and screening, early identification, preventive interventions, health promotion and community action � and their application to twenty-first century public mental health policy and practice.

Psychiatry's Contract with Society: concepts, controversies, and consequences by Dinesh Bhugra (Editor); Amit Malik (Editor); George Ikkos (Editor) The development of the internet has brought about a seachange in the traditional doctor-patient relationship. No longer is the patient entirely at the mercy of their doctor to tell them about their problems. Via the internet they can now access vast repositories of information, about even the most obscure disorder - not all of it accurate, not all of it safe. This has changed society's attitudes to medicine generally, and certainly affected the way it views the field of psychiatry. The situation has hardly been helped by a series of well publicised scandals over the past 25 years. There are also issues regarding changing social attitudes to psychiatry, and the stigma of mental illness.This book presents a timely appraisal of the status of psychiatry and its relationship with society in the second decade of this century. It brings together an international team of specialists who review critical issues such as training, professionalism, regulation, ethics, and economics. Together, it constitutes a far-reaching document that considers the status of psychiatry now, and how it should develop in the coming years. A publication of great significance, this book will be of interest to all practising psychiatrists and mental health professionals, as well as policy makers, and those involved in patient groups.

Psychiatry Reborn: Biopsychosocial Psychiatry in Modern Medicine by Professor Julian Savalescu (Editor); Rebecca Roache (Editor); Will Davies (Editor); Professor J. Pierre Loebel (Editor) Psychiatry Reborn: Biopsychosocial Psychiatry in Modern Medicine is a comprehensive collection of essays by leading experts in the field, and provides a timely reassessment of the biopsychosocial approach in psychiatry. Spanning the sciences and philosophy of psychiatry, the essays offer complementary perspectives on the ever more urgent importance of the biopsychosocial approach to modern medicine. The collection brings together ideas from the series of Loebel Lectures by world leaders in the field of psychiatry and associated Workshops at the University of Oxford, including revised versions of the Lectures themselves, and a wide range of related commentaries and position pieces. With contributions from psychiatry, psychology, neuroscience, and philosophy, the book provides the most comprehensive account to date of the interplay between biological, psychological, and social factors in mental health and their ethical dimensions. The 23 chapters of this multi-authored book review the history and place of the biopsychosocial model in medicine, and explore its strengths and shortcomings. In particular, it considers how understanding this interplay might lead to more effective treatments for mental health disorders, as developments in genomic and neurobiological medicine challenge traditional conceptions and approaches to the research and treatment of mental health disorders. The book explores the challenges and rewards of developing diagnostic tools and clinical interventions that take account of the inextricably intertwined bio-psycho-social domains, and the ethical implications of the conceptualization. It concludes with chapters drawing together the book's range of expertise to propose a best conception of the model, and how it might be adopted going forward in an age of exponentially increasing technological advances and of integrated/collaborative care. The volume is intended to present the BPS model as it stands today in the academy, the lab, and the clinic, and to start to address the challenges and potential that the model has for each.

Sociocultural Issues in Psychiatry: A Casebook and Curriculum by Nhi-Ha T. Trinh (Editor); Justin A. Chen (Editor) As the demographics shift within the US population, the importance of culture on mental health diagnosis and treatment has become critical for education and clinical training in psychiatry. While it's impossible to gain an in-depth understanding of every culture, clinicians need to have the skills and knowledge required to provide culturally respectful care for an increasingly diverse clinical population. By explaining fundamental concepts in cultural psychiatry using a case-based format, clinicians and educators in the mental health fields will be able to reduce cultural clashes and unproductive clinical encounters. Although similar books have focused on providing guidelines for working with discrete populations (e.g., African Americans, Asian Americans, LGBTQ), the purpose of Sociocultural Issues in Psychiatry is to enhance clinicians' knowledge and skills by translating theory into practice across diverse patient populations and clinical contexts. Mental health clinicians at all levels, trainees, or practitioners, will benefit from the content and education provided in this book.

Trauma and Resilience among Displaced Populations : A Sociocultural Exploration by Gail Womersley This open access book provides an enriched understanding of historical, collective, cultural, and identity-related trauma, emphasising the social and political location of human subjects. It therefore presents a socio-ecological perspective on trauma, rather than viewing displaced individuals as traumatised "passive victims".   The vastness of the phenomenon of trauma among displaced populations has led it to become a critical and timely area of inquiry, and this book is an important addition to the literature. It gives an overview of theoretical frameworks related to trauma and migration--exploring factors of risk and resilience, prevalence rates of PTSD, and conceptualisations of trauma beyond psychiatric diagnoses; conceptualises experiences of trauma from a sociocultural perspective (including collective trauma, collective aspirations, and collective resilience); and provides applications for professionals working with displaced populations in complex institutional, legal, and humanitarian settings. It includes case studies based on the author's own 10-year experience working in emergency contexts with displaced populations in 11 countries across the world. This book presents unique data collected by the author herself, including interviews with survivors of ISIS attacks, with an asylum seeker in Switzerland who set himself alight in protest against asylum procedures, and women from the Murle tribe affected by the conflict in South Sudan who experienced an episode of mass fainting spells. This is an important resource for academics and professionals working in the field of trauma studies and with traumatised groups and individuals.

Sport and Mental Health: From Research to Everyday Practice by David Baron (Editor); Thomas Wenzel (Editor); Andreas Ströhle (Editor); Todd Stull (Editor) This user-friendly, comprehensive and highly relevant book allows readers to gain a better understanding of mental health issues in sport and exercise. The field of sports psychiatry continues to grow globally at a rapid pace. This, in part, can be explained by the changing culture of sport leading to an appreciation of the role of psychiatric symptoms and syndromes in the world of sport, but also the increasing spread of both highly performance oriented and grass-roots basic sports and the associated risks in large sections of the population. The long-standing stigma attached to mental health problems, such as depression, anxiety, ADHD, suicide, brain injuries, substance-abuse, is being challenged not only by high-profile athletes, but also in public health and general mental health services. The book utilizes an innovative case-based and structured didactical format to provide short summaries of recent research by leading experts in the respective fields, as well as up-todate prevention and clinical guidelines for all relevant disorders in a way that is easily accessible to the large and growing groups interested and active in sports. This work is relevant for all mental health professionals and can also be used by a wider readership including medical doctors, psychologists, athletes and coaches. A second volume covers the role of exercise as an effective treatment for a number of common psychiatric conditions, such as depression, anxiety, eating disorders and substance abuse.

Sports Psychiatry by Alan Currie (Editor); Bruce Owen (Editor) Psychiatric conditions of all kinds can present in sporting populations due to the high intensity physical effort, competition and anxiety associated with competitive sports. Mental illness is not just a health concern but is likely to have a significant impact on sporting performance and achievement. Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library series, this concise and practical pocketbook covers the breadth of psychiatric conditions that can present in sportsmen and sportswomen. It provides practical and up-to-date guidance which is invaluable for all health professionals working within sporting communities. There are a variety of topics covered from "Eating disorders" to "Psychotropic drug prescribing" and it is based on the latest research to help health professionals working within sport better assess mental health problems and support those in need.

A Clinical Guide to the Treatment of the Human Stress Response by George S. Everly; Jeffrey M. Lating This new edition emphasizes the unique contribution of this longstanding text in the integration of mind/body relationships. The concept of stress, as defined and elaborated in Chapter 1, the primary efferent biological mechanisms of the human stress response, as described in Chapter 2, and the link from stress arousal to disease, as defined in Chapter 3, essentially remains the same. However, updates in microanatomy, biochemistry and tomography are added to these chapters. All other chapters will be updated as well, as there has been significant changes in the field over the past eight years.

The Body Keeps the Score: Brain, Mind, and Body in the Healing of Trauma by Bessel van der Kolk A pioneering researcher and one of the world's foremost experts on traumatic stress offers a bold new paradigm for healing   Trauma is a fact of life. Veterans and their families deal with the painful aftermath of combat; one in five Americans has been molested; one in four grew up with alcoholics; one in three couples have engaged in physical violence. Such experiences inevitably leave traces on minds, emotions, and even on biology. Sadly, trauma sufferers frequently pass on their stress to their partners and children.   Renowned trauma expert Bessel van der Kolk has spent over three decades working with survivors. In The Body Keeps the Score, he transforms our understanding of traumatic stress, revealing how it literally rearranges the brain's wiring--specifically areas dedicated to pleasure, engagement, control, and trust. He shows how these areas can be reactivated through innovative treatments including neurofeedback, mindfulness techniques, play, yoga, and other therapies. Based on Dr. van der Kolk's own research and that of other leading specialists, The Body Keeps the Score offers proven alternatives to drugs and talk therapy--and a way to reclaim lives.

Care of Children Exposed to the Traumatic Effects of Disaster by Jon A. Shaw; Zelde Espinel; James M. Shultz Care of Children Exposed to the Traumatic Effects of Disaster addresses the effects of disaster on children and their families, and explores the various resources that mental health practitioners and others who routinely interact with children, such as teachers, first responders, health care professionals, child care providers, child welfare professionals, and faith-based community members, can use to help them in their hour of need. The three co-authors have had extensive, and intensive, experience working with disaster victims and preparing both professionals and laypeople to intervene effectively in extreme events. Those on the front lines will find the book's practical and insightful observations, techniques, and strategies indispensible. Specifically, the book * Explains not only how to provide basic support services and brief interventions but how to recognize children in distress, to actively support positive coping skills, to monitor children's well-being in the aftermath of disaster and to identify those who need more intensive evaluation and intervention.* Encompasses a broad range of disasters, from the "natural" (such as earthquakes, tsunamis, tornadoes, and hurricanes) to the human generated (such as wars, civil strife, ethnic conflict, and acts of terrorism).* Provides a timeline of psychological responses to disaster, with its impact phase and cascade of secondary adversities in the aftermath of disaster, which establishes helpful benchmarks to those providing support.* Includes numerous tables and figures that convey complex information in an intuitive, easy-to-understand way. Care of Children Exposed to the Traumatic Effects of Disaster emphasizes the critical importance of effective therapeutic intervention--which restores function, enhances recovery, and creates a safe and secure environment--and explains how to mobilize family and social supports to achieve that goal.

Trauma and Resilience among Displaced Populations : A Sociocultural Exploration by Gail Womersley This open access book provides an enriched understanding of historical, collective, cultural, and identity-related trauma, emphasising the social and political location of human subjects. It therefore presents a socio-ecological perspective on trauma, rather than viewing displaced individuals as traumatised "passive victims".   The vastness of the phenomenon of trauma among displaced populations has led it to become a critical and timely area of inquiry, and this book is an important addition to the literature. It gives an overview of theoretical frameworks related to trauma and migration--exploring factors of risk and resilience, prevalence rates of PTSD, and conceptualisations of trauma beyond psychiatric diagnoses; conceptualises experiences of trauma from a sociocultural perspective (including collective trauma, collective aspirations, and collective resilience); and provides applications for professionals working with displaced populations in complex institutional, legal, and humanitarian settings. It includes case studies based on the author's own 10-year experience working in emergency contexts with displaced populations in 11 countries across the world. This book presents unique data collected by the author herself, including interviews with survivors of ISIS attacks, with an asylum seeker in Switzerland who set himself alight in protest against asylum procedures, and women from the Murle tribe affected by the conflict in South Sudan who experienced an episode of mass fainting spells. This is an important resource for academics and professionals working in the field of trauma studies and with traumatised groups and individuals.

Traumatization and its aftermath : a systemic approach to understanding and treating trauma disorders by Antonieta Contreras Traumatization and Its Aftermath delves deep into the complexities of traumatization and is a practical, comprehensive guide to understanding and overcoming the impacts of adverse circumstances.

Management of Treatment-Resistant Major Psychiatric Disorders by Charles B. Nemeroff (Editor) Although there are a variety of textbooks and manuals of psychiatric disorders, few have focused on the management of treatment-resistant patients. Those that exist have largely focused on treatment-resistant depression and even these are now largely outdated. Because psychiatrists and other mental health care professionals increasingly manage patients who fail treatment from family practitioners and other non-psychiatric specialists, a single practical volume summarizing the evidence-based medicine as well as the art of managing treatment-resistant patients is a much needed volume for practitioners, psychiatry residents and other mental health workers. Most importantly, both psychopharmacological and psychotherapeutic interventions will be included, a shortcoming of many previous volumes. Management of Treatment Resistant Major Psychiatric Disorders contains chapters authored by leaders in the field on the management of the major treatment resistant psychiatric disorders.

Treatment-Resistant Mood Disorders (Oxford Psychiatry Library) by Andre Carvalho (Editor); Roger McIntyre Treatment-resistant major depression and bipolar disorder are highly prevalent and disabling conditions associated with substantial morbidity and mortality. The assessment and management of refractory patients with mood disorders is a major clinical challenge for mental health providers. Part of the Oxford Psychiatry Library (OPL) series, this pocketbook provides a concise view of the current definitions, assessment and evidence-based management of treatment-resistant mood disorders and reviews novel therapeutic targets for mood disorders, which may enhance the therapeutic armamentarium of clinicians in the near future. The pocketbook serves as a useful guide for mental health practitioners, including psychiatrists, clinical psychologists, trainees, and interested primary care physicians.

Values and Psychiatric Diagnosis by John Z. Sadler The public, mental health consumers, as well as mental health practitioners wonder about what kinds of values mental health professionals hold, and what kinds of values influence psychiatric diagnosis. Are mental disorders socio-political, practical, or scientific concepts? Is psychiatric diagnosis value-neutral? What role does the fundamental philosophical question "How should I live?" play in mental health care? In his carefully nuanced and exhaustively referenced monograph, psychiatrist and philosopher of psychiatry John Z. Sadler describes the manifold kinds of values and value judgements involved in psychiatric diagnosis and classification systems like the DSM. Professor Sadler takes the reader on a fascinating conceptual tour of the inner workings of psychiatric diagnosis, considering the role of science, culture, sexuality, politics, gender, technology, human nature, patienthood, and professions in building his vision of a more humane psychiatric diagnostic process.

Biomarkers of Postpartum Psychiatric Disorders by Jennifer L. Payne (Editor); Lauren M. Osborne (Editor) Biomarkers of Postpartum Psychiatric Disorders provides an up-to-date reference on the current research relating to biomarkers in psychiatric disorders, including major depressive disorder, OCD and bipolar disorder in the immediate postpartum time-period. It is the only reference on the market that synthesizes and interprets available data and reviews clinical phenotypes. Topics cover hormonal contributions, immunology, epigenetics and neuroimaging. While the risk of psychiatric illness during pregnancy appears to be equivalent to the risk at any other time in a woman's life, the risk in the immediate postpartum time period is dramatically increased, hence the importance of the discussions in this title.

Black Dogs and Blue Words: Depression and Gender in the Age of Self-Care by Kimberly K. Emmons His "black dog"--that was how Winston Churchill referred to his own depression. Today, individuals with feelings of sadness and irritability are encouraged to "talk to your doctor." These have become buzz words in the aggressive promotion of wonder-drug cures since 1997, when the Food and Drug Administration changed its guidelines for the marketing of prescription pharmaceuticals. Black Dogs and Blue Words analyzes the rhetoric surrounding depression. Kimberly K. Emmons maintains that the techniques and language of depression marketing strategies--vague words such as "worry," "irritability," and "loss of interest"--target women and young girls and encourage self-diagnosis and self-medication. Further, depression narratives and other texts encode a series of gendered messages about health and illness. As depression and other forms of mental illness move from the medical-professional sphere into that of the consumer-public, the boundary at which distress becomes disease grows ever more encompassing, the need for remediation and treatment increasingly warranted. Black Dogs and Blue Words demonstrates the need for rhetorical reading strategies as one response to these expanding and gendered illness definitions.

Institutionalizing Gender: Madness, the Family, and Psychiatric Power in Nineteenth-Century France by Jessie Hewitt Institutionalizing Gender analyzes the relationship between class, gender, and psychiatry in France from 1789 to 1900, an era noteworthy for the creation of the psychiatric profession, the development of a national asylum system, and the spread of bourgeois gender values. Asylum doctors in nineteenth-century France promoted the notion that manliness was synonymous with rationality, using this "fact" to pathologize non-normative behaviors and confine people who did not embody mainstream gender expectations to asylums. And yet, this gendering of rationality also had the power to upset prevailing dynamics between men and women. Jessie Hewitt argues that the ways that doctors used dominant gender values to find "cures" for madness inadvertently undermined both medical and masculine power?in large part because the performance of gender, as a pathway to health, had to be taught; it was not inherent. Institutionalizing Gender examines a series of controversies and clinical contexts where doctors' ideas about gender and class simultaneously legitimated authority and revealed unexpected opportunities for resistance. Thanks to generous funding from the Andrew W. Mellon Foundation, through The Sustainable History Monograph Pilot, the ebook editions of this book are available as Open Access volumes from Cornell Open (cornellpress.cornell.edu/cornell-open) and other repositories.

Oxford Textbook of Women and Mental Health Online by Dora Kohen Gender and mental health is a growing field in psychiatry. Although women's specific mental health problems have been described for hundreds of years, it is in the last two centuries and especially in the last 3 to 4 decades that research in many different aspects of women's mental health has bloomed. We have gained better understanding of the psychological, social and cultural aspects of mental health problems in women. We have seen epidemiological data describe increased frequency of different clinical aspects of many psychiatric disorders. We have learned about biological and especially endocrinological concomitants of mental health problems in women. In addition, we have been able to describe, classify and circumscribe different diagnoses as they appear in the female gender. Eating disorders, perinatal psychiatric disorders, consequences of different types of abuse have gained better understanding in the last decades and we have been able to delve into the social, parental and personal consequences of the mental health problems.The Oxford Textbook of Women and Mental Health brings a balanced understanding of different aspects of gender and mental health. It summarizes the clinical issues and mental health problems as faced today. The first part of the book is dedicated to fundamental aspects in women's mental health. It covers topics from Women's health as a global issue to different medical, psychological theories, giving an overview of gender in mental health. The second part of the book examines clinical aspects of women and mental health. In part three, special clinical topics such as PTSD, self harm, menopause, violence and their management are investigated. Part four focuses on parental psychiatric disorders clarifying how mental health and behavioural problems in children could be a marker or a consequence of maternal distress. The final two parts look at the topics of women and disability and legislation and policy.A book of exceptional scope and depth, this volume will be essential for all those health professionals involved in managing mental health problems in women

Women's Mood Disorders: A Clinician's Guide to Perinatal Psychiatry by Elizabeth Cox (Editor) This text provides background on the history of perinatal psychiatry, and discusses future directions in the field. It clearly defines perinatal mood and anxiety disorders (PMADs), which are the most common complication of pregnancy. When left untreated, PMADs are morbid and devastating for both the patient and their entire family. It reviews gold standard recommendations for the treatment of PMADs, including evidence-based psychotherapies, as well as risk-benefit analysis of psychotropic medication use in pregnancy and lactation. Additionally, common presentations of depression, anxiety, and trauma in pregnancy and postpartum women, as well as mania, psychosis, suicidal and homicidal thoughts are reviewed.  Women's Mood Disorders: A Clinician's Guide to Perinatal Psychiatry highlights special considerations in pregnancy, including teenage pregnancies, hyperemesis gravidum, eating disorders, substance abuse disorders, as well as infertility, miscarriageand loss. The text concludes with outlining the importance of collaborative care in providing gold standard treatment of perinatal women and review documentation and legal considerations. This handbook will help educate and train future psychiatrists and OBGYNs in feeling confident and comfortable assessing and treating pregnant women who suffer from PMADs.

Women's Voices in Psychiatry: A Collection of Essays by Gianetta Rands (Editor) In early 2015, the Royal College of Psychiatrists had 4,640 female Members and Fellows and 6,015 male Members and Fellows, a ratio of 43.5% to 56.5%. Despite the high and increasing proportion of women in UK psychiatry over the years (relative to other medical specialties), publications about the history and practice of psychiatry have traditionally been written by men and about men, and there has been a distinct lack of commentary from the woman's perspective. Women's Voices in Psychiatry: A Collection of Essays examines the role of women in psychiatry and shares some of their key contributions to the specialty. Presented as a collection of thoughts, opinions, and experiences of women doctors specializing in modern day psychiatry, this book is intended to be accessible to all readers interested in the mind, mental health services, and women's roles in medicine. Interspersed between these essays are short biographical profiles of pioneering women who have contributed to psychiatry and mental health services. Women's Voices in Psychiatry: A Collection of Essays covers a diverse range of topics and aims to draw lessons from history, particularly about women's roles in UK psychiatry, and to make things better for psychiatrists of the future.

Burnout for Experts: Prevention in the Context of Living and Working by Sabine Bährer-Kohler (Editor) Wherever people are working, there is some type of stress--and where there is stress, there is the risk of burnout. It is widespread, the subject of numerous studies in the U.S. and abroad. It is also costly, both to individuals in the form of sick days, lost wages, and emotional exhaustion, and to the workplace in terms of the bottom line. But as we are now beginning to understand, burnout is also preventable.   Burnout for Experts brings multifaceted analysis to a multilayered problem, offering comprehensive discussion of contributing factors, classic and less widely perceived markers of burnout, coping strategies, and treatment methods. International perspectives consider phase models of burnout and differentiate between burnout and related physical and mental health conditions. By focusing on specific job and life variables including workplace culture and gender aspects, contributors give professionals ample means for recognizing burnout as well as its warning signs. Chapters on prevention and intervention detail effective programs that can be implemented at the individual and organizational levels. Included in the coverage:   ·       History of burnout: a phenomenon. ·       Personal and external factors contributing to burnout. ·       Depression and burnout ·       Assessment tools and methods. ·       The role of communication in burnout prevention. ·       Active coping and other intervention strategies.   Skillfully balancing scholarship and accessibility, Burnout for Experts is a go-to resource for health psychologists, social workers, psychiatrists, and organizational, industrial, and clinical psychologists.

Burnout in Women Physicians: Prevention, Treatment, and Management by Cynthia M. Stonnington (Editor); Julia A. Files (Editor) This book is the first to dissect the factors contributing to burnout that impact women physicians and seeks to appropriately address these issues. The book begins by establishing the differences in epidemiology between female physicians and their male counterparts, including  rates of burnout, depression and suicide, chosen fields, caregiving responsibilities at home, career tradeoffs in dual physician marriages, patient satisfaction and outcomes, academic rank, leadership positions, salary, and turnover. The second part of the book explores the drivers of physician burnout that disproportionately affect women, each chapter beginning with a case vignette.  This section covers many issues that often go unrecognized including unconscious bias, sexual harassment, gender role conflicts, domestic responsibilities, depression, addiction, financial stress, and the impact related to reproductive health such as pregnancy and breastfeeding.  The book concludes by focusing on strategies to prevent and/or mitigate burnout among individual women physicians across the career lifespan.This section also includes recommendations to change the culture of medicine and the systems that contribute to burnout. Burnout in Women Physicians is an excellent resource for physicians across all specialties who are concerned with physician wellness and burnout, including students, residents, fellows, and attending physicians.

Depression, Burnout and Suicide in Physicians: Insights from Oncology and Other Medical Professions by Luigi Grassi (Editor); Daniel McFarland (Editor); Michelle B. Riba (Editor) This book provides a reference and contextual basis for depression, burnout and suicide among oncology and other medical professionals. Oncology as a medical subspecialty is at a unique apex of this crisis. While the same pressures in medicine certainly apply to oncologists, oncology is particularly stressful as a changing field with diverse patient and societal expectations for outcomes. In addition to experiencing the stress of caring for patients that could succumb to their cancer diagnoses, these professionals are regularly confronted with an onslaught of new medical information and a landscape that is changing at a breakneck pace. These are just a few factors involved in the increasing rates of burnout among oncologists as well as other medcial professionals. By addressing a gap in identifying mental health problems among health care professionals, this book sheds light on mental health problems and suicide among physicians. Importantly, this book is a call to action of the professional and administrative organizations to work on improving mental health of physicians. Anxiety and depression affect not only the individual doctor but also patient care. Given the increasing attention to these issues along with limited yet applicable data regarding how to address these issues, the text aims to bring the latest data face to face with consensus opinion and can be used to ultimately enhance oncologic and psychiatric practices.  Written by experts in the field, Depression, Burnout and Suicide in Physicians: Insights from Oncology and Other Medical Professions aims to significantly increase awareness and contribute to understanding the necessity of preventive measures on individual, family, and care givers levels.

Humanism and Resilience in Residency Training: A Guide to Physician Wellness by Ana Hategan (Editor); Karen Saperson (Editor); Sheila Harms (Editor); Heather Waters (Editor) This book aims to help identify pre-existing adaptive traits and positive perspectives in resident trainees, while challenging those that are less adaptive by building a formal curriculum for medical education that focuses on the humanistic aspects of medicine.  Humanism in medicine is threatened by the false narrative that good physicians are superhumans who do not have their own needs.   Written by experts in the field, this book is designed to be a concise, integrated guide to resilience during residency training.  Through this guide, trainees learn (i) the usefulness of psychotherapeutic strategies for their own stress management and well-being; (ii) techniques and strategies that are useful in the practice of medicine; and (iii) to consider lifestyle modifications to improve physical and psychological health and well-being, through identification of positive and negative lifestyle factors influencing physicians' response to stress. Since it is designed for busy trainees and physicians, this volume meticulously provides easy-to-use, evidence-based learning tools and therapeutic techniques, including case studies, skill-building exercises, self-test questionnaires, illustrations, useful practice-reminder tips, and other features. Humanism and Resilience in Residency Training is an excellent resource for all medical trainees and professionals who need to incorporate humanism and resilience in their practice, both for accreditation requirements and for personal well-being.  This includes medical students and residents, psychiatrists, addiction medicine specialists, family physicians, medical education professionals, hospitalists, nurses, and all healthcare providers

Learned Mindfulness: Physician Engagement and M.D. Wellness by Frank John Ninivaggi Learned Mindfulness: Physician Engagement and M.D. Wellness discusses the original technique of "Learned Mindfulness" developed by Dr. Ninivaggi to combat stress and burnout. In this book, Dr. Ninivaggi uses his Integrity Mindfulness model as a tool to manage stress, prevent burnout, and broaden quality of life, ultimately promoting well-being. Helping physicians ultimately helps patients and extends to the public enhancement of greater equanimity. The book provides readers with background information on the origins of mindfulness and details step-by-step directions on how to use the original technique.

Workplace Wellness: From Resiliency to Suicide Prevention and Grief Management: A Practical Guide to Supporting Healthcare Professionals by Judy Davidson (Editor); Marcus Richardson (Editor) This book uniquely provides actionable strategies along the wellness continuum in multiple dimensions: personal, institutional and professional; while applicable across disciplines: nursing and allied health, advanced practice providers and physicians. Further, the content is presented in a manner that can be taught to those entering the workforce, or serve as a primer for Wellness Officers.  Most mental health texts focus on the needs of patients and ignore the mental health needs of clinicians. This book fills that gap embracing wellness initiatives as a matter of mental health. Wellness strategies for Inclusion Diversity and Equity are presented. The often ignored subject of suicide is approached head-on with evidence-based strategies for prevention. At the far end of the continuum of wellness, grief management after losing a colleague to death and/or suicide will be addressed. Each chapter includes learning objectives, a brief presentation of the science, application of principles into wellness practice, opportunities for future research and discussion questions. Artwork created by healthcare workers are included to augment transfer of knowledge through art as a way of knowing. Videos are offered to demonstrate through simulation lessons taught through the book.